GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF

Series
Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE)
BUS CONNECTION
DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
ETHERNET CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
CC-Link IE CONNECTION
CC-Link CONNECTION
INVERTER CONNECTION
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC CONNECTION
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone
out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s)
remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to
operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
<When using the GT1655-V, Handy GOT, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, or GT105 >
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, or GT1662>
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed.
<When using the GT104 >
The monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT103 or GT102 >
The monitor screen appears dimmed.
● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type
touch panel.
If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.
Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time.
CAUTION
● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
A-2
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT to/from the panel.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the
GOT.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist
strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity.
CAUTION
● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's
Manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension
interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact.
Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.
● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector
until you hear a click.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector.
● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of
GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in
advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card.
A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access
switch off in advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it
may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop
out.
Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to
the USB interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for removal.
After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch
firmly to comply with the protective structure.
● Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
● Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
● When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION
● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT
power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is
used exclusively for the GOT.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
A-5
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

Doing so may damage the unit.
● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

Mitsubishi electric Co. only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
● Dispose of used battery promptly.

Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
A-6
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However,
the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use
elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute
the touch panel calibration.
● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case
of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when
using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user).
Not doing so can cause an electric shock.
Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or
control panel to drop, resulting in an injury.
CAUTION
● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the
user.
Not doing so can cause an injury.
● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT
with the backlight replaceable by the user.
Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be
used.)
A-7
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.)
● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the
User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
A-8
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9
MANUALS............................................................................................................................................... A - 20
QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. A - 22
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 24
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................. A - 29
1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface............................................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)................................................................... 1 - 4
1.1.2 I/F communication setting................................................................................................... 1 - 12
1.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 1 - 14
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT............................................................................. 1 - 15
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT................................................................... 1 - 15
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT ............................................................ 1 - 16
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection ............................................................................. 1 - 17
1.3.1 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.3.2 Option unit .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 18
1.3.3 Conversion cables .............................................................................................................. 1 - 18
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter ........................................................................................... 1 - 18
1.3.5 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ...................................................................................... 1 - 18
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter .............................................................................. 1 - 18
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) ............................ 1 - 19
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection ....................................................................... 1 - 26
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ............................................................................................ 1 - 26
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method ...................................................................... 1 - 29
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ............................................................................................. 1 - 30
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor ............................................................ 1 - 33
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment........................................................................ 1 - 34
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring .................................................................................................... 1 - 39
1.6.1 Check on the GOT.............................................................................................................. 1 - 39
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ............. 1 - 45
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) ............ 1 - 47
1.6.4 Check on GX Developer .................................................................................................... 1 - 50
1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 ......................................................................................................... 1 - 54
1.6.6 Check on the PLC ............................................................................................................. 1 - 55
A-9
MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS
2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700........................................................................... 2 - 8
2.2 MELSEC-L ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * ............................................................................................. 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion ......................................................................................................... 2 - 11
2.5 MELSEC-A .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 12
2.6 MELSEC-FX .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 13
2.7 MELSEC-WS ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 14
3.ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems........................................................... 3 - 2
3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network,
CC-Link IE Field Network ..................................................................................................... 3 - 2
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection ................................................... 3 - 13
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring.............................................................................. 3 - 14
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring ........................................ 3 - 17
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU............................................................... 3 - 18
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System........................................ 3 - 19
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System .......................................... 3 - 22
4.HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System.......................................... 4 - 8
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) .......................... 4 - 8
4.1.2 Computer link connection
(Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) .................... 4 - 9
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) ..... 4 - 10
4.2 Direct CPU Connection.................................................................................................................. 4 - 11
4.2.1 When using one GOT ......................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.2.2 When using two GOTs........................................................................................................ 4 - 12
4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system
without making Q redundant setting ................................................................................... 4 - 13
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)............................................................................ 4 - 18
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) ........................................................................................................ 4 - 20
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) ...................................... 4 - 22
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) ...................................................... 4 - 23
4.7 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 24
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit.............................................................. 4 - 25
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted
on the redundant type extension base unit)........................................................................ 4 - 25
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type
extension base unit)............................................................................................................ 4 - 26
4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module
mounted on redundant type extension base unit)............................................................... 4 - 27
A - 10
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4)
(Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28
4.9 Q Redundant Setting ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 29
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function ................................. 4 - 31
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function..................................................... 4 - 31
4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function .................................................................. 4 - 38
5.BUS CONNECTION
5.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 5 - 5
5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 9
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU................................................................................ 5 - 12
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU .................................................................................................. 5 - 18
5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) ........................................................... 5 - 19
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU
(A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))................... 5 - 24
5.3 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 5 - 30
5.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 5 - 30
5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS .................................................................................. 5 - 34
5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON .......................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON) ............................................. 5 - 35
5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT ......................................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.4.6 Position of the GOT ............................................................................................................ 5 - 35
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver
written ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 35
5.4.8 When designing the system ............................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O signals ....................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................. 5 - 36
5.4.11 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type ...................................................... 5 - 37
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs ........................................................................................ 5 - 38
5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode ....................................................................... 5 - 38
5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU redundant system ......................................................... 5 - 39
5.4.15 When monitoring the Q170MCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 39
5.4.16 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 5 - 39
6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 6 - 6
6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ............................................................................................................. 6 - 7
6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU........................................................................................................ 6 - 8
6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU ............................................................................................................ 6 - 9
6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU ........................................................................................................ 6 - 10
6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU ....................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.2.7 Connecting to the motion controller CPU ........................................................................... 6 - 20
A - 11
6.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 25
6.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 28
7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module........................................................... 7 - 6
7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................................ 7 - 7
7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ............................................................................................................. 7 - 8
7.2.3 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) ............................................................................................ 7 - 9
7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type)............................................................................ 7 - 10
7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) ......................................................................... 7 - 11
7.2.6 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) ................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) ......................................... 7 - 14
7.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 15
7.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
7.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 22
7.5.1 Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series)..................................................... 7 - 22
7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) .................................................... 7 - 24
7.5.3 Connecting computer link module ...................................................................................... 7 - 25
7.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 29
8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.1.2 Ethernet module ................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module ............................................................................................ 8 - 7
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module ...................................... 8 - 11
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F.................................................................................................... 8 - 12
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 13
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 14
8.3.3 Ethernet setting................................................................................................................... 8 - 17
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 8 - 18
8.4 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 20
8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) .................................... 8 - 20
A - 12
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 22
8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)...................................................................... 8 - 24
8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller module .................................................................................... 8 - 27
8.4.5 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) .................................................................... 8 - 30
8.4.6 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) ......................................................................... 8 - 33
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) ....................................................................... 8 - 38
8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70)................................................................................. 8 - 42
8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 44
8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 46
8.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 49
9.MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

9.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU .................................................................................................. 9 - 2
9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module.......................................................................................... 9 - 6
9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ........................................................................................ 9 - 7
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system .................................................................................. 9 - 7
9.3 GOT Side Settings........................................................................................................................... 9 - 9
9.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)................................................. 9 - 9
9.3.2 Communication detail settings.............................................................................................. 9 - 9
9.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
9.4.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 9 - 11
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module ............................................................ 9 - 11
9.4.3 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................... 9 - 12
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 .................................................................................. 9 - 15
9.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 9 - 16
10.MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

10.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 10 - 2
10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module ................................. 10 - 6
10.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 10 - 7
10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system ................................................................................ 10 - 8
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting ................................................................................................ 10 - 10
10.3.4 Switch setting (Only when MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used)....................... 10 - 11
10.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 10 - 12
10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module .............................................................. 10 - 12
10.4.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) ....................................... 10 - 17
10.4.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) ............................................ 10 - 21
10.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 10 - 26
A - 13
11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit............................................................ 11 - 6
11.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 11 - 7
11.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 11 - 8
11.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
11.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 16
12.CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ................................................................... 12 - 6
12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ............................................ 12 - 7
12.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 12 - 8
12.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 12 - 10
12.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 13
13.CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

13.1.2 CC-Link module .................................................................................................................. 13 - 5
13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 6
13.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 7
13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed .................................................. 13 - 8
13.3.3 Switch setting
(Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used) ............. 13 - 11
13.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 13 - 12
13.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible .................................... 13 - 13
13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible .................................... 13 - 16
13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed .............. 13 - 20
13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible..................................... 13 - 24
13.4.5 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible..................................... 13 - 25
13.4.6 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) ................................................................... 13 - 27
13.4.7 Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series)........................................................................ 13 - 31
13.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 13 - 39
A - 14
14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 14 - 2
14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module .................................................................................... 14 - 5
14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) .......................................................................................... 14 - 6
14.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
14.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.5 PLC Side Settings........................................................................................................................ 14 - 11
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 .............................................................................................. 14 - 11
14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N ................................................................................................. 14 - 12
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) .................................................................... 14 - 14
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer ............................................................................. 14 - 14
14.5.5 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) .......................................... 14 - 15
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ................................................................................ 14 - 16
14.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 17
MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

15.INVERTER CONNECTION
15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ..................................... 15 - 3
15.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ .................................. 15 - 7
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700........................................................................................ 15 - 10
15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P ..................................................................... 15 - 14
15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522-K(-A0) ..................................................................................... 15 - 18
15.3 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 15 - 21
15.3.1 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 15 - 21
15.4 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 15 - 29
15.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 15 - 29
15.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 15 - 29
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings..................................................................................... 15 - 31
15.5.1 Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series ........................................................ 15 - 31
15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series ................................................................................. 15 - 32
15.5.3 Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series ..................................................................... 15 - 33
15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series .................................................................... 15 - 34
15.5.5 Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series .................................................................... 15 - 35
15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 36
15.5.7 Connecting FREQROL-D700 series................................................................................. 15 - 37
15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series........................................................................ 15 - 38
15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series ............................................................................. 15 - 40
15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 41
15.5.11 Connecting MD-CX522-K(-A0) ......................................................................................... 15 - 42
A - 15
15.5.12 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 15 - 43
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 15 - 44
15.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 47
16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series................................................................ 16 - 3
16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ....................................................................... 16 - 4
16.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series..................................................................... 16 - 5
16.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 8
16.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
16.4 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 16 - 12
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ................................................................................................... 16 - 14
16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series.............................................................. 16 - 14
16.5.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ..................................................................... 16 - 15
16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series.................................................................... 16 - 16
16.5.4 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 16 - 16
16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 16 - 17
16.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 16 - 45
17.ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 2
17.3.3 Ethernet setting................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
17.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 17 - 6
17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 6
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 17 - 8
17.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 17 - 8
18.CNC CONNECTION
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................... 18 - 3
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) .......................................................... 18 - 4
18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)................................................................... 18 - 5
18.2.4 Ethernet connection............................................................................................................ 18 - 6
18.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7
A - 16
18.4.3 Ethernet setting ................................................................................................................ 18 - 13
18.4.4 Switch setting ................................................................................................................... 18 - 13
18.5 CNC Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 18 - 16
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 16
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 19
18.5.3 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 21
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 23
18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7.4 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 24
MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
19.1 CPU that can be Monitored ........................................................................................................... 19 - 2
19.3 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 19 - 14
19.4 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 19 - 15
19.4.1 RS-485 cable .................................................................................................................... 19 - 15
19.5 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 19 - 23
19.5.1 Setting communication interface (communication settings) ............................................. 19 - 23
19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ............................................................................... 19 - 24
19.6.1 Write the OS ..................................................................................................................... 19 - 24
19.6.3 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 19 - 28
19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter.................................................................................... 19 - 29
19.7.1 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 19 - 29
19.8 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 19 - 30
20.MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 20 - 2
20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface ............................................................. 20 - 4
20.3.1 RS-232 Cable ..................................................................................................................... 20 - 5
20.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 20 - 6
20.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 20 - 11
A - 17
21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
21.1 What is Multi-channel Function?.................................................................................................... 21 - 2
21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection ................................................................................ 21 - 4
21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection .............................................................................................. 21 - 6
21.3.1 Basics of interface selection ............................................................................................... 21 - 7
21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 21 - 12
21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 21 - 13
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)................................................. 21 - 23
21.3.5 Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 21 - 35
21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 21 - 39
21.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 41
21.4.1 Precautions for hardware.................................................................................................. 21 - 41
21.4.2 Precautions for use........................................................................................................... 21 - 41
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ........................................................................................... 21 - 42
22.FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
22.1 FA Transparent Function ............................................................................................................... 22 - 2
22.2 Compatible Software ..................................................................................................................... 22 - 2
22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored.......................................................................................... 22 - 11
22.4 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 22 - 26
22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging
Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module ................................ 22 - 26
22.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator........................................................................................ 22 - 29
22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2............................................................................................... 22 - 30
22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ................................................................................. 22 - 32
22.4.5 FR Configurator ................................................................................................................ 22 - 34
22.4.6 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN ......................................................................... 22 - 34
22.4.7 RT ToolBox2..................................................................................................................... 22 - 35
22.4.8 NC Configurator................................................................................................................ 22 - 35
22.5 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 22 - 36
22.5.1 Setting communication interface....................................................................................... 22 - 36
22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting ................................................................................................. 22 - 39
22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator..................... 22 - 39
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 ................................................................................................. 22 - 43
22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer ............................................................................................ 22 - 52
22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ........................................................................... 22 - 53
22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer ....................................................................................... 22 - 54
22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 ........................................................................................... 22 - 55
22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator..................................................... 22 - 58
22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2................................................... 22 - 58
22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator ................................................................. 22 - 58
22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP ............................................................................ 22 - 59
22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN .................................................................................... 22 - 60
A - 18
22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 .............................................................................................. 22 - 61
22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator ......................................................................................... 22 - 63
22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .................................................................................. 22 - 63
22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool.............................................................. 22 - 64
22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module ........................................ 22 - 64
22.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 67
22.7.1 Precautions common to each software ............................................................................ 22 - 67
22.7.2 When using GX Developer, GX Woks2 ............................................................................ 22 - 69
22.7.3 When using MT Developer, MT Works2........................................................................... 22 - 71
22.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ............................................................. 22 - 72
22.7.5 When using FR Configurator ............................................................................................ 22 - 72
INDEX
REVISIONS
A - 19
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
 Connection manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080898ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC9)
SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM JY997D39201
 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080966ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 (ELE) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD7)
A - 20
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)
 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7M23)
 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D44801
(09R823)
 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D17501
(09R815)
JY997D20101
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20102
(09R817)
 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 21
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for
Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function) GT Works3 (ELE)
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT
Products 2) for GT Works3
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT

Connecting α2 with GOT
Works3 (ELE)
 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Reading data from the GOT
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 22
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

Operating the utility
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Functions) for GT Works3
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

Using a personal computer as the GOT
(ELE)
A - 23
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GOT1000
Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , Handy GOT

GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT104
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 24
GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 Series
 Communication unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23+GT15-75IF900 set
*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13+GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13+GT15-75IF900 set
 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
Fingerprint unit GT15-80FPA
*1 GT15-CFEX+GT15-CFEXIF+GT15-C08CF set
A - 25
 Option
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
For GT15 GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
Protective Sheet
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 26
 Software
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNC-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type general start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP type servo set up software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX Configurator-EN Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)

LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License key GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 27
 Others
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
α2 Abbreviation of α2 Simple Application Controller
PLC Generic term for programmable logic controllers of each manufacturer
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controllers of each manufacturer
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controllers of each manufacturer
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
Controller Generic term for controllers of each manufacturer
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font (Other than the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3) and
Windows® font
OpenType font available for Windows®
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
MODBUS®/RTU Generic term for protocols designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a serial communication
MODBUS®/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS® protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 28
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual.
BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name

Not connectable model name
5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2

Applicable model name
Shows GT16.
Shows GT15.
Shows GT14.
Shows GT12.
Shows GT11.
Shows GT11 (BUS).
Shows GT11 (SERIAL).
Shows GT10.
Shows GT105 ,GT104 .
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V).
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V).
1. 2. 3. …
Indicates the operation steps.
2.
[ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on
the software and GOT screen.
3.
4.
Refers to the information required.
Refers to information useful

Click! for operation.
Indicates the location of related content.
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 29
 About system configuration
The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual.
The configuration of The cable connecting The configuration of

equipment connected the GOT to the the GOT connected to
to GOT is shown. equipment is shown. equipment is shown.
For the option devices,
refer to the following.
1.3 Option Devices for
the Respective
Connection
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion Cable
A representative example
Connection cable of the system configuration
is described with an
illustration.
Indicates the connection diagram Indicates the maximum distance between

number of cables to be prepared by the PLC and GOT.
the user.
Refer to the connection diagram
section in each chapter.
System Configuration Examples
(When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable)
1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q].
Indicates the commercially available 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16].
cable models that can be used. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P].
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 30
1
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

PREPARATORY PROCEDURES
DEVICE RANGE
1.
FOR MONITORING 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17 4
HOW TO MONITOR
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 26
REDUNTANT
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 34
SYSTEM
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1-1
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
MONITORING
The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.
Setting the communication interface

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and
Each chapter GOT Side Settings
perform the communication setting.
Writing the project data and OS

Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
Verifying the project data and OS

Verify the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
OS, project data and communication settings are properly
written onto the GOT.
Attaching the communication unit and 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
connecting the cable 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
Each chapter System Configuration
Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the
Each chapter Connection Diagram
connection cable according to the connection type.
Verifying GOT recognizes connected

equipment 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication
Settings] of the Utility.
Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally

Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
etc.
1-2 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment.
When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication
driver before writing to GOT.
Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator.
The system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator can be reflected to the project of GT Designer3 using the
parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator.
For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator, refer to the following.
Help of MELSOFT Navigator 3
(1) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to
FOR MONITORING
green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3, refer to the following (3).
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(2) When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set
[Set with GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Input Detailed Configuration Information] in MELSOFT
Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.
(3) To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu
and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works 6
Interaction] tab.
CONNECTION TO
However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with
MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator.
Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of
DIRECT
MELSOFT Navigator.
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-3

1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)
Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.
 Setting
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.
2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.
3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.
POINT
Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

1
 Setting item
PROCEDURES FOR
This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F.
PREPARATORY
When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Item Description
Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.
5
BUS CONNECTION
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Type
(2)Setting [Controller Type]
Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following.
I/F
(3)Setting [I/F]
Driver
Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. 6
(1)Setting [Driver]
CONNECTION TO
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
DIRECT
CPU
(1) Setting [Driver]

The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. 7
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
For the settings, refer to the following.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
[Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(2) Setting [Controller Type]
The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used.
For the settings, refer to the following.
Type Model name
Type Model name
Q172DCPU
Q00CPU
Q173DCPU
Q01CPU
Q172DCPU-S1
Q02CPU
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q173DCPU-S1
Q02HCPU MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q172DSCPU
Q06HCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q12HCPU For GT14, GT11*1
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR Q170MCPU
Q25HCPU
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 MR-MQ100
Q02PHCPU
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION For GT10*1 CNC C70
Q06PHCPU MELSEC-QnU/DC (Q173NCCPU)
For GT10 Q12PHCPU CRnQ-700
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)
Q25PHCPU (Q172DRCPU)
Q172CPU CRnD-700
Q173CPU Q00JCPU
Q172CPUN Q00CPU
Q173CPUN Q01CPU
Q172HCPU Q02CPU
Q173HCPU Q02HCPU
Q00UJCPU Q06HCPU
Q00UCPU Q12HCPU
Q01UCPU Q25HCPU
Q02UCPU Q02PHCPU
Q03UDCPU Q06PHCPU
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q12PHCPU
Q04UDHCPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Q06UDHCPU Q25PHCPU
Q10UDHCPU *1
For GT14, GT11 Q12PRHCPU
Q13UDHCPU MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Q25PRHCPU
Q20UDHCPU QS001CPU*3
For GT10*1
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q26UDHCPU Q2ACPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q03UDECPU Q2ACPU-S1
Q04UDEHCPU Q3ACPU
For GT14, GT11*1
Q06UDEHCPU Q4ACPU
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
Q10UDEHCPU Q4ARCPU
ForGT10*1 Q13UDEHCPU Q2ASCPU

MELSEC-QnU/DC Q20UDEHCPU Q2ASCPU-S1
Q26UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1
Q100UDEHCPU MELDAS C6 (FCA C6)
Q03UDVCPU MELDAS C64 (FCA C64)
Q04UDVCPU L02CPU
Q06UDVCPU L26CPU
Q13UDVCPU L26CPU-BT
Q26UDVCPU MELSEC-L L02CPU-P
Q12DCCPU-V L26CPU-PBT
Q24DHCCPU-V L02SCPU
NZ2GF-ETB
*1 When using the multiple CPU system
When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of
other station, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion], or
[MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nD/M/NC/DR,CRnD-700] for the
type regardless of the host PLC CPU type.
*2 When connecting to the remote I/O station in the
MELSECNET/H network system, set the type to [MELSEC-
QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *].

Type Model name
Type Model name
1
A373UCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
A2UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
PREPARATORY
A2UCPU-S1
A171SCPU
MONITORING
A3UCPU
A171SCPU-S3
A4UCPU
A171SCPU-S3N
A2ACPU
MELSEC-A A171SHCPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
2
A2ACPU-S1
THAT CAN BE SET

A172SHCPUN
DEVICE RANGE
A2ACPUP21-S1
A173UHCPU
A2ACPUR21-S1
A173UHCPU-S1
A3ACPU
FX0
A3ACPUP21
FX0S
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
FX0N
FX1
3
A1NCPUP21
FOR MONITORING
FX2
ACCESS RANGE
A1NCPUR21
FX2C
A2NCPU
FX1S
A2NCPUP21
MELSEC-FX FX1N
A2NCPUR21
FX2N
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
FX1NC
FX2NC
4
A2NCPUR21-S1
FX3G
HOW TO MONITOR
A3NCPU
FX3GC
REDUNTANT
A3NCPUP21
FX3U
A3NCPUR21
SYSTEM
FX3UC
A2USCPU
MELSEC-A FX3U
A2USCPU-S1 MELSEC-FX(Ethernet)
FX3UC
A2USHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0 5
A1SCPU MELSEC-WS
WS0-CPU1
BUS CONNECTION
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
A1SHCPU
MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2M-*DU
A2SCPU
MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A
A2SCPU-S1
MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP
A2SHCPU
MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL
A2SHCPU-S1
MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A 6
A1SJCPU
MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T
CONNECTION TO
A1SJCPU-S3
MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A
A1SJHCPU
FREQROL-S500
A0J2HCPU
FREQROL-S500E
DIRECT
A0J2HCPUP21
FREQROL-E500
CPU
A0J2HCPUR21
FREQROL-F500
A0J2HCPU-DC24
FREQROL-F500L 7
A2CCPU
FREQROL-F500J
A2CCPUP21
COMPUTER LINK
FREQROL-A500
CONNECTION
A2CCPUR21
FREQROL 500/700 Series FREQROL-A500L
A2CCPUC24
FREQROL-V500
A2CCPUC24-PRF
FREQROL-V500L
A2CJCPU-S3
FREQROL-E700
A1FXCPU
A273UCPU
FREQROL-F700 8
FREQROL-F700P
A273UHCPU
FREQROL-F700PJ
A273UHCPU-S3
CONNECTION
FREQROL-A700
ETHERNET

(3) Setting [I/F]
The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used.
Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.
(a) GT16
Extension interface 1
3rd stage Extension interface 2
Standard interface 3
2nd stage (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
1st stage
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
(Example: In the case of the GT1685)

(USB interface built in the GOT)
(b) GT15
3rd stage
2nd stage
1st stage
(Example: In the case of the GT1575) Standard interface 2


(c) GT14 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
[Front view]] [Rear view]
Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1 3
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
[Under view]
(d) GT12
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
[Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 4

CPU
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)

7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(e) GT11
• GT11 Serial
[Front view] [Rear view]

Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1
• GT11 Bus
[Front view] [Rear view]

(GOT built-in Bus interface)
1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

(f) GT105
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
[Rear view]
3
FOR MONITORING
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
ACCESS RANGE
(g) GT104
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
6
CONNECTION TO
(h) GT1020, GT1030
DIRECT
CPU
7
or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 11

1.1.2 I/F communication setting
This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces.

Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.
 Setting
1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.
2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
POINT
When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator.
When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F
Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited.Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit
Setting].

1
 Setting item
PROCEDURES FOR
The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Description
REDUNTANT
Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.
SYSTEM
GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4
Standard I/F setting
GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11, GT105 , GT104 : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.

5
The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
BUS CONNECTION
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
8: Used for fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation
CH No.
(serial), report function (when using the serial printer), hard copy function (when using the serial printer) or GOT
(extended computer)
9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Host (modem)
*: Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway function or MES
6
interface function
CONNECTION TO
Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection
I/F The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.
Set the driver for the device to be connected.

DIRECT
Driver
None Host (Personal computer) Each communication driver for connected devices
CPU
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. 7
To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox.
COMPUTER LINK
The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases.

CONNECTION
RS232 Setting • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] in GT15 and 16.

• CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] or [8] in GT14.
• For GT12, GT11 and GT10
(Continued to next page)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Item Description
Extension I/F setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT.
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.

The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
5 to 7: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial), report function
CH No.
(when using the serial printer) or hard copy function (when using the serial printer)
* : Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), video display function, multimedia function,
operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a
PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound
output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway
function or MES interface function
Set the driver for the device to be connected.

Driver
None Each driver for connected devices
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
POINT
Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting]
(1) Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Products 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
(2) Drivers
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
[Setting the communication] section in each chapter
(3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14
Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor
1.1.3 Precautions
(1) When using the multiple CPU system

When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion]
or [MELSEC-QnU, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] for the type, regardless of the host PLC CPU type (QCPU,
QnACPU, ACPU). When other models are selected, the setting of the CPU No. becomes unavailable.
(2) Precautions for changing model
(a) When devices that cannot be converted are included.
When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that
cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges as [??]. In this case, set
the device again.
(b) When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network.
The network will be set to the host station.
(c) When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None]
The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device
again.
Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the
[Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List].

1
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
1. Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
3. The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. 6
Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data.
CONNECTION TO
4. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and
Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button. DIRECT
POINT
CPU
Writing communication driver onto GT10 7

When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver. under F or a standard monitor OS
Ver. under 01.08.00 is written, turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode.
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
GT10 User's Manual
(Operating of transmission mode)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched.

1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are
properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3.
For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
1. Select [Communication] [Read from GOT…] from the menu.
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
3. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box.
Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data.
4. Click the [Info Reception] button.
5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT.

1
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type.
For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.
1.3.1 Communication module

2
Product name Model Specifications
THAT CAN BE SET

For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)
DEVICE RANGE
GT15-QBUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2
For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-ABUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model 3
GT15-ABUS2
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-75ABUSL
4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUS2L
REDUNTANT
GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))
SYSTEM
Serial communication module GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))
GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)
RS-422 conversion unit

GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-422 side connector 9-pin 5
RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25-pin
BUS CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit
Communication module GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
MELSECNET/10 GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Communication module GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
CC-Link IE Controller Network

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
6
communication unit
CONNECTION TO
CC-Link IE Field Network
GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit
communication unit
GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

DIRECT
CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit

CPU
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit 7

COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.3.2 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connecting printer 1 ch
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie
GT16M-V4
Video input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch
GT15V-75V4
GT16M-R2
RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch
GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
Video/RGB input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
GT15V-75ROUT
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common
GT15-DIOR
Input/Source Type Output)
External I/O unit
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common
GT15-DIO
Input/Sink Type Output)
1.3.3 Conversion cables
RS-422 connector conversion

GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-422 connector conversion cable (D-sub 9-pin)
Cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
RS-485 terminal block RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10
conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter
Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block)
1.3.5 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
Serial multi-drop GOT multi-drop connection module

GT01-RS4-M
connection unit Mitsubishi Products 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter
RS-232/485 signal conversion

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)
adapter

1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit.
MONITORING
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are
using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
2
 Calculating consumed current
THAT CAN BE SET

For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
DEVICE RANGE
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
3
Current supply Current supply
GOT type capacity GOT type capacity
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(A) (A)
GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13
GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74
GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74
GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2

4
GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2
HOW TO MONITOR
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
REDUNTANT
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
SYSTEM
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3
(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller 5
BUS CONNECTION
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS,
0.275*1 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
0.12 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
6
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1

DIRECT
GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11

CPU
GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1
GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT15-CFCD 0.07

7
GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15
COMPUTER LINK
GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08

CONNECTION
GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1
Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1
GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2
GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22 8

GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
CONNECTION
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
ETHERNET
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

(3) Calculation example
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function)
and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function)
and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
 When using a bus connection unit

The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used.
(1) Wide bus units (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2)
Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2
The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are
recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. 2
THAT CAN BE SET

Recognized as the
DEVICE RANGE
3rd stage of extend Recognized as the 2nd stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend Recognized as the 1st stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
3
Recognized as the 1st stage
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
of extend interface 1
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
Relay connector
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)
A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. 5
BUS CONNECTION
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network
communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-J61BT13)
Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field
Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit
Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H

communication unit
MELSECNET/H Serial communication unit

communication unit
POINT
Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit,
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication
unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link
communication unit are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Recognized as the 3rd stage

of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 2
Recognized as the 2nd stage

of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
Recognized as the 1st stage

MELSECNET/H communication unit
Relay connector

1
 When using a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-
PROCEDURES FOR
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z)
and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable. 2
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
Serial communication unit
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 When using an Ethernet communication unit 4
An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
HOW TO MONITOR
For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit
Serial communication unit Ethernet

communication unit 5
Ethernet Serial communication unit
BUS CONNECTION
communication unit
CONNECTION TO
 When using a serial communication unit
A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
DIRECT
CPU
Serial Serial
communication communication
unit unit 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the
extension interface.
Example: When installing a printer unit

Communication Printer unit
unit
Printer unit Communication
unit
 When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or
multimedia unit
Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage
of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the
extension interface.
Communication unit Model
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

GT15-J71GP23-SX
communication unit
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit
MELSECNET/H Video/RGB
communication unit
input unit
Video/RGB MELSECNET/H
communication unit
input unit

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit
When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit
recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface.
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. 2
THAT CAN BE SET

Recognized as the 3rd stage of
DEVICE RANGE
extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
Recognized as the 2nd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
3
FOR MONITORING
Recognized as the 1st stage of
ACCESS RANGE
extension interface 1
Video/RGB input unit
Relay connector
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
 When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit
Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last. 5
The following figures show how to install the CF card unit.
BUS CONNECTION
CF card unit
Serial communication
unit
unit
CF card unit
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are
necessary.
For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side.

Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.
 RS-232 interface
Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side
connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector specifications
Hardware
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
version*1
GT16 ― 17LE-23090-27(D4C )
GT1595-X ― DDK Ltd.
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1585V-S ―
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1585-STBA
C
GT1585-STBD ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575V-S ―
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-STBA
C
17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575-STBD ―
D or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-VTBA 9-pin D-sub (male)
E
inch screw fixed type
GT1575-VTBD ―
GT1575-VN ―
GT1572-VN ―
GT1565-V ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1562-VN ―
DDK Ltd.
GT155 ―
GT14 ―
GT12 ―
GT115 -Q ―
GT105 -Q ― 17LE-23090-27(D3CC)
GT104 -Q ―
GT1030, GT1020 ― 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT15-RS2-9P ― 9-pin D-sub (male)
17LE-23090-27(D3CC) DDK Ltd.
GT01-RS4-M ― inch screw fixed type
*1 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual.
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.
(2) Connector pin arrangement

GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , GT01-RS4-M GT1030, GT1020
GOT main part connector See from the back of a

see from the front GOT main part
1 5
NC
NC
CS
RS
SG
DR
ER
RD
SD
6 9
9-pin D-sub (male) 9-pin terminal block

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use the following as the RS-422 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
PREPARATORY
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
MONITORING
(1) Connector model
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
RS-422 conversion unit

9-pin D-sub (female)
M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd.
2
fixed type
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT14
GT12
GT115 -Q M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
GT105 -Q
fixed type 3
FOR MONITORING
GT104 -Q
ACCESS RANGE
GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.
GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-sub (female)

M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
GT01-RS4-M fixed type
*1 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.

To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
4
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104 , GT01-RS4-M
GOT main part connector

see from the front
GOT main part connector
see from the front
See from the back of a
GOT main part
5
BUS CONNECTION
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
9 6
SG
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector model
GOT Hardware version*1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
GT16*2 ― 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT14 ―
GT12 ―
GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
F or later
fixed type
GT1150-QLBD
GT105 -Q C or later
GT104 -Q A or later
GT1030 B or later
9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc
GT1020 E or later

GT15-RS4-9S ― M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT15-RS4-TE ― ― SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc
*1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual.
*2 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.
To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd..

GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT105 , GT104
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
9 6
SG
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block

1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.
MONITORING
CAUTION
 Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. 2
Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable
External conductor
Outer sheath Insulating material
Nut Washer Gasket
3
FOR MONITORING
Plug shell
ACCESS RANGE
Internal conductor
Clamp Contact
1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with

dimensions as shown below.
A
Cable in use A 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Cut this portion of the outer sheath 3C-2V 15mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10mm
REDUNTANT
2.
SYSTEM
Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial
Clamp
cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.
5
Nut
BUS CONNECTION
Washer
Gasket
Insulating material 3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal
Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below.
Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same
dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed
C down to the clamp. 6
B Clamp and external
B C
CONNECTION TO
Cable in use
conductor
3C-2V 6mm 3mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7mm 5mm

DIRECT
CPU
Solder here 4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.

7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
5. Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug

shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.
8
Precautions for soldering
Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact.
CONNECTION
• Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section.
ETHERNET
• Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other.
• Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side.
When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.
 RS-422/485 communication unit  GT16

Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.
Terminating Switch No. Terminating Switch No.
resistor*1 resistor*1
ON
ON
1 2 SW1 1 2 SW1
1
1
100 OHM ON ON Enable ON ON
2
2
Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF
*1 The default setting is "Disable". *1 The default setting is "Disable".
• For RS-422/485 communication unit • For GT1685M-S

ON
SW1
1
2
ON
Terminating resistor setting switch
Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.
 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

For details, refer to the following.
Terminating resistor setting switch
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion (inside the cover)
adaptor
 GT14
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
Terminating resistor selector switch

1
 GT12  GT105
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
PREPARATORY
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 GT11 Terminating resistor selector switch

 GT104 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO

DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 GT1030
 GT1020

1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.
MONITORING
POINT
Enable the 5V power supply
Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal
2
conversion adaptor.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 8.2 Utility Function List
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
 Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
5
O
N
BUS CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
Switch No.
Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6
2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF 6

2-wire/4-wire
4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF
CONNECTION TO
110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF
Terminating resistor OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF

DIRECT
330 - - OFF ON ON OFF

CPU
POINT
7
COMPUTER LINK
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

CONNECTION
For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility.
• Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status
• Communication unit installation status
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.

GT User's Manual
 When using GT16, GT12

(For GT16)
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu]

[Communication setting] from the Utility.
2. Touch [Communication setting].
2.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
3. The [Communication Settings] appears.
PREPARATORY
3. 4.
MONITORING
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
be used is displayed in the communication
interface box to be used.
2
5. When the communication driver name is not
THAT CAN BE SET

displayed normally, carry out the following
DEVICE RANGE
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 For GT15, GT14 or GT11
1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
1.
2. Touch [Communication setting].

(The screen on the left is not displayed on
GT11.)
2.
3. 4. 3. The [Communication Setting] appears.

be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

procedure again.

1
 For GT10
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
1. 1.
MONITORING
After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Comm. Setting] from the Utility.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
2. Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting].
2.
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
3. The [Standard I/F] appears.
HOW TO MONITOR
3. 4.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

5
BUS CONNECTION
procedure again.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
Utility
(1) How to display Utility (at default)
When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020
Utility call key
1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner
Utility display
(When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15)
(When using GT105 ,

When using GT1585, GT157 , (When using GT14, GT11) GT104 )
GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 ,
GT104 or GT1030
Utility call key
Simultaneous 2-point press
(When using GT1030,GT1020)
(2) Utility call

When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold
the utility call key until the buzzer sounds.For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following.
GT User's Manual
(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing
[Communication Settings] of project data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.
GT User's Manual
(4) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

1
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
1.6.1 Check on the GOT
 Check for errors occurring on the GOT

2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo
amplifier and communications.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. 3
GT User's Manual
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(When using GT15)
Error code Communication Channel No.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Error message Time of occurrence
(Displayed only for errors)
CONNECTION TO
HINT DIRECT
Advanced alarm popup display

CPU
With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether
an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
7
For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual.
COMPUTER LINK
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Perform an I/O check
Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu.
• For GT16, GT12
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check].
• For GT15, GT14, GT11
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual
1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen.

Touching [CPU] executes the communication
check with the connected PLC.
1.
2. When the communication screen ends

successfully, the screen on the left is displayed.

1
 Communication monitoring function
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. 2
Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
THAT CAN BE SET

For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual:
DEVICE RANGE
GT10 User's Manual
(Operation of communication monitoring function screen)
Main Menu
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Touch [Comm. Setting] Touch [ ]
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
Communication settings
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Touch [Comm. Monitor]
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT
(1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system

The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be
confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT15 User's Manual
POINT
Communication unit for displaying network module status
Use the GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13 for displaying the network module status on the GOT.
The GOT cannot display the network module status with GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z.

(2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility
screen of the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GT15 User's Manual
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
(3) For CC-Link IE Field Network system
REDUNTANT
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Field Network can be confirmed by the utility
SYSTEM
screen of the GOT.
5
GT15 User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(4) For CC-Link system
The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of
the GOT.
GT15 User's Manual
POINT
CC-Link communication unit when network module status display is made
When displaying the network module status, use the CC-Link communication unit of MODEL GT15-J61BT13.
For the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z, the network module status cannot be displayed.

1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet 1
connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
 Confirming the communication state on Windows®, GT Designer3
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®.
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32time<1ms TTL=64
3
(b) When abnormal communication
FOR MONITORING
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
ACCESS RANGE
Request timed out.
(2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Communication configuration] [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display
[PING Test].
4
1. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING
HOW TO MONITOR
Test] and click the [PING Test] button.
REDUNTANT
2.
SYSTEM
The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING
Test] is finished.
BUS CONNECTION
2.
Click! CONNECTION TO
1.
DIRECT
CPU
(3) When abnormal communication

At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. 7
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
COMPUTER LINK
• Cable connecting condition

CONNECTION
• Confirmation of [Communication Settings]

• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
POINT
8
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
User's manual of the Ethernet module

 Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14)
[PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
GT14 User's Manual

1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring 1
function)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
THAT CAN BE SET

When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS).
DEVICE RANGE
(1) No. of faulty stations
(a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection)
Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.
Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
3
GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
FOR MONITORING
(b) Ethernet multiple connection
ACCESS RANGE
Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.
Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
POINT
SYSTEM
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following.
For the data operation, refer to the following manual.
5
BUS CONNECTION
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual
 Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8
COMPUTER LINK
to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238)
The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal)
The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.
(a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection)
GS231 bit 0
GS231 bit 1
GS231 bit 2
GS231 bit 3
PLC No.
Device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
(b) Ethernet multiple connection, servo amplifier connection, inverter connection

The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection/non
connection with Ethernet.
With Ethernet connection: 1 to 128
With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127
Example) With Ethernet connection, when PC No. 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty, GS327.b3 is set.
The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection.
Device PLC No./Station No.
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS)

(3) Network No., station No. notification
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup.
If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Device
Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)
GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6.4 Check on GX Developer
 Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only)
Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not.
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX
Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]
Not displayed No error displayed

at all times

1
 Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
(2) Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] Loop test 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly
(1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system

Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information].
(a) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station] (The display example
on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] Other station info.

(2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
(a) Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
2
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics…] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics]
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
(3) For CC-Link system
Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
BUS CONNECTION
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
(a) Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
6
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] Monitoring other station
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6.5 Check on GX Works2
 For CC-Link IE Field Network system

Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
Startup procedure
GX Works2 → [diagnostics] → [CC IE Field diagnostics]

1.6.6 Check on the PLC 1
PROCEDURES FOR
 Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the
fiber-optic cable.
For the line testing method, refer to the following manual.
3
FOR MONITORING
 Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only)
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system.
REDUNTANT
Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link
dedicated cable.
SYSTEM
For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11
5
BUS CONNECTION
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1

3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
5. BUS CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 1
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION . . . 11 - 1
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 1
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 - 1
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 1
2
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
DEVICE RANGE
2.
3
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 . . . . . . . 2 - 8
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2.2 MELSEC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 11
4
2.5 MELSEC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
HOW TO MONITOR
2.6 MELSEC-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
REDUNTANT
2.7 MELSEC-WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
2-1
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 *1

2.2 MELSEC-L
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * *2
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion*3
2.5 MELSEC-A
2.6 MELSEC-FX
2.7 MELSEC-WS
*1 The PLC names differ depending on the type of GOT.

• GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
• GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC
• GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 *
• GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q
• GT10: MELSEC-Q (MULTI)
2-2 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET

1
 Setting item
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When selecting buffer memory (G) with the following controllers
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
MELSEC-L
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION
(For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700) 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
(For MELSEC-FX)
SYSTEM
Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device.
When setting buffer memory (BM) and (G), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device number.
5
Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device
BUS CONNECTION
comment/device name are available during device setting.
For details on the procedure to refer to the device comment, refer to the following.
Set the block number of the extended file register.

Block
This item can be set only when the extended file register (ER) is selected.
Unit top I/O

Set when the buffer memory (BM) is selected.
Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
6
Device Intelligent
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
CONNECTION TO
function
Set when the buffer memory (G) is selected.
module
Unit No. Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
DIRECT
Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series.

CPU
Set the mask type for monitoring or writing only specified bits of the buffer memory.
Mask type
MELSEC-
FX buffer
(4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX)
7
Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series.
memory
Set the module No. of the special function unit or special function block to monitor or write.
Unit No.
COMPUTER LINK
(5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX)

CONNECTION
Information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [Device].
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
Set the CPU No. of the controller.
CPU No.
(1) Setting of the CPU No.
8
Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.
Network
Select this for monitoring other controllers.
After selecting the item, set the station number and network number of the controller to be
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Other monitored.
NW No.: Set the network No.
Station No.: Set the station No.
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2-3

(For device BM and CPU No. 0)
(1) Setting of the CPU No.
(a) When monitoring a single CPU system

Set to 0.
(b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Device number
Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when Head I/O number of buffer memory
monitoring a multiple CPU system. Device name
When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target
differs depending on the connection method. (For device BM and CPU No. 1 to 4)
Connection method Monitoring target
• Direct CPU connection Connected PLC CPU
• Bus connection
• Computer link connection
• MELSECNET connection Control CPU
• Ethernet connection
• CC-Link connection Device number
Head I/O number of buffer memory
(2) When monitoring link relay (B) and link register (W) Device name
assigned in link parameter and network parameter. CPU No. 1 to 4
Set the device link relay (B) and link register (W)
running cyclic communication as [Host]. (For device G and CPU No. 0)
If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic
transmission is changed to the transient transmission
regardless of the network type, resulting in delay of the
object display.
(3) Setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard
When setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard, set the items as follows. Device number
(For devices except BM and G) Device name
Unit No.
(For device G and CPU No. 1 to 4)
Bit condition
Device number
Device name
CPU No.
PLC station number
N/W No.
Device number
Channel No.
Device name
Unit No.
CPU No. 1 to 4

(4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) (c) Mask type 2 1
• (For 16 bits)
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the item for monitoring or writing only the specified
Monitor and write only b4 to b7 of the buffer
bits of the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
memory.
MONITORING
Example:
The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring
HINT BM0=4321H as mask type 2.
Mask type
The mask type is effective when using for the buffer
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
2
memories divided per 4 bits, such as an analog input
THAT CAN BE SET

Monitor value 0 0 0 2 H
block.
DEVICE RANGE
(a) Mask type 0 BM0=0010H when writing input value 4321H to
Monitor and write the buffer memory value directly. BM0=0000H as mask type 2.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H
(b) Mask type 1
• (For 16 bits)
3
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 of the buffer (Before writing)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
memory.
Example: BM0
(After writing) 0 0 1 0 H
BM=4321H as mask type 1. • (For 32 bits)
BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of
the buffer memory.
Example:
4
Monitor value 0 0 0 1 H The monitor value is 00060002H when monitoring
HOW TO MONITOR
BM0=87654321H as mask type 2.
BM0=0001H when writing input value 4321H to
REDUNTANT
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
SYSTEM
Monitor value 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 H
BM0
(Before writing)
0 0 0 0 H 5
BM0=00500010H when writing input value
BUS CONNECTION
BM0
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 2.
(After writing) 0 0 0 1 H
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
• (For 32 bits)
BM0
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 and b16 to 19 of (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
the buffer memory.
Example:
BM0
(After writing) 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 H 6
CONNECTION TO
(d) Mask type 3
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H • (For 16 bits)
Monitor and write only b8 to b11 of the buffer
DIRECT
Monitor value 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H memory.

CPU
Example:
BM0=00050001H when writing input value BM0=4321H as mask type 3. 7
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 1. BM0 4 3 2 1 H
COMPUTER LINK
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
CONNECTION
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0=0100H when writing input value 4321H to
BM0
(After writing) 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H
8
BM0
CONNECTION
(Before writing)
0 0 0 0 H
ETHERNET
BM0 0 1 0 0 H
(After writing)

• (For 32 bits) (f) Mask type 5
Monitor and write only b8 to b11 and b28 to 31 of • (For 16 bits)
the buffer memory. Monitor and write only b0 to b7 of the buffer
Example: memory.
The monitor value is 00070003H when monitoring Example:
BM0=87654321H as mask type 3. The monitor value is 0021H when monitoring
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 3. BM0=0021H when writing input value 4321H to
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=0000H as mask type 5.
BM0
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
(Before writing)
BM0
(After writing) 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 H
BM0 0 0 2 1 H
(After writing)
(e) Mask type 4
• (For 16 bits) • (For 32 bits)
Monitor and write only b12 to b15 of the buffer Monitor and write only b0 to b7 and b16 to 23 of
memory. the buffer memory.
Example: Example:
The monitor value is 0004H when monitoring The monitor value is 00650021H when monitoring
BM0=4321H as mask type 4. BM0=87654321H as mask type 5.
BM0 4 3 2 1 H BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
Monitor value 0 0 0 4 H Monitor value 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H
BM0=1000H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=00650021H when writing input value
BM0=0000H as mask type 4. 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 5.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0 0 0 0 0 H BM0
(Before writing) (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0 1 0 0 0 H BM0
(After writing) (After writing) 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H
• (For 32 bits) (g) Mask type 6

Monitor and write only b12 to b15 and b28 to 31 • (For 16 bits)
of the buffer memory. Monitor and write only b8 to b15 of the buffer
Example: memory.
The monitor value is 00080004H when monitoring Example:
BM0=87654321H as mask type 4. The monitor value is 0043H when monitoring
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=4321H as mask type 6.
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
BM0=50001000H for writing input value
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 4. BM0=2100H when writing input value 4321H to
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=0000H as mask type 6.
BM0
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
(Before writing)
BM0
(After writing) 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 H
BM0 2 1 0 0 H
(After writing)

• (For 32 bits) 1
Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of
PROCEDURES FOR
the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
Example:
MONITORING
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 6.
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 3
FOR MONITORING
BM0
ACCESS RANGE
(After writing) 6 5 0 0 2 1 0 0 H
(5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX)

Set the module No. of the special function unit or
special function block to monitor or write.
The module No.0 to No.7 are assigned in order for the 4
nearest module or block from the main unit. For details
HOW TO MONITOR
of the module No., refer to the following.
User's Manual (Hardware) of MELSEC-FX
REDUNTANT
(a) Direct specification
SYSTEM
Specify the module No. (No.0 to No.7) of the
special function unit or special function block
directly, to monitor or write when setting the
devices. 5
(b) Indirect specification*1
BUS CONNECTION
Specify the module No. of the special function unit
or special function block indirectly, to monitor or
write when setting the devices, by using the 16-bit
GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on
GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25
corresponding to the module No. will be the 6
module No. of the special function unit or special
CONNECTION TO
function block.
Compatible
Module No. Setting range
DIRECT
device
CPU
100 GD10 0 to 7
7
101 GD11 For the setting other than the above,
error (dedicated device is out of range)
: :
will occur.
114 GD24 If a non-existent module No. is set, a
COMPUTER LINK
timeout error occurs.

CONNECTION
115 GD25
*1 The module No. cannot be specified indirectly for the multi-

drop connection.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC- Device No.
Device name*7 Setting range
QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700]*10 as the representation
controller type. Data register (D)*4*6*11 D0 to D4910079
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2255
*7
Device No.
Device name Setting range Link register (W)*4 W0 to W4AEBFF Hexadecimal
representation
Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Timer (current value) (TN)*6 TN0 to TN32767
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN32767
Internal relay (M)*4*6*11 M0 to M61439 (CN)*6 Decimal
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 (current value) (SN)*6
Link relay (B)*4 B0 to B9FFFF Hexadecimal Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
Timer*6
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Extension Block 0 to 255
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 file register
Counter*6 Device ER0 to ER32767
Bit device
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 (ER)*1

Decimal
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2255 Extension file register
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 ZR0 to ZR4849663
(ZR)*1*3*4
*6 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
timer Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19 Decimal
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 Buffer memory
Word device
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal (Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
Specified bit of the (BM)*5
following word devices Buffer memory
(Except Timer, Counter, (Intelligent function module)
Word device bit ― G0 to G65535
Retentive timer, Index
(G)*4*5
register and Buffer
memory) Ww*8*9 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
Wr*8*9 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Multiple CPU high speed
U3E010000 to U3E024335
transmission memory (U3E0)
Multiple CPU high speed Hexadecimal
U3E110000 to U3E124335
U3E210000 to U3E224335
U3E310000 to U3E324335
Motion device (#) #0 to #12287 Decimal
Converting the above bit
devices into words
Bit device word*8*12 ―
(Except Timer, Counter
and Retentive timer)
*1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing

multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
GX Developer.
Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
*2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
instruction.
*3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
with the QDRSET instruction.
*4 GOT treats them in units of 32k (32768 points).
*5 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
the target intelligent function module.
*6 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system.
Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
*7 Even though Universal model QCPU processes 64-bit data,
the GOT cannot monitor 64-bit data.
*8 This is not supported by GT10.
*9 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
connection.
*10 For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows.
• GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
• GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC
*11 For monitoring the internal relay (M) or data register (D) of a
C Controller module, configure the settings related to the
device functions in the device setting tab of the language
controller setting utility.
*12 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.

2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
1
2.2 MELSEC-L
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting
[MELSEC-L] as the controller type are as follows. multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
Device No.
Device name Setting range GX Developer.
representation Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Input (X)
Output (Y)
X0
Y0
to
to
X3FFF
Y3FFF
Hexadecimal
*2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
instruction. 2
*3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
with the QDRSET instruction.
THAT CAN BE SET

Internal relay (M)*4*6 M0 to M61439
DEVICE RANGE
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal *5 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 to GOT can be specified.
Link relay (B)*4 B0 to BEFFF Hexadecimal the target intelligent function module.
*6 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-L system.
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. (The data
Timer*6
register (D) can be used for D32768 or later.)
Coil (TC)
Contact (CT)
TC0
CT0
to
to
TC32767
CT32767
*7
*8
This is not supported by GT10.
This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
3
Counter*6
Bit device
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 connection.
FOR MONITORING
Decimal *9 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
ACCESS RANGE
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*6 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S8191
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal
Specified bit of the 4
following word devices
HOW TO MONITOR
(Except Timer, Counter,
Word device bit ―
register and Buffer
REDUNTANT
memory)
SYSTEM
Data register (D)*4*6 D0 to D421887
Decimal
Link register (W)*4 W0 to W66FFF Hexadecimal
5
Timer (current value) (TN)*6 TN0 to TN32767
BUS CONNECTION
Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*6 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
(current value) (SN)*6
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Hexadecimal
File register (R)*1*2
Extension file register
R0 to R32767
6
Word device
ZR0 to ZR393215
(ZR)*1*3*4
CONNECTION TO
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19
Buffer memory Decimal
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
DIRECT
(BM)*5
CPU
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module)
(G)*4*5
G0 to G65535
7
Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
COMPUTER LINK
Hexadecimal
*7*8 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
CONNECTION
Wr
*7*9
devices into words
Bit device word ―
(Except Timer contact
and Counter contact)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

2.2 MELSEC-L
2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *
[MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*]*13 as the controller multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
type are as follows. the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
GX Developer.(Except MELSEC-QnA)
Device No. Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Device name*7 *8 *12 Setting range *2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
representation
instruction.
Input (X) X0 to X3FFF *3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
Hexadecimal with the QDRSET instruction.
Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF
Internal relay (M)*9 M0 to M32767 *5 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 the target intelligent function module.
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal *7 When monitoring MELDAS C6/64, if a word device outside
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 the range is set, the value becomes indefinite.
Timer*9 When a bit device outside the range is set, the object may
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate.
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer3.
Counter*9 *8 Devices used by the MELDAS C6/64 system cannot be
Bit device
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 used.

Decimal
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047 *9 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system.
Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 *10 This is not supported by GT10.
timer*9 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 *11 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
connection.
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 *12 Only reading is possible from QS001CPU.
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal *13 For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows.
• GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 *
Specified bit of the
• GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q
Word device bit ―
register and Buffer
memory)
Data register (D)*9 D0 to D32767
Decimal
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*9 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Hexadecimal
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
Extension Block 0 to 255
file register
Device R0 to R32767
Word device
(ER)*1*10*11
ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*4*10*11
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15 Decimal
Buffer memory
(BM)*5*10*11
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) G0 to G65535
(G)*4*5*10*11
Ww*10*11 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
Hexadecimal
*10*11 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Wr
devices into words
2 - 10 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET

1
2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(When using the QCPU)
[MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion]*13 as the controller type are * For details of *1 to *6, refer to 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS,
as follows. MELDAS C6 *.
Device No. *8 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
Device name Setting range
representation connection.
2
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF (When using the Q Motion)
Hexadecimal *9 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM
THAT CAN BE SET

Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
for the device name and set the value subtracted 9000 for
DEVICE RANGE
Internal relay (M)*12 M0 to M32767 the device number (0 to 255).
*10 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
special data register.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 *11 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid
setting range.
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
(When using the QCPU/Q Motion)
Timer*12
Contact (TT)
Coil (TC)
TT0
TC0
to
to
TT32767
TC32767
*12 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q
Motion system.
3
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
FOR MONITORING
Counter*12 *13 For GT10, the controller type is [MELSEC-Q(Multi)].
Bit device
ACCESS RANGE
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Decimal
Special relay (SM)*9 SM0 to SM2047
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*12 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Word device bit ―
REDUNTANT
register and Buffer
SYSTEM
memory)
Data register (D)*10*11*12 D0 to D32767
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047 5
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
BUS CONNECTION
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*12 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
6
Extension Block 0 to 255
CONNECTION TO
file register
Device R0 to R32767
(ER)*1*7*8
Word device

DIRECT
ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*4*7*8
CPU
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15 Decimal
Buffer memory
7
*5*7*8
(BM)
COMPUTER LINK
Buffer memory
CONNECTION
(Intelligent function module) G0 to G65535

(G)*4*5*7*8
Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww7FF
Hexadecimal
Wr*7*8 Wr0 to Wr7FF
Motion device (#)*7*8 #0 to #8191 Decimal 8

devices into words
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 11

2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
2.5 MELSEC-A
[MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. (2) For GT10, GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
(1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 Device No.
representation
Device No.
Device name Setting range Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
representation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Hexadecimal Internal relay/
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF M0 to M9255 Decimal
Special internal relay (M)
Internal relay/Special
M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191
internal relay (M)
Decimal Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Bit device
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF Hexadecimal
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047

Timer
Bit device
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047

Timer Decimal
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Decimal Counter
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
Counter Specified bit of the
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Word device bit following word devices ―
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
(Except Index register)
Data register/
following word devices D0 to D9255 Decimal
Word device bit ― Special data register (D)
(Except Index register
and Buffer memory) Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF Hexadecimal
Data register/Special data Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047

D0 to D32767 Decimal
register (D) Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN1023
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal (CN)
Word device
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767 File register (R) R0 to R8191 Decimal
Counter (current value) Decimal Index (Z) Z0 to Z6
CN0 to CN32767
(CN) register*1 (V) V0 to V6
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal *2 A0 to A1
Accumulator (A)
File register (R) R0 to R32767 Converting the above bit
Extension Block 1 to 255 devices into words
Bit device word*3*4*5 ―
file register (Except Timer and
Device ER0 to ER32767
Word device
(ER) *1 Counter)
Decimal
Index (Z) Z0 to Z15 *1 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
register*2 (V) V0 to V6 not available.
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1 *2 With the computer link connection, the GOT cannot read/
write data from/to the accumulator.
Buffer memory *3 This is not supported by GT10.
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 Decimal *4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
(BM)*3 *5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF of 16.
Hexadecimal Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
devices into words
(Except Timer and
Counter)
*1 In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing
of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the extension
file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, or A4UCPU is
not available.
When the bit specification writing of the word device is
required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.
*2 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
not available.
*3 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
the target intelligent function module.
*5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
of 16.
Example: M9000, M9016, M9240

2.5 MELSEC-A
1
2.6 MELSEC-FX
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting If using the 16 bit specification for a buffer
[MELSEC-FX] as the controller type are as follows. memory of 32 bit data, monitoring and writing
may not be executed normally.
Device No. For the data size of each buffer memory, refer to
representation
the following.
Input relay (X) X0 to X377
Octal User's Manual of the special block or special 2
Output relay (Y) Y0 to Y377
module
THAT CAN BE SET

Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M7679
• When reading from/writing to the special block or
DEVICE RANGE
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511 special module by interrupt processing of the
Bit device
State (S) S0 to S4095 Decimal sequence program, monitoring/writing from GOT

Timer contact (T) T0 to T511 to the buffer memory may not be executed
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255 normally.
Specified bit of the (2) How to select a keyword protection level
Word device bit*1
― For equipment that are allowed to operate the FX 3
(Except Timer (set value) PLC online, 3 levels of protection level can be set.
FOR MONITORING
and Counter (set value)) When monitoring or changing settings by any
ACCESS RANGE
Data register (D) D0 to D0999 online equipment is required, set a keyword
File register (D) D1000 to D7999 referring to the following.
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8511 (a) When setting the keyword only
Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T511 Select a protection level by the initial letter of
Counter (current value) the keyword.
C0 to C255
(C) All operation protect: Set a keyword with the
initial letter "A", "D" to "F", or "0" to "9".
4
Timer (set value) (TS)*3*5 TS0 to TS511
Incorrect write/read protect: Set a keyword
Word device
HOW TO MONITOR
Counter (set value)
CS0 to CS255 with the initial letter "B".
(CS)*4*5 Decimal
Incorrect write protect: Set a keyword with the
REDUNTANT
Extension register (R) R0 to R32767
initial letter "C".
SYSTEM
Index register (V) V0 to V7
(b) When setting the keyword and 2nd keyword
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z7
Select a protection level by [Registration
Buffer memory (BM)*7 BM0 to BM32767
condition].
(3) Monitoring availability at each keyword protection
5
devices into words
Bit device word*2*6 level
BUS CONNECTION
(Except Timer contact
and Counter contact) The following shows the device monitoring
availability at each keyword protection level.
*1 When executing the touch switch function set during the bit
specification of the word device, do not write any data to the When registering the
When registering the Keyword
word device through the sequence program. keyword and 2nd
keyword only not
*2 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. keyword
registered
*3 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed. Item Incorrect
All Incorrect All online Read/ or
*4 For CS0 to CS199, only 16-bit (1-word) designation is
allowed. operation
protect
write/
read
write
protect
operation write
protect protect
Write protection
protect cancelled 6
For CS200 to CS255, only 32-bit (2-word) designation is protect
allowed. Monitoring
CONNECTION TO
*5 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device devices
designation mode.
T, C set
In addition, setting values of the timer and counter, which are
value
not used for the program, cannot be monitored. If monitoring
DIRECT
and file
is executed, a reading error occurs. *1 *1 *1
register
CPU
*7 Can be used only for special blocks or special units Changing (D1000
devices and the
compatible with FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC.
(Except FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD, and FX2N-2DA)
following)
Other
7
than
above
COMPUTER LINK
POINT
CONNECTION
*1 When the T, C set values are specified indirectly, changing

devices is available.
(1) Precautions when using the buffer memory (4) Difference between all online operations
• When the power supply of the special block or prohibition and all operations prohibition
special module is turned off, the contents of the When specifying all online operations prohibition,
buffer memory are initialized, except for some displaying devices and inputting data with 8
keeping areas. programming tools or GOT are all prohibited.
• When the buffer memory is monitored by the When all operations are prohibited, displaying
GOT, the PLC scan time may increase instantly. devices and inputting data with the GOT are
CONNECTION
• Use the 16 bit specification for the buffer enabled while all operations using programming
ETHERNET
memory of 16 bit data. Use the 32 bit tools are prohibited.

specification for the buffer memory of 32 bit data.

2.6 MELSEC-FX
2.7 MELSEC-WS
The device ranges that can be set when selecting (3) Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device
[MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. representation of GT Designer3
The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and
Device No. the device representation of GT Designer3 are
Device Setting range
representation different. Set the device by referring to the
Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8 following table.
Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Decimal Engineering software for
Device GT Designer3
Bit device
Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 +Decimal MELSEC-WS

Logic input (LI) LI0.0 to LI3.7 [ ].I
Specified bit of the I . : I/O model name
Word device bit -
following word devices I*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
Data (byte)(D) D0 to D99 (1-8): Input position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
Decimal
Data (word)(W) W0 to W49 (1-8): Input position
Decimal [ ].Q
Word device
EFI input (byte)(EI) EI110 to EI233 +Decimal Q . : I/O model name

+Decimal Q*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
Decimal (1-8): Output position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
EFI output (byte)(EQ) EQ10 to EQ22
+Decimal (1-8): Output position
Logic input (byte)(LD) LD0 to LD3 Decimal .
LQ .
Logic input (word)(LW) LW0 to LW1 Decimal : "Result"
LQ*1 (0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
(0-7): Bit position
(0-7): Bit position
POINT [0] . .
LI .
: CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
(1) Devices of MELSEC-WS LI*1 (0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
Only reading is possible for all devices. (0-7): Bit position
(0-7): Bit position
(2) Device settings of MELSEC-WS [0].EFI : , Byte
EI
• Input(I), Output(Q) : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
(1-2): EFI number
EI*1 (1-2): EFI number
(1-3): Device number
(1-3): Device number
(0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
[0].EFI :1, Byte
Device Input position(1 to 8) EQ
: CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
name EQ*1 (1-2): EFI number
Module number(1 to 12) (1-2): EFI number
(0-2): Byte number
• Logic result(LQ), Logic input(LI) (0-2): Byte number
D RS232 data
D
(0-99(Dec)): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
W
(0-49(Dec)): Word number
Device Bit position(0 to 7) Word virtualization of D GOT independent device
name W
Byte number(0 to 3) device (Not available)
W0= (D1(Upper bits),
• EFI input(EI) D0(Lower bits))
LD RS232 data
LD
(0-3): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
LW
Device Byte number(0 to 3) (0-1): Word number
name Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device
Device number(1 to 3) LW
device (Not available)
EFI number(1 to 2) LW0= (LD1(Upper bits),
LD0(Lower bits))
• EFI output(EQ)
*1 When the mapping position is changed by the MELSEC-WS
engineering software, a mismatch occurs between virtual
devices on GOT and MELSEC-WS mapping devices.
When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices.
Device Byte number(0 to 2)

name
EFI number(1 to 3)

2.7 MELSEC-WS
(4) When using offset specification
Offset
(f) EFI output(EQ)
+0 +1 +2 +3 to +15
1
When setting devices using the offset function, the
PROCEDURES FOR
+0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12
device values are as follows.
PREPARATORY
+16 Fixed to 0
(a) Input(I)
MONITORING
: Fixed to 0
+240
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error
+0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8
+272 Device range error
+16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8
+32
+48
I3.1
I4.1
I3.2
I4.2
I3.3
I4.3
I3.4
I4.4
I3.5
I4.5
I3.6
I4.6
I3.7
I4.7
I3.8
I4.8
2
+64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8
THAT CAN BE SET

+80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8 Fixed to 0
DEVICE RANGE
+96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8 (OFF)
+112 I8.1 I8.2 I8.3 I8.4 I8.5 I8.6 I8.7 I8.8

+128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.7 I9.8
+144 I10.1 I10.2 I10.3 I10.4 I10.5 I10.6 I10.7 I10.8
+160 I11.1 I11.2 I11.3 I11.4 I11.5 I11.6 I11.7 I11.8
+176 I12.1 I12.2 I12.3 I12.4 I12.5 I12.6 I12.7 I12.8 3
FOR MONITORING
(b) Output(Q)
ACCESS RANGE
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8
+16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8
+32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8
+48
+64
Q4.1
Q5.1
Q4.2
Q5.2
Q4.3
Q5.3
Q4.4
Q5.4
Q4.5
Q5.5
Q4.6
Q5.6
Q4.7
Q5.7
Q4.8
Q5.8
4
+80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8
HOW TO MONITOR
Fixed to 0
+96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8 (OFF)
REDUNTANT
+112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 Q8.8
+128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8
SYSTEM
+144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8
+160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8
+176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8
+192 Device range error 5
(c) Logic result(LQ)
BUS CONNECTION
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7
6
(d) Logic input(LI)
CONNECTION TO
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7
DIRECT

CPU

(e) EFI input(EI) 7

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +8 to +15
COMPUTER LINK
+0 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113

CONNECTION
+16 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123

+32 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133
+48 Fixed to 0
: Fixed to 0
+240
+256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 8
+272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223
+288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 Device range error
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

2.7 MELSEC-WS
2.7 MELSEC-WS
3
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
DEVICE RANGE
3.
3
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems
FOR MONITORING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
ACCESS RANGE
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14 4
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for
HOW TO MONITOR
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
REDUNTANT
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . .3 - 18
SYSTEM
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19 5
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network
BUS CONNECTION
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3-1
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network

Systems
3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC-Link
IE Field Network
 Bus connection
(1) When connecting to multiple CPU system
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the Control station
network.
GOT
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal Control station
stations on other networks. *1
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the GOT Control
station
routing parameter)
Normal Normal Normal
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the station station station
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Normal Normal
Link IE controller network. station station
• When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can Control station
monitor CPU No.1 to No.4.
GOT Control
station

station station station
Normal
station
Normal station
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
to 2)
• The motion controller CPU (Q Series) at other stations cannot be monitored.
*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network
respectively.
3-2 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

(2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU
1
PROCEDURES FOR
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the *1
Control
network.
PREPARATORY
GOT station
MONITORING
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
2
THAT CAN BE SET

• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal
DEVICE RANGE
Control Control
stations on other networks. GOT
station station
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the Normal Normal Normal
routing parameter) station station station
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the Normal Normal
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Link IE controller network.
station station
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included,
the master station and local stations can be monitored. GOT
• When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the Control Control
station
data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] station
for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the Normal
4
Normal station
parameter is ignored) station M station Normal
station
HOW TO MONITOR
L station L station
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
5
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
BUS CONNECTION
to 2)
respectively.
(3) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU 6

• The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. Control
CONNECTION TO
When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or station
QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned
Normal Normal
for the network parameter. GOT station station
DIRECT
• The GOT cannot monitor normal stations on the network.

CPU
Normal
• The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks. station
7
Control Control
station station
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

GOT station station station
Normal Normal
station station
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3-3

 Direct CPU connection/computer link connection
(1) When connecting to multiple CPU system
• Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (1).
(2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU
(3) When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations *1
Control
on the network. GOT station
For monitoring devices (other than B and W assigned for the network *1
Normal Normal
parameter) of other stations, the GOT cannot monitor the devices of station station
the PLC CPU that is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU.
Normal
station
• If connected to a relay station, use data link parameter [Effective unit

number for accessing other stations] to designate the unit number GOT
that is connected to the network to be monitored. Control Control
station station
Normal
Normal station Normal
station M station
station
L station L station
(4) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU

(5) When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700)
via direct CPU connection
Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following
QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.
Controller Relay CPU
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU QCPU (Q mode)

Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU
CNC (CNC C70) Q173NCCPU QnUCPU
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) Q172DRCPU
respectively.
 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), CC-Link connection (via G4)

• Only the station connected to the GOT can be monitored.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 6:
When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)
• When the station connected to the GOT is in the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to
No.4.
• The GOT cannot monitor other stations.

1
 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network
PROCEDURES FOR
connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
Precautions for cyclic transmission
When transmitting cyclic transmission with a GOT, even if link device X and/or Y are assigned to a GOT when 2
setting the network parameter for the control station, the GOT cannot access the host station.
THAT CAN BE SET

When transmitting cyclic transmission, use link device B and/or W.
DEVICE RANGE
• The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the
network.
When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to
CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No.
3
• When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Controller Network, or CC-Link field network is accessible via the PLC CPU.
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
On the Ethernet network, only QCPU (Q mode) and QnACPU can be accessed.
• When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication
unit on the GOT.
• To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. 4
For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
HOW TO MONITOR
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
5
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
BUS CONNECTION
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (MELSECNET/H network system, MELSECNET/10 network
system)
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Controller Network) 6
CONNECTION TO
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Field Network)
DIRECT
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

CPU
• If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are
monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. 7
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5:
COMPUTER LINK
When using MELSECNET/10 connection

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system
When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station.
If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target automatically
when the system is switched.
(A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
 Monitoring devices of other stations on the network

If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore, monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network parameter.
 Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, CPU direct connection, computer link
connection)
• Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station.
• If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.

1
 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices
PROCEDURES FOR
Example 1: When using bus connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Control station Control station
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
THAT CAN BE SET

QnA AnU
Network No.1 (1-4) Network No.2
DEVICE RANGE
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
AnA AnN
(1-3) (2-3)
3
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
FOR MONITORING
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
ACCESS RANGE
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be accessed Network No.1 Network No.2
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Station AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
connected to GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
AnU (1-1)
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
QnA (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) 5
BUS CONNECTION
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
(1-4)
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── Other (2-4)
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
6
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
CONNECTION TO
AnU (2-4)
Other (1-1) ── ── Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Host
DIRECT
CPU
How to read the table
Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible
7
: Not accessible
COMPUTER LINK
Lower line: Network settings

CONNECTION
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)
POINT
8
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
CONNECTION
designating devices allocated to another station.

ETHERNET
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Example 2: When using bus connection
QnA AnU
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
station.
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
Station
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
QnA (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
Other
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) (0-2)*1
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
How to Upper line: Accessibility

read the : Accessible
table : Not accessible
Host
POINT

Example 3: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
Q(Q mode) AnU
Network No.1 (1-4) Network No.2
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
AnA AnN
(1-3) (2-3)
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
station.
No.).
Station AnU (1-1)

Q(Q mode)
AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
4
connected to GOT (1-2)
HOW TO MONITOR
AnU (1-1)
REDUNTANT
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── ──
SYSTEM
Q (Q mode) (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
5
(1-4)
BUS CONNECTION
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── ──
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
6
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── ── ── Other (2-2) ── Host
How to read the table CONNECTION TO

DIRECT
CPU
Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible
Lower line:
: Not accessible
Network settings
7
Host
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
POINT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection
Q(Q mode) AnU

(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
station.
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
Station QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
Q (Q mode) (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
*1
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) Other (0-2)
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
How to Upper line: Accessibility

read the : Accessible
table : Not accessible
Host
POINT
3 - 10 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
QnA Q (Q mode)
MONITORING
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 QnA
2
(1-4)
(1-2) (2-2)
(2-4)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
AnN
GOT (2-3)
(1-3)
• Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)
3
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU Q (Q mode) QnA AnN AnU
Station
FOR MONITORING
connected to GOT (1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4) (2-1) (2-2) (2-3) (2-4)
ACCESS RANGE
GOT (1-3) ――
: Accessible : Not accessible

• Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device
(a) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter
NW No.: 1, Station number: Host
4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating
devices allocated to another station.
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)
Station to be accessed
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU
Station How to read the table 1, Other (2)
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT ↑ ↑
GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) ―― 1, Other (4) NW No. Station number
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 - 11

Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)
Image of CC-Link Connection

GOT
Q(Q mode) CC-Link Master Network module

(1-2) module (0 station) (1-2)
CC-Link System
QnA AnA
GOT
(1-1) (1-3)
Network
System
AnN
GOT (1-4) GOT
QnA Q (Q mode) AnA AnN
Station
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT
QnA (1-1)
Q(Q mode) (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnN (1-4)
: Accessible : Not accessible

1
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet
PROCEDURES FOR
Connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
 Access range 2
(1) MITSUBISHI PLC
THAT CAN BE SET

The PLC can be monitored via the Ethernet module set in the Ethernet setting on GT Designer3.
DEVICE RANGE
The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller
Network, or CC-Link field network via the QCPU or QnACPU.
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
(The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and
MELSECNET/10 networks)
For monitoring CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link 3
field network, set the routing parameter.
FOR MONITORING
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
ACCESS RANGE
• Routing parameter setting of the GOT
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10
network system
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 4
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network
HOW TO MONITOR
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network
REDUNTANT
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
SYSTEM
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed.
GOT 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub etc.
Gateway
(Router etc.)
6
MELSECNET/H etc.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
POINT
7
(1) Host in the Ethernet connection
While the GOT is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station
COMPUTER LINK
(Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet
CONNECTION
connection.
(2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system
When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station.
If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target
automatically when the system is switched.
(A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
8
 Various settings
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following.


3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring
 When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection
Only connected stations can be monitored.
 When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
(1) Access range

The master station and local station can be monitored.
: Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored
Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission Monitoring by transient transmission
Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode)
Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible)
Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible) *1
*1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13.
All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can
be monitored.
When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number
of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied.
For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
(2) Setting device name and device number

(a) Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter
setting
Use the following device names.
For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station number setting.
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Automatic Device name on master Link GT Designer3 settings

Device name on PLC CPU
refresh station scan Device name Set device range
Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X1FFF
Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y1FFF
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
(read area)
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Automatic Device name on master Link GT Designer3 settings

Device name on PLC CPU
refresh station scan Device name Set device range
Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X7FF
Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y7FF
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to WwFF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to WrFF
(read area)

(b) Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations 1
Set the device name and device No.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(3) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link
parameter setting 2
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local
THAT CAN BE SET

(b) When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station
DEVICE RANGE
NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n)
(n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station))
POINT 3
For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
if designating devices allocated to another station.
 When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only) 4

(1) Access range
HOW TO MONITOR
GT16, GT15 and GT14 can monitor the master station and local stations.
GT10 and GT11 can monitor the master station only.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring master station
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0)
(b) When monitoring local station
5
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)
BUS CONNECTION
(3) Setting device name and device number
Set the device name and device No.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Monitoring overview
The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit.
Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2
All remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to

Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and
Contents the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are
local station are specified and monitored.
specified and monitored.
The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is

Advantage required. However, the GOT communication sequence The data communication processing speed is high.
program is not needed.*1
• Writing from the GOT (read command from the master

station) can be performed only to remote outputs and
The data communication processing speed is lower than
Disadvantage remote registers assigned to the GOT of the master
that of cyclic transmission.
station and to the GOT internal registers.
• GOT communication sequence program is required.*1
*1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program
satisfy the following conditions.
• Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC
CPU of the master station.
• Use GX Developer or SW2 -GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link
setting on the package.
For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
*2 For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic
transmission, refer to the following.
■ When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
POINT
In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and
intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed.
To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or
more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.

1
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access
PROCEDURES FOR
Range for Monitoring
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
 Bus connection, CPU direct connection, Computer link connection
THAT CAN BE SET

(1) When connecting to the master station
DEVICE RANGE
• Local stations can be monitored. M GOT
When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B
L1 L3
and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
(2) When connecting to the local station

M
3
• The master station can be monitored.
FOR MONITORING
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
ACCESS RANGE
L1 L3
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
• Other local stations cannot be monitored. GOT
(3) When connecting to the master station on the third layer

• The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer M
4
can be monitored. L1 L3
HOW TO MONITOR
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
L2
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. m GOT
REDUNTANT
• Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.
SYSTEM
1 3
5
 Monitoring devices of other stations
BUS CONNECTION
If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring
 Setting method of monitor device
The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting
monitor devices .
L1 L3
L2
m
1 3 GOT
(1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter
Specify the host station.
(2) Monitoring devices of other stations
Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table.
Setting of the station No.

L2
Station M L1 L3 1 2 3
m
connected to GOT
M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 ― ― ―
L1 Other 0 Host ― ― ― ― ―
L2
Other 0 ― Host ― Other 1 Other 2 Other 3
m
L3 Other 0 ― ― Host ― ― ―
1 ― ― Other 0 ― Host ― ―
2 ― ― Other 0 ― ― Host ―
3 ― ― Other 0 ― ― ― Host
POINT
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting

FXCPU
The access range that can be monitored for the direct CPU connection is only the connected CPU. (The GOT cannot
monitor other stations.)
The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others.
The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop
connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.

3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU
1
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/
PROCEDURES FOR
H Network System
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of 2
the master station.
THAT CAN BE SET

When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.
DEVICE RANGE
POINT
(1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10
The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and 3
MELSECNET/10 network system.
FOR MONITORING
Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.
ACCESS RANGE
Network No.1
Monitor Station No.0
target (master station)
QJ71LP21-25
Q33B
module
Power supply
PLC CPU
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network
SYSTEM
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
QJ71E71-100
Q33B
module
Power supply
Empty
Network No.1
Station No.1
(remote I/O station) 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub
GOT GOT GOT
(1) Direct CPU (2) Computer link (3) Ethernet connection

6
connection connection
CONNECTION TO
(2) Connection to GT11 and remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H
GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system.
DIRECT
GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station).
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System
 Direct CPU connection
(1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU.
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit.
For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following.
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.]
(Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16,
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
 Computer link connection

(1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the remote I/O station.
For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or modem interface module and
other details, refer to the following.
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.

1
 Ethernet connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
(1) Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on
MONITORING
the remote I/O station.
For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following.
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.Therefore, a longer
time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
devices B and W of the remote I/O station.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual.
For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
 Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station
The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
REDUNTANT
The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
SYSTEM
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field
Network System
When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master
station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods.
 Computer link connection

Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 0
module
Power supply
CLP CPU
QJ71GF11-T2
Empty
Empty
Q33B

LJ72GF15-T2
LJ71C24
LX40C6
LY10R2
module
Power supply
Network No. 1,
Station No. 1
GOT
(1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2) mounted on the head module.
For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following.
(2) Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify
[Network No. 1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring
target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only)
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network.
devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link field network.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter setting of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Connection between GT11, GT10 and head module of CC-Link IE Field Network
GT11, GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network.
GT11, GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module).
2
 Restrictions on connection to head module
THAT CAN BE SET

The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
DEVICE RANGE
Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT
DEVICE RANGE
4.
SYSTEM 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8
4.2 Direct CPU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 4
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
HOW TO MONITOR
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network
Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit . .4 - 25
4.9 Q Redundant Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29
6
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
4-1
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM
This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU
redundant system is monitored by the GOT.
Monitor
target
Station No. 0 Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Control Standby
system system
(System A) (System B)
Tracking cable MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
(remote I/O station)
The GOT monitors

GOT the control system
CPU direct PLC CPU.
connection
When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.
Monitor target
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Standby Control
system system
Tracking cable MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
The GOT monitors the PLC CPU

GOT of the new control system after
CPU direct system switching.
connection
In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the
standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant
system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching
occurs.
To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3.
4.9 Q Redundant Setting
4-2 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. 1
PROCEDURES FOR
• Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system)
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station)
(2) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H
network system)
2
4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote
THAT CAN BE SET

I/O station)
DEVICE RANGE
(3) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network
system)
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station)
• Direct CPU connection 3

4.2 Direct CPU Connection
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
• CC-Link connection (Via G4)

4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
• MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system)
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System)
5
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection
• Connection to the redundant type extension base unit

(1) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit) 6
(2) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
CONNECTION TO
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type
extension base unit)
DIRECT
(3) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base
CPU
unit)
4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module 7
mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
COMPUTER LINK
(4) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
CONNECTION
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant
type extension base unit)
For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following.
8
Monitorable controllers of each chapter
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4-3

The following table shows the features of each connection method.
Connection type Before system switching After system switching
• Direct CPU connection

(Remote I/O station of Control system Standby system Standby system Control system
MELSECNET/H network
system) Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
• Computer link connection master station sub master station master station sub master station
(Serial communication
module mounted on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
remote I/O station on
MELSECNET/H network Serial Serial
Remote Ethernet Remote Ethernet
system) communication communication
I/O station module I/O station module
• Ethernet connection module module
(Ethernet module mounted
on the remote I/O station
GOT1 GOT2 GOT3 GOT1 GOT2 GOT3
of the MELSECNET/H
network system) Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet
Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet
connection connection connection connection connection connection
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control

system PLC CPU.

GOT GOT
Control
Control Standby system system
system Standby system
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
master station sub-master station
master station sub-master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O
Remote I/O
station
station
By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes

the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*1
GOT1 GOT2 GOT1 GOT2
Control Control
system Standby system Standby system system
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
master station sub-master station master station sub-master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Remote I/O Remote I/O

station station
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
• CC-Link connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(intelligent device station) Intelligent device station
GOT1
• CC-Link connection (Via GOT1

AJ65BT-G4-S3 CC-Link
G4) GOT2
CC-Link
2
GOT2
Master station Standby master station
Master station Standby master station
Control
THAT CAN BE SET

Standby
DEVICE RANGE
system system
Control Standby
system system
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control
system PLC CPU.
• MELSECNET/H
connection, MELSECNET/
10 connection
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
3
(Network system)
FOR MONITORING
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
ACCESS RANGE
(MELSECNET/H mode or (MELSECNET/H mode or
MELSECNET/10 mode) MELSECNET/10 mode)
Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.2

(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (sub control station)
Control Standby Standby Control 4

system system system system
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection GOT Station No.3 GOT Station No.3
(Network system) (normal station) (normal station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Controller Network

5
BUS CONNECTION
Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.2
(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (sub control station)
Control Standby Standby Control

By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes 6

*2
the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.
CONNECTION TO
GOT
Station No. 3 GOT
Station No. 3
Ethernet Ethernet
DIRECT
CPU
Station Station
No. 1 No. 2
Control Standby Standby Control

7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET


(Serial communication Control system Control system Standby system
module mounted on the
redundant type extension Station Station Station Station
base unit) No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
(Ethernet module mounted
Serial Serial
on the redundant type CC-Link Ethernet CC-Link Ethernet
communication module communication
extension base unit) module module module
module module
• CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station)
GOT2 GOT3 GOT1 GOT2 GOT3
(CC-Link module mounted GOT1
on the redundant type CC-Link Computer link Ethernet CC-Link Computer link Ethernet
extension base unit) connection connection connection connection connection connection
• CC-Link connection (Via

G4)
(CC-Link module mounted
on the redundant type
extension base unit)
*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the
PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.
*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following.
4.10Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system
(1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system.
When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system."
When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or
modules."
2
However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
the monitoring operation.
(2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is
changed).
The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user.
(3) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. 3
Monitoring function System monitoring function
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(4) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station
to be set in the clock setting of the utility.
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
(5) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target
even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, 4
data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected.
HOW TO MONITOR
In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device
writing error. Correct device." is not detected.
REDUNTANT
(6) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function
SYSTEM
version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102".
Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.
(7) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an 5
option function such as the ladder monitor is used.
BUS CONNECTION
(8) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the
MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU
redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm.
If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.
(9) In the direct CPU connection, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following
cases. 6
• When the power supply to the CPU where the GOT is connected is OFF
CONNECTION TO
• When the cable connecting the GOT with the CPU is broken
• When the tracking is disabled
DIRECT
(10) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the
CPU
start up of the GOT and the GOT operates normally.

In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC
CPU for which the Q redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the
7
monitoring target change mode that was set in the Q redundant setting.
COMPUTER LINK
(11) If the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode, do not make the Q redundant system setting for the
CONNECTION
GOT side when connecting the GOT.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/
H Network System
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station)
This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Monitor target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
Standby system
Control system (System B)
(System A)

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Network No. 1, Station No. 2

(Remote I/O station)
CPU direct connection
GOT
(1) Connection method

Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on
the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as follows.
Setting item Settings Model
Controller Type
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
Host Host
Device setting
Remote master Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
(Network setting)
station Station No. 0 (master station))
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network
system.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC
CPU.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that
is operating as the master.

4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module 1
mounted on remote I/O station)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the computer link connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O 2
station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
Standby system
Control system
(System B)
(System A)
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
supply module
Power
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
(Remote I/O station)
Computer link connection

4
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the
MELSECNET/H network system. 5
BUS CONNECTION
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* 6

Controller Type
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
Host Host
CPU
Device setting
(Network setting)
Remote master
station
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
Station No. 0 (master station))
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.
8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET

4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O
station)
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/
O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the
MELESCNET/H network system.
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control system Standby system

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
(remote I/O station) Network No. 2, Station No. 2
Ethernet

GOT

Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on
the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Controller Type
Device setting Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
Other station
(Network setting) Station No. 0 (master station))
Routing Information Setting 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
4 - 10 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system.
Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available.
2
4.2.1 When using one GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

CPU direct connection
DEVICE RANGE
GOT
Monitor target
(Multiplexed remote master station)
(Multiplexed remote sub master station)
3
FOR MONITORING
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
ACCESS RANGE

4
HOW TO MONITOR
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of 5
the redundant system.
BUS CONNECTION

6
CONNECTION TO
Controller Type
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* DIRECT
Device setting
Host Host
CPU
(Network setting)
Q Redundant Setting 4.9 Q Redundant Setting
7
When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching
COMPUTER LINK
takes over the host station operation.

CONNECTION
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
8
If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring
target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station).
CONNECTION
As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control
ETHERNET
system after system switching.
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 11

4.2.2 When using two GOTs
Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.

CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
GOT1 GOT2
Monitor Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1

target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect GOTs to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU,
Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.
Controller Type
Device setting
Host Host
(Network setting)
When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the
system switching.
The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring.
Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required.
POINT
To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the Q redundant
settings.

4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant 1
system without making Q redundant setting
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be
changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system.
To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable
between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each
PLC CPU. 2
(2) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
directly connected to the GOT can be monitored.
(3) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC
CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system.
In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system.
When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the
device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby 3
system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
GOT1 GOT2
2) Tracks D100=5 from control 1) Numerically input D100=100 4

system to standby system. from the GOT.
HOW TO MONITOR
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network 1) D100=100 5
BUS CONNECTION
2) D100=5
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
As countermeasures to the above, perform the following.

• Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GOT 6
when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU.
CONNECTION TO
• To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the
special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU.
(When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system)
DIRECT
• Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition.
CPU
• For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device.

If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the 7
device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system
tracking function.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515.
System configuration example: when using one GOT
GOT
Control Standby
Q25PRH QJ71 Station system Q25PRH QJ71 Station
system
CPU BR11 No. 0 CPU BR11 No. 1
QJ72 Station
BR15 No. 2
Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a
GOT to control system and standby system.
1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch
operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen.
2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of
the connection cable.
1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system

1
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen.
PROCEDURES FOR
Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device
PREPARATORY
GD100 as the base screen switching device.
MONITORING
(Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT
may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the
redundant system tracking function)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
2. Set the Status Observation.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system
(SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.
Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.
Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.

4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1.
Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of
the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit).
Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).
Device/Style tab
Device : SM1515
Shape : None
Comment tab : Basic Comment
Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.
Touch the screen to display the next screen.
Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.
Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.
1) Device/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status)
3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)

1
4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1.
PROCEDURES FOR
By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen
PREPARATORY
touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON).
MONITORING
Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function.
Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the
switch operation.
Next Screen tab 2

Screen Type : Base
THAT CAN BE SET

Go To Screen : Fixed 2
DEVICE RANGE
Style tab
Display Style : None (Shape)
Trigger tab
Trigger Type : ON
Trigger Device : SM1515
3
FOR MONITORING
1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
The following shows the created base screen 1.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent
device station to the CC-Link network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.
CC-Link connection
(Master station) (Standby master station) GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
Network No. 0,
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Station No. 2
Control (Intelligent device station)
system Standby system
(System A)
(System B)

supply module
Power
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the CC-Link network system to the GOT.
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
Master station Other (NW No. 0, Station No. 0 (master station))
(Network setting)
As the monitoring method, "monitoring by transient transmission" and "monitoring by cyclic transmission" are
available. Each monitor method has advantages and disadvantages.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
THAT CAN BE SET

system, or due to switching by the user
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4)
This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link
network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
(AJ65BT-G4-S3)

(Master station) (Standby master station) GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control
Standby system
system
(System B)
(System A)

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT.
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
MELSEC-QnA/Q
Device setting Master station Host

(Network setting) Local station Other (Local station in other than redundant system)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item. *1
*1 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10.The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
THAT CAN BE SET

system, or due to switching by the user
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections
(Network Systems)
This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to
the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network
system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
GOT
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
(Control station) (MELSECNET/H mode or Network No. 1, Station No. 2
MELSECNET/10 mode) (Normal station)
Monitor target
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Control Empty Standby

system system

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GOT.
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of PLC to PLC network),
Device setting
Other station Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1,
(Network setting)
in the above example))
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
module station No. 2.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems)
1
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network
PROCEDURES FOR
System)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CC- 2
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
GOT

(Control station) Network No. 1, Station No. 2
Monitor target
CC-Link IE Controller Network (Normal station) 3
QJ71GP21-SX
QJ71GP21-SX
QJ61BT11N
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
Control Standby
system system

4
HOW TO MONITOR
QJ71C24N
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
module
Power supply
Empty
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
5
BUS CONNECTION
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
Set GT Designer3 as described below.
Device setting
Other (NW No.1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network), 6
Other station Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1
(Network)
in the above example))
CONNECTION TO
Q Redundant Setting 4.9 Q Redundant Setting DIRECT
CPU
When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub
control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as 7
the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System)
This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network.
GOT
Network No. 1,
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 Station No. 2
Ethernet
Monitor target
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
Control
Standby
system
(System A) system
(System B)

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empt y
Empt y

Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT.
Controller Type
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of Ethernet),

Device setting Other station Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1,
(Network setting) in the above example))
Host Host
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet
POINT
When monitoring control system without Q redundant setting (Only GT16, GT15 and GT14)
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.

1
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base
PROCEDURES FOR
Unit
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module
mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the redundant type extension base unit.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant
type extension base unit.
Monitor target 3
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
4
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
Computer link
REDUNTANT
connection
SYSTEM
Redundant type extension base unit
GOT
5
BUS CONNECTION
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension
base unit.
Set GT Designer3 as follows. 6
CONNECTION TO
Controller Type
DIRECT
CPU
Device setting 7
Host Host
(Network setting)
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
switched to the control system.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on
redundant type extension base unit)
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type
extension base unit.
Monitor target

Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
Ethernet connection
GOT
Network No.2, Station No.1

(Ethernet module)

Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2) mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit.
Controller Type
Device setting
Host Host
(Network setting)

4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link 1
module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type
2
extension base unit.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Monitor target

Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link connection
GOT
Network No. 0, Station No. 1 4
HOW TO MONITOR
(Master station)
REDUNTANT
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Device setting
Master station Other (NW No. 0, Station No. 0 (master station))
(Network setting)
6
CONNECTION TO
switched to the control system. DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted
on redundant type extension base unit)
This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
Monitor target
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply

(Master station)
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link
connection
GOT

(AJ65BT-G4-S3)

Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT.
Controller Type
Device setting
Master station Other (NW No.0, Station No.0 or FF (master station))
(Network setting)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a QCPU
redundant system.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Before making the Q redundant setting
In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Q Redundant] from the menu.

3
2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
3. Make the settings for the Q redundant setting.
In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)
Item Contents Model

CH1 to CH4 Select a tab of the CH No. for the Q redundant setting.
Target at its own Station Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station.
(0-FF) (In Ethernet connection, not available even when selected) 6
Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.
CONNECTION TO
NW No.
Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
(The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)
Pair No.*1
Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
DIRECT
Station Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.

CPU
No. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
New
(The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)
Create a new pair No.
*2 7
Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.
COMPUTER LINK
Deletes one setting of the selected pair.

CONNECTION
Delete
After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.
Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.
Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.
Paste All Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.
For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.
8
*2 GT14, GT12, GT11 are applicable to built-in serial interface only.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

*1 Pair number
Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration.
Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair.
Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2)
Redundant CPU pair (No.1)

Station Station
<System A> <System B>
No.1 No.2
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
GOT
Station
No.5
Ethernet (Network No.1)
Redundant CPU
pair (No.2)
Station Station
<System A> <System B>
No.3 No.4
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
POINT
Precautions for making Q redundant setting
Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting.
• In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a
pair.
As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be
determined as desired.
• Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed.
• Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.
If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GOT fails to
automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.
• When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check
the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual
network module station Nos. are not matched, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to
the control system when the system is switched.
• The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes
automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its
own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.)
• GOT supports the backup mode (separate mode), which is the operation mode of the QCPU redundant system,
and does not support the debug mode.

1
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System
PROCEDURES FOR
Using the Script Function
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 2
connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.)
THAT CAN BE SET

at the occurrence of system switching even if the Q redundant setting is not made.
DEVICE RANGE
The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function.
The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen
switching function.
Function Advantage Disadvantage
Station number switching

The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system)
and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one
Some objects do not allow the station number to be 3
function switched.
screen.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Monitor screens must be created separately for Station
All objects can be used since monitor screens are created
Screen switching function No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby
for each station number.
system).
The following explains how to use each function.
4
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system)
can be created on one screen.
SYSTEM
• If the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
same monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device.
5
• Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.
BUS CONNECTION
 Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection)

System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H 6
(MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
CONNECTION TO
Station Network No. 1
GOT
No. 3
Control system Q25PRH QJ71 Q25PRH QJ71 Standby system
DIRECT
(System A) CPU BR11 CPU BR11 (System B)

CPU
Connected module Network No. Station No. 7

MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1
COMPUTER LINK
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

CONNECTION
1
GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10
3
network
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1. Set the station number switching device.
Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the
station number switching device.
Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the
tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled.
Set here.
2. Set the status observation.

Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of
MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Station No. is changed to 2.

Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to 1.
POINT
Setting for the status observation function
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH)
Set "2570".

1
3. Create a monitor screen.
PROCEDURES FOR
For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common)
PREPARATORY
In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
MONITORING
4. Validate the station number switching function.
On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to
validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen. 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Check here.
HOW TO MONITOR
5. Change the station number switching device value in the script.
REDUNTANT
By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515
SYSTEM
status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device
value.
Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
5
• Screen script for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:
BUS CONNECTION
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station.
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{ 6
[w:GD100]=1;
}
CONNECTION TO
} DIRECT
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

HINT
When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can
be set as the station number switching device.
In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.
 Setting method (Ethernet connection)

System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU E71 CPU E71 (System B)
Connected module Network No. Station No.

Ethernet module of control system 1
Ethernet module of standby system 1 2
GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3
1. Set the station number switching device.

Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the
station number switching device.
Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the
tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled.
Set here.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station
PREPARATORY
monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
MONITORING
(For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H))
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=258(0102H) Station No. is changed to 2.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Operation : GD100=257(0101H) Station No. is changed to 1.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
POINT
Setting for the status observation function 5
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
BUS CONNECTION
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) 6
Set "2570".
CONNECTION TO
3.
DIRECT
Create a monitor screen.

CPU

In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device.
After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0".
For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0".
Therefore, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number switching device and the switch for
shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1.
To make this setting, select [Object] [Switch] [Switch].
The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1, Station No. 1) and base screen=2
to one switch.(Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen)
5. Validate the station number switching function.

On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to
validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen.
However, do not make this setting on the screen 1 created in the item above.
Check here.

1
6. Change the station number switching device value in the script.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
value.
• Screen script for Ethernet connection:

2
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==0x0101){ // Station No. 1 to 2
[w:GD100]=0x0102;
}else{ // Station No. 2 to 1
[w:GD100]=0x0101;
} 3
}
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
For the Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set to the station
switching device.
For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102".
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab. 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number.
When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
other monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the
screen switching devices.
• Precautions:
There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be
used.
(1) Base screen switching device
(2) Overlap window 1 switching device
(7) Superimpose window 1 switching device
(8) Superimpose window 2 switching device
 Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection)

System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H
(MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU BR11 CPU BR11 (System B)

MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2
1
GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10
3
network
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen.

Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of
PREPARATORY
MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
MONITORING
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.

2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM

5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3. Set monitor screens.
• Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1).
4. Change the screen switching device value in the script.

value.
Screen scripts for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:

The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet
connection.
// Script of Screen No. 1

// If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2.
if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=2;
}

if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=1;
}
Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2
HINT
When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can
be set as the screen switching device.
In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.

1
 Setting method (Ethernet connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU E71 CPU E71 (System B)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Ethernet module of control system 1
Ethernet module of standby system 1 2
GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. 3

Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON)

Operation : GD100=2
When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.
Screen No. is changed to 2.
5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
3. Set monitor screens.

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4. Change the screen switching device value in the script.
value.
Screen script for Ethernet connection:
The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet
connection.

if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=2;
}

if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=1;
}
Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2

5
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

BUS CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
5.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
4
5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
HOW TO MONITOR
5.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
REDUNTANT
5.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5-1
5. BUS CONNECTION
5.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
type
Q00JCPU*1
Q00CPU*2
Q01CPU*2
Q02CPU*2
Q02HCPU*2
Q06HCPU*2 Bus *3
connection 5.2.1
Q12HCPU*2
Q25HCPU*2
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
- -
Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)
Q00UJCPU*1
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q02UCPU
(Q mode)*5 Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Bus *3
Q04UDEHCPU connection 5.2.1
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*4 Bus *3
module connection 5.2.1
Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -

*1 When using the bus extension connector box, attach it to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not
allowed.)
*2 For the multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
*3 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected.
*4 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042.
*5 When a slim base is used, a bus connection cannot be established.
5-2 5. BUS CONNECTION

1
Communication
PROCEDURES FOR
type
PREPARATORY
L02CPU
MONITORING
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
2
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
THAT CAN BE SET

(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
DEVICE RANGE
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA Bus
Q3ACPU *1
5.2.2
(QnACPU) connection
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU*2
Q2ASCPU 3
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 Bus *1
FOR MONITORING
(QnASCPU) connection 5.2.3
Q2ASHCPU
ACCESS RANGE
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU 4
A2ACPUP21
HOW TO MONITOR
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
SYSTEM
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A Bus
5
A3ACPUR21 *1
(AnCPU) connection 5.2.2
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
BUS CONNECTION
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 6
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
DIRECT
A2USHCPU-S1
CPU
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
7
MELSEC-A A2SCPU Bus *1
(AnSCPU) connection 5.2.3
COMPUTER LINK
A2SCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU*3
A1SJCPU-S3*3
A1SJHCPU*3
A0J2HCPU Bus
8
MELSEC-A *1
connection 5.2.4
A0J2HCPUP21

CONNECTION
ETHERNET
*1 Only GT115 -Q BDA can be connected.

*2 Bus-connect the GOT on the last redundant extension base A68RB (version B or later) for the Q4ARCPU redundant system.
*3 When an extension base unit is connected, a bus connection cannot be established.
5. BUS CONNECTION 5-3

Communication
type
A0J2HCPUR21
Bus connection *1
5.2.4
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
A2CCPUP21
MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*3*4
Q173CPU*3*4
Q172CPUN*3
Q173CPUN*3
Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
Bus connection *2
controller Q172DCPU 5.2.1
CPU Q173DCPU
(Q Series) Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*5
MR-MQ100 - -
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3 Bus connection *1
5.2.5
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU*6
Motion
A171SCPU-S3*6
controller
CPU A171SCPU-S3N*6
(A Series) A171SHCPU*6
A171SHCPUN*6 Bus connection *1
5.2.6
A172SHCPU*6
A172SHCPUN*6
A173UHCPU*6
A173UHCPU-S1*6
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Bus connection *2 5.2.1
Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) Bus connection *2 5.2.1
*1 Only GT115 -Q BDA can be connected.
*2 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected.
*3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
*4 Use main modules with the following product numbers.
• Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later
• Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later
*5 Connect Q170MCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).
*6 When using an extension base, use the A168.

1
5.2 System Configuration
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs
It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. 2
Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the
THAT CAN BE SET

equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment.
DEVICE RANGE
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU
 When one GOT is connected 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Bus extension Extension base
Main base unit connector box unit GOT
Communication driver
Bus(Q)
HOW TO MONITOR
Extension cable Connection cable
PLC GOT
REDUNTANT
Main base Extension base
SYSTEM
Bus Bus
Extension Extens Connection cable Max. distance
Main extension *1
extension Option device*4 Model
cable ion
base connector
box*2
base
connector
box*2
5
GT15-75QBUSL
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QBUS Between main base and
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2 GOT: 13.2m
GT15-QC30B(3m)
Extension (Including the extension
Extens GT15-QC50B(5m)
cable cable length)
- ion - GT15-QC100B(10m) - (Built into GOT)
(13.2m or
Main
less)
base
6
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-75QBUSL
base A9GT GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-75QBUS2L
CONNECTION TO
- - -
-QCNB*3 GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QBUS
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QBUS2 Between main base and
GT15-QC100B(10m) GOT: 37m
DIRECT
Extension GT15-QC150BS(15m) (Including the extension

Extens
CPU
cable A9GT GT15-QC200BS(20m) cable length)

- ion - (Built into GOT)
(13.2m or -QCNB GT15-QC250BS(25m)
less)
base
GT15-QC300BS(30m) 7
GT15-QC350BS(35m)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032).
COMPUTER LINK
*2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension
CONNECTION
connector box is required.

Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit.
Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box.
When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit.
When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage.
*3 When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main
base unit is not allowed)
8
*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
CONNECTION
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
ETHERNET
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.

 When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected
GOT
Bus extension Extension base Intermediary
Main base unit 1st GOT (Terminating
connector box unit GOT station)
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)
PLC GOT (1st)*5
Main base Extension base

Extension Connection cable 1)
Option device
Bus extension cable Extension Bus extension Model
Main base *6*7
*1
connector box*2 base connector box*2
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - -
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
Extension
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable -
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less)
Main base
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-75QBUS2L
A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
Extension GT15-QC250BS(25m)
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable A9GT-QCNB GT15-QC300BS(30m)
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less) GT15-QC350BS(35m)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032).

*2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension
connector box is required.
Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit.
When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit.
When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage.
Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box.
Set the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as that of the GOT unit.
For details on the Stage No. setting, refer to the following.
5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)
*3 When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main
base unit is not allowed)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(Q) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (intermediary)*4*5 GOT (terminal)*4*5
Connection cable 2)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Connection cable 3)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Max. distance
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75QBUSL,
Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L,
(1st): 13.2m
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2
Between main base and GOT
(terminal): 37m
- (Built into GOT)
4
GT15-75QBUSL, Between main base and GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75QBUS2L, (1st): 13.2m (Including the
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QBUS, extension cable length)
GT15-75QBUS2L,
REDUNTANT
GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QBUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC30B(3m) Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC50B(5m) - (Built into GOT) (terminal): 37m (Including the
GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC100B(10m) extension cable length)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-75QBUSL, 5
GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-75QBUS2L,
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QBUS, Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 (terminal): 37m
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L, Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, (terminal): 6
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2 37m (Including the extension
cable length)
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
*4 When connecting 3 or more GOTs, the overall cable length is restricted.

DIRECT
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs

CPU
*5 The connection of multiple GOTs

When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal.
*6 The bus connection unit 7
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
COMPUTER LINK
*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used.
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
 When one GOT is connected
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Extension base Bus extension
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Communication driver 2
THAT CAN BE SET

Bus(A/QnA)
DEVICE RANGE
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
PLC GOT
Bus
3
Extension Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector
FOR MONITORING
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device Model
ACCESS RANGE
base conversion
*1 base
box*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- - - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 6.6m
4
- (Built into GOT)
HOW TO MONITOR
Main GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and
REDUNTANT
base GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
GT15-ABUS (Including between main
SYSTEM
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 base and bus connector
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
- - conversion box)
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-AC50B(5m) *3
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and
bus connector conversion
5
BUS CONNECTION
box: 6.6m
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS GOT: 6.6m
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension
GT15-C50NB(5m)
cable length)
- (Built into GOT)
Main Extension
Extens
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and
6
ion
base cable GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
base
CONNECTION TO
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB bus connector conversion
DIRECT
GT15-AC50B(5m) box: 6.6m

- (Built into GOT)
CPU
(Including the extension

cable length)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). 7
*2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, follow the precautions below.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected

Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT
unit connector box
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*3
Extension Extension Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Option device
Main base *1
Connection cable 1) *2
Model
cable base conversion box *6*7
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
Main base
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m)
A7GT-CNB GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-AC30B(3m)
*4
Extension GT15-AC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable
base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Main base GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024).

*2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal.
*4 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

*5 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.
5 - 10 5. BUS CONNECTION
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*5 GOT (3rd)*3*5
Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance
Option device Option device
*6*7
Model
*6*7
Model
3
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
- -
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (2nd):
GT15-C300BS(30m) GT15-ABUS 36.6m
*4 GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension cable length) 4
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and bus connector
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUS2L conversion box: 6.6m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C30BS(3m)
SYSTEM
Between bus connector conversion box
GT15-C50BS(5m) - -
GT15-75ABUSL and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L
*4 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
Between main base and GOT (2nd):
36.6m
5
(Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m 6
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
CONNECTION TO
*4 GT15-75ABUS2L *4 GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-ABUS2 GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT)

DIRECT
CPU
*6 About the bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
*7
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 11
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU

Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT
Bus
Extens Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main
ion cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
base
base *1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 5m
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 30m
Main
- - *3
base - (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and

GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 35m
GT15-ABUS (Including between main
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 base and bus connector
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
conversion box)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) *3
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and
bus connector conversion
box: 5m
PLC GOT 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Extens Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main
PREPARATORY
ion cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
MONITORING
base
base *1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension base
- -
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
and GOT: 6m
(Including the extension
2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m) cable length)
THAT CAN BE SET

- (Built into GOT)
DEVICE RANGE
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension base
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS and GOT: 36m
Extens - -
Extension Main GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension
ion
cable base cable length)
3
*3
base - (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL Between extension base
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 36m
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS2 Between extension base
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) and bus connector
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) *3 conversion box: 6m
- (Built into GOT) (Including the extension
cable length)
4
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.
REDUNTANT
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
SYSTEM
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function 5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When two GOTs are connected

Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*3

Option device
*1
Main base Connection cable 1) Model
base cable conversion box *6*7
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- -
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
base cable GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

*2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*5
Connection cable 3) Max. distance
Option device
*6*7
Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L 4
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C200BS(20m)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C300BS(30m) - (Built into GOT)
*4
SYSTEM
GT15-75ABUSL
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
5
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
6
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L
CONNECTION TO
Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
DIRECT
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CPU
*4
GT15-75ABUSL
Extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
7
GT15-ABUS2
COMPUTER LINK
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
CONNECTION
*6 About the bus connection unit

external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When three GOTs are connected
Extension base
unit
PLC*3 GOT (1st)*2

Option device
*1
Main base Connection cable 1) Model
base cable conversion box *5*6
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- - Main base - -
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - -
base cable GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*3 GOT (3rd)*2*3
Option device Option device
*5*6
Model
*5*6
Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 35m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-75ABUS2L
REDUNTANT
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between extension base and GOT (3rd): 36m
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4 (Including the extension cable length)
*4 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5

5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
BUS CONNECTION
*5 The bus connection unit
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU
Power supply
PLC GOT
module
Bus(A/QnA)
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
PLC GOT1000 series*1
Power supply Connection cable 2) Max. distance

Model name Connection cable 1) Option device*2 Model
module
GT15-75ABUSL
A0J2C03(0.3m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m
A0J2C06(0.55m) GT15-ABUS
A0J2HCPU A0J2-PW GT15-J2C10B(1m) Between power supply module and
A0J2C10(1m) GT15-ABUS2
GOT: 1m
A0J2C20(2m)
- (Built into GOT)
*1 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the
A0J2HCPU.

5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU 1
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3))
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT1000 Series

3
FOR MONITORING
Bus
ACCESS RANGE
Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector Option device
Extension cable ion Connection cable 1) Model
base conversion *3
base
box*1
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base 4
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 2.5m
HOW TO MONITOR
-
(Built into GOT)
REDUNTANT
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base
SYSTEM
Main
- - GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 32.5m
base
GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) connector conversion 5
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) box)
BUS CONNECTION
*2 -
(Built into GOT) Between main base
and bus connector
conversion box: 2.5m
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base
GT15-C12NB(1.2m) and GOT: 6.6m
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the 6
GT15-C50NB(5m) extension cable
- length)
CONNECTION TO
(Built into GOT)
Extens
Main GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base
ion
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 36.6m
DIRECT
base
GT15-ABUS
CPU
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 Between main base
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
and bus connector
GT15-AC30B(3m)
GT15-AC50B(5m)
-CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
*2
conversion box: 6.6m 7
- (Including the
(Built into GOT) extension cable
COMPUTER LINK
length)
CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function, 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*4 GOT (1st)*2
Main Extension Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Extension cable Connection cable 1) Option device*5*6 Model
base base conversion box
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
Main
- -
base
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Main GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) Extension

base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) base
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-AC50B(5m)
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*4
Option device*5*6 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3 4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS
REDUNTANT
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C50BS(5m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
*3
5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT (1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3
6
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including extension cable
CONNECTION TO
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
DIRECT
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
CPU
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
*3
*5 The bus connection unit 7

COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*2
Extension base
unit
PLC*2 GOT (1st)*1
Extension Connection Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Extension cable Main base Option device*4*5 Model
base cable 1) conversion box
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Extension GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*3 GOT (3rd)*2*3
Option device*4*5 Model Option device*4*5 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 32.5m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*3 *3
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
- (Built into GOT)
*3 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.

5
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N),
A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))

Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT1000 Series
Bus
Extension Extens Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main connector
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
base conversion
*1 base*2
box
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 3m
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 30m
Main *4
- - - (Built into GOT)
base
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base

GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 33m
GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) connector conversion
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m)
-CNB*3 GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) box)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m)
*4
- (Built into GOT) Between main base
and bus connector
conversion box: 3m
PLC GOT1000 Series 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Extension Extens
Main connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
cable ion Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
PREPARATORY
base conversion
MONITORING
*2
*1 base
box
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS base and GOT: 3m
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the
extension cable length)
2
- (Built into GOT)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between extension
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS base and GOT: 33m
- -
Extens GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 (Including the
Main Extension
ion *4 extension cable length)
base cable - (Built into GOT)
base
3
GT15-75ABUSL Between extension
GT15-75ABUS2L base and GOT: 33m
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-ABUS
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-ABUS2 Between extension
A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) base and bus
-CNB*3 GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) connector conversion
*4
- (Built into GOT) box: 3m
(Including the
extension cable length) 4
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
HOW TO MONITOR
*2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*4
Extension Extension Connection cable 2)

Bus connector
Main base Connection cable 1) Option device*7*8 Model
cable*1 base*2 conversion box
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
Main base - - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)

GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*5
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
Extension Extension
Main base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
cable base GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*5
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2

5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*4*6
Option device*7*8 Model
3
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
4
GT15-75ABUS2L
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-ABUS
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200BS(20m)
*5 GT15-ABUS
5
GT15-ABUS2
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT (1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
6
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CONNECTION TO
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
DIRECT
GT15-ABUS
CPU
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT) 7
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including extension
COMPUTER LINK
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L cable length)

CONNECTION
*5 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*4
Extension base
unit
PLC*3 GOT (1st)*3
Extension Extension Connection cable 2)

Bus connector
Main base *1 *2
Connection cable 1) Option device*6*7 Model
cable base conversion box
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
cable base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*4 GOT (3rd)*3*4
Option device*6*7 Model Option device*6*7 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*5 *5
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
- (Built into GOT)
*5 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.

5
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.3 GOT Side Settings
5.3.1 Setting communication
5.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) (1) Bus(Q)
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
2.
Item Description Range

3. Number of
(Default: 1) 1 to 7
Stages
Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 9
Set the monitor speed of the GOT.
4. Monitor Speed This setting is not valid in all systems.
High*1/Normal/
(Default: Normal) Low*2
Set the time period for a

Timeout Time
communication to time out. 12 to 90
(Sec.)
(Default: 12)
Click! *1 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the
monitor screen.
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/
Q00/Q01CPU.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
menu. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)
*2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/
channel to be used from the list menu. Q01CPU.
However, the monitor speed may be reduced.
3. Set the following items.
(2) Bus(A/QnA)
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi
• Controller Type: Set the option according to the
Controller Type to be connected.
• I/F: Interface to be used
• Driver: Set either of the following option according
to the Controller Type to be connected.
BUS (Q)
BUS (A/QnA) Item Description Range
Number of
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Stages
(Default: 1) 1 to 7
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 7
Make the settings according to the usage Set the time period for a
Timeout Time
environment. (Sec.)
communication to time out. 3 to 90
(Default: 3)
POINT
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
1
 Setting Stage No. and Slot No.
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility POINT
The communication interface setting can be changed
on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing Before setting Stage No. and Slot No.
[Communication Settings] of project data. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. • QCPU (Q mode) 2
GT User's Manual : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points
(2) Precedence in communication settings • Other than QCPU (Q mode)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points
Utility, the latest setting is effective. At the [Detail setting], assign the GOT to an empty I/O
(3) When changing Stage No. and Slot No. slot on the PLC CPU.
Change these settings with the PLC CPU turned
OFF, and then reapply the power to the PLC CPU (1) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
and GOT. Set an additional stage (16 points 10 slots) for GOT 3
Failure to do so may generate a system alarm connection, and assign a GOT to one of the I/O slots.
(No.487).
FOR MONITORING
(The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the
ACCESS RANGE
main base unit or extension base unit.)
Main base unit

HINT Q312B
Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the

controller 4
Empty
Empty
By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
HOW TO MONITOR
portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
example, faulty station that has communication
REDUNTANT
timeout can be cut from the system.
SYSTEM
Disconnect the
Extension base unit
faulty station
Q68B
Extension
stage 1
5
BUS CONNECTION
Empty
Empty
Stage No. setting

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal connector
device, refer to the following manual. 6

CONNECTION TO
Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2
(Fundamentals) Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
DIRECT
CPU
POINT 7
COMPUTER LINK
When using the bus extension connector box

CONNECTION
Set the Stage No. switch on the bus extension

connector box to the same Stage No. as the GOT.
For setting details, refer to the following manual:
A9GT-QCNB Bus Extension Connector Box
User's Manual 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT HINT
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when
In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
number of slots for the extension base used for GOT Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from
connection. "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer
Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number
No. in the communication interface settings, of empty slots" for other purposes.
For details on I/O assignment settings, refer to the
set "10" to [2nd Stage].
following manual:
QnU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals)
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Example: I/O assignment (when 16 points are assigned
to each of all modules installed with the PLC
CPU)
Main base unit
Q35B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 · · · · Slot No.
X00 to X0F
X10 to X1F
X20 to X2F
X30 to X3F
X40 to X4F
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 stage 1
XC0 to XCF
XA0 to XAF
XB0 to XBF
X50 to X5F
X60 to X6F
X70 to X7F
X80 to X8F
X90 to X9F
Q65B
Extension
13 14 15 16 17 stage 2
X100 to X10F
X110 to X11F
XD0 to XDF
XE0 to XEF
XF0 to XFF
Stage No. setting

connector
1 2 3 4 5
Schematic image of Stage No. for GOT connection

viewed from PLC CPU (16 points x 10 slots occupied)
Extension
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 stage 3
X1A0 to X1AF
X1B0 to X1BF
X120 to X12F
X130 to X13F
X140 to X14F
X150 to X15F
X160 to X16F
X170 to X17F
X180 to X18F
X190 to X19F
1 2 3 4 5
Set Empty (0 points)
to unused I/O slots.
(2) Other than QCPU (Q mode)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension
base unit.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O
slots are left on an extension base unit, set an
additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O
slots.
(Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base
unit is not allowed.)
(a) When there is an empty I/O slot on the extension
2
base unit
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Main base unit
A1S35B
Empty
Empty
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Extension base unit
A1S65B
0 1 · · · · Slot No.
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Slot No. :2 Slot No. :3 Slot No. :4
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) When there are no empty I/O slots on the
extension base unit
Main base unit
A1S35B
6
Empty
Empty
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
Extension base unit
A1S65B 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.4 Precautions
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, (b) When using GT15-C BS
Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above
GT15-C [ ] BS for both GOTs.
(1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1

It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-
5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON
C BS (10 to 30m).
Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS- (1) System configuration
1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15- The PLC CPU remains in the reset status until the GOT
C300EXSS-1(30m). is started.
Therefore, no sequence program will run until then.
(2) GT15-C EXSS-1 connector The system configuration, in which the GOT is turned
Connect the connectors as follows: on from a sequence program, is not available.
GT15-EXCNB PLC CPU side
GT15-C BS GOT side (2) Time taken until the PLC runs after power-on of the
GOT
PLC side GOT side The following time is taken from when the GOT is
powered on until when the PLC runs.
• QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU
(GT15-EXCNB) (GT15-C□BS) (Q series): 10 seconds or more
• MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
(3) Grounding When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
(a) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
PLC
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
FG (3) Power-up sequence for connection of 3 GOTs or
LG
N more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode))
L
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to
2SQ cables to
FG terminals, No. of GOTs
28cm or less
Not connected (4) Power-up sequence for connection of the
(GT15-C□BS)
Q4ARCPU redundant system
5.4.14 (2)Power-On sequence for GOT and
(GT15-EXCNB) Q4ARCPU redundant system
GOT
(5) Power-up sequence for cases other than (3) and (4)
OUT IN
The GOT and PLC can both be started up whichever of
2SQ cables to these devices is turned ON first. (There is no specific
FG terminals,
L N LG FG sequence in which they are powered ON)
28cm or less
Note, however, that operation is as follows when the
GOT is turned ON followed by the PLC:
When the PLC power is OFF with the GOT turned ON,
the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated.
1. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the
Upon power-on of the PLC CPU, the GOT
terminal block on the GOT unit power and
ground them with a cable. automatically starts monitoring.
Use System Information to reset the alarm.
2. Use the GT15-C BS's FG cable of 28cm For the System Information, refer to the following
or less. manual:
3. Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
ground cable. Manual
4. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on
the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's
terminal block.
5. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on
the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power
supply module.
6. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the
terminal block on the PLC and ground them
with a cable.
5.4 Precautions
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, 5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the 1
reapplying the power (OFF to PLC
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
ON)
MONITORING
(1) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(1) Precautions for reapplying the power to the GOT monitoring
When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(OFF to ON)
monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is
Do not power-cycle the GOT (OFF to ON) while the
PLC is ON.
generated. 2
When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically
Before doing so, be sure to turn off the PLC first.
THAT CAN BE SET

resumes monitoring.
DEVICE RANGE
Use System Information to reset the alarm.
For the System Information, refer to the following
HINT manual:
Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT1000 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Series Manual
Since the GOT1000 Series is automatically rebooted
3
(2) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC CPU before
in the following cases, the power does not need to be display of the user creation screen
FOR MONITORING
reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON).
ACCESS RANGE
When the PLC CPU is turned OFF or reset before the
• When an OS is written from GT Designer3 or a CF user creation screen is displayed on the GOT,
card subsequent communications may be no longer
• When utility settings have been changed possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and
(2) When turning OFF the GOT before display of the
user creation screen
GOT.
4
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when
When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation
HOW TO MONITOR
connecting QCPU (Q mode))
screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to
REDUNTANT
communications may be no longer possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and No. of GOTs
SYSTEM
GOT.
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when 5.4.6 Position of the GOT
connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to Always connect the GOT to the last base unit.
BUS CONNECTION
No. of GOTs Connecting a GOT between base units is not allowed.
5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT
When bus connection is used, the reset switch on the GOT

does not function. 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-
connected to a PLC CPU
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
without the communication

driver written
When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the
standard monitor OS and the communication driver for the 8
bus connection being written onto the GOT, the PLC CPU
is reset. (GX Developer cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU)
CONNECTION
In this case, disconnecting the bus connection cable from

ETHERNET
the GOT will cancel the reset status of the PLC CPU.
5.4 Precautions
5.4.8 When designing the system (3) When using a Q00J/Q00UJ/Q00/Q00U/Q01/Q01U/
Q02UCPU
When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU or
to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply Q00UJCPU, number of extension stages including the
module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate GOT must be 2 or less.
when it is OFF.) When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU,
Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU,
of the modules on the main base unit and the total current number of extension stages including the GOT must be
consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output 4 or less.
current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.
Main base unit
Total current Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU
When connecting to No. of GOTs
consumption
5 2200mA
4 1760mA
When connecting to
3 1320mA
QCPU (Q mode) Extension base unit Extension
2 880mA stage 1
1 440mA
3 360mA
Other than QCPU (Q mode) 2 240mA
1 120mA
Stage No. setting
connector
GOT
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O Stage No. :2
signals
Do not use the I/O signals assigned to the PLC CPU in

sequence programs, as these signals are used by the GOT
Main base unit
system.
Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU,
When these signals are used, GOT functions cannot be Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU
assured.
5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU

(Q mode) Extension base unit Extension
stage 1
(1) Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs

The following restrictions apply when 3 of more GOTs
are connected: Extension
stage 2
Number Overall Cable Overall Cable
Restriction Restriction
of GOTs Length Length
1
(No restrictions)
2
Extension
Less than Use the same stage 3
3 25 to 37m
25m power supply for
Less than the PLC and all
(No
4 20 to 37m GOTs, and turn
20m restrictions)
these devices
Less than ON and OFF
5 15 to 37m
15m simultaneously. Stage No. setting
connector
GOT
(2) When using a Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU Stage No. :4
The bus extension connector box can be connected
only to the extension base unit.
(Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed)
Q00JCPU,
Q00UJCPU
5.4 Precautions
(4) In the case of CPUs other than (2) (3) above
1
(4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit
PROCEDURES FOR
A GOT is physically connected to the last of all Even if the max. number of stages are used with no
extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, empty I/O slots, when there is a free space of 32 I/O
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
assign the GOT as a stage next to the last Q B type points or more, a GOT can be connected under the
extension base unit. following communication interface setting.
Assign the QA1S6 B type extension base unit as a For the communication interface setting, refer to the
stage next to the GOT. following.
Connection method Stage No.

5.3.1 Setting communication interface 2
(Communication settings)
Q38B
THAT CAN BE SET

Main base unit Communication interface
DEVICE RANGE
Max.
When connecting to stage setting
No. Stage No. Slot No.
A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1)
Q68B 1 2 0
/QnAS(H)CPU(-S1)
Extension base unit
A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3
7
4 0
3
A3 CPU/A4 CPU
FOR MONITORING
Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU 7 Cannot be used
ACCESS RANGE
QA1S68B A0J2HCPU 1
Extension base unit
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
5.4.11 When connecting to a
SYSTEM
QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type
(1) When connecting with a QnASCPU type and an 5

AnSCPU type
BUS CONNECTION
A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on
only one side of the main base unit.
(Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension
connectors on both sides is not allowed)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
(2) In the case of Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A3 CPU, 7

A4UCPU
Empty I/O slots are required within the max. number of
COMPUTER LINK
extension stages.
CONNECTION
(3) For A0J2HCPU

Assign the GOT to the I/O slots 0 to 3 of extension
stage 1.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.4 Precautions
5.4.12 When connecting multiple 5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the
GOTs direct mode
(1) System including different GOT series Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the
The GOT1000 series can be connected with GOT-A900 direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or
series in a system. extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-
When using them together, refer to the following AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O
Technical News. slot cannot be used.
Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the
with GOT1000 Series (GOT-A-0009) refresh mode.
The GOT1000 series cannot be used with GOTs other On PLC CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by
than GOT-A900 series in a system. a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode
before use.
GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800
POINT
In the cases where input X of an empty I/O slot is used
(1) When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10
network
(2) Restrictions on No. of GOTs
The number of connectable GOTs is restricted (2) When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned ON/
according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent OFF by the computer link module
function modules. (3) When input X of the I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by
the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/
Total number of Momentary) of GOT
Number of
connectable GOTs
When connecting to connectable
and intelligent
GOTs
function modules*1
5 GOTs
QCPU(Q mode),
Up to 5 + 6 intelligent
motion controller CPU (Q Series)
function modules*2
Not
QCPU (A mode) ―――――
connectable
QnACPU Up to 3 6 in total
AnUCPU,
AnACPU, Up to 3 6 in total
A2US(H)CPU
AnNCPU,
ACPU AnS(H)CPU, Up to 2 2 in total
A1SJ(H)CPU
A0J2HCPU Up to 1 2 in total
Not
A1FXCPU ―――――
connectable
A273UCPU,
Motion A273UHCPU(-S3),
Up to 3 6 in total
controller A373UCPU(-S3),
CPU A173UHCPU(-S1)
(A Series) A171SHCPUN,
Up to 2 2 in total
A172SHCPUN
*1 Indicates the following models:
AD51(S3), AD51H(S3), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3),
AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/
S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T,
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only),
A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3),
A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S,
A1SJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only)
*2 Only the A1SD51S can be connected to the QCPU (Q
Mode).
5.4 Precautions
5.4.14 When connecting to a 5.4.15 When monitoring the 1
Q4ARCPU redundant system Q170MCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
redundant system device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base
When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system.
PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
For the redundant extension base units, use version B
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to
2
or later.
The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
THAT CAN BE SET

cannot be executed.
DEVICE RANGE
rating plate.
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
Manual
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Caution
Version of redundant extension base unit
Enlarged view of rating plate

5
5.4.16 Troubleshooting
BUS CONNECTION
POINT For the troubleshooting, refer to the User's Manual for the
GOT you are using.
Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system
configurations
The GOT does not operate normally in the following 6
system configurations.
CONNECTION TO
(1) When the GOT is bus connected to the bus
switching module (A6RAF) on a redundant main
base unit (A32RB/A33RB)
DIRECT
(2) When the GOT is bus connected to a version-A

CPU
redundant main base unit (A68RB)
(2) Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU

7
redundant system
COMPUTER LINK
Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant

CONNECTION
system in the following sequence.
1. Turn ON the GOT.
2. After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn

ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system. 8
At this time, a timeout is displayed on the system
alarm. Use System Information to reset the alarm.
For the system alarm, refer to the following manual:
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Manual
5.4 Precautions
5.4 Precautions
6
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
DEVICE RANGE
6.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 4
HOW TO MONITOR
6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
6.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6-1
Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 6.2.1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232 *3 *3
Q25PHCPU RS-422
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- *3 *3 -
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU 6.2.1
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
6.2.1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*4 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
RS-232 6.2.1
module Q24DHCCPU-V

*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
*2 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*3 Exclude the GT10 from the multiple CPU system configuration.
*4 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
6-2 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

Communication
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
L02CPU*1
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
L26CPU*1
L26CPU-BT*1 RS-232
MELSEC-L 6.2.2
L02CPU-P *1 RS-422
L26CPU-PBT*1
L02SCPU 2
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
THAT CAN BE SET

Q02HCPU-A 6.2.1
(A mode) RS-422
DEVICE RANGE
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-422
Q3ACPU 6.2.3
(QnACPU)*3
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
RS-422
3
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
RS-422
ACCESS RANGE
6.2.3
(QnASCPU)*3 Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
4
A2ACPUP21
HOW TO MONITOR
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A2ACPUP21-S1
SYSTEM
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21 5
MELSEC-A
A1NCPU *2 RS-422 6.2.4
BUS CONNECTION
(AnCPU)
A1NCPUP21*2
A1NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU*2
A2NCPUP21*2
A2NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU-S1*2 6
A2NCPUP21-S1*2
CONNECTION TO
A2NCPUP21-S1*2
A3NCPU*2
A3NCPUP21*2
DIRECT
A3NCPUP21*2
CPU
MELSEC-A
A2USCPU RS-422
(AnSCPU) 6.2.4
7
COMPUTER LINK
*1 When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 is required.

*2 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
CONNECTION
• AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later
• A2SCPU: Version H or later
*3 GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later.
PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type HW/SW Version
Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL 8
Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL
Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL
Q4ARCPU AL - -
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6-3

Communication
type
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A A2SCPU*1
RS-422 6.2.4
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1*1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1
RS-422 6.2.4
A0J2HCPUR21*1
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-422 6.2.4
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
RS-422 6.2.1
Q172CPUN*2
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
Q172DCPU
controller
CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU
RS-232 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
6.2.1
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU RS-232 6.2.7
MR-MQ100 RS-422 6.2.7

*1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later
• A2CCPU, A2SCPU: Version H or later
*4 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.

Communication
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU RS-422
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422 2
Motion
A171SCPU-S3
THAT CAN BE SET

controller 6.2.4
DEVICE RANGE
CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
RS-422
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU 3
A173UHCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS RS-232 6.2.6
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25
H QJ72LP25G *1
RS-232 6.2.1
Remote I/O
station
CC-Link IE
QJ72BR15
4
HOW TO MONITOR
head module
REDUNTANT
CC-Link IE
Field Network
SYSTEM
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

6.2.1
5
Robot CRnQ-700 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
RS-232 6.2.1
BUS CONNECTION
controller (Q172DRCPU)
FX0 RS-422 *4
FX0S
RS-422
FX0N
FX1 RS-422 *4
FX2
*3 RS-422 *4 6
FX2C
CONNECTION TO
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N RS-232 6.2.5

FX2N RS-422
DIRECT
FX1NC
CPU
*3
RS-232
FX2NC
FX3G
RS-422
7
FX3GC RS-232
COMPUTER LINK
FX3U RS-422
CONNECTION
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*3 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. 8
*4 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A

( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(Q mode)) ( For GT10, when connecting to QCPU(A mode))
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable
PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Communi connectable
RS-422 connector Max.
Model name cation Cable model Option device Model
conversion cable distance equipment*5
type
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
- RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *7
3m - (Built into GOT)
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S
MELSEC-Q GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 *6 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) - (Built into GOT)
RS-422
FA-CNV2405CBL (0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *8
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT155 .
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3))
*4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
*5 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

*6 Applicable to the QnUCPU only
*7 Use the RS-232 connection model.

6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU

( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10)
THAT CAN BE SET

RS-422 connector
DEVICE RANGE
LCPU Adapter GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable
3
Number of
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Communi connectable
Model RS-422 connector Max.
Adapter cation Cable model Option device Model
name conversion cable distance equipment*5
type
- (Built into GOT)

4
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
HOW TO MONITOR
L6ADP-R2 - RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
REDUNTANT
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
SYSTEM
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *6
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S 5
MELSEC-L *1 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT15-RS2T4-9P
BUS CONNECTION
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m)
L6ADP-R2 RS-422
FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 - 6
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
DIRECT
CPU
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
GOTs.

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU

QnACPU GOT
Connection cable
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model
type distance equipment*4
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
MELSEC-QnA RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*2
GOTs.

6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 MELSEC-A

THAT CAN BE SET

ACPU GOT
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable

3
FOR MONITORING
equipment*4
ACCESS RANGE
type distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
4
MELSEC-A RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
HOW TO MONITOR
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
REDUNTANT
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
SYSTEM
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
5
*2
BUS CONNECTION
GOTs.
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU
Function
Function
FXCPU expansion GOT
adapter
board Communication driver
Connection cable
MELSEC-FX
 When connecting to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2 or FX2C

Number of
Function Communi
Model Function Max. connectable
expansion cation Cable model Option device Model
name adapter*5 distance equipment*4
board*5 type
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
FX0 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
FX0S - - RS-422 GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX0N GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL
1 GOT for 1
*2
PLC
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX0S GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
- - RS-422 3m - (Built into GOT)
FX0N GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
FX1 GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
FX2 - - RS-422
FX2C GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*7
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.
*5 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
6.5 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
adapter
6 - 10 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-422 connection) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
Function Communi connectable
PREPARATORY
Model Function Max.
MONITORING
expansion cation Cable model Option device Model equipment
name *4*7 adapter*7 distance
board type *6
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S 2
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
THAT CAN BE SET

- (Built into GOT)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX1S GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
FX1N 1 GOT for 1
FX2N - - RS-422
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) PLC built-in 3
FX1NC GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8 port
FOR MONITORING
FX2NC GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
4
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
REDUNTANT
GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
5
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
BUS CONNECTION
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
FX1S
FX1N-422-BD GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) function
FX1N - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
FX2N-422-BD expansion
FX2N GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *8 board 6
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
DIRECT
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
CPU
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
7
*3
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) can be available for FX1S, FX1N and FX2N.

*4 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU to be connected.
Use the applicable function expansion board shown in the following table.
Function expansion board to be used
Item
When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series 8
RS-422 communication FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD

CONNECTION

ETHERNET
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 - 11

GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-232 connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function Communi Cable model
Model Function Max. connectable
expansion cation Connection diagram Option device Model
name *1*4 adapter*4 distance equipment*3
board type number
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
2
15m 1 GOT for 1
FX1N-232-BD RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
THAT CAN BE SET

- RS-232 function
FX2N-232-BD diagram 1)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-RS4-M*2 - expansion board
RS232 connection *5
diagram 4)
3
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - (Built into GOT)
or
FX1S 15m
FX2NC RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
FOR MONITORING
FX1N RS-232
ACCESS RANGE
-232ADP diagram 1)
FX2N GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection *5
FX1N-CNV-BD diagram 4)
FX2N-CNV-BD
GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
4
15m
RS232 connection
HOW TO MONITOR
FX0N GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
REDUNTANT
RS232 connection
SYSTEM
diagram 5) 1 GOT for 1
function adapter
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
5
15m
RS232 connection
BUS CONNECTION
FX2NC GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection *5
FX1NC diagram 4)
-
FX2NC
GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
6
15m
FX0N RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
RS232 connection
DIRECT

diagram 5)
CPU
*1 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU. Select the function expansion board from
the following table. 7
Function expansion board to be used
Item
COMPUTER LINK
When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series

CONNECTION
RS-232 communication FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD

When the function adapter is used FX1N-CNV-BD FX2N-CNV-BD

*3 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two 8
GOTs.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
adapter

 When connecting to FX3G (RS-422 connection)
Function Communi connectable
Model Function Max.
expansion cation Cable model Option device Model equipment
name adapter*6 distance
board*6 type *5
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
- - RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) PLC built-in
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) port
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
*4*7
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
FX3G
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) function
FX3G-422-BD - RS-422
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) expansion
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *7 board
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
*4
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 3m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
*4 When connecting FX3G series to GT10 (input power supply: 5V), they cannot be connected to standard built-in port (RS-422) and
function expansion board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously.
*5 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral
such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX3G (RS-232 connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function Communi Cable model connectable
Model Function Max.
expansion cation Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name *3 adapter*3 distance *2
board type number
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - (Built into GOT) 2

or
15m 1 GOT for 1
THAT CAN BE SET

RS232 connection function
DEVICE RANGE
FX3G-232-BD - RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1) expansion
board
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS232 connection *4
diagram 4)
FX3G
3
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
FOR MONITORING
- (Built into GOT)
ACCESS RANGE
or
15m
FX3G-CNV-ADP RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
- + RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P function
diagram 1)
FX3U-232ADP adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
GOTs.
*3
When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
5
BUS CONNECTION
adapter
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection)
type distance equipment*4
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX3GC- /D GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-
RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
FX3GC- /DSS in port
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
GOTs.
 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-232 connection)

Function Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model
adapter*3 type Connection diagram number distance equipment*2

or
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
FX3GC- /D GT15-RS2-9P
FX3U-232ADP RS-232 function
FX3GC- /DSS diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*1 - adapter
RS232 connection *4
diagram 4)

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU
individually.
GOTs.
adapter

 When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-422 connection)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Function
PREPARATORY
Function Commu connectable
Max.
MONITORING
Model name expansion adapter nication Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
board*6 *6 type *5
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT15-RS4-9S 2
THAT CAN BE SET

GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) 1 GOT for 1
- - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
PLC built-in 3
30m - (Built into GOT) *7 port
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
FOR MONITORING
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
3m - (Built into GOT) *7 4
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
HOW TO MONITOR
FX3U
*3
FX3UC
REDUNTANT
(FX3UC- -LT(-2)) GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
- (Built into GOT)
5
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
BUS CONNECTION
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
1 GOT for 1
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
function
FX3U-422-BD - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) expansion
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m) board
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m) 6
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
DIRECT
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
CPU

GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
7
*2
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
COMPUTER LINK
*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL can be used for FX3U or FX3UC- -LT(-2).

CONNECTION
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two 8
GOTs.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
adapter

 When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-232 connection)
Function Commun Cable model connectable
Function Max.
Model name expansion ication Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
*3 adapter*3 distance *2
board type number

or
15m 1 GOT for 1
RS232 connection function
FX3U-232-BD - RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1) expansion
board
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
FX3U RS232 connection *4

FX3UC diagram 4)
(FX3UC- -
LT(-2))
or
15m
FX3U-422-BD RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
FX3U-232-BD FX3U-232ADP RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P function
diagram 1)
FX3U-CNV-BD adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS232 connection *4
diagram 4)

GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-422
PROCEDURES FOR
connection)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Commun Number of connectable
Max.
Model name ication Cable model Option device Model equipment*4
distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
2
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m)
THAT CAN BE SET

GT15-RS4-9S
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
FX3UC- /D
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
3
1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in
FX3UC- /DS RS-422 GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
FOR MONITORING
port
ACCESS RANGE
FX3UC- /DSS GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
4
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
REDUNTANT
*2
SYSTEM

5
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.
BUS CONNECTION
 When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-232
connection)
Number of
6
Commun Cable model connectable
Function Max.
Model name ication Connection diagram Option device Model
CONNECTION TO
adapter*3 distance equipment*2
type number
DIRECT

CPU
or
FX3UC- /D 15m
RS232 connection
FX3UC- /DS FX3U-232ADP RS-232
diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT for 1 function
adapter 7
FX3UC- /DSS
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
COMPUTER LINK
RS232 connection
CONNECTION

diagram 4)

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU
individually. 8
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
adapter

6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU
WSCPU GOT
MELSEC-WS
Connection cable

Number of connectable
Communication Cable model Max.
Model name Option device Model equipment
type Connection diagram number distance
- (Built into GOT)

WS0-C20R2(2m) 2m
MELSEC-WS RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P 1 GOT for 1 PLC

WS0-C20R2(2m)
+
2.3m - (Built into GOT) *1
RS232 connection
diagram 6)
6.2.7 Connecting to the motion controller CPU

Motion controller
GOT
CPU
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24
Connection cable ( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11)
QnA/L/Q CPU
( For GT10)
Motion controller CPU Connection cable GOT

Communication Max.
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment*4
type distance
- (Built into GOT)

GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
1 GOT for 1 motion
Q170MCPU RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P controller CPU
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *5
*1
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
+
30m GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection
diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for 1 motion
MR-MQ100 RS-422
controller CPU
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
+
RS422 connection
diagram 4)
*6
Q170MIOCBL1M-A(1m)*3 1m - (Built into GOT)
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT155 .
GOTs.

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q Series) other than Q170MCPU, MR-MQ100
A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored.
The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion
controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC.
RS232 connection diagram 4)
GOT side FX PLC side
6.3.1 RS-232 cable (terminal block) (D-sub 9-pin)
SD 2
 Connection diagram RD 3
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER 6
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 9-pin) DR 8
SG 5
1 1
RS 4
2 3
CS 7
3 2
NC 1
4 6
NC 9
5 5
6 8
7 4 GOT side FX PLC side
(terminal block) (D-sub 25-pin)
8 7
9 9 SD 3
RD 2
ER 5
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 25-pin) DR 20
2 2 SG 7
3 3 RS 6
8 5 CS
4 6 NC
5 7 NC
6 20
GOT side WS0-C20R2(male)side
(terminal block) (D-Sub 9-pin)
SD 3
RD 2
ER
GOT side Untied wire color
(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P DR
SD Brown SG 5
RD Red RS
ER Blue CS
DR Yellow NC
SG Green NC
RS Purple
CS
NC
NC

RS422 connection diagram 2) 1
 Precautions when preparing a cable GOT side Untied wire color of
PROCEDURES FOR
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-25P
(1) Cable length
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the SDA Brown
maximum distance specifications. SDB Red
(2) GOT side connector RDA Orange

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RDB Yellow
2
SG Green
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
RSA Blue
6.3.2 RS-422 cable RSB Purple
CSA Black
 Connection diagram CSB White
RS422 connection diagram 1) 3

GT10 (input power supply : 24V)
FOR MONITORING
GOT side Untied wire color of
ACCESS RANGE
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P GOT side Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
SDA Brown SDA 1 1 SDA
SDB Red RDA 2 2 RDA
4
RDA Orange RSA 3 3 RSA
RDB Yellow CSA 4 4 CSA
HOW TO MONITOR
SG Green SG 5 5 SG
REDUNTANT
RSA Black SDB 6 6 SDB
SYSTEM
RSB White RDB 7 7 RDB
CSA RSB 8 8 RSB
CSB CSB 9 9 CSB

5
GT10 (input power supply : 5V)
BUS CONNECTION
GOT side Untied wire color of GOT side
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
SDA Brown SDA 1 SDA
SDB Red SDB 6 SDB
RDA Orange RDA 2 RDA 6

RDB Yellow RDB 7 RDB
CONNECTION TO
SG Green SG 5 SG
RSA Black RSA 3 RSA

DIRECT
RSB White RSB 8 RSB

CPU
- CSA 4 CSA
INPUT
DC5V + CSB 9 CSB
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

GOT side United wire color of
(terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-A
SDA Yellow(Dot mark:Black)
SDB Yellow(Dot mark:Red)
RDA Pink(Dot mark:Black)
RDB Pink(Dot mark:Red)
SG White(Dot mark:Black)
RSA White(Dot mark:Red)
RSB
CSA
CSB
 Precautions when preparing a cable

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the
maximum distance specifications.
(2) GOT side connector
 Connecting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT
main unit to "330 ".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor,


1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
settings)
Make the settings according to the usage
environment. 2
6.4.2Communication detail settings
THAT CAN BE SET

POINT
DEVICE RANGE
GOT Multi- Drop Connection Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer
to the following.
POINT
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Set the channel of the connected equipment. For details, refer to the following:
2.
4
3. Make the settings according to the usage environment.
HOW TO MONITOR
(1) A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
REDUNTANT
4.
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Click!
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the

menu.
6
2.
CONNECTION TO
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Item Description Range
channel to be used from the list menu. Set this item when change the
transmission speed used for
3.
DIRECT
Set the following items. communication with the connected

9600bps,
CPU
equipment.
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi 19200bps,
Transmission (Default: 115200bps)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller 38400bps,
Type to be connected.
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
the connected equipment,
57600bps, 7
115200bps
• I/F: Interface to be used communication is performed at the
fastest transmission speed supported
COMPUTER LINK
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the

by the connected equipment.
CONNECTION

Set the number of retries to be
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
MELSEC-FX
MELSEC-WS
Timeout Time
Set the time period for a communication
to time out. 3 to 30sec
8
For GT10 (Default: 3sec)
QnA/L/Q CPU Set this item to adjust the transmission
CONNECTION
MELSEC-A Delay Time

timing of the communication request
0 to 300 (ms)
ETHERNET
from the GOT.

MELSEC-FX
(Default: 0ms)
MELSEC-WS

(b) For GT10
Select the communication format.
Format*3 1, 2
(Default: 1)
Set the monitor speed of the GOT. High*1

Monitor Speed
This setting is not valid in all systems. Normal
(GT16 only)
*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than

the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However,
when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan
time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on
the sequence scan time, do not set "High".
(High performance is hardly affected)
*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the
sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when
connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor
speed may be reduced.
*3 Set the format to "1".
(2) MELSEC-FX Set this item when change the
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 transmission speed used for
communication with the connected
9600bps,
equipment.
19200bps,
38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of the
57600bps,
connected equipment, communication is
115200bps
performed at the fastest transmission
speed supported by the connected
equipment.
(3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10)

Set this item when change the
9600bps,
equipment.
19200bps,
38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of the
57600bps,
connected equipment, communication is
115200bps
equipment.
Set the number of retries to be Item Description Range
performed when a communication
Set this item when change the transmission
timeout occurs. When receiving no speed used for communication with the
Retry 0 to 5times
response after retries, the connected equipment. 9600bps,
communication times out. (Default: 115200bps) 19200bps,
Transmission
(Default: 0time) When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps,
Speed
Set the time period for a communication connected equipment, communication is 57600bps,
performed at the fastest transmission 115200bps
Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
equipment.
Set this item to adjust the transmission
Delay Time 0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)

(4) MELSEC-A (GT10)
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following 2
manual.
GT User's Manual
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

HINT 3
speed used for communication with the
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
connected equipment.
(Default: 9600bps) controller
Transmission
Speed
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 9600bps By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
connected equipment, communication is portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
equipment. timeout can be cut from the system.
Disconnect the 4
(5) MELSEC-WS faulty station
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
For details of the setting contents of GOT internal
device, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals)
Item Description Range 6

speed used for communication with the
CONNECTION TO
connected equipment. 9600bps,
(Default: 115200bps) 19200bps,
Transmission
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps,
Speed
DIRECT
connected equipment, communication is 57600bps,

CPU
performed at the fastest transmission 115200bps

equipment.
Set the number of retries to be performed
7
when a communication timeout occurs.
COMPUTER LINK
Retry When receiving no response after retries, 0 to 5times

the communication times out.
CONNECTION
(Default: 3times)
Set the time period for a communication to
Timeout Time time out. 1 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
timing of the communication request from
8
the GOT.
(Default: 5ms)
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.5 Precautions
 Connection to FXCPU
(1) When connecting to FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC series  Connection in the multiple CPU system
When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/ When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
FX3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
monitoring.Perform an I/O check again. • QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series):
( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ 10 seconds or more
O check is normal, check the status of keyword • MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
registration.
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
(2) When connecting with function extension board or
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the
communication special adapter
When a sequence program and settings that the
FXCPU communicates with devices other than the GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
GOT are set with software, including GX Developer, the Manual
FXCPU cannot communicate with the GOT.
 Connection to LCPU
(a) Settings with sequence program LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
Check the sequence program and delete the process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
following. power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE the SD memory card becomes available. When the
CONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL - Data GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
Communication Edition system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
• No protocol communication (RS instruction) the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
• Sequence program with the computer link, N:N GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
network, and parallel link Manual
• Parameter setting
• Set the following special registers to 0.  Connection to basic model QCPU
Except FX3U, FX3UC: D8120
Do not set the serial communication function of Q00UJ/
FX3U, FX3UC: D8120, D8400, D8420
FX3G, FX3GC: D8120, D8400, D8420, D8370 Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU, Q00/Q01CPU. If the function
is set, the communication may not be performed.
(b) Settings with GX Developer
Select [PLC parameter] in [Parameter], and then
click the PLC system(2) tab on the FX parameter  Connection to Q170MCPU
screen. Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
Uncheck [Operate communication setting], and device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
then transfer the parameter to the programmable When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
controller.After the transfer, turn off the
programmable controller, and then turn on the
programmable controller again. When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
Manual
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
(3) Connection to GT1020-L L , GT1030- L

When connecting GT1020-L L or GT1030- L
to FX3G series, they cannot be connected to standard
built-in port (RS-422) and function expansion board
(FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously.

6.5 Precautions
7
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
7.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22
5
7.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
7-1

7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU
Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU RS-232 *2 *2
RS-422 7.2.1
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
- *2 *2 -
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base) RS-232 *2 *2
RS-422 7.2.1
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
RS-232
Q04UDEHCPU 7.2.1
RS-422
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
*2 For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration.
7-2 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*1*2 RS-232
MONITORING
module RS-422 7.2.1
Q24DHCCPU-V*2
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
2
RS-232
MELSEC-L 7.2.2
L02CPU-P RS-422
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A 7.2.3
(A mode) RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU 3
Q2ACPU-S1 RS-232
FOR MONITORING
MELSEC-QnA
ACCESS RANGE
Q3ACPU RS-422
(QnACPU) 7.2.4
*3 Q4ACPU
RS-232
Q4ARCPU
RS-422
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA
(QnASCPU)
Q2ASCPU-S1
Q2ASHCPU
RS-232
RS-422 7.2.5 4
*3
HOW TO MONITOR
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
REDUNTANT
A2UCPU-S1
SYSTEM
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21 5
A2ACPUR21
BUS CONNECTION
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU)
A3ACPUR21
RS-232
RS-422 7.2.6 6
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
DIRECT
A2NCPUP21
CPU
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
7
A2NCPUR21-S1
COMPUTER LINK
A3NCPU
CONNECTION
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21

*1 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
*2 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU. 8
*3 If the A series computer link module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices in the same range on AnACPU.
However, the following devices cannot be monitored.
• Devices added to QnACPU
CONNECTION
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)

ETHERNET
(In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified,
an access is made to the internal relay.)
• File register (R)
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7-3

A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU*1
MELSEC-A A2SCPU*1 RS-232
(AnSCPU) RS-422 7.2.7
A2SCPU-S1*1
A2SHCPU*1
A2SHCPU-S1*1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU*1
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.7
*1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A
A2CCPUP21 - -
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.7
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
- -
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3
Q172CPUN*2
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion RS-232
Q172DCPU RS-422 7.2.1
controller CPU
(Q Series) Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*4
MR-MQ100 - -

*1 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU.
In addition, A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later
• Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later
• Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later
*4 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).

1
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
RS-232
A273UHCPU-S3 7.2.6
RS-422
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU 2
Motion A171SCPU-S3
THAT CAN BE SET

controller CPU A171SCPU-S3N
DEVICE RANGE
(A Series)
A171SHCPU*2
RS-232
A171SHCPUN*2 7.2.7
RS-422
A172SHCPU*2
A172SHCPUN*2
A173UHCPU
3
FOR MONITORING
A173UHCPU-S1
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
RS-232 *1
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G 7.2.1
RS-422
4
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
RS-232 *3 *3 *3
HOW TO MONITOR
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 7.2.2
RS-422
head module
REDUNTANT
CC-Link IE
Field Network
SYSTEM
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU

RS-232
RS-422 7.2.1 5
Robot CRnQ-700 RS-232
BUS CONNECTION
controller (Q172DRCPU) RS-422 7.2.1
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
6
FX2C
CONNECTION TO
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
DIRECT
FX1NC
CPU
FX2NC -
FX3G 7
FX3GC
-
COMPUTER LINK
FX3U
CONNECTION
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 For computer link connection of A171SHCPU(N) and A172SHCPU(N), use the computer link module whose software version is
*3
version U or later.
GT11,GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE field network system. GT11,GT10 can access only the connected
8
host station (head module station).
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module
CPU series Model name*1
MELSEC-Q (Q mode) QJ71C24*2, QJ71C24-R2*2

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71CMO*3, QJ71CMON*3
MELSEC-L LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF

MELSEC-Q (A mode)
A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF
AJ71QC24*4, AJ71QC24-R2*4, AJ71QC24-R4*4
AJ71QC24N*4, AJ71QC24N-R2*4, AJ71QC24N-R4*4
A1SJ71QC24*4, A1SJ71QC24-R2*4
MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24N*4, A1SJ71QC24N-R2*4

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)
A1SJ71QC24N1*4, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2*4
AJ71UC24*4*6
A1SJ71C24-R2*6, A1SJ71C24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6
A1SJ71UC24-R2*6, A1SJ71UC24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6
AJ71UC24*4*5
MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A1SJ71UC24-R2*5, A1SJ71UC24-R4*5, A1SJ71UC24-PRF*5

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)
A1SJ71C24-R2*5, A1SJ71C24-R4*5, A1SJ71C24-PRF*5
MELSEC-A
Motion controller CPU (A Series) A1SCPUC24-R2*5
A2CCPUC24*4, A2CCPUC24-PRF*4
*1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485.
A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used.
*2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or
later.
*3 Only CH2 can be connected.
*4 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used.
*5 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU.
*6 The module operates in the device range on AnACPU.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
7.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Serial
QCPU GOT
communication
(Q mode)
module
Connection cable
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Number of
Serial Communi connectable
Max.
Model name communication cation Cable model Option device Model
distance equipment*5
*1 type
module
4
HOW TO MONITOR
QJ71C24 or
QJ71C24N 15m
REDUNTANT
QJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection
RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
SYSTEM
QJ71C24N-R2 diagram 1)
QJ71CMO
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
QJ71CMON
RS232 connection
diagram 3)
2 GOTs for 1 serial
BUS CONNECTION
RS422 connection communication
MELSEC-Q diagram 2) module*3
(Q mode)
GT16-C02R4-9S 1 GOT for 1 modem
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) interface module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
QJ71C24
QJ71C24N RS-422
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S 6
QJ71C24N-R4 or
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*4 -
DIRECT
CPU
RS422 connection *7
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. 7
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)
COMPUTER LINK
For details on the system configuration on the modem interface module side, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
Modem Interface Module User's Manual

*3 Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module.
*5
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to four 8
GOTs.
However, when using modem interface modules or serial communication modules (function version A), up to two GOTs can be
connected.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET


7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU

Serial
LCPU communication GOT
module
Connection cable

Number of
Serial Communi connectable
Max.
Model name communication cation Cable model Option device Model
distance equipment
module*1 type

or
15m
LJ71C24 RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
LJ71C24-R2
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS232 connection *4
diagram 3)
RS422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial
MELSEC-L diagram 2) communication
module
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S
LJ71C24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)



7.2.3 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 AJ71C24/UC24

2
QCPU Computer
GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

(A mode) link module
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable

3
Number of
FOR MONITORING
Commun connectable
Computer link Max.
ACCESS RANGE
Model name *1
ication Cable model Option device Model equipment
module distance
type
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
A1SJ71UC24-R2 15m
A1SJ71C24-R2
RS-232
RS232 connection
diagram 1)
4
A1SJ71UC24-PRF GT15-RS2-9P
HOW TO MONITOR
A1SJ71C24-PRF
RS232 connection *3
REDUNTANT
diagram 3)
SYSTEM
RS422 connection
MELSEC-Q diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 computer
(A mode) link module
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S 5
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
BUS CONNECTION
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 500m GT15-RS4-9S
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS422 connection
diagram 3)
6
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION TO
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual
DIRECT

CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type)
AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 QnA/L/Q CPU

(GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10)
QnACPU module GOT
(QnACPU type) /Computer link module
Connection cable

Number of
Serial Commun
Max. connectable
Model name communication ication Cable model Option device Model
distance equipment
module*1 type

or
AJ71QC24 15m
AJ71QC24N RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
AJ71QC24-R2 diagram 2)
AJ71QC24N-R2 GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS232 connection *4
diagram 4)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
AJ71QC24-R4
RS-422 GT01-RS4-M*3 -
AJ71QC24N-R4
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) 1 GOT for 1 serial
MELSEC-QnA GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) communication
(QnACPU) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) module
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *5
or
RS422 connection
diagram 4)
RS422 connection
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71QC24 GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
AJ71QC24N 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
AJ71QC24-R4 or
AJ71QC24N-R4 - (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
diagram 3)
Serial Communications Module User’s Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)


7 - 10 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

Number of
1
Commun
PROCEDURES FOR
Computer link Max. connectable
Model name ication Cable model Option device Model
module*1 distance equipment
PREPARATORY
type
MONITORING
GT09-C30R2-25P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
or
15m
RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
AJ71UC24 RS-232
diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*3 - 2
RS232 connection *4
THAT CAN BE SET

diagram 4)
DEVICE RANGE
RS422 connection
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnACPU) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 9P*2
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m GT15-RS4-9S 3
or
FOR MONITORING
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
ACCESS RANGE
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
diagram 3)
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual 4

When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) 5
BUS CONNECTION
AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 QnA/L/Q CPU

(GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10)
QnACPU
(QnACPU type)
module GOT 6
/Computer link module
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable
DIRECT
CPU

Number of
Model name
Commun
ication Cable model
Max.
Option device Model
connectable 7
module*1 distance equipment
type
COMPUTER LINK
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
A1SJ71QC24 - (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION
or
A1SJ71QC24N 15m 1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-QnA A1SJ71QC24N1 RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P serial
RS-232
(QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24-R2 diagram 1) communication
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
A1SJ71QC24N-R2 module
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 RS232 connection
diagram 3)
8
Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)

CONNECTION

ETHERNET

7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 - 11

Number of
Serial communication Commun
Max. connectable
Model name module ication Cable model Option device Model
distance equipment
/Computer link module*1 type
RS422 connection
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 1 GOT for 1
A1SJ71QC24 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
MELSEC-QnA GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) serial
A1SJ71QC24N RS-422
(QnACPU) or communication
A1SJ71QC24N1
- (Built into GOT) module
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
diagram 3)

or
A1SJ71UC24-R2 15m
A1SJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
A1SJ71UC24-PRF diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
A1SJ71C24-PRF
RS232 connection *4
diagram 3)
RS422 connection
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnACPU) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
RS422 connection *5
diagram 3)
Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)
For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].


7.2.6 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
ACPU Computer
link module GOT
(AnCPU type) Communication driver
Connection cable 2
AJ71C24/UC24
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Computer link Commun Number of connectable

Max. equipment
Model name module
*1
ication
type
Cable model
distance
Option device Model
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT09-C30R2-25P(3m)
15m
RS232 connection
AJ71UC24 RS-232 diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
HOW TO MONITOR
RS422 connection
MELSEC-A diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 computer link
REDUNTANT
(AnCPU) module
SYSTEM
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
500m GT15-RS4-9S
5
RS422 connection
BUS CONNECTION
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS422 connection *4
diagram 3)
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)
ACPU
Computer link
(AnSPU type) GOT
module Communication driver
(A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC)
Connection cable
AJ71C24/UC24
Computer link Commun Number of connectable

Max. equipment
Model name module ication Cable model Option device Model
distance
*1 type
A1SJ71UC24-R2 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
A1SJ71C24-R2
15m
A1SJ71UC24-PRF RS232 connection
A1SJ71C24-PRF RS-232 diagram 1)
A1SCPUC24-R2 GT15-RS2-9P
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF RS232 connection *3
diagram 3)
MELSEC-A RS422 connection

(AnSCPU) diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 computer
(A0J2H) link module
(A2CCPUC) GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 500m GT15-RS4-9S
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
RS422 connection *4
diagram 3)


1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 2)
GOT and the PLC.
PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin
7.3.1 RS-232 cable For GT16, GT15
GOT side
 Connection diagram (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side

2
RS232 connection diagram 1) CD 1 4 RS(RTS)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
For GT16, GT15
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
SG 5 7 SG
3
CD 1 7 RS(RTS)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
FOR MONITORING
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
ACCESS RANGE
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
SG 5 5 SG - 9 1 FG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit
(When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
GOT side 4
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
HOW TO MONITOR
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
REDUNTANT
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
SYSTEM
(When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module)
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
SG 5 7 SG 5
NC 1 7
BUS CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104

(When connecting to the Computer Link Module)
6
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
GOT side
CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
DIRECT
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)

CPU
(When connecting to the Computer Link Module)

SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) 7
SG 5 7 SG
COMPUTER LINK
NC 1 1 CD
CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
8
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS(RTS)
CONNECTION
CS(CTS) CS(CTS)
ETHERNET
8 8
- 9 9 -

RS232 connection diagram 3) RS232 connection diagram 4)
PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin
For GT1030, GT1020 For GT1030, GT1020
(When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module) (When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)
GOT side GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side (terminal block) PLC side
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG
For GT1030, GT1020 For GT1030, GT1020

(When connecting to the Computer Link Module) (When connecting to the Computer Link Module)
GOT side GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side (terminal block) PLC side
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

7.3.2 RS-422 cable RS422 connection diagram 3) 1
(For GT1030, GT1020)
PROCEDURES FOR
 Connection diagram
PREPARATORY
GOT side
MONITORING
(terminal block) PLC side
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ), Serial Multi-Drop Unit SDA RDA
RDA SDA
GOT side PLC side
RSA - 2
R
SDA 1 RDA CSA -
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
RDA 2 SDA SG SG
RSA 3 - SDB RDB
R
CSA 4 - RDB SDB
SG 5 SG RSB -
SDB 6 RDB CSB - 3
RDB 7 SDB
FOR MONITORING
FG
ACCESS RANGE
RSB 8 -
CSB 9 -
FG - FG (For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side
(terminal block)
Untied wire color of
GT10-C□□□R4-25P 4
HOW TO MONITOR
(For GT16)
SDA Brown
GOT side PLC side
REDUNTANT
SDB Red
SYSTEM
R RDA Orange
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDA
RDB Yellow
SDB1(TXD1-) RDB
5
2
SG Green
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDA
RSA Blue
BUS CONNECTION
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDB
RSB Purple
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
CSA Black
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 FG
CSB White
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
6
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
(1) Cable length
CSB(CTS-)
DIRECT
12
CPU
SG 13
NC 14
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 7
Shell
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(1) GOT side
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
(b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
(2) Serial communication module or computer link
module side
Connect the terminating resistors (330 1/4W (orange/
orange/brown/ ) ) on the serial communication module
or computer link module side. For details, refer to the
following manual.
User's Manual for the serial communication
module or computer link module
(a) Other than A2CCPUC24(-PRF)

Connect the terminating resistors supplied with the
module across RDA and RDB.
(b) A2CCPUC24(-PRF)
Set TXD and RXD on the terminating resistor
setting pin to "A".

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
settings)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
2.

3. 3
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.
HOW TO MONITOR
Click!
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
menu.
5
BUS CONNECTION
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
channel to be used from the list menu.
3. Set the following items. transmission speed used for
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi communication with the connected
9600bps,
equipment.
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller 19200bps,
Transmission
Speed
(Default: 115200bps)
When the setting exceeds the limit of
38400bps, 6
57600bps,
• I/F: Interface to be used the connected equipment,
115200bps
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the communication is performed at the
Controller Type to be connected. fastest transmission speed supported
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11
DIRECT
A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24 Set the number of retries to be

CPU

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* timeout occurs. When receiving no
AJ71C24/UC24
Retry
response after retries, the
0 to 5times
7
For GT10 communication times out.
(Default: 0time)
COMPUTER LINK
QnA/L/Q CPU
CONNECTION
AJ71C24/UC24 Set the time period for a communication

4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 3sec)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the transmission
Make the settings according to the usage timing of the communication request
environment.
Delay Time
from the GOT.
0 to 300 (ms)
8
(Default: 0ms)
Select the communication format.
Format*3 1, 2
CONNECTION
(Default: 1)
ETHERNET

Item Description Range (2) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*
Set the monitor speed of the GOT. High*1
Monitor Speed
This setting is not valid in all systems. Normal
(GT16 only)
*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than
the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However,
when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan
time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on
the sequence scan time, do not set "High".
(High performance is hardly affected)
*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the
sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when
connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor
speed may be reduced.
*3 Refer to the following POINT.
POINT Item Description Range

4800bps,
Setting [Format] Set this item when change the 9600bps,
Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps,
This setting is required for replacement of F900 series Speed communication with the connected 38400bps,
with GOT1000 series. equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 57600bps,
(1) To change the communication settings of the 115200bps
serial communication module which is connected Set this item when change the data
to F900, set as follows. length used for communication with the
Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
The value of Transmission Speed can be set to connected equipment.
115200bps. (Default: 8bit)
(a) [Intelligent function module switch setting] of Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
PLC
(Default: 1bit)
Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Specify whether or not to perform a
parity check, and how it is performed
Switch 1 0000H - Parity Odd (fixed)
during communication.
Switch 2 0000H -
(Default: Odd)
Switch 3 - 0000H Set the number of retries to be
Switch 4 - 0000H performed when a communication
Switch 5 0000H 0000H timeout occurs. When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times
7.5 PLC Side Setting communication times out.
(b) GOT communication settings (Default: 0time)
Format Timeout Time 3 to 30sec
to time out. (Default: 3sec)
1 Set this item to adjust the transmission
(2) To maintain the communication settings of the Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
serial communication module which is connected
to F900, set the communication setting of the GOT
as follows.
The value of Transmission Speed remains
38400bps.
Format Transmission Speed

2 38400bps

1
(3) AJ71C24/UC24 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Item Description Range Item Description Range
Transmission
4800bps,
3
9600bps,
Speed communication with the connected communication with the connected
FOR MONITORING
19200bps 9600bps,
ACCESS RANGE
equipment. (Default: 19200bps) equipment.
19200bps,
Set this item when change the data Transmission (Default: 115200bps)
38400bps,
length used for communication with the 57600bps,
Data Bit 8bit (fixed) the connected equipment,
connected equipment. 115200bps
communication is performed at the
(Default: 8bit)
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
4
(Default: 1bit)
HOW TO MONITOR
Specify whether or not to perform a
parity check, and how it is performed POINT
Parity Odd (fixed)
REDUNTANT
(Default: Odd) (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
SYSTEM
Set the number of retries to be The communication interface setting can be
performed when a communication changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
timeout occurs. When receiving no after writing [Communication Settings] of project
Retry
0 to 5times
data. 5
communication times out. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
BUS CONNECTION
(Default: 0time)
Timeout Time
3 to 30sec
GT User's Manual
to time out. (Default: 3sec) (2) Precedence in communication settings
Set this item to adjust the transmission When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms) Utility, the latest setting is effective.
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
6
HINT
CONNECTION TO
controller
DIRECT

CPU

Disconnect the
7
faulty station
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(Fundamentals)

7.5 PLC Side Setting
The GOT operates under the following transmission
specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi PLC in 7.5.1 Connecting serial
the computer link connection. communication module (Q, L
Transmission specifications Setting
Series)
Data bit 8bits
Parity bit Yes (Odd) POINT

Stop bit 1bit
(1) Serial communication module (Q, L Series)
Sum check Yes For details of the serial communication module (Q,
Transmission speed Set the same transmission speed on
L Series), refer to the following manual.
(Baud rate) both the GOT and the PLC. Q Corresponding Serial Communication
Module User’s Manual (Basic)
The PLC side settings (the serial communication module, MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module
computer link module) are explained in Section 7.5.1 to User's Manual (Basic)
Section 7.5.3. (2) Modem interface module
For details of the modem interface module, refer to
Refer the following manual.
Model
to Modem Interface Module User's Manual
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24
Serial communication module
 [Intelligent function module switch setting] on
QJ71C24N-R2, 7.5.1
(Q Series) GX Developer
QJ71C24-R2
[The intelligent function module switch setting] on GX
QJ71C24N-R4
Developer is not necessary. (When no [intelligent
QJ71CMO, function module switch setting] is made, the module
Modem interface module 7.5.1
QJ71CMON runs in the GX Developer connection mode.)
A module can be also connected to a GOT by making
Serial communication module LJ71C24,
(L Series) LJ71C24-R2
7.5.1 the following [intelligent function module switch setting]
on GX Developer.
AJ71QC24N,
AJ71QC24 (1) When connecting to the CH1 side
AJ71QC24N-R2,
AJ71QC24-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4,
Serial communication module AJ71QC24-R4
7.5.2
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QC24N1,
Bit
A1SJ71QC24N, Set
Switch Specifi
A1SJ71QC24 Positi Description
No. ed value*3
on
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2, value
A1SJ71QC24N-R2, Operation
b0 OFF
A1SJ71QC24-R2 setting
b1 OFF Data Bit
AJ71UC24 7.5.3 b2 OFF Parity Bit
A1SJ71UC24-R2, Even/Odd
b3 OFF
A1SJ71UC24-PRF, parity
7.5.3 b4 OFF CH1 Stop bit
A1SJ71C24-R2, (Operates
transmiss Sum according
A1SJ71C24-PRF
b5 OFF ion check to the GOT
Computer link module Switch 1 0000H
A1SJ71UC24-R4, settings*1 code side
7.5.3
A1SJ71C24-R4 Write specificatio
b6 OFF during ns.)
A1SCPUC24-R2 7.5.3
RUN
A2CCPUC24, Setting
7.5.3
A2CCPUC24-PRF b7 OFF modifica-
tions
b8 to CH1 transmission
―
b15 speed setting*2
GX
CH1 Communication
Switch 2 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H

(2) When connecting to the CH2 side
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When the [intelligent function module switch
setting] has been set
After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU,
turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or
Switch
Bit
Set
reset the PLC CPU.
(2) Connection of multiple GOTs
2
Specifi Description
Positi To some serial communication module models,
No. value*3
THAT CAN BE SET

ed
on
two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and
DEVICE RANGE
value
CH2.
Operation
b0 OFF
setting
Connection of 2 GOTs
b1 OFF Data bit Model
Function version A Function version B
b2 OFF
Parity
bit
QJ71C24(-R2) 3
QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) -
FOR MONITORING
Even/odd
b3 OFF
ACCESS RANGE
parity
CH2 LJ71C24(-R2) -
(Operates
b4 OFF transmiss Stop bit
according : 2 GOTs connectable, : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable
ion Sum to the GOT
Switch 3
b5 OFF settings*1 check 0000H (3) When connecting to the modem interface module
side
code specificatio
When the modem interface module is connected,
Write
ns.) only CH2 can be used. 4
b6 OFF during
HOW TO MONITOR
RUN
REDUNTANT
Setting
b7 OFF modifica-
SYSTEM
tions
b8 to CH2 transmission
―
b15 speed setting*2
5
GX
CH2 Communication
BUS CONNECTION
Switch 4 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H
*1 The module operates under the following transmission

specifications.
Transmission specifications Setting details

6
Operation setting Independent
CONNECTION TO
Data bit 8bits
Parity bit Yes

DIRECT
Even/odd parity Odd

CPU
Stop bit 1bit
Sum check code Yes

7
*2 The serial communication module operates at the
transmission speed set on the GOT.
COMPUTER LINK
*3 When the value of switch setting is other than "0", the setting
of [Format] and [Transmission Speed] on the GOT side are
CONNECTION
required to be changed.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.5.2 Connecting serial
communication module (QnA POINT
Series) When connecting a GOT to CH2
Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0"
(interlocked operation).
POINT
CH1 CH2
Serial communication module (QnA Series) MODE
For details of the serial communication module (QnA

Series), refer to the following manual.
Serial Communication Module User's Manual
(Modem Function Additional Version) (2) Transmission specifications setting switch
Transmission
Setting Set
 Switch setting on serial communication specifications setting
switch
Description
value
switch
module
Operation Independent
Set the Station number switches, the Mode setting SW01
setting operation
OFF
switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and Data bit
AJ71QC24(N)
SW02 8bits ON
the Transmission specifications switches. (-R2/R4) setting
ON SW ON Parity bit
AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2 01 SW03 enable/disable Enable ON
02
AJ71QC24N-R4,AJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2, setting
03
AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4 A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2 04
Even/odd parity
AJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N 05 SW04 Odd OFF
RUN
CPUR/W
CH1.ERR.
CH2.ERR.
ERR.
RUN
C.R/W
ERROR
SW.E ERR. 06
setting
C/N NEU NEU C/N
P/S ACK ACK P/S 07
SW05 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
NEU NEU
ACK ACK PRO NAK NAK PRO
NAK
C/N
NAK
C/N
SID SD.W.
SD
SD.W.
SD
SIO
08
P/S P/S
CH.1 CH.2 RD RD
PRO PRO
Sum check
SIO SIO CH1 CH2
SD.WAIT SD.WAIT
SD SD DISPLAY AB
RD RD STS ERR.
10 1
09 SW06 enable/disable Enable ON
10 1
5 5
(3) 10 setting
5
0
5
0
STATION
No. (3) STATION NO.
0 0
11
CH1 CH2
Write during
CH1 CH2
8 8 8 8
12
MODE
(1) (1)
C
MODE
4
C
4
SW07 RUN enable/ Enable ON

0 0 0 0
SW
01 1
02
disable setting
03
2
04 3
A1SJ71QC24(N)
05
4
(2)
06
07 5
08 6
SW 7
(2)
(N1)(-R2)*1 Setting change Disable
09
8
10
9
SW08 OFF
11
12
10
11
12
enable/disable (prohibit)
ON CH2 RS-422/RS-485
1
2 (Consistent
SDA
SW09
CH1 SG 3 Transmission with the GOT
RS-232C
4 to See (a)
SDB
speed setting side
(FG) 5 SW12
RDA 6 specifications)
(NC)
SW 7
CH2
RS422
RS485
RDB 8 The switch is
SDA
RDA
9 located on
CH1 RS-232-C A1SJ71QC24N
10
the left side
SDB
RDB
NC 11 SW13
SG
12 of the
FG
to ― All OFF
ON module.
SW15
(only on
AJ71QC24 (-
(1) Mode setting switch R2/R4))
*1 The following shows the layout of switches in the case of the

Mode setting switch*1 Description Set value following hardware versions for the module.
Switch settings and switch ON/OFF directions are the same.
CH CH1/2
1 9
Dedicated protocol (Format 5)
5 2 10
MODE (Binary mode)
3 11
4 12
SW
5
*1 The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/
R4). 6
7
8
ON
Target unit Hardware version
A1SJ71QC24 Version E hardware or earlier
A1SJ71QC24-R2 Version D hardware or earlier
A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 Version A hardware

(a) Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) 7.5.3 Connecting computer link 1
Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as module
PROCEDURES FOR
follows.
PREPARATORY
The transmission speed setting must be consistent
MONITORING
with that of the GOT side.
POINT
Transmission speed*1*2*3
Setting Computer link module
Switch 4800
bps
9600
bps
19200
bps
38400
bps*4
57600
bps*4
115200
bps*4
For details of the computer link module, refer to the 2
following manual.
THAT CAN BE SET

SW09 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print.
DEVICE RANGE
SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON func.) User’s Manual
SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
SW12 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON  Switch setting on the computer link module
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission
*2
shown.
When the software version of AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4) and
specifications switches and the Station number setting 3
A1SJ71QC24 (-R2) is "L" or earlier, and when 2 devices are switches.
FOR MONITORING
connected to the two interfaces individually, make the setting
ACCESS RANGE
so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4,
within 19200bps. AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R4
When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is A1SJ71C24-R2,
RUN 2-C/N
2 - SD 2-P/S
2 - RD 2 - PRO A1SJ71UC24 - R4
2 - SIO
within 19200bps, a controller other than GOT can be

RUN NEU SCAN
2 - NEU 4-C/N L4
A1SJ71C24-PRF
SD ACK SET E.
2 - ACK 4-P/S L5
RD NAK SCAN E.
2 - NAK 4 - PRO L6
CPU C/N SIO E.
L1 4 - NEU 4 - SIO
connected to the computer link module.

MD P/S
L2 4 - ACK
L3 4 - NAK PRO ST. DWN
CPUR / W
4 - SD COM SIO
4 - RD M.D.M COM MD / L
When only one device is connected to either of the A1SJ71UC24-R2

M.D.L
B0
B1
NEU NEU
B2
interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 19200bps can

ACK ACK
NAK NAK
4
C/N C/N SW
be set to the one where the device is connected.In this MODE (1) PRO
SIO
P/S 01
02
03
STATION NO.
7 8
(2)
instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side. SIO 04
0
10
(3)
STATION NO. 2 3
10 05
*3 When 3 devices are connected to the two interfaces (3) 06

07
7 8
1
0
08
HOW TO MONITOR
1 23
individually in the case of AJ71QC24N(-R2/R4),

09
10
SW11 ON
(1) 11
B CD
(1)
F0
89
12
MODE
A1SJ71QC24N(-R2), and A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2), make the

13 12 34
14
SW
15
16 03
setting so that the total transmission speed of the two

17
18 (2) 04
(2)
REDUNTANT
21 05 MODE
interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case

22 06
23 07 1.FORM1
08 SDA
24 2.FORM2
09
10 3.FORM3
of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)).
4.FORM4 SG
11
SYSTEM
12 5.MOFORM SDB
When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is

FG
RDA
RS-232-C
within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of
NC
RS-232-C RDB
A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)), a controller other than GOT can be

connected to the computer link module.
5
RS - 422 / 485
A1SJ71UC24 - R4
When only one device is connected to either of the RS - 422

RS - 485
interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps SDA A1SJ71UC24-R2

can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this
BUS CONNECTION
SG
SDB
instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side.

FG
RDA
NC
*4 This can be set only in the case of AJ71QC24N (-R2/R4), RDB
A1SJ71QC24N (-R2) or A1SJ71QC24N1 (-R2).
A1SCPUC24-R2
(3) Station number switch (for both CH1 and CH2) MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2
STOP
MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2
STOP
RUN L CLR RUN RUN L CLR RUN
RESET RESET RESET RESET

ERROR ERROR
Set
6
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
*5 Contents
Station number switch
value
(1)
CONNECTION TO
10 1 Set the station number of the
(2)
serial communication module
0
STATION to which an access is made
No.
from the GOT.
DIRECT
CPU
*5 The station number switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 PULL
(N) (-R2/R4).
When the cover is open
7
POINT A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
(1)
When the switch setting has been changed
(3)
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
PLC CPU.
8
(2)
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
When the cover is open

(1) Mode setting switch (b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF,
A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF
Mode setting switch Contents Set value
Transmission
Setting Set
RS-232 specifications Description
BCD 1 switch value
Dedicated connection switch
EF
8 9A
012
protocol type 1 SW03 Unused ― OFF

67
RS-422
5
345
connection SW ON Write during RUN
SW04 Enabled ON
03 enabled/disabled setting
04 SW05 (Consistent See
(2) Transmission specifications switch Transmission speed with the GOT descripti
ON SW06
(a) AJ71UC24 setting side ons
05 SW07 specifications) below.
06
Transmission 07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON
Setting Set
specifications Description 08 SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON
switch value
switch 09
10 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
RS-232 11
OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
connection 12
SW11 Main channel setting SW12 Sum check setting Set ON
RS-422
ON
connection • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07)
SW12 Data bit setting 8bits ON Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as
ON
SW11 SW13
follows.
(Consistent See
SW12 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti The transmission speed setting must be consistent
SW14
SW13 setting side ons with that of the GOT side.
SW14 SW15 specifications) below.
SW15
SW16 SW16 Parity bit setting Set ON Transmission speed*1
Setting switch
SW17 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
SW17 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
SW18
ON SW18 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW05 OFF ON OFF
SW21 SW06 OFF OFF ON
SW21 Sum check setting Set ON
SW22
SW23 Write during RUN SW07 ON ON ON
SW24 SW22 Enabled ON
enabled/disabled setting
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
Computer link/multi-drop Computer shown.
SW23 ON
selection link
(c) A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4
Master station/Local (Setting
SW24 OFF
station setting ignored)
Transmission
Setting Set
• Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW15) specifications Description
switch value
Set the transmission speed (SW13 to SW15) as switch
follows. Master station/Local (Setting
SW01 OFF
The transmission speed setting must be consistent station setting ignored)
with that of the GOT side. Computer link/multi-drop Computer
SW02 ON
selection link
*1
SW ON
Transmission speed 01 SW03 Unused ― OFF
Setting switch
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
02
03 Write during RUN
SW04 Enabled ON
enabled/disabled setting
SW13 OFF ON OFF 04
ON SW05 (Consistent See
SW14 OFF OFF ON 05 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti
06 SW06
SW15 ON ON ON setting side ons
07 SW07 specifications) below.
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side 08
09 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON
are shown.
10
SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON
11
12 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF
SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

• Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) (e) A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF 1
Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as
PROCEDURES FOR
follows. Transmission
Setting Set
PREPARATORY
The transmission speed setting must be consistent specifications Description
MONITORING
switch value
with that of the GOT side. switch
SW11 (Consistent
See
Transmission speed*1 Transmission speed with the GOT
Setting switch SW12 descriptio
setting side
ns below.
SW05
4800bps
OFF
9600bps
ON
19200bps
OFF
ON OFF
SW13 specifications)
2
SW SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON
THAT CAN BE SET

SW06 OFF OFF ON 11
SW15 Parity bit setting Set ON
DEVICE RANGE
12
13
SW07 ON ON ON Even/odd parity
14 SW16 Odd OFF
15 setting
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are 16
shown. 17 SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
18
(d) A1SCPUC24-R2 19
ON
20
SW19 Main channel setting RS-232 OFF
Transmission Write during RUN
Setting
specifications Description Set value
FOR MONITORING
SW20 enabled/ Enabled ON
switch
ACCESS RANGE
switch disabled setting
Write during RUN • Transmission speed setting (SW11 to SW13)

1 enabled/ Enabled ON
disabled setting
Set the transmission speed (SW11 to SW13) as
follows.
2 (Consistent
ON
with the See
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 Transmission speed with that of the GOT side.

GOT side description
setting
specification s below.
4 s)
Transmission speed*1
HOW TO MONITOR
5 Data bit setting 8bits ON Setting switch
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
REDUNTANT
6 Parity bit setting Set ON
SW11 OFF ON OFF
SYSTEM
Even/odd parity
7 Odd OFF
setting SW12 OFF OFF ON
8 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW13 ON ON ON
9 Sum check setting Set ON *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are 5
shown.
• Transmission speed setting (2 to 4)
BUS CONNECTION
Set the transmission speed (2 to 4) as follows. (3) Station number setting switch
with that of the GOT side. Station number switch*2 Description Set value
Transmission speed*2 STATION NO.

Setting switch 7 8
6
9 01
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps

4 5 6
10 Set the station number of the

2 3 computer link module to
2 OFF ON OFF 0
which an access is made
CONNECTION TO
7 8
3 OFF OFF ON from the GOT.
9 01
4 5 6
1
4 ON ON ON 2 3 DIRECT
*2 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

shown. *2 The station number setting switch in the figure is for the
CPU
A1SJ71UC24-R4.
POINT
7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION

PLC CPU.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and
the computer link unit
When the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer
link unit are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer
memory in the computer link unit using the sequence
program so that CD signals are not checked.
Examples of the CPU units equipped with built-in
computer link are explained below also.
(1) In the case of A computer link

Refer to the program example below in which the
I/O signals of the computer link unit are 80 to 9F
(H).
Write to buffer memory
Computer link unit
connection point
X87
TO P H8 H10B K1 K1
10B(H):CD terminal will be checked

K1:CD terminal will not be checked
(2) In the case of CPU equipped with built-in

computer link
(a) A1SCPUC24-R2
Computer link unit connection point
(Fixed values)
X0E7
TO P H0E H10B K1 K1

Fixed values K1:CD terminal will be checked
(b) A2CCPUC2
Computer link unit connection point
(Fixed values)
X1E7
TO P K61 H10B K1 K1

Fixed values K1:CD terminal will not be checked

1
7.6 Precautions
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
 Time taken until the PLC runs when
MONITORING
connected in the multiple CPU system
The following time is taken until the PLC runs.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
seconds or more 2
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Manual
3
FOR MONITORING
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
ACCESS RANGE
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
the SD memory card becomes available. When the
GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Manual
REDUNTANT
 When monitoring the Q170MCPU
SYSTEM
Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
5
BUS CONNECTION
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
cannot be executed.
GT Designer3 Version
Manual
Screen Design 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.6 Precautions
7.6 Precautions
8
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

ETHERNET CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
8.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
8.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
SYSTEM
8.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8-1


Communication *3
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Ethernet 8.2.1
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU 8.2.1
Ethernet
Q50UDEHCPU 8.2.2
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V*2
Ethernet 8.2.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V

*3 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
8-2 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION

Communication *2
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Ethernet
PREPARATORY
8.2.1
MONITORING
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT 8.2.2
MELSEC-L Ethernet
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
8.2.1
2
L02SCPU
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q02CPU-A*3
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A*3 Ethernet 8.2.1
(A mode)
*3
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU*3
MELSEC-QnA
Q2ACPU-S1*3 3
Q3ACPU*3 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
8.2.1
(QnACPU)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Q4ACPU*3
Q4ARCPU*3
Q2ASCPU
Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
(QnASCPU) 8.2.1
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1 4
A2UCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
A2UCPU-S1
REDUNTANT
A3UCPU
SYSTEM
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21 5
A2ACPU-S1
BUS CONNECTION
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 Ethernet 8.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU 6
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION TO
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
DIRECT
A2NCPUR21
CPU
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 7
A2NCPUR21-S1
COMPUTER LINK
A3NCPU
CONNECTION
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21

*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.
• Devices added to QnACPU 8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
*3 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted. 8.1.2 Ethernet module
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8-3

Communication *4
type
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU Ethernet 8.2.1
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
Ethernet 8.2.1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1 Ethernet 8.2.1

Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU 8.2.1
Ethernet
Q173DSCPU 8.2.5
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100

*3 When using Ethernet module, only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).

Communication *3
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
A273UCPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 2
controller A171SCPU-S3
THAT CAN BE SET

Ethernet 8.2.1
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
DEVICE RANGE
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU 3
A173UHCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G Ethernet 8.2.1
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE 4
HOW TO MONITOR
head module
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
REDUNTANT
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB 8.2.4
SYSTEM
Ethernet Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Ethernet 8.2.3

Robot CRnQ-700
5
Ethernet*2 8.2.1
BUS CONNECTION
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
-
- 6
FX1S
CONNECTION TO
FX1N
MELSEC-FX -
FX2N
FX1NC
DIRECT
CPU
FX2NC -
FX3G*1
FX3GC*1
Ethernet 7
8.2.1
FX3U*1
COMPUTER LINK
Ethernet
CONNECTION
FX3UC*1
*1 The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below.
Ethernet module FX3U(C) FX3G(C)
FX3U-ENET Ver. 2.21 or later FX3U-ENET is supported.
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 3.10 or later Ver. 2.00 or later

8
*2 The Ethernet connection of robot controller can be established only via the Ethernet module (QJ71E71) or Built-in Ethernet port of
QnUDE.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

8.1.2 Ethernet module
CPU series Ethernet module*1
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
MELSEC-QS
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
AJ71QE71N3-T*2 AJ71QE71N-B5*2 AJ71QE71N-B2*2 AJ71QE71N-T*2

*2
AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T*2
MELSEC-QnA
*2 *2 *2
A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T*2
A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T

MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5
MELSEC-A
A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
Motion Controller CPU (A Series)
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
MELSEC-FX FX3U-ENET FX3U-ENET-ADP
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100
*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.
• Devices added to QnACPU
*2 Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module and PLC CPU.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module
MONITORING
 When connecting to MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller
Ethernet Communication driver

2
PLC CPU GOT
module
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
PLC
Communication
Connection cable*1 Maximum
segment
GOT Number of
connectable
3
Ethernet module
*4*5 type length*3 equipment
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
*2
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode) *8*9
QJ71E71-100 - (Built into GOT)
QJ71E71-B5
MELSEC-QS Ethernet 100m
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71
Motion controller
CPU (Q Series)*6
GT15-J71E71-100
4
AJ71QE71N3-T
HOW TO MONITOR
AJ71QE71N-B5 *2
AJ71QE71N-B2
REDUNTANT
*8
AJ71QE71N-T - (Built into GOT)
SYSTEM
AJ71QE71N-B5T
AJ71QE71
AJ71QE71-B5
MELSEC-QnA Ethernet 100m
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
A1SJ71QE71N-B5 Twisted pair cable 5
A1SJ71QE71N-B2 • 10BASE-T
BUS CONNECTION
A1SJ71QE71N-T Shielded twisted pair
GT15-J71E71-100
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T cable (STP) or unshielded
128 GOTs*7
A1SJ71QE71-B5 twisted pair cable (UTP):
(recommended to
A1SJ71QE71-B2 Category 3, 4, and 5
16 units or less)
• 100BASE-TX
AJ71E71N3-T Shielded twisted pair
AJ71E71N-B5 cable (STP): *2
MELSEC-A
AJ71E71N-B2
AJ71E71N-T
Category 5 and 5e
- (Built into GOT) *8
6
AJ71E71N-B5T
MELSEC-Q AJ71E71-S3
CONNECTION TO
(A mode) A1SJ71E71N3-T Ethernet 100m
A1SJ71E71N-B5
Motion controller A1SJ71E71N-B2
DIRECT
CPU (A Series) A1SJ71E71N-T GT15-J71E71-100

CPU
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 7
*2
COMPUTER LINK
*8
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100 Ethernet 100m
CONNECTION
GT15-J71E71-100
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
8
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
CONNECTION
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.

ETHERNET
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)

*3 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*4 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)

For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
*5 Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
• Ethernet module (Q Series): QJ71E71
• Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71
• Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71
For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.3 Ethernet setting
*6 When using the peripheral I/F of Q170MCPU, Q17nDCPU-S1 or MR-MQ100, refer to the following.
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU)
*7 The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
*9 GT14 cannot be connected with MELSEC-QS.

1
 When connecting to MELSEC-FX
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet Communication driver
PLC CPU GOT
module
Connection cable Ethernet (FX), Gateway
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum GOT Number of
Ethernet module Communication segment connectable
*4*5 type length*3 equipment
*2
3
*7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
FX3U-ENET Ethernet 100m
(FX3U, FX3G)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-J71E71-100
2 GOTs
*2
FX3UC-1PS-5V,
*7
MELSEC-FX FX2NC-CNV-IF - (Built into GOT)
Ethernet 100m
(FX3UC, FX3GC) +
FX3U-ENET*6
Twisted pair cable
• 10BASE-T
GT15-J71E71-100 4
*2
HOW TO MONITOR
FX3U-CNV-BD, Shielded twisted pair
FX3U-422-BD, cable (STP) or unshielded *7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
twisted pair cable (UTP):
REDUNTANT
FX3U-232-BD, Ethernet 100m
(FX3U) Category 3, 4, and 5
+
SYSTEM
FX3U-ENET-ADP*8*9 • 100BASE-TX
GT15-J71E71-100
Shielded twisted pair
cable (STP): *2
Category 5 and 5e
- (Built into GOT) *7 5
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet 100m 4 GOTs
BUS CONNECTION
(FX3UC)
GT15-J71E71-100
*2
FX3G-CNV-ADP,
MELSEC-FX *7
+ Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
(FX3G)
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 100m
6
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 Ethernet GT15-J71E71-100
(FX3GC)
CONNECTION TO
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION

cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. 8
*4 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals.
For FX Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual

CONNECTION
*5 Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.

ETHERNET
• Ethernet module (FX Series): FX


*6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
*8 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series, FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required.
*9 FX3U-ENET-ADP occupies one extension communication adapter CH (Max. 2 CHs) of the FX3U(C). One CPU allows the
connection of only one FX3U-ENET-ADP.
8 - 10 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Connecting to
Built-in
GOT
Ethernet port
CPU
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
PLC Maximum GOT Number of
Model name
Communication
type
Connection cable*1*2 segment
length*4
Option device Model
connectable
equipment
3
FOR MONITORING
*3
ACCESS RANGE
*9
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-QnUDE(H)
Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
*5*6
GT15-J71E71-100
Twisted pair cable
• 10BASE-T
*3 4
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or *9
HOW TO MONITOR
- (Built into GOT)
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
C Controller module Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
Category 3, 4, and 5
REDUNTANT
• 100BASE-TX
SYSTEM
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
Category 5 and 5e
*3
- (Built into GOT) *9

5
*7*8 Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
MELSEC-L
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-J71E71-100
system.
*2 A straight cable is available. 6
When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, connection by cross cable is available.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT

CPU

7
COMPUTER LINK
cascades.
CONNECTION

*5 For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, refer to the following manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

*6 Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
8.3.3 Ethernet setting 8
*7 For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)

CONNECTION
*8 Select [LCPU] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.

ETHERNET

8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 11
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F
CNC
PLC CPU GOT
C70 Communication driver
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
PLC Maximum GOT

Connection cable *1 segment
Communication equipment
Model name length*3 Option device Model
type
Twisted pair cable *2

• 10BASE-T
*6
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or - (Built into GOT)
CNC C70
(Q173NCCPU) Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs for 1 network
*4*5
• 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
Category 5 and 5e
system.
cascades.
*4 For the system configuration of the CNC C70, refer to the following manual.
C70 Series SET UP MANUAL

*5 Select [Q17nNC] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet(MELSEC),
Q17nNC, CRnD-700
CC-Link IE Field CC-Link IE

2
Field Network
QCPU Network Master/ GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

Ethernet adapter
Local module
DEVICE RANGE
module
CC-Link IE
3
PLC *4 Field Network *1 GOT
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Ethernet adapter module Number of
CC-Link IE Maximu connectable
Commu Commu Cable model equipment
Field Network Cable Max. Model m Option
Model name nication nication Connection diagram Model
Master/Local model distance name segment device
type type number
module length*3
Twisted pair cable

• 10BASE-T
*2
4
- (Built into *7
MELSEC-Q Shielded twisted pair
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT)
(Q mode) cable (STP) or
Double- 128 GOTs*6
unshielded twisted
REDUNTANT
shielded CC-Link NZ2GF (recommend
Motion QJ71GF11-T2 100m Ethernet pair cable (UTP): 100m
twisted pair IE -ETB
SYSTEM
ed to 16 units
Controller Category 3, 4, and 5
cable*4 or less)
CPU (Q • 100BASE-TX GT15-
Series) Shielded twisted pair J71E71-100
cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
5
BUS CONNECTION
system.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following. 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT

CPU
cascades.
*4
Use cables with the following specifications.
7
Connector Range
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
Cable that satisfies the following specifications:

Category 5e or higher
IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T
Shielded RJ-45
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B(Category 5e)
*5 For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network module side, refer to the following manual.
*6
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller
CPU)
Q172DCPU-S1
PLC Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU GOT Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
CPU
Q173DSCPU
Connection cable
Q170MCPU
MR-MQ100
PLC GOT
Maximum Number of
Communi *1 segment connectable
Connection cable
Model name*3 cation length*4 Option device Model equipment
type
Motion controller CPU Twisted pair cable *2

(Q Series) • 10BASE-T
*5
Q172DCPU-S1 Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or - (Built into GOT)
Q173DCPU-S1 unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
Ethernet 30m 16 GOTs for 1 network
Q172DSCPU Category 3, 4, and 5
Q173DSCPU • 100BASE-TX
Q170MCPU Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
MR-MQ100 Category 5 and 5e
system.

*3 When using the PERIPHERAL I/F, set as shown below.
• Use the GT Designer3 Version1.12N or later.
• Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
cascades.
HINT
Direct connection between PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT
The PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT can be directly connected by using a cross cable for the Ethernet connection
cable.
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 GT16, GT14 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
2.
3. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
REDUNTANT
Set the station No. of the GOT.
SYSTEM
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
Click! (Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to

IP Address*2 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Set the subnet mask for the sub 5
menu. network. (Only for connection via
BUS CONNECTION
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask*2
If the sub network is not used, the
default value is set.
255.255.255.255
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the default

3. Set the following items. Default gateway where the GOT is connected. 0.0.0.0 to
Gateway*2 (Only for connection via router) 255.255.255.255
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi (Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller
Ethernet
1024 to 5010,
6
Type to be connected. Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
5014 to 65534
Download Port download.
• I/F: Interface to be used (Except for 5011, 5012,
CONNECTION TO
No.*2 (Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
• Driver:
Set the GOT port No. for the
Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 connection with the Ethernet module.
DIRECT
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet(FX), Gateway GOT • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC,
5014 to 65534
CPU
Communication and CRnD-700

(Except for 5011, 5012,
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Port No. (Default: 5001)
5013 and 49153)
7
• For Ethernet(FX), Gateway
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 5019)
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
environment.
COMPUTER LINK
timeout occurs.
CONNECTION
Retry 0 to 5times
8.3.2 Communication detail settings When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the GOT
startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
POINT communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec) 8
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time
communication to time out. 1 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. *1
(Default: 3sec)
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
Set the delay time for reducing the

0 to 10000
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in
the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set
[Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer.
 GT15
*2 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
IP Address Setting] screen.

(Default: 1)

GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)

IP address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Set the subnet mask for the sub

network.(Only for connection via
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to
Mask If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)

gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected.(Only for connection via
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
5014 to 65534
Download download.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
5013 and 49153)

connection with the Ethernet module.
1024 to 5010,
GOT • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC,
5014 to 65534
Communication and CRnD-700
(Except for 5011, 5012,
5013 and 49153)
• For Ethernet(FX), Gateway
(Default: 5019)

timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
When receiving no response after
(Default: 3times)

communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)

Timeout Time
*1
(Default: 3sec)

Delay 0 to 10000
load of the network/destination PLC.
Time ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in

the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set
[Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer.
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the
following.
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual. Item Description Range
GT User's Manual
(3) Precedence in communication settings Host
The host is displayed.(The host
is indicated with an asterisk (*).))
- 3
Set the network No. of the
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239
(Default: blank)
Set the station No. of the

PLC No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank)
QnUD(V/EH),
QnD(H)CCPU,
4
LCPU,
HOW TO MONITOR
Set the type of the connected Q17nNC,
Type*1 Ethernet module. QJ71E71/LJ71E71,
REDUNTANT
(Default: QJ71E71/LJ71E71) AJ71QE71,
SYSTEM
AJ71E71
FX
NZ2GF-ETB
Set the IP address of the

0.0.0.0 to
5
IP Address connected Ethernet module.
255.255.255.255
BUS CONNECTION
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the

Port No.*2 connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
(Default: 5001)
Communication*3 UDP UDP, TCP
*1 Select one of the following [Controller Type].

• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU: QnUD(V/EH)
6
• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port Q170MCPU, Q172/
CONNECTION TO
Q173DCPU: QnUDE(H)
• C Controller module: QnD(H)CCPU
• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU: LCPU
• Ethernet module (NZ2GF-ETB): NZ2GF-ETB
DIRECT
• Q17nNCCPU: Q17nNC
CPU
• Ethernet module (Q, L Series): QJ71E71/LJ71E71

• Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71
• Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71
• Ethernet module (FX Series): FX
7
For the applicable Ethernet module, refer to the following.
COMPUTER LINK
8.2System Configuration
CONNECTION
*2 Set only when selecting "AJ71E71" in [Controller Type].

When other than [AJ71E71] is selected, the port No. is as
follows.
• [QnUDE(H)]:5006(fixed)
• [Q17nNC],[QJ71E71],[AJ71QE71]:5001(fixed)
• [FX]: 5551 (When using FX3U-ENET)
*3
5556 (When using FX3U-ENET-ADP)
When selecting the FX in [Controller Type], the
8
communication type is the TCP (fixed).
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
POINT
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
(1) Example of [Ethernet setting] However, the same transfer network number cannot be set
For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the twice or more (multiple times).
following.
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
8.4 PLC Side Setting request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT No.]s.
Navigator
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT POINT
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
are displayed in green cells, from the Routing parameter setting
MELSOFT Navigator. When communicating within the host network, routing
(b) When the settings of N/W No., PLC No., type parameter setting is unnecessary.
or IP address are reflected to the parameter
from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
are added. Items set in advance are not manual.
deleted. However, if the combination of the N/ Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
W No. and the PLC No. or the IP address User's Manual (Application)
overlaps, the item set in advance is
overwritten.
(3) Changing the host on the GOT main unit
The host can be changed by the utility function of
the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection
method, refer to the following manual.
(When using GT16)
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
*1 1 to 239
Relay Network No.
Relay Station No.*1 1 to 64
*1 When accessing to other networks relaying a Build-in

Ethernet port CPU, set the virtual network No. and PLC No.
set in the Ethernet settings on GT Designer3.
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
the relay station.
For the setting, refer to the following.
8.4 PLC Side Setting 2
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT
THAT CAN BE SET

Navigator
DEVICE RANGE
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
are displayed in green cells, from the
MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
3
Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
in advance are not deleted.However, if the
target network No. overlaps, the item set in
advance is overwritten.
(c) The routing information is used manually by
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
4
after changing the network configuration by
HOW TO MONITOR
MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
information again. For details of the creation
REDUNTANT
of the routing information, refer to the
SYSTEM
MELSOFT Navigator help.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Model Reference 8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, port CPU (one-to-one
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, connection)
Built-in Ethernet 8.4.1
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU,
port QCPU 8.4.2
Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU,
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in
Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU,
Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
configuration.
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V
8.4.4
module Q24DHCCPU-V
L02CPU
POINT
L26CPU
Built-in Ethernet 8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
L26CPU-BT
port LCPU 8.4.2
L02CPU-P For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
L26CPU-PBT following manual.
Ethernet module QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
(Q Series) QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71 Built-in Ethernet Port)
8.4.3
Ethernet module MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-
LJ71E71-100
(L Series) In Ethernet Function)
AJ71QE71N3-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T,  System configuration
AJ71QE71N-B5T, For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to one
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set
Ethernet module
A1SJ71QE71N3-T, 8.4.5
(QnA Series) [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and
A1SJ71QE71N-B5,
A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, then connect Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to the GOT.
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
A1SJ71QE71-B5, Designer3
A1SJ71QE71-B2
<GOT>
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, (The settings other than the
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, following are set to the default)
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3, Network No. :1
A1SJ71E71N3-T, PLC No. :1
Ethernet module A1SJ71E71N-B5, IP address : 192.168.3.1
8.4.6 Port No. : 5001
(A Series) A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-T, Communication : UDP (fixed)
format
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU> *1
Ethernet module (The following settings are set to the default)
FX3U-ENET, FX3U-ENET-ADP 8.4.7 Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
(FX Series)
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *2
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU 8.4.8 IP address : 192.168.3.39
Port No. : 5006 (fixed)
Communication : UDP (fixed)
format
*1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub

and a transceiver, refer to the following.
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
(multiple connection)
*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
1
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT  Checking communication state of Connecting
PROCEDURES FOR
Designer3 to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
2
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time
Designer3, refer to the following.
THAT CAN BE SET

<10ms TTL=32
DEVICE RANGE
8.3.1 Setting communication interface
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
(2) Ethernet setting
Request timed out.
When connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or
LCPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network (2) When abnormal communication
No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
However, these virtual values must be set on the execute the Ping command again.
FOR MONITORING
GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and • Cable connecting condition
ACCESS RANGE
station No. • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
Therefore, set the network No. and station No. • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Set the network No. that is not existed on the • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
network system and any station No.. in the ping command
POINT 4
(3) Controller setting
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value (Use default value)
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
REDUNTANT
GOT NET No. 1
Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
GOT PLC No. 1 For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1 refer to the following manual.
GOT Port No.

5001
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection)
5
(Communication)
BUS CONNECTION
GOT Port No.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Ethernet Download)
5014 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec

6
Timeout Time 3sec
CONNECTION TO
Delay Time 0ms DIRECT

CPU
Item Set value
Host *
7
N/W No. 1*1
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
PLC No. 2*2

Ethernet
setting No.1 Type QnUDE(H), LCPU
IP address 192.168.3.39
Port No.
Communication
5006 (fixed)
UDP (fixed)
8
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.
*2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet
 [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting]
port CPU (multiple connection) for GX Developer
(1) Built-in Ethernet port
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in
Example: [Q parameter setting] screen
Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
configuration.
POINT
Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
following manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
Built-in Ethernet Port)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-
In Ethernet Function)
 System configuration
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
<GOT>
(The settings other than the Setting
following are set to the default) necessity at
Item Set value
Network No. :1 GOT
PLC No. :1 connection
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001 IP address 192.168.0.1
Communication : UDP(fixed)
Subnet mask pattern -
format
Default router IP address -
<Connecting to Built-in Communication data code

1
Ethernet port CPU>
(The settings other than the Enable online change
following are set to the default) (FTP, MC protocol)
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *1 Disable direct connection (Use default value)
IP address : 192.168.0.1 to MELSOFT
Port No. : 5006(fixed)
Do not respond to search
format for CPU (Built-in Ethernet
port) on network
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU>
2
(The settings other than the following are Open settings Refer to (2).
set to the default)
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1 FTP settings
PLC No. : 3 (virtual) *1 (Use default value)
IP address : 192.168.0.2 Time settings
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
format
■ [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter
setting] for GX Developer

1
(2) Open settings  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
Designer3 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE

When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a
GOT, the settings items for the network No. and 3
station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However,
FOR MONITORING
these virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
ACCESS RANGE
Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
Set the network No. that is not existed on the
network system and any station No..
Item Set value
Protocol UDP (fixed) (1) Controller setting 4

Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)
HOW TO MONITOR
Host station port No. (Use default value)
GOT NET No. 1
REDUNTANT
GOT PLC No. 1
SYSTEM
GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
GOT Port No.

5
5014
(Ethernet Download)
BUS CONNECTION
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec 6

Delay Time 0ms
CONNECTION TO
(2) Ethernet setting DIRECT
Set value
CPU
Item
Host * - 7
N/W No. 1*1 1*1
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
PLC No. 2*2 3*2

Ethernet setting QnUDE(H), QnUDE(H),
No.1 Type
LCPU LCPU
IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2
Port No. 5006 (fixed) 5006 (fixed) 8

Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

CONNECTION
*2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the
ETHERNET
PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network.
8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet
 Checking communication state of Connecting
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU module (Q/L Series)
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the
Windows. system configuration.
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 POINT
<10ms TTL=32 Ethernet module (Q/L Series)
(b) When abnormal communication For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 to the following manual.
Request timed out.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
(2) When abnormal communication User's Manual (Basic)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's
execute the Ping command again. Manual (Basic)
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
• The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
 System configuration (for Q series)
in the ping command ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
<GOT> (The settings other than the

POINT following are set to the default)
Network No. :1
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP (fixed)
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, *1
refer to the following manual. <Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
following are set to the default)
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Network No. :1
Maintenance and Inspection) PLC No. :2
IP address : 192.168.0.19
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed)
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
Inspection)
*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".
POINT
When connecting to Q170MCPU
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of
the Ethernet module is set to "70".
1
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Operation setting
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Network parameter
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Communication data code*1 (Use default value) 4

Setting
IP address 192.168.0.19
HOW TO MONITOR
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT Initial timing *1
REDUNTANT
connection
Send frame setting
SYSTEM
Network type Ethernet (fixed)
(Use default value)
Enable Write at RUN time*1
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
TCP Existence confirmation
Network No.*2 1 setting 5
Group No. 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
BUS CONNECTION
*3 2 *1 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the
Station No.
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
Mode Online (fixed) • Communication : [Binary code]
date code
Operation setting Refer to (2)
• Initial timing : "Always wait for OPEN"
Initial settings (Communication is applicable while
Open settings • Enable Write at

stopping the PLC CPU.)
: [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing
6
Router relay parameter RUN time Data is applicable while running the
CONNECTION TO
PLC CPU.)
Station No.<->IP information
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
POINT
DIRECT
CPU
E-mail settings
When changing the network parameter
Interrupt settings
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 7
Redundant settings*4 operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
COMPUTER LINK
Routing Parameters Refer to (3)

CONNECTION

*1 When using Q170MCPU, set the start I/O to 0070H.
*2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.
*3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.
*4 Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU
system. 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(3) Routing parameter setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
However, the same transfer network number cannot be
Designer3
set twice or more (multiple times). (1) Controller setting
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Item Set value (Use default value)
Network No.]s.
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1
GOT Port No.

5001
(Communication)
GOT Port No.

5014
(Ethernet Download)
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
Item Range PLC No. 2

Ethernet
Target network No. 1 to 239 Type QJ71E71
setting No.1
Relay network No. 1 to239 IP address 192.168.0.19
Relay station No. 1 to 64 Port No. 5001 (fixed)
Communication UDP (fixed)
POINT
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
request source GOT. For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
For the setting, refer to the following. Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
(4) Communication confirmation

The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when
the module is ready to communicate.
For confirming the communication state, refer to the
following.
■Confirming the communication state of
Ethernet module
*1
QJ71E71-100
RUN ERR.
INIT. COM.ERR.
OPEN 100M
SD RD
*1 The LEDs layout of QJ71E71-100.
8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller 1
 Confirming the communication state of
module
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and C
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Controller module in the following case of the system
Windows. configuration.
2
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 POINT
Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
THAT CAN BE SET

TTL=64 C Controller module
DEVICE RANGE
(b) When abnormal communication For details of C Controller module, refer to the
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 following manual.
Request timed out. C Controller Module User's Manual (Hardware
(2) When abnormal communication Design, Function Explanation)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
execute the Ping command again.
FOR MONITORING
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
ACCESS RANGE
• Cable connecting condition ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Designer3
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) <GOT>

• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command (The settings other than the
POINT
Network No.
PLC No.
:1
:1 4
IP address : 192.168.3.18
HOW TO MONITOR
Port No. : 5001
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
REDUNTANT
format
SYSTEM
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
<C controller module>
refer to the following manual. 1
(The settings other than the
User's manual of the Ethernet module following are set to the default)
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1 5
BUS CONNECTION
IP address : 192.168.3.1
format
<C controller module>

2
(The settings other than the following are
set to the default)
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1 6
CONNECTION TO
IP address : 192.168.3.2
format
DIRECT
■ Utility setting for C Controller module

CPU

the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. 7
Designer3
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(c) Detail settings
 Utility setting for C Controller module
(1) Q12DCCPU-V
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C
Controller setting utility.
(a) Connection settings
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Setting
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Write authority Mark the checkbox connection
User name*2 target IP address 192.168.3.1
Password*2 password Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Detailed settings - Default gateway -
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary IP address settings CH2 -

*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
changed, input the changed IP address or host name. : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,
input the changed user name and password.
(b) Online operation
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Detailed settings Refer to (3)
(d) System settings (2) Q24DHCCPU-V
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller setting
utility.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(a) Connection settings
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT 3
connection
FOR MONITORING
Points occupied by empty
ACCESS RANGE
slot
Remote reset
Output mode at STOP to
RUN
Intelligent function module
settings
Setting
necessity at
4
Initial settings of intelligent (Use default value) Item Set value
GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
function module connection
WDT (Watchdog timer)
REDUNTANT
192.168.3.39
setting IP Address*1
(Default)
SYSTEM
Error check
255.255.255.0
Operation mode at the Subnet Mask
(Default)
time of error
Module synchronization
Default Gateway - 5
BUS CONNECTION
Built-in Ethernet port open : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Mark the checkbox *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been
settings
changed, input the changed IP address.
Event history registration
(Use default value)
settings

 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
6
POINT
CONNECTION TO
Designer3
DIRECT

CPU

7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
When connecting C Controller module to a GOT,

the setting items for the network No. and station
No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, these
virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
Set the network No. that is not existed on the
8
network system and any station No..
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(1) Controller setting 8.4.5 Connecting to Ethernet
module (QnA Series)
GOT NET No. 1
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
GOT PLC No. 1 Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 system configuration.
GOT Port No. POINT

5014
(Ethernet Download)
Ethernet module (QnA Series)
For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 to the following manual.
Retry 3times For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s
Startup Time 3sec Manual
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms

(2) Ethernet setting ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
Set value <GOT>(The settings other than
Item the following are set to the default)
Network No. :1
Host * - PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001
N/W No. 1*1 1*1 Communication format : UDP(fixed)
PLC No. 2*2 3*2
Ethernet setting *1
<Ethernet module> (The settings other than
No.1 Type QnD(H)CCPU QnD(H)CCPU
the following are set to the default)
IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 Network No. :1
PLC No. :2
Port No. 5006 (fixed) 5006 (fixed) IP address : 192.168.0.19
Port No. : 5001
Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed) Communication format : UDP(fixed)
■ Switch settings of Ethernet module
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
*2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the
PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
 Checking communication state of C
Controller module

Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1
<10ms TTL=32
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1
Request timed out.
At abnormal communication, check the followings and
• The IP address of C Controller module specified in the
ping command
1
 Switch settings of Ethernet module (2) Exchange condition setting switch
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange Setting
PREPARATORY
Exchange
condition setting switch.
MONITORING
Setting Set necessity at
condition Description
switch value GOT
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, setting switch
connection
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, Selection of line
AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
AJ71QE71N3-T *1 A1SJ71QE71N3-T
RUN BUF1
*1
SW1
processing at
TCP timeout
OFF 2
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RDY
BSY
SW.ERR.
BUF2
BUF3 error
THAT CAN BE SET

RDY BUF3 BUF4
BSY BUF4
SW.ERR. BUF5 COM.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 TEST BUF6
Data code
CPU R/W
DEVICE RANGE
BUF7 TEST ERR.
OFF
BUF8 BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
OFF ON SW2
setting*2 (fixed)
TEST
TEST ERR.
MODE
0:ONLINE BCD
SW1
6789A
MODE 1:OFFLINE
EF 12
(1)
‚O
Self start mode
C
AB DE
(1) 2:TEST1
SW2
345
789
0:ONLINE
F01
1:OFFLINE
2 3456
3:TEST2
SW3 ON
2:TEST1 4:TEST3
3:TEST2 ON 5:TEST4
setting*3
4:TEST3 SW1
5:TEST4 SW1
SW2 SW2 SW3
SW3 SW3
SW4
SW5 (2) SW4
SW4
SW6
SW7 SW5
(2)
SW6
SW4
SW8
3
SW7
SW8 SW5
SW6 (Must not to be OFF
ON
SW5
SW7 used) (fixed)
FOR MONITORING
SW8 SW6
ACCESS RANGE
10BASE-T
CPU exchange OFF

SW7
timing setting*2 (fixed)
10BASE-T
Initial timing
SW8 OFF
setting
A1SJ71QE71N3-T
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 4

*2 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the
HOW TO MONITOR
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
*1 The figure of AJ71QE71N3-T and • Data code setting : [Binary code]
A1SJ71QE71N3-T.
REDUNTANT
• Enable Write at : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing
(1) Operation mode setting switch RUN time Data is applicable while running the
SYSTEM
PLC CPU.)
Setting *3 When SW3 is ON, the initial processing is executed
regardless of the initial request signal (Y19).
5
Operation mode setting Set necessity at
Description In addition, communication is applicable while stopping the
switch value GOT
PLC CPU.
connection For the initial processing by using the initial request signal
BUS CONNECTION
(Y19), refer to the following manual.
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
0
Online
(fixed)
POINT
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the switch setting has been changed 6
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Routing parameter setting
(1) Network parameter However, the same transfer network number cannot be
set twice or more (multiple times).
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer
Network No.]s.
Item Range
Target network No. 1 to 239

Setting necessity
Item Set value
at GOT connection Relay network No. 1 to 239
Network type Ethernet (fixed) Relay station No. 1 to 64
Start I/O No. 0000H
Network No.*1 1
POINT
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Station No.*2 2
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
IP address 192.168.0.19 request source GOT.
Station No.<->IP For the setting, refer to the following.
information 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
Router relay parameter
Routing parameters Refer to (2)

POINT
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
(3) Communication confirmation 8.4.6 Connecting to Ethernet 1
module (A Series)
PROCEDURES FOR
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
following. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the
8.3.4 ■Confirming the communication state of system configuration.
Ethernet module
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, 2
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, POINT
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5,
THAT CAN BE SET

AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
Ethernet module (A Series)
DEVICE RANGE
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RUN BUF1 For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to
RDY BUF2
RDY
BSY
BUF3
BUF4
BSY BUF3 the following manual.
SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR.
COM.ERR.
BUF5
BUF6
COM.ERR.
TEST
BUF5
BUF6
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR. BUF7
BUF8
3
CPU R/W BUF8
TEST  System configuration
FOR MONITORING
TEST ERR.
ACCESS RANGE
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3

Designer3 following are set to the default)
Network No. :1
(1) Controller setting PLC No. :1
IP address
Port No.
: 192.168.0.18
: 5001 4
Item Set value (Use default value) Communication format : UDP (fixed)
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT NET No. 1
*1
GOT PLC No. 1 <Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
REDUNTANT
: 1 (virtual)*2
SYSTEM
Network No.
GOT Port No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual)*2
5001 IP address : 192.168.0.19
(Communication)
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed)
GOT Port No.
(Ethernet Download)
5014 ■ Switch settings of Ethernet module
■ Sequence program
5
BUS CONNECTION
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Timeout Time 3sec ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Delay Time 0ms

6
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value
Host *
DIRECT
N/W No. 1
CPU
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type AJ71QE71
7
IP address 192.168.0.19
Port No. 5001 (fixed)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
 Switch settings of Ethernet module (1) Operation mode setting switch
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange
Setting
condition setting switch. Operation mode necessity at
Description Set value
setting switch GOT
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, connection
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
A J71E71N3-T *2 A1SJ71E71N3-T *2
RUN BUF1
RUN
RDY
BUF1
BUF2 0
Online
BUF2
RDY BUF3 BSY BUF3
BSY BUF4 SW.ERR. BUF4
(fixed)
SW.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 COM.ERR. BUF5
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST BUF6
BUF8
TEST ERR. BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
TEST
TEST ERR.
MODE
BCD
MODE
C
0:ONLINE
1:OFFLINE 6789A
EF012
(1)
0:ONLINE
8
2:TEST1
(1)
0
1:OFFLINE 4 345
2:TEST1 3:TEST2
3:TEST2 ON 4:TEST3
4:TEST3
SW1 SW1
SW2
SW3 SW2
(2) Exchange condition setting switch*1

SW4
SW3
SW5
SW6
SW7
(2) SW4 (2)
SW8 SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
ON
Setting
Exchange
10BASE-T condition Description
switch value GOT
setting switch
connection
10BASE-T Selection of line

SW1 processing at TCP OFF
A1SJ71E71N3-T timeout error
Data code setting OFF

OFF ON SW2
(binary code) (fixed)
*2 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T. SW1
SW3
SW2
SW3 SW4 (Must not to be OFF
SW4
SW5 used) (fixed)
SW5
SW6 SW6
SW7
CPU exchange
SW8
timing setting ON
SW7
(Enable write at (fixed)
RUN time)
SW8 Initial timing setting OFF

*1 The exchange condition setting switches of A1SJ71E71-B5-
S3 and A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 are specified as the below.
Setting
Exchange
condition Description
switch value GOT
setting switch
connection
Selection of line
SW1 processing at TCP OFF
timeout error
ON OFF Data code setting OFF

SW2
SW1 (binary code) (fixed)
SW2
SW3 CPU exchange
SW4 timing setting ON
SW3
(Enable write at (fixed)
RUN time)
SW4 Initial timing setting OFF
POINT
PLC CPU.
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present 1
 Sequence program example
PROCEDURES FOR
The sequence program for initial processing and
PREPARATORY
communication line opening processing are required. Buffer memory
MONITORING
address Item Set value
(1) Programming condition Dec (Hex)
This program performs the initial processing of the
Ethernet module and the opening processing of C0A80013H
0 to 1 (0 to 1H) IP address of Ethernet module
connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts (192.168.0.19)
2
running. 16 (10H) Application setting*1 100H
THAT CAN BE SET

(a) I/O signal of Ethernet module 24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001
DEVICE RANGE
25 to 26
IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH
(19 to 1AH)
(b) Device used by user
27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed)
Device Application 80 (50H) Initial fault code ―
M102 COM.ERR turned off command *1 The details of the application setting are shown below.
3
Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user.
D100 IP address of Ethernet module
FOR MONITORING
4), 5) and 6) are fixed.
ACCESS RANGE
D110 Application setting
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D111 Port No. of Ethernet module 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D112 to D113 IP address of GOT 5) 4) 3) 2) 1)
6)
D114 Port No. of GOT
D200 Initial fault code

1) Fixed buffer application
0: For sending; no exchange 4
1: For receiving
HOW TO MONITOR
2) Existence check
0: No
REDUNTANT
1: Yes
3) Pairing open
SYSTEM
0: No
1: Yes
4) Communication format (Set to "1" (UDP/IP).)
0: TCP/IP
1: UDP/IP
5
5) Fixed buffer exchange (Set to "0" (With procedure).)
BUS CONNECTION
0: With procedure
1: Without procedure
6) Open method (Set to "00" (Active, UDP/IP).
00: Active, UDP/IP
10: Unpassive
11: Fullpassive
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(2) Example of sequence program
* Initial processing
IP address of Ethernet
module(192.168.0.19)
Turned on WDT
at first scan ERR
only while detection
running
Initial request
Read the initial fault code.

Initial WDT ERR
fault detection
detection
COM. ERR turned off request

COM.
ERR
turned off Clear the initial fault code.
command
* Opening processing of communication line

Set to the permit of
communication while stopping
Initial request the PLC CPU.
Communication
format(UDP/IP)
No. 1 Normal
open completed
completed initial
Port No. of Ethernet

module(5001)
IP address of GOT
(When GOT is used, FFFFFFFFH)
Port No. of GOT

(When GOT is used, FFFFH)
Request to open
POINT
When changing the sequence program
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
1
(3) Communication confirmation  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
For confirming the communication state, refer to the (1) Controller setting
following.
8.4.3 ■Confirming the communication state of Item Set value (Use default value)
Ethernet module GOT NET No. 1
The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing
GOT PLC No. 1
2
of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at
executing of the sequence program example described
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
at (2). GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, GOT Port No.
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, 5014
(Ethernet Download)
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RUN
RDY
BUF1
BUF2
3
RDY BUF3 BSY BUF3
FOR MONITORING
BSY BUF4 SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR. BUF5 Retry 3times
ACCESS RANGE
COM.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 TEST BUF6
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR.
BUF8 BUF7 Startup Time 3sec
CPU R/W BUF8
Timeout Time 3sec
TEST Delay Time 0ms

TEST ERR.
(2) Ethernet setting 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value
REDUNTANT
Host *
SYSTEM
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type AJ71E71
5
IP address 192.168.0.19
BUS CONNECTION
Port No. 5001
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX
module (FX Series) Configurator-EN
(1) Ethernet settings
Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN.
Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the
For using FX Configurator-EN, install GX Developer Ver.
system configuration.
8.25B or later on the personal computer.
For details on FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following
POINT manual.
FX Configurator-EN Operation manual
Ethernet module (FX Series)
For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to
the following manual.
FX3U-ENET User's manual
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's manual
Designer3
<GOT>
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5019
Communication : TCP (fixed)
format
<Ethernet module> (The settings other than the

Network No. : 1 (virtual)*1
PC No. : 2 (virtual)*1 Setting
Item Setting
IP address : 192.168.0.19 (with GOT connected)
Port No. : 5551
Module Module 0*1
Communication : TCP (fixed)
format Operational settings Refer to (2)
■ Ethernet parameter settings of FX Configurator-EN
*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, Initial settings (Use default value.)
Open settings Refer to (3)
Designer3 Router relay parameter
(Use default value.)
E-mail settings
:Required :Set if necessary :Not required
*1 Set the number of the Ethernet module.
(2) Operational settings (3) Open settings
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Setting
Item Setting
(with GOT connected)
Protocol TCP
Open system MELSOFT connection 3

Fixed buffer
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Fixed buffer communication
procedure
Setting
Item Setting Pairing open
Existence confirmation
Communication (Use default value.)
date code*1 Host station Port No.
(DEC.)
4
IP address 192.168.0.19
HOW TO MONITOR
Transmission target device
Initial timing*1 IP address
REDUNTANT
Transmission target device
Send frame setting
(Use default value.) Port No. (DEC.)
SYSTEM
TCP Existence :Required :Set if necessary :Not required
confirmation setting

POINT 5
*1 Because the port No. 5551 is fixed, the GOT oper-
ates as follows, regardless of the setting for the item.
BUS CONNECTION
• Communication date code : [Binary code] When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
• Initial timing : [Always wait for OPEN] devices
(Communications are enabled while the programmable The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs
controller CPU stops.)
*2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.254. Set the IP
and devices must be set.
address corresponding to the system configuration.
POINT
6
CONNECTION TO
When changing Ethernet parameter
After writing the Ethernet parameter to the
programmable controller CPU, turn off and then on, or
DIRECT
reset the programmable controller CPU.

CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET- (2) Open settings
ADP
(1) Ethernet settings
Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX
Works2.
To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later
is required.
For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Setting
Item Setting
Protocol TCP
Open System MELSOFT connection
POINT
When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
devices
The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs
and devices must be set.
\
Setting
Item Setting
Channel CH1 or CH2*1
IP Address 192.168.1.250*2
Open Settings Refer to (2).
Communication Data
Code
Disable direct
connection to
MELSOFT
Do not respond to
search for CPU on
network

*1 Set a channel according to the installation position of FX3U-
ENET-ADP on the CPU body.
*2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.250. Set the IP
address corresponding to the system configuration.
POINT
When changing Ethernet parameter
After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.
1
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT  Confirming the communication state of
PROCEDURES FOR
Designer3 Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Controller setting (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Item Setting (Use default value.)
Windows.
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1

C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
2
THAT CAN BE SET

TTL=64
DEVICE RANGE
GOT Port No.
(Communication)
5019 (b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT Port No. Request timed out.
5014
(Ethernet Download)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 execute the Ping command again.
FOR MONITORING
Retry 3times • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
ACCESS RANGE
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Delay Time 0ms • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
(2) Ethernet setting POINT 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Setting Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN
Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-EN is
REDUNTANT
Host *
available to a Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
N/W No. 1
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of FX Configurator-
PLC No. 2 EN, refer to the following manual.
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type FX (fixed) FX Configurator-EN Operation manual
5
IP address 192.168.0.19*1
BUS CONNECTION
Port No. 5551*2
Communication TCP (fixed)
*1 Set the value according to the IP address of the connected

PLC.
*2 Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected
PLC.
For details, refer to the following. 6
POINT CONNECTION TO
DIRECT

CPU

7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (2) CNC monitor
(CNC C70)
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display

I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system
configuration.
POINT
Display I/F (CNC C70)
For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the
following manual.
C70 Series SET UP MANUAL
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Setting necessity at
Designer3
Item Set value
GOT connection
IP address 192.168.0.19
Network No. :1 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18 Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port No. : 5001
Port number 64758 (fixed)
Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)

<Q17nNCCPU> (The settings other than the
following are set to the default) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Network No. : 239
PLC No. :2 (3) Communication check
IP address : 192.168.0.19
Port No. : 5001
The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when
Communication format : UDP(fixed) INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit.
■ IP address settings of CNC C70
following.
 IP address settings of CNC C70 ■Checking communication state of CNC C70
(1) Remote monitor tool  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT

Designer3
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1
GOT Port No.

5001
(Communication)
GOT Port No.

5012
(Ethernet Download)

Setting necessity at
Item Set value Retry 3times
GOT connection
Startup Time 3sec
IP address 192.168.0.19
Timeout Time 3sec
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Delay Time 0ms
Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port number 64758 (fixed)
Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Item Set value
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Host *
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
setting No.1
Type Q17nNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.19
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
POINT
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 Checking communication state of CNC C70 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
Windows.
SYSTEM
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
TTL=64
5
BUS CONNECTION
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Request timed out.
• Mounting condition of CNC C70 6
• Switch settings and network parameter settings
CONNECTION TO
• IP address of the CNC C70 specified for the Ping
DIRECT
command
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field
 GX Works2 network parameter
Network Ethernet Adapter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET
Module For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the
following manual.
This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/
adapter module and the PLC in the following system Local Module User's Manual
configuration.
(1) Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting
 System configuration Example: Master station setting
<GOT>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network No. :3 *1
PC No. :1
IP address :192.168.3.18
Port No. :5001
Communication :UDP (fixed)
format
Ethernet
<Ethernet adapter module>

Ethernet setting
IP address :192.168.3.30
CC-Link IE Field Network setting Set value
Item
Network No. :1 Master station Local station
Station No. :1
CC IE Field CC IE Field
Network type
(Master station) (Local station)
CC-Link IE Field Network Network No. 1 1

Total Stations 2 -
HUB Station No. 0 (fixed) 2
*2 (2) Routing parameter setting

<CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module>
Set the followings as necessary.
Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station) Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
Network No. :1 However, the same transfer network number cannot be
PC No. :0
Total Stations :2
Network No.]s.
*2
Network Type : CC IE Field (Local station)
Network No. :1
PC No. :2
*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet
(network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
*2 The CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module is
mounted on slot 0 of the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Master/
Local module is set at [0].
Item Range
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 1 to 64
1
 Ethernet Adapter Module setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module Designer3
PREPARATORY
setting tool.
MONITORING
For details of the setting method, refer to the following
manual.
POINT
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Module User's Manual For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT 2
(1) CC-Link IE Field Network setting Designer3, refer to the following.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT NET No.

3*1
3
FOR MONITORING
GOT PC No. 1
ACCESS RANGE
GOT Port No.
5014
Item Set value (Ethernet Download)
Network No. 1*1

4
Station No. 1*2
HOW TO MONITOR
Retry 3 times
*1 Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side.
Startup Time 3 sec
REDUNTANT
*2 Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side.
Timeout Time 3 sec
SYSTEM
(2) Ethernet setting Delay Time 0ms
*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet

(network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
5
BUS CONNECTION
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 3*1
PC No. 30*2
Ethernet Setting
No.1
Type NZ2GF-ETB
6
IP address 192.168.3.30*3
CONNECTION TO
Item Set value Port No. 5001(fixed)
Communication UDP(fixed)
IP address 192.168.3.30*1
*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet
DIRECT
*1 Set the IP address within the following range. adapter module IP address.
CPU
*2 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet

192.168. 3. 30 adapter module IP address.
Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64.

*3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
7
(3) Routing parameter setting
Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239.
COMPUTER LINK
Item Set value

CONNECTION
Transfer Network No. 1*1
Relay Network No. 3*2
Relay Station No. 30*3
*1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network

No.
8
*2 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet
adapter module IP address.
*3 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet
CONNECTION
adapter module IP address.

ETHERNET
8.4.10 Connecting to PERIPHERAL
I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU
Motion Controller CPU) settings as default in the following system
configuration.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case
of system configuration. <GOT>
POINT Network No. :1
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.1
(1) GOT type setting Port No. : 5001
For details, refer to the following. Communication : UDP (fixed)
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel format
setting)
(2) Setting [Controller Type]
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU> *1
(2) CPU No. specification of Q170MCPU (The following settings are set to the default)
Set whether to monitor the PLC CPU area or the Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
Motion CPU area of Q170MCPU, in the CPU No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *2
specification. For details, refer to the following. IP address : 192.168.3.39
Open system : MELSOFT connection (fixed)
8.5 Precautions
(3) PLC type of GX Works2/GX Developer
*1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub
When creating a program, set the following PLC and a transceiver, refer to the following.
type: 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
• For Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU (multiple connection)
QnUD(E)(H)CPU *2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
• For Q170MCPU the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Q03UDCPU ■[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
(4) Built-in Ethernet port CPU
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to  Basic setting of MT Works2
the following manual. Use the default values of the basic setting for the
User's Manual of Q173D(S)CPU/ system configuration above.
Q172D(S)CPU and Q170MCPU
(1) Built-in Ethernet port
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT
connection
192.168.3.39
IP address
(Default)
Subnet mask pattern -
Default router IP address -
Item Set value
Setting necessity
at GOT (3) Controller setting
1
PROCEDURES FOR
connection
Item Setting (Use default value.)
PREPARATORY
Communication data code
MONITORING
GOT NET No. 1
Enable online change (Use default value)
GOT PC No. 1
(MC protocol)
Open settings Refer to (2)
GOT Port No.
5014 2
(2) Open settings (Ethernet Download)
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3 sec
Timeout time 3 sec
Delay Time 0ms 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1*1
Ethernet
PC No.
Type
2*2
QnUDE(H)
4
setting No.1
HOW TO MONITOR
IP address 192.168.3.39*3
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Item Set value *2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
*3 Set it to the IP address value of the Built-in Ethernet port
Protocol UDP (fixed)
Motion Controller CPU side. 5
Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)
 Checking communication state of Connecting
BUS CONNECTION
Host station port No. -
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows
Designer3 Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
POINT (a) When normal communication 6
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time
CONNECTION TO
Designer3 <10ms TTL=32
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (b) When abnormal communication
Designer3, refer to the following. C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
DIRECT
Request timed out.

CPU

(Communication settings) (2) When abnormal communication
(2) Ethernet setting At abnormal communication, check the followings and
7
The settings items for the network No. and station execute the Ping command again.
No. do not exist at the Built-in Ethernet port
COMPUTER LINK

Motion Controller CPU side. However, these
CONNECTION

virtual values must be set on the GOT side. • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Therefore, set the network No. and station No. on • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not in the Ping command
existed on the network system and any station
No.. 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is
available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX
Developer, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual
(Common)
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
1
8.5 Precautions
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
 Connection to QnA (S) CPU type
MONITORING
Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module
(QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
 Connection to QSCPU power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
the SD memory card becomes available. When the 2
The GOT can only read device data and sequence GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
THAT CAN BE SET

programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
DEVICE RANGE
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
 Connection to Q170MCPU Manual
 When connecting to multiple GOTs
device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). 3
When the CPU No. is set to "1", the device on the PLC (1) Setting PLC No.
When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
FOR MONITORING
CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
ACCESS RANGE
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
When the CPU No. is set to "0", the monitoring target 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
differs depending on the GOT connection destination. (Communication settings)
Refer to the following.
(2) Setting IP address
GOT connection destination Monitoring target
Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) multiple GOTs. 4
PERIPHERAL I/F Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
HOW TO MONITOR
IP address.
REDUNTANT
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring (3) Setting for starting up multiple GOTs simultaneously
(When connected to Built-in Ethernet port CPU)
SYSTEM
cannot be executed.
When connecting multiple GOTs to one Built-in
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. Ethernet port CPU, adjust the timing of GOT
GT Designer3 Version
Manual
Screen Design communication start. When the communication
concentrates on the PLC, the communication between
5
GOT and PLC becomes difficult, and the monitoring by
BUS CONNECTION
GOT may not start. As a method for adjusting the
timing, communicating one GOT alone first, and then
communicating the other GOTs is effective.
Set the following items on each GOT.
• [Startup Time] of [Controller Setting], or [Title Display
Time] of [GOT Setup].
• [Timeout Time] of [Controller Setting] 6
The following shows a setting example.
CONNECTION TO
HUB
DIRECT
QnUDE(H)CPU GOT1 GOT2 GOT10

CPU
Item GOT1 GOT2 GOT10
7
Startup Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
Timeout Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
 When connecting to the multiple network

COMPUTER LINK
 Connection in the multiple CPU system

CONNECTION
equipment (including GOT) in a segment

When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
seconds or more
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more • Using a switching hub 8
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps)
alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT
CONNECTION

ETHERNET

Manual
8.5 Precautions
 When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
 When monitoring to another network No. on

the same line
When the network No. of the GOT does not match with
that of the PLC on the same Ethernet, the PLC cannot
be monitored. When monitoring, set the same network
No. as that of the GOT, or connect a Ethernet module to
the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other
network.
When the Multi-channel is supported for GT16, set
each channel with the networks No. to monitor.
 Remote password for QCPU

Do not set a remote password for QCPU.
Monitoring with GOT becomes unavailable.
 When connecting to Built-in Ethernet port of

Built-in Ethernet port CPU
Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment
such as Built-in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable
the communication.
When the communication with Built-in Ethernet port
CPU is not available, a communication error may occur
on the GOT.
 The number of connectable CPUs for one

GOT
QCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are
recommended)
FXCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are
recommended)
8.5 Precautions
9
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
9.
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
NETWORK
9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
9.4 PLC Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 11 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
9.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9-1
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
(1) Connectable network
When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION.
Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system
(2) MELSECNET/H network module
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type.

Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU MELSECNE *1 *1
T/H 9.2
MELSEC-Q Q25HCPU
(Q mode) Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
- -
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
MELSEC-Q MELSECNE
Q04UDHCPU 9.2
(Q mode) T/H
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU

*1 Use CPU function version B or a later version.
9-2 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q03UDECPU
MELSECNET/H
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
MELSEC-Q Q26UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H 9.2
10
(Q mode) Q50UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q100UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
MELSECNET/H 9.2
11
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
L02CPU
CONNECTION
L26CPU
NETWORK
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU 12
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
CC-Link IE FIELD
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
CONNECTION
Q2ACPU
NETWORK
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
STATION)
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
14
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
CONNECTION
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1 (Via G4)
CC-Link
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU)
A3ACPUR21 - - 15
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A1NCPUR21
INVERTER
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 16
A2NCPUR21-S1
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A3NCPUR21
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9-3

Communication
type
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
controller Q172DCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -


Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
10
A171SCPU
Motion
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN 11
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
NETWORK
WS0-CPU1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O
station
QJ72LP25G - -
12
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
head module
NETWORK
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module 13
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
9.2
CC-Link CONNECTION
Robot
CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/H 9.2
controller
FX0
STATION)
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1 14
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
FX1NC
15
FX2NC -
FX3G
CONNECTION
FX3GC
INVERTER
-
FX3U
FX3UC
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module
Model name
CPU series
Optical loop Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25 QJ71BR11*1
CNC C70 QJ71LP21S-25
QJ71LP21-25
C Controller module QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system
QCPU
MELSECNET/H
GOT
10
network module Communication driver
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/H

Number of 11
MELSECNET/H connectable
Communication Max.
Model name network module Cable model Option device Model
type distance equipment
*1
CONNECTION
QJ71LP21
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21S-25
63 GOTs
C Controller
module
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25
MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25 12
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual.
NETWORK
*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manual. 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system
STATION)
QCPU
MELSECNET/H
network module
GOT Communication driver
14
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
Number of 15
Model name Network module Cable model Option device Model equipment
*2
type distance
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
INVERTER
*1
Coaxial cable
C Controller QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H *4 GT15-J71BR13 31 GOTs
*3
module
MELSEC-QS
*1 Use a PLC CPU of function version B or a later version.
16
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
Use a MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or a later version.

*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual.

For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following.
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method
number of stations.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
• MNET/H mode
• MNET/10 mode
Set the network type.
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click! • MNET/H
Network Type
CONNECTION
(Default: MNET/H mode)
Extended
NETWORK
mode*1
Set the network No.

Network No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 239
menu.
Station No.
1 to 64
13
(Default: 1)
2.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
• Online
(auto.

reconnection)
STATION)
• Offline
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Test between
Set the operation mode of the
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller GOT. slave station*2
Type to be connected. Mode Setting
(Default: • Self-loopback
14
• I/F: Interface to be used Online (auto. reconnection)) test*2
• Driver: MELSECNET/H • Internal self-
loopback
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, test*2 CONNECTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. • H/W test*2 (Via G4)
CC-Link
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
environment. performed when a communication

Retry
timeout occurs.
When no response is received 0 to 5times
15
after retries, a communication
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. times out.
CONNECTION
(Default: 3times)
INVERTER

POINT Timeout
Time
(Default: 3sec)
Delay
load of the network/destination
16
For details, refer to the following: Time PLC.
0 to 300ms
SERVO AMPLIFIER
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (Default: 0ms)

CONNECTION

Set the number of refreshes to

secure the send/receive data in
station units during
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time)
1 to 1000times
Interval Valid when [Secured data send/
Secured data receive] Is marked
by the control station side network
parameters of the melsecnet/h
network system.
Set the communication

transmission speed.
Transmission (Default: 25Mbps)
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10
mode] as The network type, only Item Range
10mbps can be set applicable.
*1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system.
*2 For details, refer to the following manual. Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Relay Station No. 1 to 64

Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
POINT POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility
the relay station.
data. 9.4 PLC Side Settings
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
(2) Precedence in communication settings Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the are displayed in green cells, from the
Utility, the latest setting is effective. MELSOFT Navigator.
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
in advance are not deleted.However, if the
target network No. overlaps, the item set in
advance is overwritten.
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set (c) The routing information is used manually by
twice or more (multiple times). the user when the data is created. Therefore,
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the after changing the network configuration by
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
No.]s. information again. For details of the creation
POINT
Routing parameter setting
When communicating within the host network, routing
parameter setting is unnecessary.
For details of routing parameters, refer to the following

manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network
System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC
network)
9 - 10 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

9
9.4 PLC Side Settings
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system 9.4.2 Switch setting of
configuration shown as 9.4.1. MELSECNET/H network
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
module
the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended
10
Set the station number setting switch and mode setting
Mode as a network type.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switch.
MELSECNET/10
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
POINT
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
RUN MNG RUN MNG
T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK
MELSECNET/H network module SD RD SD
ERR.
RD
L ERR.
ERR. L ERR.
For details of the MELSECNET/H network module,

refer to the following manual.
STATION NO.
23
STATION NO. 23
11
90 1
456
456
90 1
X10 78 X10 78
(1) (1)
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network 23 23
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78

network)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
IN IN
9.4.1 System configuration 34 5 3 45
12
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
BCD MODE BCD
+24V
+24V
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
<GOT>
24G
24G
(Use the default value for settings other
CC-Link IE FIELD
OUT OUT
than the following.)
CONNECTION
(FG)
24G
Network type : MNET/H Mode
NETWORK
Network No. :1 QJ71LP21
Station No. :2 -25 QJ71LP21 S-25
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
Network range assignment *2: LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)
Transmission speed : 10Mbps
<MELSECNET/H network module> *1

QJ71BR11
13
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) QJ71BR11
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RUN MNG
Station No. :1 T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
Mode : Online (10Mbps) L ERR.
ERR.
Network type : MNET/H mode (Control station)
Network No. :1 STATION NO.
23
Total stations :2
901
456
X10
STATION)
Network range assignment *2: LB0000H to LB00FFH 78
23
(1)
LW0000H to LW00FFH
90 1
456
X1
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module 78
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer 345

EF 2
67
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
14
BCD
*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of

the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is
set at "0".
*2 The network type must be set according to the number of
CONNECTION
assignment of send points for each station.
When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or less:
MELSECNET/H mode (Via G4)
CC-Link
When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or more:

MELSECNET/H Extended Mode
POINT QJ71BR11
15
CONNECTION

INVERTER
the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 - 11

(1) Station number setting switch 9.4.3 Parameter setting
Station number setting Set

Setting
necessity at
 Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series
Description
switch value GOT (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection
(a) Network parameter
STATION NO.
23
Station number
456
90 1
X10 78
setting 1
23
(Station No.1)*1
4
90 1
56
X1 78

(2) Mode setting switch
Setting
Set necessity at
Mode setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
Mode setting
34 5
(Online:
EF 2
67
0
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
10Mbps)*2

*2 Set the same mode setting and transmission speed as those
of the GOT.
Setting
POINT Item Set value necessity at

GOT connection
When the switch setting has been changed MNET/H mode

Network type (Control station)
(fixed)
PLC CPU.
Network No.*2 1
Total stations 2
Group No. 0 (fixed)
*3 Online
Mode
Network range assignment Refer to (b).
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
Control station return setting

(Use default value)
Redundant settings*4
Interlink transmission
parameters
Routing parameters Refer to (c).

*1 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system
configuration.
*3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT.
*4 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in
the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the same transfer network number
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of
[Transfer Network No.]s.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting 11
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Monitoring time 200
NETWORK
Station Start 0000H
Send
range No.1 End 00FFH
for
station Start 0100H
12
Station
(LB) No.2 End 01FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
LB/LW
CONNECTION
Station Start 0000H
setting*1 Send
NETWORK
for
station Station Start 0100H Item Range
(LW) No.2 End 01FFH Target network No. 1 to 239
13
Relay network No. 1 to 239
Pairing setting*2 Disable
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Relay station No. 1 to 64
LX/LY setting*1 No setting
Specify I/O master station*1 No setting
STATION)
Specify reserved station No setting
POINT
Supplementary setting Routing parameter setting of request source
Station inherent parameters
(Use default value)
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the 14
request source GOT.
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary For the setting, refer to the following.
*1 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.
CONNECTION
*2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
15
CONNECTION
or resetting.
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Connecting to C Controller module Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the GOT
MELSECNET/H utility. connection
MNET/H mode
(1) Connection settings Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0
Mode*2 Online
Return (Use default value)
Refresh parameters (Use default value)
Total stations 2
Assignment method Start/End
Setting Sta. Start 0000H
each station LB
Send range for
Item Set value necessity at No.1 End 00FFH
GOT connection
Start 0100H
LB/LW settings*3
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) Sta.
Network range assignment No.2 End 01FFH
Write authority Mark the checkbox
Sta. Start 0000H
each station LW
Send range for
User name*2 target
No.1 End 00FFH
Password*2 password
Sta. Start 0100H
Detailed settings -
No.2 End 01FFH
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been (LX/LY) settings*3 No setting
changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, Monitoring time (Use default value)
*3 No setting
Specify I/O master Sta.
(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Specify reserved Sta. No setting
(a) Parameter settings
Supplementary settings (Use default value)

POINT
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and
then ON or reset it.
Setting
Item Set value necessity at
GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)
Routing parameter Refer to (b).
Target module 1
Start I/O No. 0000H
Channel No. (Use default value)

(b) Routing parameter setting 9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT 9
Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Item Set value
[Transfer Network No.]s. Network Type MNET/H mode
Network No. 1: Network No.1

10
Station No. 2: Station No.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)
MELSECNET/10
Retry count 3times (Use default value)
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Delay Time 0sec (Use default value)
Refresh Interval 1time (Use default value)

11
Monitor Speed 10Mbs
POINT
CONNECTION
NETWORK
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
following. 12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Range 13
Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
POINT
14
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. CONNECTION
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

9.5 Precautions
 Network configuration
Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) to  Connection in the multiple CPU system
configure a network including the GOT. When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
The following networks including the GOT cannot be the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
configured. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) seconds or more
 Network type setting MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
• Specify all the network modules on the same network When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
as the same network type. alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the
(MELSECNET/H Mode and MELSECNET/H GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
Extended Mode cannot be mixed.)
• When connecting to MELSECNET/H in the QCPU
redundant system, [MELSECNET/H Extended Mode]
cannot be specified as the network type.
 Connection to QSCPU
The GOT can only read device data and sequence
 Monitoring range programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
monitored in GOT.
 Connection to Q170MCPU
 GOT startup in the MELSECNET/H When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
connection PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
In the MELSECNET/H connection, the data link is When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
startup. cannot be executed.
 When a network error occurs in the system
alarm GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
In the MELSECNET/H connection, when a network
error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm
message cannot be canceled even though the causes
are removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
 MELSECNET/H network module version

For version restrictions of the MELSECNET/H network
module, refer to the following manual.
network)

9.5 Precautions
10
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
10.
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
NETWORK
10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
10 - 1
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC
TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
The MELSECNET/10 connection includes the MELSECNET/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10
mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system

When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.

Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
MELSECNET/10 *1 *1
10.2
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode) Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU

*1 Use CPU function version B or a later version.
10 - 2 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Series Model name Clock
Communication
Refer to
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q04UDHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU 10
Q04UDEHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q06UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10
MELSEC-Q Q10UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
(Q mode) Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU 11
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
CONNECTION
Q13UDVCPU
NETWORK
Q26UDVCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 12
L02CPU
L26CPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L - -
NETWORK
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
(A mode)
Q02HCPU-A MELSECNET/10 10.2 13
Q06HCPU-A
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
(QnACPU)
STATION)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
14
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 - 3

Communication
type
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
(AnCPU) A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21 - -
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 10.2

A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
- -
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU

Communication 9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q172CPU*1*2
MELSECNET/H
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU 10
Q173HCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Motion
controller Q172DCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
MELSECNET/10
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
11
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU 12
A373UCPU-S3
CC-Link IE FIELD
A171SCPU
CONNECTION
Motion
NETWORK
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series) - -
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN 13
A172SHCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A173UHCPU-S1
STATION)
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25-25
14
remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link

head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
15
Ethernet
adapter module
CONNECTION
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2

INVERTER
Robot CRnQ-700
MELSECNET/10 10.2

*1 When using SV13, SV22 or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


Communication
type
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3U
FX3UC
10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module
Model name
CPU series
Optical loop Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
CNC C70
C Controller module QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11

MELSEC-QnA
A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QBR11
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
MELSEC-A
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
Motion controller CPU (A Series)
*1 Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(When MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/10
communication unit is used) communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H,
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment
network module
*1
type distance
12
GT15-J71LP23-25
QJ71LP21
CC-Link IE FIELD
Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-Q QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *3
CONNECTION
*2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
QJ71LP21S-25
NETWORK
*5
C Controller QJ71LP21-25 Optical fiber cable GT15-75J71LP23-25

MELSECNET/10 *2
*3
module QJ71LP21S-25 *4
QJ71LP21
Optical fiber cable GT15-75J71LP23-25
13
MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *3
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*2 *4
QJ71LP21S-25 63 GOTs
AJ71QLP21 GT15-J71LP23-25
AJ71QLP21S Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *3
STATION)
A1SJ71QLP21 *2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
A1SJ71QLP21S *5
AJ71LP21 Optical fiber cable

GT15-J71LP23-25
*4 14
MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 *3
A1SJ71LP21 *2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
*5
CONNECTION
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (Via G4)
CC-Link
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual

Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual

15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
number of stations.
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual 16
*4 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following.
SERVO AMPLIFIER

*5 Not available for the GT155 .
CONNECTION

10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system
MELSECNET/H,
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
network module type distance
*2
MELSEC-Q GT15-J71BR13*5
Coaxial cable
*1 QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 *4
*3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
C Controller
Coaxial cable
module QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 *3
*4 GT15-J71BR13*5
MELSEC-QS
31 GOTs
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71QBR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71QBR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71BR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71BR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
*1 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later.
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.

*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manuals.

number of stations.

*6 Not available for the GT155 .

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) MELSECNET/H 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
2.
MELSECNET/10
3.
11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
• MNET/H mode 12
Set the network type. • MNET/10 mode
Click! Network Type
(Default: MNET/H mode) • MNET/H Extended
CC-Link IE FIELD
mode*1
CONNECTION
Set the network No.
NETWORK
Network No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 239
menu. Set the station No. of the GOT.

Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the • Online
13
channel to be used from the list menu. (Auto Reconnect)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
• Offline
• Test between
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi GOT. slave station*2
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Mode Setting
(Default: • Self-loopback test*2
STATION)
Type to be connected. Online (auto. reconnection)) • Internal self-
• I/F: Interface to be used loopback
• Driver: test*2
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit • H/W test*2 14
MELSECNET/H Set the number of retries to be
When using the MELSECNET/10 communication performed when a communication
CONNECTION
unit timeout occurs.
Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
MELSECNET/10 (Via G4)
CC-Link
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, times out.

(Default: 3times)
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
15
environment. (Default: 3sec)
10.3.2 Communication detail settings Set the delay time for reducing the
CONNECTION

Delay Time 0 to 300ms
INVERTER
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. PLC.

(Default: 0ms)
POINT
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

station units during Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time) However, the same transfer network number cannot be set
1 to 1000times twice or more (multiple times).
Interval Valid when "Secured data send/
Secured data receive" is marked Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
by the control station side network request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
parameters of the MELSECNET/H
No.]s.
network system.
transmission speed. POINT
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode]
(1) Routing parameter setting
as the network type, only 10Mbps
When communicating within the host network,
can be set applicable.
routing parameter setting is unnecessary.
*1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system.
*2 For details, refer to the following manual. (2) Selection of communication unit
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
Routing parameters cannot be set in the GT15-
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 75J71LP23-Z and the GT15-75J71BR13-Z.
When setting routing parameters, use the GT15-
(2) MELSECNET/10 J71LP23-25 or the GT15-J71BR13 according to
the connection type to be used.

manual.
network)

timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
When no response is received after
retries, a communication times out.
(Default: 3times)

(Default: 3sec)
POINT Item Range

(1) When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used Relay Network No. 1 to 239
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network
module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, Relay Station No. 1 to 64
specify the [MNET/10 mode] as a [Network Type].
The communication interface setting can be POINT
after writing [Communication Settings] of project Routing parameter setting of relay station
data. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
For details on the Utility, refer to the following relay station.
manual. For the setting, refer to the following.
GT User's Manual
(3) ■ Switch
Precedence in communication
setting of MELSECNET/H network module settings
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer

10.3.4 Switch setting (Only when (3) Station number setting switch
9
MELSECNET/10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Station number setting
communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H
switch
4
5 6 Set the station No. of the
7 8
2 3
X10 MELSECNET/10 1 to 64: GT15-
POINT
9
0 1
communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
10
STATION
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: GT15-
stations in the network. 75J71BR13-Z
7 8
2 3
Switch setting of the communication unit X1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(Default: 01)
9
0 1
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
MELSECNET/10
the switch setting is not needed.
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the
following manual. Mode setting switch Description Set value
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
User's Manual 67
89
On-line
11
AB
45
0
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
CONNECTION
GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
NETWORK
POINT
RUN POWER
PC
(1) Switch setting example

12
DUAL D.LINK
SW.E T.PASS
M/S.E
For the switch setting example, refer to the

E PRM.E GOT R/W E
R CRC CRC R
R OVER R
OVER
O O
R AB.IF AB.IF R
TIME TIME
DATA
UNDER
LOOP
SD
DATA
UNDER
LOOP
SD
following.
RD RD
CC-Link IE FIELD
F.LOOP R.LOOP
CONNECTION
(2) When the switch setting is changed
NETWORK
4 5 6
(2) When changing the switch setting after mounting

7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1
(4) 67
89
4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
4 5 6 4 5 6
(1) GOT, reset the GOT.

7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X10 X10 NETWORK

9 0 1 9 0 1 No.
(3) (3) Self check test

13
STATION
No.
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
Select "6" to "9" as the mode setting switch to

9 0 1 9 0 1
provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(1) Network number setting switch communication unit.
Network number setting
Description Set value GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
STATION)
switch
User's Manual
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
9 0 1
X100
14
Set the network No. of
4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10
7 8
2 3
X10 NETWORK 1 to 239

9 0 1 No. communication unit.
CONNECTION
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
(Via G4)
CC-Link
7 8
2 3
X1
9 0 1
15
(2) Group number setting switch
Group number setting

CONNECTION

switch
INVERTER
Set the group No. of the

4 5 6 0:
MELSECNET/10
No group
7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
setting (fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
16
*1 The GOT does not use the group number.
Specify "0".
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Model name Reference
QJ71LP21, POINT
QJ71LP21-25,
MELSECNET/H network module 10.4.1
QJ71LP21S-25, When connecting to Q170MCPU
QJ71BR11
AJ71QLP21, the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".
AJ71QLP21S,
MELSECNET/10 network
AJ71QBR11,
module 10.4.2
A1SJ71QLP21,
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QLP21S,
A1SJ71QBR11
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network
module
AJ71LP21,
MELSECNET/10 network Set the station number setting switch and mode setting
AJ71BR11,
module 10.4.3
A1SJ71LP21, switch.
(A Series)
A1SJ71BR1
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H RUN
T.PASS
SD
MNG
D.LINK
RD
EXT.PW
RUN
T.PASS
SD
MNG
D.LINK
RD
network module ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR.
STATION NO. STATION NO. 23

23
90 1
456
456
90 1
X10 78 X10 78
23
(1) 23
(1)
MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
IN IN
the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
34 5 3 45
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
BCD MODE BCD
POINT +24V
+24V
24G
24G
MELSECNET/H network module OUT OUT
For details of the MELSECNET/H network module,

(FG)
24G
refer to the following manual. QJ71LP21

-25 QJ71LP21 S-25

network) QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
RUN MNG
T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 STATION NO.

23
901
■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit

456
X10
78
23
(1)
90 1
456
X1
<GOT> (Use the default value for settings other 78
than the following.) 345

EF 2
67
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
Station No. :2
Mode : Online
Network No. :1
Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)
<MELSECNET/H network module> *1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
Station No. :1
Mode : Online (10Mbps)
Network type : MNET/10 mode (Control station)
Network No. :1
Total stations :2 QJ71BR11
LW0000H to LW00FFH
*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of

the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is
set at "0".

9
(1) Station number setting switch  Parameter setting (when connecting to
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting
MELSEC-Q or QS series)
MELSECNET/H
Station number necessity
setting switch
at GOT
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection (a) Network parameter
Station number
setting 1
10
(Station No.1)*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
11
necessity
Mode setting switch Description Set value
at GOT
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Mode setting
0 (fixed)
(Online: 10Mbps)

12
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Setting
NETWORK
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
PLC CPU.
MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station) (fixed) 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Network No.*2 1
Total stations 2
STATION)
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode Online (fixed)
Network range assignment Refer to (b)

14
Refresh parameters
CONNECTION
Interrupt settings
(Via G4)
Control station return setting
CC-Link
(Use default value)

Redundant settings*3
parameters
15
Routing parameters Refer to (c)
CONNECTION

INVERTER

configuration.
*3 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing parameter setting
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 200
Station Start 0000H

Send
for
station Station Start 0100H
(LB) No.2 End 01FFH
LB/LW
Station Start 0000H
setting*1 Send
for
station Station Start 0100H
(LW) No.2 Item Range
End 01FFH
Pairing setting*2 Disable

POINT
Supplementary setting
(Use default value)
request source GOT.
*1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
*2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in For the setting, refer to the following.
the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting
POINT
or resetting.

9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
necessity at
Controller module) Item Set value
GOT
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the connection
MELSECNET/H utility. MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
(1) Connection settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Mode Online
MELSECNET/10
Return (Use default value)
Total stations 2
Assignment method Start/End

11
Sta. Start 0000H
each station LB
Send range for
Setting No.1 End 00FFH
Start 0100H
CONNECTION
GOT connection
LB/LW settings*2
Sta.
NETWORK
Network range assignment
No.2 End 01FFH
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)
Write authority Mark the checkbox Sta. Start 0000H
each station LW
Send range for
User name*2 target
No.1 End 00FFH 12
Start 0100H
Password*2 password Sta.
CC-Link IE FIELD
No.2 End 01FFH
CONNECTION
Detailed settings -
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (LX/LY) settings*2 No setting
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been Monitoring time (Use default value)
Specify I/O master Sta.*2 No setting
Specify reserved Sta. No setting
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings]
STATION)
POINT 14
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and CONNECTION
then ON or reset it. (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
Setting
INVERTER
GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)

16
Routing parameter Refer to (b).
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Target module 1
CONNECTION
Start I/O No. 0000H

(b) Routing parameter setting
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Item Set value (Use default)
Therefore, the one that can access to other station Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec
POINT
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
 Setting of the MELSECNET/10

communication unit
Item Set value
Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1
Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed)
Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)
POINT
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
Item Range
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
communication unit, refer to the following.
Relay network No. 1 to 239 10.3.1 Setting communication interface
Relay station No. 1 to 120 (Communication settings)
POINT
request source GOT.

10.4.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/ 9
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network
10 network module (QnA
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module
Series)
MELSECNET/H
Set for each setting switch.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the A J71QLP21 A J71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
following case of system configuration.
10
RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER
PC - - MNG PC - - MNG PC - - MNG
REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 - D.LINK 1
SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS
100 M/S.E - - 100 M/S.E - - EX.POWER 100 M/S.E - -
In this section, the network parameter (common

PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W
CRC - - CRC CRC - - CRC CRC -
E OVER - - OVER E E OVER - - OVER E E OVER -
AB.IF - - AB.IF AB.IF - - AB.IF AB.IF -
R TIME - - TIME R R TIME - - TIME R R TIME -
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
R DATA - - DATA R R DATA - - DATA R R DATA -
parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to O UNDER - - UNDER O O UNDER - - UNDER O O UNDER -

R LOOP - - LOOP R R LOOP - - LOOP R R
SD - - SD SD - - SD SD -
RD - - RD RD - - RD RD -
MELSECNET/10
provide explanations.
F.LOOP R.LOOP F.LOOP R.LOOP
NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO.

X100 X100 X100
X10 (1) X10

(1) X10 (1)
POINT X1 X1 X1
GROUP NO.
(2) GROUP NO. (2) GROUP NO. (2)
STATION NO. STATION NO. STATION NO.
MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series)

X10 X10 X10
11
X1
(3) X1
(3) X1
(3)
For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5)
(QnA Series), refer to the following manual.
2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE
OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW

PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1
N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network

3
(6) (6) (6)
PRM D.PRM PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM 3
STATION SIZE 4 STATION SIZE 4 STATION SIZE 4
(8.16.32.64) 5 (8.16.32.64) 5 (8.16.32.64) 5
LB/LW SIZE 6 LB/LW SIZE 6 LB/LW SIZE 6
(2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7
System Reference Manual

8 8 8
CONNECTION
NETWORK
24V
24G
FG
12
FRONT SIDE FRONT SIDE
IN IN
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 OUT OUT
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
RUN PW CRC RUN PW CRC
NETWORK
Station No. :2 MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
EXT.P W
MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
‚q ‚q
Mode : Online DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
Network No. :1 T.PASS

F.E.
PRM E.
R.E.
UNDER
SD
T.PASS
F.E.
PRM E.
R.E.
UNDER
SD
CPU R/W RD CPU R/W RD
Network range assignment: B0100H to B01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) W0100H to W01FFH NETWORK NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY NO. 78 DISPLAY
(4)
13
456
456
901
(4)
901
X100 L R X100 L R
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.) (F.L) (R.L.)
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1 (1) 78
(1) 78
456
456
901
901
X10 X10
23 23
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 78 78
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
456
456
901
901
CC-Link CONNECTION
X1 SW OFF ON X1 SW OFF ON
23 23
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
Station No. :1 78 2 N.ST MNG 78 2 N.ST MNG
(2) (2)
456
456
901
901
GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM
Mode : Online 23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
Network type : MNET/10 (Control station) ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE

(3) ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
456
901
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k X10 7 2,4,6,8k
(3)
23 23
8 EXT.PW 8
Network No. :1 78 78
456
456
901
901
Total stations :2 X1
23 OFF ON
{24V
X1
23 OFF ON
STATION)
SW SW
Network range assignment: B0000H to B00FFH BCD 1 BCD 1

67 A
67 A
EF
EF
(5)
89
89
01
01
MODE 23 2 MODE 23 2
W0000H to W00FFH
45 45
3 3
24G
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6)
■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
2 : OFFLINE 2 : FOFFLINE
6 6
FRONT SIDE 7 FRONT SIDE 7
FG
8 8
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of

IN
(5)
IN
14
the base unit.
OUT OUT
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
set at "0".
A1SJ71QBR11 CONNECTION
A1SJ71QBR11
(Via G4)
CC-Link
RUN PW CRC
‚d
MNG PC OVER
‚q
S.MNG REM. AB. IF ‚q
SWE. TIME ‚n
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA ‚q
T.PASS PRM E. UNDER
SD
CPU R/W RD
NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY
(4)
15
456
901
X100 L R
23
(F.L) (R.L.)
(1) 78
456
901
X10
23
78
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON
23
CONNECTION
1 PC REM.
78 2 N.ST MNG
(2)
456
901
GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM

23 4 ST,SIZE
INVERTER
5 8,16,32,64
ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k
23
(3) 78
8
456
901
X1
23 OFF ON
SW
BCD 1
(5)
67 A
EF
89
01
MODE 23 2
45
3
MODE
(6)
16
4
0 : ONLINE (A.R)
5
2 : OFFLINE
6
7
8
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
A1SJ71QBR11

(1) Network number setting switch
Setting
Network number Set necessity at
Description
setting switch value GOT
connection
NETWORK NO. 78
90 1
4 5 6
X100
23
78 Network
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 No. setting 1

(Network No.1)*1
23
78
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1
23

Setting
Set necessity at
Group number setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
78
Group
No. setting 0
90 1
4 5 6
GROUP.NO.
23 (No group (fixed)
setting)
(3) Station number setting switch
Setting
Set necessity at
Station number setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
STATION.NO. 78
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10
23 Station number
78 setting 1
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1 (Station No.1)*2
23

(4) LED indication select switch
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
DISPLAY
LED indication
L R L (F.L.)
select
(F.L) (R.L.)

9
(5) Mode setting switch  [Network parameter] of GX Developer
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting (1) Network parameter
MELSECNET/H
Set necessity at
value GOT
connection
MODE BCD Mode setting 0 10

89A
EF
(Online) (fixed)
01
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
67
23
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
45
2 : OFFLINE
MELSECNET/10
(6) Condition setting switches
Setting
Condition setting
switches
Setting
switch
Description
Set
value
necessity at
GOT
11
connection
Network type
CONNECTION
(PLC to PLC OFF
SW1
NETWORK
net-work (fixed)
(PC))
Station type
OFF ON
SW
SW2
(Control
station
ON
(fixed)
12
Setting
1 (MNG))
necessity at
CC-Link IE FIELD
2 Item Set value
Parameter GOT
CONNECTION
3 for using*1 connection
NETWORK
OFF
4 SW3 (common
(fixed) MNET/10
5 parameter Network type
(Control station) (fixed)
(PRM))
6
7 SW4 No. of OFF
Start I/O No. 0000H
13
8 stations*1 (fixed) Network No.*1 1
SW5
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SW6 B/W Total stations 2
OFF
Total BW Network range assignment Refer to (2)
SW7 (fixed)
points*1
STATION)
Refresh parameters
OFF
SW8 Not used Interlink transmission (Use default value)
(fixed)

parameters

14
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated
by default parameters.
For details, refer to the following manual. : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number
CONNECTION
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System
setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module.
Reference Manual
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
15
select switch) is changed
CONNECTION
PLC CPU.
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting
Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 200
Send Start 0000H

Station
range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
each Start 0100H
Station
station
No.2 End 01FFH
BW (LB)
setting*1 Send Start 0000H
Station
range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
each Item Range
Station Start 0100H
station Target network No. 1 to 239
No.2 End 01FFH
(LW)
XY setting*1 No setting

POINT
(Use default value) Routing parameter setting of request source
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary request source GOT.
POINT
or resetting.

10.4.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/ 9
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
10 network module (A Series)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Retry 3times This section describes the settings of the GOT and
MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the
Timeout Time 3sec
following case of system configuration.
In this section, the network parameter (common
parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to 10
POINT
provide explanations.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT POINT
10.3.1 Setting communication interface MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series)
(Communication settings) For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (A
Series), refer to the following manual. 11
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to
 Setting of the MELSECNET/10 PLC network) Reference Manual
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value  System configuration
Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 ■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) <GOT>
12
Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 than the following.)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Station No. :2
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) Mode : Online
CONNECTION
Network No. :1
NETWORK
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) LW0100H to LW01FFH
POINT
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1
Station No.
Mode
:1
: Online 13
Network type : MNET/10 (Control station)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
communication unit, refer to the following. Network No. :1
Total stations :2
10.3.1 Setting communication interface Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH
LW0000H to LW00FFH
(Communication settings) ■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
STATION)
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of

the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is 14
set at "0".
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network (1) Network number setting switch
module Setting
Set for each setting switch. Network number Set necessity at
Description
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
connection
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
RUN -
PC -
- POWER
- MNG
RUN -
PC -
- POWER
- MNG
NETWORK NO. 78
90 1
4 5 6
10REMOTE - - S.MNG 1 REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 1
DUAL -
SW.E -
100M/S.E -
- D.LINK
- T.PASS
- EX.POWER 100
SW.E -
M/S.E -
- D.LINK
- T.PASS
-
X100
PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W
CRC - - CRC CRC - 23
E OVER - - OVER E E OVER -
AB.IF - - AB.IF R AB.IF -
R TIME - - TIME R TIME -
R DATA -
O UNDER -
LOOP -
- DATA
- UNDER O
- LOOP
R R
O
DATA -
UNDER - Network
R R SD - - SD R R
SD - 78
RD - - RD RD -
No. setting
9 0 1
4 5 6
F.LOOP R.LOOP
X10 1
NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO. 23 (Network
X100 X100
*1*2
78 No.1)
(1) (1)
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 X10
X1
X1 X1 23
GROUP NO. (2) GROUP NO. (2)

STATION NO. STATION NO.
X10 X10
(3) (3) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

X1 X1
MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) 0: ONLINE(A.R)
2: OFFLINE
MODE
(5) *2 Do not specify a number between 240 and 255.
2: OFFLINE
OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW

PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1
N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2
PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM 3
STATION SIZE
(8.16.32.64)
LB/ LW SIZE
4
5
6
(6) STATION SIZE
(8.16.32.64)
LB/LW SIZE
4
5
6
(6)
(2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7
8 8
Setting
Group number Set necessity at
Description
connection
FRONT SIDE
IN
OUT
78
Group No.
setting 0
90 1
4 5 6
GROUP.NO.
23 (No group (fixed)
setting)
RUN PW CRC RUN PW CRC
E E
MNG PC OVER MNG PC OVER
R R
S.MNG REM. AB. IF R S.MNG REM. AB. IF R
DUAL SWE. TIME O SWE. TIME O
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R
T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER
F.E. R.E. SD SD
CPU R/W RD CPU R/W RD
NETWORK NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY NO. DISPLAY
78
Setting
456
901
X100
(4) (4)
5
L R X100 L R
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.)
(1)
78
(1)
78
Set necessity at
456
901
Station number setting switch Description

5
X10
0
X10
23 23
78 78 value GOT
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON X1 SW OFF ON
connection
23 23
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
78 2 N.ST MNG 78 2 N.ST MNG
(2) (2)
456
901
3 PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM

5
GR.NO.
0
GR.NO.
23 4 ST,SIZE 23 4 ST,SIZE
5 8,16,32,64 5 8,16,32,64
ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10
5
7 2,4,6,8k X10 7 2,4,6,8k

0
(3)
23
78
8
(3)
23
78
8
STATION.NO. 78
9 0 1
4 5 6
456
901
X1 X1
X10
5
23
OFF ON
23 OFF ON
SW SW
(5)
CD
AB E 1
(5)
BCD 1 23 Station number
89
789
F01
F01
MODE 2 MODE 2
67
23 345
45
setting
3 3
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
4
5
(6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
4
5 (6) 78 1
9 0 1
2 : OFFLINE
4 5 6
(Station No.1)*3
2 : OFFLINE
FRONT SIDE
6
7
6
7 X1
8 8
23
IN
OUT

(4) LED indication select switch
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
DISPLAY
LED indication
L R L (F.L.)
select
(F.L) (R.L.)

9
(5) Mode setting switch  [Network parameter] of GX Developer
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting (1) Network parameter
MELSECNET/H
Set necessity at
value GOT
connection
Mode setting 0
10
MODE BCD
67 A
(Online) (fixed)
EF
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
89
0:ONLINE(A.R)
01
23
MELSECNET/10
45
2:OFFLINE
Setting 11
Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
Description
switches switch value GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Network type
NETWORK
(PLC to PLC OFF
SW1 Setting
net-work (fixed)
(PC)) necessity at
Item Set value
Station type
GOT
connection 12
OFF ON (Control ON
SW SW2 MNET/10
station (fixed) Network type
CC-Link IE FIELD
1 (MNG)) (Control station) (fixed)
CONNECTION
2
Start I/O No. 0000H
NETWORK
Parameter
3
*1
for using Network No.*1 1
4 OFF
SW3 (common
5 (fixed)
parameter Total stations 2
6
7
(PRM))
Network range assignment Refer to (2) 13
SW4
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
8 No. of OFF Refresh parameters
SW5 stations*1 (fixed)
Interlink transmission (Use default value)
SW6 Total B/W OFF parameters
STATION)
SW7 points*1 (fixed)
OFF : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
SW8 Not used
(fixed)

*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number
setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module. 14
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated
by default parameters.
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC CONNECTION
network) Reference Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
15
When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
select switch) is changed
CONNECTION

INVERTER
PLC CPU.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(2) Network range assignment (3) Routing parameter setting
Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 200
Send Start 0000H

Station
range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
each Start 0100H
Station
station
No.2 End 01FFH
LB/LW (LB)
*1
setting Send Start 0000H
Station
range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
each Start 0100H
Station
station
No.2 End 01FFH
(LW)
Item Range
LX/LY setting*1 No setting Target network No. 1 to 239
Specify I/O master station*1 No setting Relay network No. 1 to 239
Specify reserved station No setting Relay station No. 1 to 64
(Use default value)
Station inherent parameters POINT
request source GOT.
POINT For the setting, refer to the following.
or resetting.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec
10
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
 Setting of the MELSECNET/10
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value
Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1
Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) 12

CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
communication unit, refer to the following.
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

10.5 Precautions
 Network configuration
Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H  Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
(PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC CNC C70, CRnQ-700
network) to configure a network including the GOT.
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
configured. 700 are applicable to the MELSECNET/H connection
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) (PLC to PLC network) only.
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)
For connecting the GOT to the MELSECNET/10
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC network system (PLC to PLC network), set the
to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network)
following. to the MELSECNET/10 mode.
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
PLC NETWORK)  Connection to QSCPU
 Monitoring range programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
monitored in GOT.
For details, refer to the following manual.  Connection to Q170MCPU
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
Manual device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
 Starting GOT with MELSECNET/10 When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
connection
With the MESLSECNET/10 connection, the data link When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts. to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
 When a network error occurs in the system For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
alarm GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs Manual
with the MELSECNET/10 connection, the system alarm
is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
factor is removed.

When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
seconds or more
Manual
 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H
network module and QCPU (Q mode).

10.5 Precautions
11
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 7
NETWORK
11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 8
11.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 16
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
11 - 1
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK
CONNECTION

Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 CC-Link IE *1 *1
11.2
*1
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU
MELSEC-Q (Extension base)
(Q mode)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
CC-Link IE 11.2
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU

11 - 2 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

Communication
Refer to
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q50UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 11.2
(Q mode)
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE 11.2
MELSECNET/10
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CC-Link IE 11.2
L02CPU
L26CPU
MELSEC-L
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
- - 11
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1 12
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q4ACPU
CONNECTION
Q4ARCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
13
A2UCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
STATION)
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 14
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU CONNECTION
A3ACPUP21 (Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21 15
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
CONNECTION
A2NCPUP21
INVERTER
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
CONNECTION

11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 - 3

Communicati
on type
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
Q172DCPU
controller
CPU Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1 CC-Link IE 11.2

Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*1
MR-MQ100 - -


Communication
Refer to
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 10
A171SCPU-S3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
controller
- -
CPU
MELSECNET/10
A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
11
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
CONNECTION
WS0-CPU1
NETWORK
station
QJ72BR15
12
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE FIELD
head module
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE
NETWORK
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE 11.2 13

Robot CRnQ-700
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE 11.2
FX0
FX0S
STATION)
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
14
FX2C
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N
-
- CONNECTION
FX2N (Via G4)
CC-Link
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
15
FX3GC
-
FX3U
CONNECTION
FX3UC
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit*1

MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
C Controller module
MELSEC-QS QJ71GP21-SX
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71GP21S-SX
CNC C70
*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or
later.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE controller
QCPU GOT
network module Communication driver
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Number of
CC-Link IE controller connectable
Model name*5 network
communication unit*1
Communication
type
Cable model
Max.
distance
Option device Model equipment 12
MELSEC-Q
CC-Link IE FIELD
C Controller QJ71GP21-SX Optical fiber cable
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE *3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 119 GOTs*4
module QJ71GP21S-SX *2
NETWORK
MELSEC-QS
*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or
later.
For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Controller Network module side, refer to the following manual.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION

number of stations.
STATION)
*4 When Universal model QCPUs is a control station, up to 119 GOTs can be connected.
When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station, the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units (at most).
14
Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station.
*5 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, only MELSEC-Q series Universal model QCPU can be used.
*6 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a module with the serial No. 02910908******* or later.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

11.3 GOT side settings
Set the channel of connecting equipment.
2.
3.
4.
• CC IE Control
Network Set the network Type
• CC IE Control
Type*4 (Default: CC IE Control)
extended mode
Set the network No.
Network No. 1 to 239
Click! (Default: 1)
Station No. 1 to 120
(Default: 1)
• Online
(auto.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the reconnection)
menu. • Offline
Set the operation mode of the GOT. • Test station*1

2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Mode Setting (Default: • Self-loopback
channel to be used from the list menu. Online (auto. reconnection)) test*1
• Internal self-
3. Set the following items. loopback test*1
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi • Line test*1
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller • H/W test*1
Type to be connected. Set the number of retries to be
• I/F: Interface to be used performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
• Driver: CC-Link IE Controller Network Retry 0 to 5times

(Default: 3times)
Make the settings according to the usage Timeout
Time
environment. (Default: 3sec)
11.3.2 Communication detail settings Set the delay time for reducing the
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms
(Default: 0ms)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Set the number of refreshes to
station units during communication.
POINT (Default: 1ms)
Refresh
Valid when [Block data assurance 1 to 1000ms
The settings of connecting equipment can be Interval
per station is available.] is checked
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. by the control station side network
For details, refer to the following. parameters of the CC-Link IE
Controller Network.

9
Set the monitor speed for the CC-
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Monitor *2 *3
This setting is not valid in all High /Normal/Low
MELSECNET/H
Speed
systems.
(Default: High) When communicating within the host network, routing
*1 For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
manual. 10
monitor screen. CC-Link IE Controller Network
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time Reference Manual
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/
MELSECNET/10
Q00/Q01CPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)
sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/
Q01CPU. 11
*4 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended
mode, set to [CC IE Control extended mode]. The extended
mode can be used in GT Designer3 version 1.22Y or later.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
For the switch setting example, refer to the 12
following. Item Range
CC-Link IE FIELD
11.4 PLC Side Setting Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
CONNECTION
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility Relay Network No. 1 to 239
NETWORK
Universal model QCPU 1 to 120
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] Relay Station
QCPU other than Universal model
after writing [Communication Settings] of project No. 1 to 64
data. QCPU*1
For details on the Utility, refer to the following *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
13
manual.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT User’s Manual
POINT
STATION)
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
(4) Network type the relay station.
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU
side and the GOT side. If the net work types of the
For the setting, refer to the following. 14
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side. (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link

11.3.3 Routing parameter setting MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No., 15
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
CONNECTION
twice or more (multiple times). in advance are not deleted.However, if the

INVERTER
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the target network No. overlaps, the item set in
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network advance is overwritten.
No.]s. (c) The routing information is used manually by
after changing the network configuration by 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Link IE controller network module in the following case of  System configuration2
system configuration. (Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode)
<GOT>
POINT
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode
Network No. :1
CC-Link IE Controller Network module Station No. :2
For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH
module, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Controller Network
Monitor Speed : High
LW00100H to LW001FFH
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference

<CC-Link IE Controller Network module> *1
Manual (Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
Station No. :1
Mode : Online
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode
 System configuration1 (Control station)
Network No. :1
(Network Type: CC IE Control) Total stations :2 LB0000H to LB00FFH
Network range assignment : LW00000H to LW000FFH
■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) *1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on
slot 0 of the base unit.
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network
than the following.) module is set at [0].
Network type : CC IE Control
Network No. :1
Station No. :2
Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH
<CC-Link IE Controller Network module> *1

Station No. :1
Mode : Online
Network type : CC IE Control (Control station)
Network No. :1
Total stations :2
Network range assignment : LB0000H to LB00FFH
*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on

slot 0 of the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network
module is set at [0].
POINT
the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set to
"70".

(b) Network range assignment 9
 Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q, QS series) of System configuration1
MELSECNET/H
(Network Type: CC IE Control)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
Item Set value

necessity at
GOT
11
connection
Monitoring time 2000
CONNECTION
Station Start 0000H
NETWORK
No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H
LB/LW No.2 End 01FFH

12
setting(1)
*1 Station Start 00000H
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
No.1 End 000FFH
NETWORK
LW
Station Start 00100H
Setting
No.2 End 001FFH
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
13
station*1 No setting
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Specify I/O master
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC IE Control
Network type
(Control station) (fixed) Specify reserved station No setting
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H Supplementary setting (Use default value)
STATION)
Network No.*2 1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Total stations 2
Group No. 0 (fixed) 14

POINT
Station No. 1
Mode*3 Online
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, CONNECTION
Network range assignment Refer to (b)
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON (Via G4)
CC-Link
Refresh parameters or resetting.

Interrupt settings
(Use default value)
15
parameters

CONNECTION
INVERTER

configuration.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(c) Routing parameter setting
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.  Parameter setting (when connecting to C
However, the same transfer network number Controller module)
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE
Therefore, the one that can access to other station Control utility.
[Transfer Network No.]s. (1) Connection settings between personal computer
and C controller module
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Item Range User name*2 target

Password*2 password
Detailed settings -
POINT *2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,

request source GOT.

(2) CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings] (b) Network range assignment 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection 11
Total stations 2
Setting Station Start 0000H

necessity at
CONNECTION
Item Set value No.1 End 00FFH
GOT
NETWORK
LB
connection
Station Start 0100H
Number of modules 1 No.2 End 01FFH

12
LB/LW
Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) settings (1)
Routing parameter Refer to (c) No.1 End 000FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
LW
Target module 1
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Start I/O No. 0000H No.2 End 001FFH
Channel No. 151 LX/LY settings*1 No setting

CC IE Control
Network type
(Control station)
Monitoring time (Use default value)
13
Operation settings
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Mode*1 Online
Network No.*2 1
Group No. 0
STATION)
Station No. 1 *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Network range POINT

14
Refer to (b)
assignment
CONNECTION
*2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(c) Routing parameter setting
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.  GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of
However, the same transfer network number System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Control)
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Item Set value
Network Type CC IE Control
Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)
Retry 3times (Use default value)
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)
Monitor Speed High (Use default value)
POINT
Item Range
POINT
request source GOT.

9
 Parameter settings (Connection to Universal POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
model QCPU) of System configuration2
MELSECNET/H
(Network Type: Extended mode) (1) Network type of the GOT side
When the network is in the extended mode, be
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Works2 sure to set the network type of the GOT side to
(a) Network parameter [CC IE Control extended mode].
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to
the following. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
(2) Network type of the PLC side
Only GX Works2 can set [CC IE Control extended
mode (control station)] or [CC IE Control extended
mode (ordinary station)]. The CPU which is
compatible with the extended mode is Universal
model QCPU only. 11
Setting necessity
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
CC IE Control Ext. Mode
Network Type
(Control station) (fixed)
Start I/O No.*1 0000H
Network No.*2 1
12
Total Stations 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Group No. 0 (Fixed)
NETWORK
Station No. 1
Mode*3 Online
Network Range
Same as the following setting 13
[Network parameter]
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Assignment
CC-Link CONNECTION
of GX Developer
Refresh Parameters
Interrupt Setting
STATION)
(Use default value)
parameters
Same as the following setting 14

Routing parameters [Network parameter]
of GX Developer
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
(2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Item Set value
Network type CC IE Control extended mode 15


CONNECTION
INVERTER
Mode Online (auto. reconnection)
Delay Time 1ms (Use default value) 16

Refresh Interval High (Use default value)
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

11.5 Precautions
 GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection  Connection to Q170MCPU
For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
GOT startup.
 When a network error occurs in the system PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
alarm When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system cannot be executed.
alarm display cannot be canceled even though the For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
causes are removed. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Manual
 Connection in the multiple CPU system Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
seconds or more
alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the
Manual
 CC-Link IE Controller Network module

version
For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Controller
Network module, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference
Manual
 Connection to QSCPU
programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.

11.5 Precautions
12
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSECNET/10
12.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
12.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
12 - 1
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK
CONNECTION

Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1 - -
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU(Main base)
Q25PRHCPU(Main base)
Q12PRHCPU(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU(Extension base)
MELSEC-Q
Q00UJCPU
(Q mode)
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU CC-Link IE
FIELD 12.2
Q20UDHCPU NETWORK
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
12 - 2 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q50UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q Q04UDVCPU
(Q mode) 12.2
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU 10
Q26UDVCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE
MELSECNET/10
FIELD 12.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V
NETWORK
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*3 12.2
L02CPU*2
L26CPU
MELSEC-L
L26CPU-BT*2 11
12.2
L02CPU-P*2
L26CPU-PBT*2
L02SCPU
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
NETWORK
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
12
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q4ACPU
CONNECTION
Q4ARCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1 13
A2UCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
STATION)
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 14
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
CONNECTION
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21 (Via G4)
CC-Link
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
15
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
CONNECTION
A2NCPUR21
INVERTER
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU 16
A3NCPUP21
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A3NCPUR21

CONNECTION
*3 Use a module with the upper five digits later than "13042". Use GX Developer of Version 8.98C or later.
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 - 3

Communication
type
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU
CPU
(Q Series) Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
CC-Link IE -
Q173DCPU-S1 FIELD
Q172DSCPU NETWORK
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*1 *2 *2
12.2

*2 For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later than 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored.

Communication
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3 10
A171SCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Motion
MELSECNET/10
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU 11
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
NETWORK
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25-25
12
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
NETWORK
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 FIELD 12.2
head module NETWORK
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE
Field Network
Ethernet
NZ2GF-ETB FIELD 12.2 13
NETWORK
adapter module
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU FIELD 12.2
NETWORK
STATION)
CC-Link IE
Robot CRnQ-
FIELD 12.2
controller 700(Q172DRCPU)
14
NETWORK
FX0
FX0S
-
CONNECTION
FX0N
FX1 (Via G4)

CC-Link
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S 15
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
CONNECTION
FX1NC
INVERTER
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC
- 16
FX3U
SERVO AMPLIFIER
FX3UC
CONNECTION

12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
MELSEC-Q(Universal model) QJ71GF11-T2, QD77GF16
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE
PLC CPU GOT
Field Network unit
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
CC-Link IE Field Number of
Model name
Network
communication
Communicatio
n type
Cable model*2
Max
distance*1
option device Model
connectable
equipment
12
unit
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSEC-Q
CONNECTION
(Universal model) QJ71GF11-T2
NETWORK
Q170MCPU QD77GF16*3
C Controller module
Ethernet cable that meets the
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2 1000BASE-T standard:
CC-Link IE
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2 Field Network
Category 5e or higher,
(double-shielded, STP)
12100m GT15-J71GF13-T2 120 GOTs
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC-Link IE Field straight cable.
-
Network head module
Ethernet adapter
-
module
STATION)
*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring),
the system configuration, etc.
14
*2 Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions.
• Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T)
CONNECTION
• Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function
• Supporting the auto-negotiation function
• Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.) (Via G4)
CC-Link
Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi electric products)

Type Model name
Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8 15
CONNECTION
*3 When connecting to the QD77GF16, refer to the following manual.

INVERTER
MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

2.
3.
4.

Network
Set the network Type • CC IE Field
Type*4
Click! Set the network No. of the GOT.
Network No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
Station No. 1 to 120
(Default: 1)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the • Online

• Offline
Set the operation mode of the GOT.
menu.
Mode Setting (Default: • H/W test*1

Online (auto. reconnection)) • Self-loopback
test*1
3. Set the following items. Refresh

Interval
station units during communication.
1 to 1000ms
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi (Default: 25ms)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Set the hold/clear of input from the
Type to be connected. station where the data link is faulty
Input for Error
• I/F: Interface to be used due to some reason such as turning Clear/Hold
Station
• Driver: CC-Link IE Field Network the power OFF.
(Default: Clear)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Set the number of retries to be
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
environment. retries, the communication times
12.3.2 Communication detail settings out.
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Timeout
Time
(Default: 3sec)
POINT Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms
(Default: 0ms)
Set the monitor speed for the CC-
Link IE field network.
For details, refer to the following. Monitor
This setting is not valid in all High*2/Normal/Low*3
Speed
1.1.2 I/F communication setting systems.
(Default: High)

*1 For details, refer to the following manual. 9
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
User's Manual
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
MELSECNET/H
monitor screen.
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.) 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
MELSECNET/10
POINT
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239 11
following. Relay Network No. 1 to 239
12.4 PLC Side Setting Relay Station MELSEC-Q (Universal model)

0 to 120
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility No. Q170MCPU C Controller Module
CONNECTION
NETWORK
The communication interface setting can be *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
POINT
data.
12
manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT User’s Manual
CONNECTION
the relay station.
(3) Precedence in communication settings For the setting, refer to the following.
NETWORK
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
(4) Network type
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU
13
side and the GOT side. If the network types of the
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.
MELSOFT Navigator.
STATION)
12.3.3 Routing parameter setting reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. in advance are not deleted. However, if the 14
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set target network No. overlaps, the item set in
twice or more (multiple times). advance is overwritten.
CONNECTION
(c) The routing information is used manually by
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network (Via G4)
CC-Link
after changing the network configuration by

No.]s.
POINT of the routing information, refer to the 15
CONNECTION
When communicating within the host network, routing

INVERTER

manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network 16
Reference Manual
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Link IE controller network module in the following case of
 Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-
system configuration. Q, QS series) of System configuration
(Network Type: CC IE Field)
POINT (1) Network parameter] of GX Works2
Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later.
CC-Link IE Field Network Module (a) Network parameter
For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module,
User's Manual
(Network Type: CC IE Field)
■ GT Designer3 [Communication setting] of System
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Field)
<GOT>
Network type : CC IE Field
Network No. :1
Station No. :1
Mode Setting : Online
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH
RWW/RWr00 to FFH
<CC-Link IE Field Network module> *1

Station No. : 0 (fixed)

Mode : Online (normal) Setting
Network type : CC IE Field (Master station)
Network No. :1 necessity at
Total stations :1 Item Set value
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00H to FFH
GOT
RWW/RWr00H to FFH connection
■ [Network parameter] of GX Works2
CC IE Field
*1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 Network type
(Master station) (fixed)
of the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
set at [0].
*2 1
Network No.
POINT Total stations 1
Station No. 0 (fixed)

When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of Online
Mode*3
(Normal mode)
the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set to "70".
Network Configuration
Refer to (b)
Settings
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
(Use default value)
parameters

configuration.

(b) Network Configuration Settings (c) Routing parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Item Set value
Setting
necessity at 11
GOT
connection
Rx/RY Station Start 0000H
CONNECTION
setting No.1
NETWORK
Rx/RY, End 00FFH
RWw/RWr
setting(1)*1 RWw/RWr Station Start 00000H
setting No.1 End 000FFH
12
Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
(1) When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC
Item Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
then ON or resetting. Relay network No. 1 to 239
(2) GOT station type
Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.
STATION)
POINT
14
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of
System configuration (Network Type: CC IE
Field)
Item Set value
Network Type CC IE Field
Mode Setting Online
Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value)
POINT

9
12.5 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network
connection  Data link failure in other stations at GOT
For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data startup
link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT At GOT startup, the data link failure may occur in other
startup. stations.
10
However, after the failure occurrence, the GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 When a network error occurs in the system reconnects automatically and monitors the devices
MELSECNET/10
alarm properly.
In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a To avoid such data link failure, start up the GOT 10
network error occurs in the system alarm, the system seconds earlier than the master station.
alarm display cannot be canceled even though the However, if the master station does not complete
causes are removed. startup when GOT starts monitoring (10 seconds after 11
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. the GOT startup), the communication timeout occurs in
the GOT side.
 CC-Link IE Field Network module version For details, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
NETWORK
module, refer to the following manual. User's Manual
User's Manual
 Data link failure in all stations at GOT startup 12
 Connection to Q170MCPU or cable connection/disconnection
CC-Link IE FIELD
The Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) cannot be At GOT startup, the communication is broken
CONNECTION
monitored. temporarily between PORT1 and PORT2 in the CC-
NETWORK
Set the CPU No. to "0" or "1". Link IE Field module which is installed on the GOT.
The device of the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is Thus, as the GOT or a station between the GOT and
monitored. the master station is reconnected, the data link failure
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. may occur on all stations. 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Manual
POINT
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device GOT startup
STATION)
GOT startup indicates the startups after the following
operations:
• Turning ON the GOT
• Resetting the GOT main unit
14
• Operating the utility
• Downloading the project including the
CONNECTION
communication settings
• Downloading the OS (Via G4)
CC-Link
 When the output is required to be held at the

data link failure 15
Set the GOT to hold the input from the data link faulty
stations in the communication setting. Set "Input for
CONNECTION
Error Station" to "Hold".

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

12.5 Precautions
12.5 Precautions
13
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
13.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12 13
13.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 39
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
13 - 1
13. CC-Link CONNECTION
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)


Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
CC-Link(ID) 13.2
(Q mode) Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
CC-Link(ID) 13.2
module Q24DHCCPU-V

13 - 2 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

Communicati
Refer to
9
on type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-B
MELSEC-L CC-Link(ID) 13.2.2
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
MELSECNET/10
Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU 11
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
CONNECTION
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
NETWORK
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU 12
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
A2ACPUP21
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
STATION)
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21 14
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 CONNECTION
(Via G4)
A3NCPU
CC-Link
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU 15
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A1SCPU
INVERTER
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
16
A2SHCPU-S1
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A1SJCPU
CONNECTION
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 - 3

Communication
type
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Motion Q173HCPU
controller Q172DCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1


Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS0-CPU0
MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
head module
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2

Robot 11
CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link(ID) 13.2
controller
FX0
FX0S
CONNECTION
-
NETWORK
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
-
12
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
CC-Link IE FIELD
-
CONNECTION
FX2N
NETWORK
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3G
FX3GC 13
-
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FX3U
FX3UC
STATION)
13.1.2 CC-Link module
14
CPU series CC-Link module
MELSEC-Q (Q mode) CONNECTION

C Controller module (Via G4)
CC-Link
QJ61BT11
QJ61BT11N
CNC C70
15
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11
AJ61QBT11
MELSEC-QnA
CONNECTION
A1SJ61QBT11
INVERTER
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ61BT11
MELSEC-A
A1SJ61BT11
16
*1 Transient communication can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible
CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID)

(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link communication unit is used)
PLC CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable

CC-Link module Communication Max. connectable
*1 type distance
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link dedicated *5
QJ61BT11
MELSEC-Q CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
QJ61BT11N
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link dedicated
C Controller QJ61BT11 GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
module QJ61BT11N *5
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
*5
*2
CC-Link dedicated 26 GOTs

MELSEC-L GT15-J61BT13
- CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
(L26CPU-BT) *2
*5
GT15-J61BT13
AJ61QBT11 CC-Link dedicated *5
MELSEC-QnA CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
A1SJ61QBT11*4
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-J61BT13
AJ61BT11 CC-Link dedicated *5
MELSEC-A CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
A1SJ61BT11*4
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals.

Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following.
CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and
the transmission speed.
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual
*4 Transient transmission can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later.
*5 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it.
For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual.

13.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
CC-Link Communication driver
PLC
module
GOT
10
Connection cable
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link Ver2(ID)
MELSECNET/10
(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link communication unit is used)

11
Number of
*1 type distance
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
C Controller QJ61BT11N
module CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3 26 GOTs
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 *4
MELSEC-L
*2
12
-
(L26CPU-BT)
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

QCPU CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable

*1 type distance
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3
*4
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
MELSEC-Q QJ61BT11N cable *3
*5
*2
CC-Link (Ver.1)
CC-Link dedicated
cable *3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z 26 GOTs
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
*4
C Controller *2
QJ61BT11N
module CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
*5
*2



9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
POINT
settings)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.

3. 11
(1) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click!
CONNECTION
NETWORK
menu. Item Description Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Station No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 64

Set the transmission speed and
Transmission
the mode of the GOT. 0 to E
3.
STATION)
*1
Set the following items. Rate
(Default: 0)
Set the mode of CC-Link. Ver.1/Ver.2/
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Mode
(Default: Ver.1) Additional/Offline
14
Expanded Set the cyclic point expansion. Single/Double/
• I/F: Interface to be used Cyclic (Default: Single) Quadruple/Octuple
• Driver:
Set the number of stations
CONNECTION
When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link Occupied
occupied by the GOT. 1 Station/4 Stations
communication unit is used Station
(Default: 1 Station) (Via G4)
CC-Link
CC-Link Ver2 (ID) Set Clear/Hold at an error

Input for Error
When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link occurrence. Clear/Hold
Station
communication unit is used (Default: Clear)
15
CC-Link (ID) Set the number of retries to be
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, timeout occurs.
CONNECTION

INVERTER

Make the settings according to the usage times out.
environment. (Default: 3times)
13.3.2 Communication detail settings Set the time period for a

Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec 16
(Default: 3sec)
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

PLC.
(Default: 0ms)

*1 Transmission speed settings
The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC- (2) CC-Link(ID)
Link communication.
Set value Description
0 Online: 156kbps
1 Online: 625kbps
2 Online: 2.5Mbps
3 Online: 5Mbps
4 Online: 10Mbps
A Hardware test: 156kbps
B Hardware test: 625kbps
C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps
D Hardware test: 5Mbps

E Hardware test: 10Mbps
For details of the hardware test, refer to the following
manual. timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
Manual for CC-Link module to be used
(Default: 3times)

(Default: 3sec)
POINT
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual


13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when (3) Transmission baudrate setting switch
9
MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Transmission
CC-Link communication unit is
MELSECNET/H
baudrate Description Set value
used) setting switch
0: 156kbps
1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
POINT
(Default: 0)
2: 2.5Mbps
3: 5Mbps 10
4: 10Mbps
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Switch setting of the communication unit
MELSECNET/10
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.
Condition
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the setting
Setting
following manual. switches
switch
11
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Specify input data status of
Manual OFF: Cleared
SW1 the data link error station.
ON: Held
(Default: OFF)
CONNECTION
GT15-75J61BT13-Z Specify the number of stations
NETWORK
OFF: 1 station
Left side Front side SW2 occupied.
ON: 4 stations
(Default: OFF)
RUN
L RUN 12
345
SD
RD POINT
(1)
EF 2
67 A
01
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
CC-Link IE FIELD
901
456

78
10
(2)
CONNECTION
STATION NO.
23

901
456
78
1
NETWORK
23
(3) following.
901
456
78
BAUDRATE
ON
(4) 13.4 PLC Side Setting

1 2
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
2 4 1
DB SLD (FG1) NC
(2) When the switch setting is changed 13

(1) Mode setting switch When changing the switch setting after mounting
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link
Mode setting
communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT.
switch
STATION)
Select the online mode.
0 (fixed)
(Default: 0)
14
Station CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
number
setting
switch
15
Specify the station No. of the CC-
Link communication unit. 1 to 64
CONNECTION
(Default: 01)
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown
below in the CC-Link system.
Station data Description HINT

Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device Number of stations occupied
Station type
station or Ver.2 intelligent device station
The number of stations occupied is setting for
Number of stations determining number of link device points (RX/RY/
Station 1 or Station 4
occupied RWw/RWr) used by the GOT.
To use multiple numbers of link device points in the
case of cyclic transmission between the GOT and CC-
The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side
Link module, set the number of stations occupied as
(CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.7.
the exclusive station 4.
Model name Refer to The number of link device points at the exclusive
station 1 and 4 is shown below.
Connecting
with QJ61BT11,
13.4.1 CC-Link Ver.2
Ver.1 QJ61BT11N
compatible Expanded cyclic setting
Connecting Single Double Quadruple Octuple

CC-Link Link
with Ver.2 QJ61BT11N 13.4.2 Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu
module device
compatible sive sive sive sive sive sive sive sive
(Q Series)
statio statio statio statio statio statio statio statio
Connecting n1 n4 n1 n4 n1 n4 n1 n4
with Ver.1/
Remote 32 128 32 224 64 448 128 896
Ver.2 QJ61BT11N 13.4.3
input (RX) points points points points points points points points
compatibles
mixed Remote 32 128 32 224 64 448 128 896
output (RY) points points points points points points points points
CC-Link module AJ61QBT11,
13.4.6 Remote
(QnA Series) A1SJ61QBT11 register
4 16 8 32 16 64 32 128
points points points points points points points points
(RWw)
CC-Link module AJ61BT11,
13.4.7
(A Series) A1SJ61BT11 Remote
4 16 8 32 16 64 32 128
register
points points points points points points points points
(RWr)
CC-Link Ver.1
Number of stations occupied
Link device
Exclusive station Exclusive station 4
Remote input (RX) 32 points 128 points
Remote output (RY) 32 points 128 points
Remote register (RWw) 4 points 16 points
Remote register (RWr) 4 points 16 points

13.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module 9
 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(Q Series) with Ver.1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the station number setting switch, transmission
compatible
MELSECNET/H
speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-
Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
following system configuration. MST
SD
ERR.
S MST
RD
L ERR.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
STATION
NO.
MELSECNET/10
5
0
X10
CC-Link module (Q Series) (1)

For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to
0
X1

C
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's (2)
11
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
NC
1
CONNECTION
NC
2
NETWORK
DA
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit 4
DB
<GOT> (FG)
5
than the following.) DG
6
7
12
Station type : Intelligent device
station
Station No. : Station No.1
CC-Link IE FIELD
Number of
: Exclusive station 1
stations occupied
CONNECTION
Transmission speed : 156kbps
NETWORK
<CC-Link module> *1
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
Type : Master station
Station No. : Station No.0 Station number Setting necessity at
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) setting switch GOT connection
All connect count
Transmission speed
:
:
1
156kbps 13
■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Station number
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. setting 0 (fixed)
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"
(master station)
STATION)
14
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch
Transmission
CONNECTION
Setting necessity at
rate/mode setting Description Set value
GOT connection
switch (Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission
rate/
MODE mode setting
(Online:
0
15
*1
156kbps)

CONNECTION
*1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.

INVERTER
POINT
When the switch setting is changed 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION

 Parameter setting (when connecting to (b) Station information setting
Setting
necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT
connection
Intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select
Intelligent buffer select

(Use default value)
(word)

*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set.
*2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the
GOT.
Setting
Item Set value

necessity POINT
at GOT
connection When changing the network parameter
No. of boards in module 1 After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
Start I/O No. 0000H
or resetting.
Operation setting (Use default value)
Type Master station (fixed)
Remote net
Mode
(Ver.1 mode)
All connect count 1
Remote input (RX) X400
Remote output (RY) Y400
Remote register (RWr) D300
Remote register (RWw) D200
Special relay (SB) SB0
Special register (SW) SW0
Retry count
Automatic reconnection
station count
Stand by master station No. (Use default value)

PLC down select
Scan mode setting
Delay information setting
Station information setting Refer to (b).
Remote device station initial

settings (Use default value)
Interrupt setting

9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Controller module) (a) Parameter settings
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-
Link utility.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
necessity at
CONNECTION
GOT connection
Item*1 Set value
NETWORK
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
User name *2 target Target module 1 12

Password*2 password Start I/O No. 0000H
CC-Link IE FIELD
Detailed settings - Channel No. (Use default value)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Type Master station (fixed)
Remote net
changed, input the changed IP address or host name. Mode
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, (Ver.1 mode)
Operation settings

Expanded cyclic setting Single 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Occupied number Exclusive station 1
CC-Link CONNECTION
Error event: input data
Clear
status
STATION)
CPU stop: data link status Refresh
Other settings (Use default value)
All connect count 1

14
Station information settings
Sta. Intelligent device

Station Type
No.1 station
Sta.
CONNECTION
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
station select No.1

(word)
(Use default value) 15
CONNECTION

INVERTER
*2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the

GOT.
POINT 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link
module (Q Series) with
(1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit is used Ver.2 compatible
Item Set value This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Station No. 1: Station No.1 Link module (Q Series) in the following case of system
configuration.
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)

POINT
Number of stations occupied 1 Station CC-Link module (Q Series)
Input for Error Station 0: Clear For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to
Manual QJ61BT11N
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link  System configuration

communication unit is used ■ [Communication settings] of GT Designer3
Item Set value (Use default value) <GOT>

Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec station
Expanded cyclic setting : Single
Number of
stations occupied
POINT <CC-Link module> *1
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Type

Station No.
:
:
Master station
Station No.0
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Mode
All connect count
:
:
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
1
Designer3, refer to the following. Transmission speed : 156kbps
13.3.1 Setting communication interface ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
(Communication settings) *1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit POINT

(Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link communication unit is used) When connecting to Q170MCPU
Item Set value the CC-Link module is set to "70".
Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
SW1 (Input data status of the

Condition OFF: Cleared
data link error station)
setting
switches SW2 (Number of occupied
OFF: 1 station
stations)
POINT
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit, refer to the following.
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL
GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication
unit is used)

9
 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)  Parameter setting (when connecting to
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the station number setting switch, transmission MELSEC-Q or QS series)
MELSECNET/H
speed / mode setting switch. (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
QJ61BT11N (a) Network parameter
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST
SD
ERR.
S MST
RD
L ERR.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
STATION
NO.
MELSECNET/10
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C
(2)
11
8
MODE
4
NC
1
CONNECTION
NC
NETWORK
DA 2
SLD
3
DB 4
5
12
(FG)
DG
6
7
Setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
necessity at
Item Set value
NETWORK
GOT
connection
Station number Setting necessity No. of boards in module 1
setting switch at GOT connection
Start I/O No.*1
Operation setting
0000H
(Use default value)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Station number Type Master station
setting 0 (fixed) Remote net
Mode
(master station) (Ver.2 mode)
STATION)
All connect count 1
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Remote register (RWr) D300 14

Transmission Special relay (SB) SB0
Setting necessity
CONNECTION
at GOT connection Special register (SW) SW0
switch
Retry count (Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission
rate/mode
station count
setting 0
(Online: Stand by master station No.
PLC down select
(Use default value)
15
156kbps)*1
Scan mode setting
CONNECTION

Station information setting Refer to (b)
INVERTER

POINT setting (Use default value)
Interrupt setting
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the *1 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PLC CPU. configuration.

CONNECTION

(b) Station information setting
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C
Controller module)
Link utility.
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single
Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Setting

Reserve/invalid station select No setting
GOT connection
Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. *2
User name target
[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT. Password*2 password
Detailed settings -
POINT : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
When changing the network parameter changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, input the changed user name and password.
or resetting.

(2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
9
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 [Communication settings] of GT Designer3
MELSECNET/10
Item Set value
Mode
Expanded Cyclic
Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Single
11
Number of stations occupied 1 Station
Setting Input for Error Station Clear
necessity at
CONNECTION
Item*1 Set value Retry 3times (Use default value)
GOT
NETWORK
connection Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Number of modules 1
Target module 1 12
Start I/O No. 0000H
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
Channel No. (Use default value) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Type Master station
Remote net
Mode 13.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Ver.2 mode)
13
Operation settings
Expanded cyclic setting Single
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION

Clear
status
STATION)
All connect count 1 14

Sta. Ver.2 intelligent device
Station Type
No.1 station
CONNECTION
Expanded cyclic Sta.

Single
setting*2 No.1 (Via G4)
CC-Link
Sta.
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
Remote station points

Sta.
32 points
15
No.1
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
CONNECTION
station select No.1

INVERTER

(Use default value)
(word)

*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote 16
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.

13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module
 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 Set the station number setting switch, transmission
compatibles mixed speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11N
This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link
module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
the following system configuration. MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
POINT
STATION
NO.
0
X10
CC-Link module (Q Series) (1)

For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to
0
X1
C
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's (2)
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
NC
1
NC
DA 2
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
DB 4
<GOT (Ver.1 compatible)> (FG)
5
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 6
DG
Station type : Intelligent device 7
station
Station No. : Station No. 1
Number of stations
occupied
<GOT (Ver.2 compatible)>

(Use default value for settings other
Station number Setting necessity
Station type : Intelligent device Description Set value
station setting switch at GOT connection
Number of stations
occupied
<CC-Link module> *1 Transmission speed : 156kbps Station number
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) setting 0 (fixed)
Type : Master station (master station)
Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
All connect count : 2
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
Transmission
Setting necessity
at GOT connection
POINT switch
Transmission
When connecting to Q170MCPU rate/
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of mode setting 0
the CC-Link module is set to "70". (Online:
156kbps)*1

POINT
PLC CPU.

(b) Station information setting 9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
• Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.1 intelligent
Station type
device station (fixed) 11
*2 Exclusive station 1
Exclusive station count
No setting
select
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(Use default value)
(word)
• Station information setting of station No.2 (GOT) 12

Setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
*1
necessity at
Setting Set value
CONNECTION
Item
GOT
necessity at
NETWORK
Item Set value connection
GOT
connection Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
No. of boards in module 1
Start I/O No.*1 0000H Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
*2
CC-Link CONNECTION
Operation setting (Use default value) Exclusive station count Exclusive station 1
Type Master station (fixed) Reserve/invalid station
No setting
Remote net select
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
STATION)
(Use default value)
All connect count 2 (word)
Remote input (RX) X400 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Remote output (RY) Y400 *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
14
Remote register (RWw) D200 The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
CONNECTION
POINT
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Retry count
station count
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 15
PLC down select
or resetting.
Scan mode setting
CONNECTION

INVERTER
Station information setting Refer to (b)

setting (Use default value)
Interrupt setting 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
configuration.

 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
Controller module) (a) Parameter settings
Link utility.
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
GOT connection *1
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
*2 target
User name Target module 1
*2 password
Password Start I/O No. 0000H
Detailed settings - Channel No. (Use default value)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Type Master station

changed, input the changed IP address or host name. Remote net
Mode
*2 If the account of the C Controller module has been changed, (Ver.2 mode)
Operation settings

Expanded cyclic setting Single

Clear
status
All connect count 2

No.1 station
Station Type
No.2 station
Sta.
Single
Expanded cyclic No.1
setting*2 Sta.
Single
No.2
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
No.1
Occupied number*2
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
No.2
Sta.
32 points
No.1
Remote station points
Sta.
32 points
No.2

Setting
(2) Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)
9
*1
necessity at
Item Set value
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
connection
MELSECNET/H
Sta.
No setting Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Reserve/invalid No.1
station select Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Sta.
No setting
No.2 Expanded Cyclic Single
Number of stations occupied 1 Station 10
(Use default value) Input for Error Station 0: Clear
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(word)
MELSECNET/10
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.  Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT. (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z 11
POINT Item Set value
CONNECTION
NETWORK
module, either turn the C Controller module OFF and Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
then ON or reset it SW1 (Input data status of the
Condition data link error station)
OFF: Cleared
12
setting
SW2 (Number of occupied
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 switches
stations)
OFF: 1 station
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
(1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)
NETWORK
(a) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link POINT
communication unit is used
Station No.
Item Set value
1: Station No.1
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) unit is used)
STATION)
Input for Error Station 0: Clear
Retry 3times (Use default value) 14
(b) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link CONNECTION

communication unit is used (Via G4)
CC-Link

Retry
Timeout Time
3times
3sec
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
series with CC-Link Ver.1
compatible (1) Network parameter

MELSEC-L in the following case of the system
configuration.
POINT
(1) CC-Link module (L Series)
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual
(2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
 System configuration Setting

necessity at
(Example when using CC-Link module (L Series)) Item Set value
GOT
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 connection
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other Start I/O No.*1 0000H
Station type : Intelligent device Operation setting (Use default value)

station
Station No. : Station No.1 Type Master station (fixed)
Number of Remote net
stations occupied
: Exclusive station Mode
(Ver.1 mode)
<CC-Link module> *1
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) All connect count 1
Type : Master station Remote input (RX) X400
Retry count
station count
PLC down select
Scan mode setting
Station information setting Refer to (2)
Interrupt setting

*1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the

(2) Station information setting 13.4.5 Connecting to MELSEC-L 9
series with CC-Link Ver.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
compatible
MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-L in the following case of the system
configuration.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting POINT
MELSECNET/10
*1
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT (1) CC-Link module (L Series)
connection
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
Station type
Intelligent to the following manual.
device station (fixed)
Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Module User's Manual 11
(2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
No setting
select For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
CONNECTION
(Use default value)
(word) MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
NETWORK
12
(Example when using CC-Link module (L Series))
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
NETWORK
When changing the network parameter <GOT>
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, (Use the default value for settings other
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Station type : Intelligent device
or resetting. Station No.
station
: Station No.1 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Number of
: Exclusive station
stations occupied
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 <CC-Link module> *1

Transmission speed
: 156kbps
Type : Master station
STATION)
Item Set value Station No. : Station No.0
Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission speed : 156kbps

14
Number of stations occupied 1 Station CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) 15

CONNECTION
POINT
INVERTER

Designer3, refer to the following. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Station information setting
(1) Network parameter
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

*2 Exclusive station 1
Exclusive station count
Remote station points 32 points (fixed)
Reserve/invalid station select No setting
Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)

Setting net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
necessity at
Item Set value The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
GOT *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
connection
POINT
*1 0000H
Start I/O No.
Operation setting (Use default value) When changing the network parameter
Type Master station (fixed) After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON
Remote net
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
or resetting.
All connect count 1

Remote register (RWr) D300 Item Set value
Remote register (RWw) D200 Station No. 1: Station No.1
Special relay (SB) SB0 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps

Expanded Cyclic Single
Retry count
station count Input for Error Station 0: Clear
Stand by master station No. Retry 3times (Use default value)

(Use default value)
PLC down select
Scan mode setting
Station information setting Refer to (2) POINT

Interrupt setting For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
*1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the 13.3.1 Setting communication interface
system configuration. (Communication settings)

 Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA
(QnA Series)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Series)
MELSECNET/H
Set for each setting switch.
AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
Link module (QnA Series) in the following case of system
configuration. AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
RUN SW E
B ERR. M/S R
10
RUN 156K
ERR. 625K R MST PRM R
MST
S MST
2. 5M
5M
A
T
S MST TIME O
LOCAL LINE R
POINT
LOCAL 10M E
CPU R / W
CPU R / W
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
L ERR. RD
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
R PRM S0 E
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
CC-Link module (QnA Series)
MELSECNET/10
L RUN SD
STATION NO. MODE
L ERR. RD
78 67
89 A
456
(2)
901
x
BCD
345
For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer 10 23 EF0 2
1
(1)
to the following manual. 78 SW OFF ON
ON
456
901
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
x
78 1 23 2
Control & Communication Link System Master/

STATION NO.
9 01
4 56
x10 3
(1) (4)
23
78 4 CLR HLD
78
Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11
456
901
5 1/2 3/4
9 01
(3)
4 56
x1 6 1/4 2/3
11
23 23
7
User's Manual
BCD
MODE
(2)
8 9A
EF 2
01
0 : ONLINE (A. R. ) B RATE 8
67
3 45
1 : ONLINE (RIM )
2 : OFFLINE
0 156K
78
B RATE
9 01
1 625K
(3)
4 56
0 156K 23
1 625K 2 2. 5M
2 2. 5M 3 5M
3 5M
4 10M NC
4 10M
DA 1
ON
OFF ON SW
NC 2
CONNECTION
M/L S MST 1
2
3
3
(4) DB
NETWORK
CLEAR HOLD 4
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 1/2

1/4
3/4
2/3
5
6
NC 4
7
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit 8

DG 5
<GOT> (Use the default value for settings other NC 6
12
SLD 7
NC
Station type : Intelligent device DA 1

NC 8
NC 2
station DB 3 9
Station No. : Station No.1 NC 4 (FG)
10
Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 DG 5
NC 6
CC-Link IE FIELD
SLD 7
<CC-Link module> *1 NC 8 A1SJ61QBT11
CONNECTION
9
(FG)
10
NETWORK
Station type : Master station
Mode setting : Remote net mode
All connect count :1
■ Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series)

■ Parameter setting
(1) Station number setting switch 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. Station Setting
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" number necessity at
setting GOT
switch connection
STATION)
78
x
456
901
14
10 23
0 (fixed)
78
(master station)
x
456
901
1 23

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Mode setting
Setting
necessity at
15
switch GOT
connection
CONNECTION
MODE
INVERTER
Mode setting
789
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)

SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(3) Transmission speed setting switch  Parameter setting
Setting There are two methods for the parameter setting:
Transmission
necessity at perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX
speed setting Description Set value
switch
GOT Developer and the sequence program.
connection
Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX
78 Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the
456
901
23 CC-Link module use the function version B or later.

Transmission speed
B RATE
0 (1) Setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer
0 156K
setting (156kbps)*1
1 625K (a) Network parameter
2 2. 5M
3 5M
4 10M

Setting
Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
Description
switches switch value GOT
connection
Station type
(Master OFF
SW1
station/Local (fixed)
station)
SW2 OFF Setting

Not used necessity at
SW OFF ON SW3 (fixed) Item Set value
GOT
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
2
Input data connection
3
status of the
4 CLR HLD
SW4 OFF No. of boards in module 1
5 1/2 3/4 data link error
6 1/4 2/3
7
station (clear) Start I/O No. 0000H
8
SW5 Number of Type Master station (fixed)
OFF
stations
SW6 (fixed) All connect count 1
occupied*2
SW7 Remote input (RX) X400

OFF
Not used
SW8 (fixed) Remote output (RY) Y400
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Remote register (RWr) D300

*2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the local station.
In the case of the master station, turn off it.
Special relay (SB) B0
POINT Special register (SW) W0
Retry count
station count
PLC CPU.
Wait master station No.
(Use default value)
PLC down select
Scan mode setting
Station information setting Refer to (2)

(b) Station information setting (2) Setting from sequence program
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the
data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status
MELSECNET/H
changes from STOP to RUN.
(a) I/O signal of CC-Link module
Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11
User's Manual 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(b) Device used by user
MELSECNET/10
Device Application
Setting
necessity at M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting
Item Set value
GOT M102, M103 Flag for data link startup
connection
D0 Number of connected modules
Station type
Intelligent device station
D1 Number of retry 11
(fixed)
D2 Automatic reconnection station count
D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure
CONNECTION
No setting Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to
select D4
NETWORK
Station No. 16)
Intelligent buffer select Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to
(Use default value) D5
(word) Station No. 16)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary D6 Station data (first module) 12

*1 Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure
GOT.
CC-Link IE FIELD
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present
CONNECTION
POINT example
NETWORK
When changing the network parameter Buffer memory
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Decimal (Hex) 13
or resetting.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)
CC-Link CONNECTION
2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)
Automatic reconnection station
3(33 (3H) 1 (1 station)
count
STATION)
Operation specification in the
6(66 (6H) 0 (stop)
case of CPU failure
16(1016 (10H)
Reserved station specification
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16)
0 (No
specification)
14
Error invalid station specification 0 (No
20(1420 (14H)
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) specification)
32(2032 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Details for the station data are shown below.

For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station
occupied as those of the GOT.
b15 to
For 3), the setting is fixed.
b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
15
3) 2) 1)
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT)
CONNECTION
01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64

INVERTER
2) Number of stations occupied (Set the number of station

occupied as that of the GOT)
1H: Exclusive station 1
4H: Exclusive station 4 16
3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station)
SERVO AMPLIFIER
0H: Remote I/O station

1H: Remote device station
CONNECTION
2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

(d) Example of sequence program
Parameter setting
Module error Module

ready
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
Number of retry
(3 times)
Number of
automatic return
stations (1 station)
Operation specification
in the case of CPU
failure (Stop)
Reserved station
specification (No
specification)
Error invalid station

specification (No
specification)
Station data (Intelligent

device station, exclusive
station 1, station No.1)
Refresh insruction
Refresh insruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
Data link with buffer memory parameter
Module error Module

ready
Data link start up

request (buffer memory
address)
Data link
startup
normal
completion
(buffer memory)
Error code reading

(SW0068)
Data link
startup
abnormal
completion
(buffer
memory)
POINT

(A Series)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
communication unit is used This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Link module (A Series) in the following case of system
Item Set value
configuration.
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps 10

POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) CC-Link module (A Series)
MELSECNET/10
Number of stations occupied 1 Station For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to
Input for Error Station 0: Clear the following manual.
Retry 3times (Use default value) Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11
Timeout Time
Delay Time
3sec (Use default value)
0ms (Use default value)

User's Manual 11
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link  System configuration
CONNECTION
NETWORK
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
Item Set value (Use default value) ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
<GOT>
Retry 3times
12
Timeout Time 3sec
station
Number of station occupied : Exclusive station 1
CC-Link IE FIELD
POINT
Transmission : 156kbps
CONNECTION
speed
<CC-Link module> *1
NETWORK
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Station type : Master station
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Mode setting : Remote net mode
Designer3, refer to the following. All connect count :1

Transmission speed
Module mode
: 156kbps
: Intelligent mode 13
■ Settings of CC-Link module (A Series)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
■ Sequence program
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
STATION)
14
Item Set value
CONNECTION
Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps (Via G4)

CC-Link
SW1
Condition (Input data status of the data OFF: Cleared
setting link error station) 15
OFF: 1 station
stations)
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
unit is used)

 Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) (3) Transmission speed setting switch
Set for each setting switch. Setting
Transmission
AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 necessity at
speed setting Description Set value
GOT
A1SJ61BT11 switch
AJ61BT11 RUN SW E connection
B ERR. M/S R
RUN 156K
ERR. 625K R
MST PRM R
MST 2. 5M A S MST TIME O
S MST 5M T
LOCAL
CPU R / W
10M E LOCAL
CPU R / W
LINE R
78
456
901
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
R PRM S0 E
L ERR. RD 23
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
STATION NO. MODE

B RATE
Transmission speed
0
L RUN SD
L ERR. RD 8
x (2) 0 156K setting (156kbps)*1
C
5
4
10 0
1 625K
(1) ON SW OFF ON 2 2. 5M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
x
5
1 2 3 5M
STATION NO. 78
3
4 10M
5
x10
(1) (4)
23
4 CLR HLD
78 5 1/2 3/4
(3)
5
0
5
x1 6 1/4 2/3
23
C 7
MODE
(2) B RATE 8 ISM SFM
8
0 : ONLINE (A. R. )
1 : ONLINE (RIM ) 4
2 : OFFLINE 0 156K
78
B RATE 1 625K
(3)
5
0 156K
2 2. 5M

23
1 625K
2 2. 5M 3 5M
3 5M
4 10M NC
4 10M
DA 1
Setting
ON
OFF ON SW
NC 2
M/L S MST 1
2
3
Condition setting Setting necessity at
DB
CLEAR HOLD
3
4
(4)
1/2 3/4 5
1/4 2/3 6 NC 4
ISFM SFM
7
8
DG 5
switches switch GOT
NC 6 connection
SLD 7
DA
NC
1
NC 8
Station type
NC 2
9 (Master OFF
SW1
DB 3
station/Local (fixed)
NC 4 (FG)
10
DG 5
SLD
NC 6
7
station)
NC 8
A1SJ61BT11
(FG)
10
9
SW2 OFF
Not used
SW3 (fixed)
Input data
status of the
SW OFF ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
2
SW4 data link OFF
3 error station
Setting
Station
4 CLR HLD
(clear)
necessity at 5 1/2 3/4
number Description Set value 6 1/4 2/3
GOT SW5 Number of
setting switch 7
OFF
connection 8 ISM SFM stations
SW6 *2
(fixed)
occupied
STATION NO.
78 OFF
x SW7 Not used
901
456
10 (fixed)
23 Station number setting
0 (fixed)
(master station) Module
78
x mode OFF
901
456
1 SW8
(Intelligent (fixed)
23
mode)
*2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is a local station.
(2) Mode setting switch In the case of the master station, turn off it.
Setting
Mode setting
necessity at POINT
switch GOT
connection When the switch setting has been changed
MODE
Mode setting PLC CPU.
789
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)

9
 Sequence program
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
The parameter setting and the sequence program of
MELSECNET/H
the data link startup request is required.
(1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated

instructions)
The program sets the network parameter and
automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status 10
changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
MELSECNET/10
User's Manual
(b) Device used by user 11
Device Application
M0 RLPA instruction normal completion flag
CONNECTION
M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag
NETWORK
M100 Network parameter setting flag
M101 Automatic refresh parameter setting flag
D0 Synchronous mode valid/invalid 12

CC-Link IE FIELD
D2 Station data
CONNECTION
D3 Send buffer size
NETWORK
D4 Receive buffer size
D5 Automatic update buffer size
D400
Error code in the case of error completion of 13
RLPA instruction
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
D100 to D103 Automatic refresh setting (RX)
D104 to D107 Automatic refresh setting (RY)
STATION)
D108 to D111 Automatic refresh setting (RW)
D112 to D115 Automatic refresh setting (SB)
D116 to D119 Automatic refresh setting (SW)

14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction)
* Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction
Module error Module

ready
Synchronous mode
(Invalid)
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
Station data (intelligent

station 1, station No.1)
Send buffer size

(64 words)
Receive buffer size

(64 words)
Automatic update buffer

size (128 words)
Dedicated
instruction (RLPA)
CC-Link module head

I/O No. (0000H)
Parameter storage
head device (D0)
Turning on during 1 scan

in the case of instruction
completion ON (M0)
Error code reading

(SW0068)
RLPA error completion
* Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRPA instruction
Module Module RLPA error

error ready completion

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Head No. of RX (RX0)
MELSECNET/H
RX refresh destination (X)
RX refresh destination
device head No. (400)
No. of refresh points (32)

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RY head number (RY0)
MELSECNET/10
RY refresh destination (Y)
RY refresh destination
No. of refresh points (32) 11
RW head No. (RW0)
CONNECTION
RW refresh destination (D)
NETWORK
RW refresh destination
No. of refresh points (260) 12

SB head No. (SB0)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
SB refresh destination (B)
SB refresh destination
device head number (0)

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SW head number (SW0)
STATION)
SW refresh destination (W)
SW refresh destination
device head No. (0)
14
Dedicated instruction
CONNECTION
(RRPA)
CC-Link module head (Via G4)

CC-Link
I/O No. (0000H)
Parameter storage head

device (D100)
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
When changing the sequence program 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction)
This program writes parameters to the buffer memory
when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN
and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO
instruction.
User's Manual
(b) Devices used by user
Device Application
M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting
M102, M103 Flag for data link startup
D1 Number of retry
D2 Automatic reconnection station count
D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure
Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to

D4
Station No. 16)
Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to

D5
Station No. 16)
D6 Station data (first module)
D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present

example
Buffer memory
Decimal (Hex)
1 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)
2 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)
Automatic reconnection station

3 (3H) 1 (1 station)
count
Operation specification in the

6 (6H) 0 (stop)
case of CPU failure
Reserved station specification 0 (No

16 (10H)
Error invalid station specification 0 (No

20 (14H)
32 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H
*1 Details for the station data are shown below.

For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station
occupied settings as those of the GOT.
For 3), the setting is fixed.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
3) 2) 1)
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.)
01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64
2) Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the
number of station occupied as that of the GOT.)
3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station.)
0H: Remote I/O station
1H: Remote device station
2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

(d) Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction) 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
* Parameter setting
MELSECNET/H
Module error Module
ready
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Number of retry (3 times)
MELSECNET/10
Number of automatic
return stations (1 station)
Operation specification in
the case of CPU failure
(Stop)
11
Reserved station
CONNECTION
specification
NETWORK
(No specification)
Error invalid station

specification
(No specification)
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Station data (Intelligent
NETWORK
station 1, station No. 1)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
* Refresh instruction
Refresh instruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
STATION)
* Data link with buffer memory parameters
Module error Module
14
ready
Data link startup request

(buffer memory address)
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Data link
startup
normal
completion
15
(buffer memory)
Error code reading

(SW0068)
Data link
startup
abnormal
completion
CONNECTION
(buffer
INVERTER
memory)
POINT
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

Item Set value
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link

Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec
POINT
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit

Item Set value
Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
SW1 (Input data status of the

Conditio OFF: Cleared
data link error station)
n setting
OFF: 1 station
stations)
POINT
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit is used)

9
13.5 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 Using cyclic transmission
(1) I/O signal for master station  GOT startup in the CC-Link connection
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output (intelligent device station)
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master For CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the
station. data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the
10
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC GOT startup.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
system may be malfunctioned.
MELSECNET/10
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
 When a network error occurs in the system
alarm
MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User’s Manual In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station),
when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
Manual
system alarm display cannot be canceled even though 11
the causes are removed.
(2) Access range that can be monitored
The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and
that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary
CONNECTION
NETWORK
according to the mode in the master station of the CC-
Link system. When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
Applicable of monitoring
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 12
Mode of master station Data for each station Data for each station seconds or more
compatible with compatible with
CC-Link IE FIELD
CC-Link ver.1 CC-Link ver.2
CONNECTION
Remote net mode -
NETWORK
Remote net ver.1
- GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
mode
Remote net ver.2
mode
*1 Manual 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Remote net additional *1  Connection to LCPU
mode
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
: Applicable : N/A(All "0") -: N/A of system configuration recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
STATION)
*1 Monitoring is applicable only when MODEL GT15-J61BT13 turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
CC-Link communication unit is used.
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
(3) When GOT malfunctions, the cyclic output status available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
remains the same as before becoming faulty. becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the
14
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
 For transient transmission system alarm occurs.
(1) CC-Link module of target station GT Designer3 Version Screen Design CONNECTION
Mount the CC-Link module of function version B or later Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
and software version J or later to the PLC CPU when

performing the following CC-Link modules and  Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
transient transmission. CNC C70, CRnQ-700 15
Only cyclic transmission can be communicated with the The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
CC-Link module of function version A or before and 700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2
software version I or before.
CONNECTION
only
• AJ61BT11
INVERTER
• A1SJ61BT11 For connecting to the CC-Link (ID) network system, set

• AJ61QBT11 the CC-Link (ID) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2
• A1SJ61QBT11 mode.
(2) Access range that can be monitored 16
The GOT can access to the PLC CPU mounting the
SERVO AMPLIFIER
master and local station of the CC-Link System.

CONNECTION
It cannot access another network via the CC-Link

module.

13.5 Precautions
 Connection to Q170MCPU
cannot be executed.
Manual

13.5 Precautions
14
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
MELSECNET/10
14.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
14.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 11
14.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 17 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
14 - 1


Communication
type
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 CC-Link *2 *2 *2
Q02HCPU*1 (G4)
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU CC-Link *2 *3 *3
Q12PRHCPU (Main base) (G4)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode) 14.2.1
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
CC-Link *2 *2 *2
Q04UDEHCPU
(G4)
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU

*2 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10.
*3 For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration.
14 - 2 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

9
Communication
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
MELSECNET/H
CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 *1
module 14.2.1
Q24DHCCPU-V
L02CPU
L26CPU 10
L26CPU-BT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-L CC-Link(G4) *1 *1 *1
14.2.2
L02CPU-P
MELSECNET/10
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A 11
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
CONNECTION
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
NETWORK
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
Q2ASCPU-S1
12
MELSEC-QnA
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q2ASHCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2UCPU
NETWORK
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU 13
A2ACPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
STATION)
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU 14
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU CONNECTION
A1NCPUP21
(Via G4)
CC-Link
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
15
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2NCPUP21-S1
INVERTER
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
16
A3NCPUR21
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

*2 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 - 3

Communication
type
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
CC-Link (G4) *4 *4 *4
controller Q172DCPU 14.2.1
CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
MR-MQ100 - -


Communication
Refer to
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A273UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion
A171SCPU 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
- -
CONNECTION (PLC
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
MELSECNET/10
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
11
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS - -
WS0-CPU1
CONNECTION
NETWORK
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
12
head module
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE FIELD
Field Network
CONNECTION
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
NETWORK
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link (G4) *1

14.2.1
Robot controller CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link (G4) *1

14.2.1 13
FX0
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
STATION)
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
14
MELSEC-FX FX1N -
-
FX2N
CONNECTION
FX1NC
FX2NC -
(Via G4)
CC-Link
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3U
15
FX3UC
*1 Only master station can be monitored in GT11.
CONNECTION
14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module

INVERTER
Model name
CPU series
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
CC-Link module Peripheral module
16
C Controller module
SERVO AMPLIFIER
QJ61BT11
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) AJ65BT-G4-S3
QJ61BT11N
CONNECTION
CNC C70 AJ65BT-R2N

MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
CC-Link (G4)
Peripheral
QCPU CC-Link module connection GOT
module
Peripheral
PLC Connection cable 1) connection Connection cable 2) GOT
module Number of
connectable
CC-Link Max. Commu Cable model Max. equipment
Model Cable Model Option
module dista nication Connection diagram dista Model
name model name device
*1 nce type number nce
GT09-C30R2-9P
or
AJ65BT RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1)
-R2N
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
MELSEC
GT16-C02R4-9S
-Q CC-Link 1 GOT for
QJ61BT11 dedicated GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
*3
C QJ61BT11N cable GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) connection
Controlle *2 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S module
30m
r module GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
AJ65BT
RS-422 - (Built into GOT)
-G4-S3
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 30m - (Built into GOT)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*4


*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.


14.2.2 Connecting to LCPU 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Peripheral
CC-Link
LCPU connection GOT
module
module
Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Communication driver
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link (G4)
MELSECNET/10
Peripheral
Connection
PLC connection Connection cable 2) GOT
cable 1) Number of
module
connectable
CC-Link Max. Commu Max.
Cable Model Cable model Option equipment
Model name module dista nication dista Model
model name Connection diagram number device
*1 nce type
GT09-C30R2-9P
nce
11
or
RS-232
-R2N diagram 1)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
L02CPU GT16-C02R4-9S
L26CPU
-BT LJ61BT11
CC-Link
dedicated
*3 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*5
1 GOT for
1 peripheral 12
cable GT15-RS4-9S connection
L02CPU-P GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
*2 30m module
L26CPU-PBT GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
CONNECTION
AJ65BT - (Built into GOT)
RS-422
-G4-S3
NETWORK
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
*4
13
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT09-C30R2-9P
or
RS-232
STATION)
-R2N diagram 1)
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
1 GOT for
14
CC-Link
L26CPU
dedicated GT15-RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
-BT - *3 GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
cable GT15-RS4-9S connection
L26CPU-PBT GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
CONNECTION
*2 30m module
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
AJ65BT GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) (Via G4)
- (Built into GOT)
CC-Link
RS-422
-G4-S3
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) 15
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)*4
CONNECTION
INVERTER

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.


GOT and the PLC. 14.3.2 RS-422 cable
14.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram

 Connection diagram GOT side Untied wire color of
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-25P
GOT side SDA Brown
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
SDB Red
CD 1 7 RS(RTS)
RDA Orange
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RDB Yellow
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
SG Green
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
RSA Blue
SG 5 5 SG
RSB Purple
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
CSA Black
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
CSB White
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS)
- 9 9 -
RS232 connection diagram 2) (1) Cable length
GOT side PLC side The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.
(terminal block)
SD 2 RD(RXD) For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RD 3 SD(TXD) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR)
(1) GOT side
SG 5 SG
RS 1 CD resistor must be connected to the GOT.
CS 7 RS(RTS) (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
NC 8 CS(CTS)
GOT main unit to "Disable".
NC 9 NC (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
 Precautions when preparing a cable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
(1) Cable length to the following.
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
Transmission
transmission speed used for 19200bps, 12
communication with the connected 38400bps
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click!
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
menu.
Timeout Time
to time out.(Default: 3sec)
3 to 30sec 13
2.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the timing of the communication request
Delay time 0 to 300ms
channel to be used from the list menu. from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
3.
STATION)
Set the following items.
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller POINT
Type to be connected. 14
• Driver: CC-Link (G4)
after writing [Communication Settings] of project CONNECTION
data. (Via G4)
CC-Link

Make the settings according to the usage manual.
environment.
GT User's Manual 15
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Utility, the latest setting is effective.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
16
For details, refer to the following:
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

HINT
controller
Disconnect the
faulty station

(Fundamentals)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Model Reference
 Switch setting of peripheral connection
AJ65BT-G4-S3 14.5.1
Peripheral connection module
module AJ65BT-R2N 14.5.2
Set the station number setting switch, data link
transmission speed setting switch, and operation
10
setting DIP switch.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3
MELSECNET/10
(2) (1)

B RATE STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI AJ65BT-G4-S3 x 10 x1
01 0 1 90 1
2 8
peripheral connection module in the following case of the PW 2 2
3 3 7 3
RUN 4 654 654
L RUN
SW
SD SW1 SW6 MODE 12345678 RESET
RD OFF OFF A ON
11
ON OFF QnA
L ERR. OFF ON Q
ON ON non-used
RS-422 (3)
POINT
(1) Peripheral connection module
CONNECTION
For details of the peripheral connection module,
NETWORK
Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT- (1) Station number setting switch
G4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume)
(2) CC-Link module Setting 12
Station number setting necessity at
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the Description Set value
switch GOT
following manual.
CC-Link IE FIELD
connection
CONNECTION
Manual QJ61BT11N
NETWORK
STATION NO.
×10 ×1 AJ65BT-G4-S3
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local 01 90 1 station number 1 to 64
Module User's Manual 2 8 2
setting
13
(3) CC-Link function built-in CPU 3 7 3
654 654
For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Module User's Manual (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch
STATION)
Setting
Data link transmission necessity at
 System configuration speed setting switch
GOT
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series)
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection 14
B RATE 0: 156kbps
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station Data link 1: 625kbps
CONNECTION
01 transmission 2: 2.5Mbps
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 2
All connect count :1 3 speed setting 3: 5Mbps (Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission speed : 156kbps 4 4: 10Mbps

<GOT>Setting example
Transmission speed: 9600bps 15
CONNECTION
<AJ65BT-G4-S3> Setting example

Station type : Intelligent device station
INVERTER

Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1
■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module
*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" 16

SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(3) Operation setting DIP switch 14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N
Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Operation setting Setting necessity
Description Set value peripheral connection module in the following case of the
DIP switch Switch at GOT
connection
SW1 = OFF
SW1, Operation SW6 = ON POINT
SW6 mode (fixed)
(Q mode) (1) Peripheral connection module
SW2 Peripheral For details of the peripheral connection module,
SW transmissi OFF (fixed) refer to the following manual.
12345678 SW3
ON
on speed*1 Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-
SW4 R2N User's Manual
(2) CC-Link module
SW5 Not used OFF (fixed)
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the
SW7 following manual.
OFF (fixed) CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
SW8 Test mode
(Online mode) Manual QJ61BT11N
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) CC-Link built-in CPU
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
rate set in the GOT. refer to the following manual.
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
POINT
Operation mode of peripheral connection module  System configuration
Be sure to set the "Q mode" as an operation mode of 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series)
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
the peripheral connection module.
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station
All connect count :1
<GOT> Setting example

Transmission speed: 9600bps
<AJ65BT-R2N> Setting example

Station type : Intelligent device station
Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1
■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module
*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

9
 Switch setting of peripheral connection (4) RS-232 transmission setting switch
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module Setting
MELSECNET/H
Set the station number setting switch, data link RS-232 transmission Setting Set necessity at
Description
transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting switch switch value GOT
connection
setting DIP switch.
SW1
10
(3) (2)
2 (1)
SW2 Peripheral
OFF
transmission
SW3 *1
(fixed)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
speed
SW4
MELSECNET/10
Data OFF
SW5
bit length (fixed)
4
(4) SW6
Parity bit OFF
SW7
length (fixed)
11
Stop bit OFF
SW8
length (fixed)
CONNECTION
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud
NETWORK
Setting rate set in the GOT.
Station number setting necessity at
Description Set value 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
switch GOT
connection
12
POINT
AJ65BT-R2N
Precautions when setting peripheral connection
CC-Link IE FIELD
station number 1 to 64
CONNECTION
setting module
NETWORK
(1) mode setting switch
Be sure to set the Operation mode setting switch
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary to "5" (MELSOFT/connection mode).
(2) Data link transmission speed setting switch (2) RS-232 transmission setting switch 13
Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS-232
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
transmission setting switch.
CC-Link CONNECTION
Setting
Data link transmission necessity at If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON, setting
speed setting switch GOT error will occur (RUN LED turns off).
connection
STATION)
0: 156kbps
Data link 1: 625kbps
transmission 2: 2.5Mbps 14
speed setting 3: 5Mbps
4: 10Mbps

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Setting
Mode setting switch Description Set value

necessity at 15
GOT
connection
CONNECTION
5 (fixed)
INVERTER
(MELSOFT/
Mode setting
connection
mode)

SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX
module (Q series) Developer
Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / (1) Network parameter
mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C
(2)
8
MODE
4
NC
1
NC
DA 2
SLD
3
DB 4
(FG)
5
DG
6
7
Setting necessity
connection
Start I/O No. 0000H
Setting Operation setting (Use default value)
Station number necessity
Description Set value Type Master station (fixed)
setting switch at GOT
connection Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
All connect count 1
STATION
NO.
5
X10
Station number setting Remote output (RY) Y400
0 (fixed)
(master station) Remote register (RWr) D300
5
X1
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Special register (SW) SW0
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Retry count

Transmission Setting station count
rate/ necessity Stand by master station No.
Description Set value (Use default value)
mode setting at GOT
PLC down select
switch connection
Scan mode setting
0: 156kbps
C 1: 625kbps Delay information setting
Transmission rate/mode
2: 2.5Mbps Station information setting Refer to (2)
8
MODE
4 setting
3: 5Mbps Remote device station
4: 10Mbps initial setting (Use default value)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Interrupt setting
POINT
PLC CPU.

(2) Station information setting 14.5.5 Parameter setting (when 9
connecting to C Controller
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
module)
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C
Controller module setting utility.
(1) Connection settings 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT connection
Intelligent device
Station type*2
station (fixed)
Number of stations
occupied
Exclusive station 1 (fixed) 11
No setting
select
CONNECTION
Intelligent buffer select Setting
(Use default value)
NETWORK
(word) necessity
Item Set value
at GOT
connection
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. Target module*1 192.168.3.3 12
*2 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote *2 target
User name
CC-Link IE FIELD
net - (Ver. 2 mode)] or [Remote net - Additional mode], set to
CONNECTION
[Ver. 1 Intelligent device station]. Password*2 password
NETWORK
Detailed settings -
POINT : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*2
If the account of the C Controller module has been changed,
13
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, input the changed user name and password.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
or resetting.
STATION)
(3) Completion confirmation
After initial communications of CC-Link are completed,
the L RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
The GOT starts to monitor after the L-RUN LED of
14
AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off.
CONNECTION
PW (Via G4)
CC-Link
RUN
L RUN
SD
RD
L ERR.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(2) [Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT
(a) Network parameter Designer3
Item Set value
9600bps
19200bps
Transmission Speed 38400bps
57600bps
115200bps
Retry Count 0 to 5times
Timeout Time 3 to 30sec
POINT
Setting [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
necessity
Item Set value For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
at GOT
following.
connection
Number of modules 1
Target module 1
Start I/O No. 0000H
type Master station(fixed)
Remote net
Mode*1
(Ver.1 mode)
Expanded cyclic
Single(fixed)
station
Operation Exclusive station 1
Occupied number
setting (fixed)
Error event : input data
Clear
status
CPU stop: data link
Refresh
status
All connect count 1
Ver.1 Intelligent device
Station type
station(fixed)
Expanded cyclic
Single
Station station
information Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
settings
Remote station points 32 points
No setting
select
(Use default value)
(word)

*1 If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -Ver.1 mode],
[Remote station points] cannot be set.
POINT

9
14.6 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 Connection in the multiple CPU system  Connection to Q170MCPU
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
seconds or more PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
MELSECNET/10
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the cannot be executed.
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual Manual
11
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
CONNECTION
turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
NETWORK
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the 12
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
system alarm occurs.
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Manual
NETWORK
 Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
CNC C70, CRnQ-700
The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
13
700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
only.
For connecting to the CC-Link (Via G4) network
system, set the CC-Link (G4) network system to the
STATION)
CC-Link Ver.2 mode.
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

14.6 Precautions
14.6 Precautions
MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE
CONNECTIONS
15. INVERTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1

16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1
18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1
15
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
INVERTER CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
15.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3 12
15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 21
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 29
NETWORK
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 31
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44 13
15.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 47
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
15 - 1
15. INVERTER CONNECTION

Communication
type
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-422 15.2.1
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-F500J RS-422 15.2.2
FREQROL
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-F700PJ
FREQROL-E700 RS-422 15.2.3

FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700 RS-422 15.2.4
FREQROL-F700P
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0) RS-422 15.2.5
15 - 2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L
 When connecting to one inverter

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Computer link
Inverter GOT
option Communication driver
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
11
Inverter Connection cable GOT
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Communi
Computer link Connection diagram Max. equipment
Model name cation Option device Model
option number distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
12
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CC-Link IE FIELD
FREQROL- RS422
500m
CONNECTION
A500/A500L connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S
NETWORK
F500/F500L
- RS-422
V500/V500L - (Built into GOT)
*2
RS422 13
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
10)
1 GOT for 1 inverter
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
STATION)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
FREQROL- connection diagram 2) GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L
F500/F500L
FR-A5NR RS-422 14
- (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L
CONNECTION
RS422
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT) (Via G4)
CC-Link
11)
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15 - 3

 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
Distributor Distributor GOT
Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
Connection Distributor Connection cable

Inverter GOT
cable 1) *3 2) Number of
Max.
Commun Terminal cable connectable
Connection Model Connection distance
Model name ication Option device Model equipment
diagram number name diagram number
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
(Recomm diagram 1)
FREQROL- RS422 RS422 ended)
A500/A500L 31 inverters
F500/F500L RS-422 500m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L GOT*4
*2
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
ended)
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10

GT1020-L
GT1030-L
GT1030-H
Model name
D
D
D
GT1040-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
E or later
B or later
A or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
31
31
10
Inverter

15 - 5
CC-Link CC-Link CONNECTION CC-Link IE FIELD CC-Link IE CONTROLLER MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H
SERVO AMPLIFIER INVERTER CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE NETWORK NETWORK CONNECTION (PLC CONNECTION (PLC
9
CONNECTION CONNECTION (Via G4) STATION) CONNECTION CONNECTION TO PLC NETWORK) TO PLC NETWORK)
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option)
FREQROL 500/700
Computer Computer
Inverter link Inverter link
option option
GOT
Connection cable

Number of
Communi Max.
Computer link Connection diagram connectable
Model name cation Option device Model distance
option number equipment
type
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL- RS422 connection
GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L diagram 4) 31 inverters for
FR-A5NR RS-422 500m
F500/F500L one GOT*2
- (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

15.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter GOT Communication driver
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
FREQROL 500/700
11
Communi Number of connectable equipment
Connection diagram Max.
number distance
CONNECTION
type
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL-
RS422 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
12
E500/S500/S500E diagram 1)
RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter
F500J/D700/F700PJ
- (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
*2
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS422 connection
diagram 10)
*1
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155
Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
Connection cable Distributor Connection cable

Inverter GOT
1) *3 2) Number of
Max.
Commu Terminal cable connectable
Model name nication Option device Model equipment
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
(Recomm diagram 1)
FREQROL- RS422 RS422 ended)
E500/S500 31 inverters
S500E/F500J RS-422 500m for one
D700 GOT*4
*2
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
ended)
LTD.
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10

GT1020-L
GT1030-L
GT1030-H
Model name
D
D
D
GT1040-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
E or later
B or later
A or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
31
31
10
Inverter

15 - 9
CC-Link CC-Link CONNECTION CC-Link IE FIELD CC-Link IE CONTROLLER MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H
SERVO AMPLIFIER INVERTER CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE NETWORK NETWORK CONNECTION (PLC CONNECTION (PLC
9
CONNECTION CONNECTION (Via G4) STATION) CONNECTION CONNECTION TO PLC NETWORK) TO PLC NETWORK)
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700
Control
Inverter terminal GOT
option
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
Commun Number of connectable

Control terminal Connection diagram Max. equipment
Model name ication Option device Model
option number distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-
E700 - RS-422
*2 - (Built into GOT)
RS422
10)
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
500m
connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-
*3 RS-422
FR-E7TR
E700*3 - (Built into GOT)
RS422
15)
*3 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Distributor Distributor GOT 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Inverter GOT
Terminating
1) *3 2)
Max.
Number of
connectable
12
Commun cable distance
Connection Model Connection equipment
Model name ication Option device Model
type
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
NETWORK
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
GT15-RS4-9S
13
diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FREQROL- 31inverters
E700 RS-422 500m for one
*2 GOT*4
STATION)
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 14
ended)
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
LTD.
15
CONNECTION

Inverter
INVERTER
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Inverter
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

9
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the control terminal option)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
FREQROL 500/700
Control Control
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Inverter terminal Inverter terminal
option option
MELSECNET/10
GOT
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Number of
Communi Max.
Control terminal Connection diagram connectable
Model name cation Option device Model distance
equipment
option
type
number
12
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CC-Link IE FIELD
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CONNECTION
RS422 connection
NETWORK
GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 8) 31 inverters for
FR-E7TR*2 RS-422 500m
E700*2 one GOT*3
- (Built into GOT)
13
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
diagram 16)
*2 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.
STATION)
GT10 User’s Manual 14
Inverter
C or later 31 CONNECTION
GT1155-QTBD (Via G4)
CC-Link
B or earlier 10
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10 15
CONNECTION
GT1045-QSBD
INVERTER
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
16
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
SERVO AMPLIFIER
D or earlier 10
CONNECTION

15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P
Inverter GOT
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700
Communi Number of connectable

Connection diagram Max. equipment
number distance
type
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 1)
A700/F700/F700P RS-422
(PU port) - (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 10)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
500m GT15-RS4-9S
A700/F700/F700P diagram 5)
RS-422
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
RS422 connection
diagram 13)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
FREQROL 500/700
10
Inverter Inverter
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Inverter GOT
1) *2 2) Number of
NETWORK
Max.
Commun Terminal cable connectable
Model name ication Option device Model equipment
type
GT16-C02R4-9S
13
(0.2m)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
STATION)
(Recomm diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
FREQROL- 31 inverters
for one
14
A700/F700 RS-422 diagram 9) diagram 3) 500m
- (Built into GOT)
(PU port) GOT*3
CONNECTION
RS422
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm - (Built into GOT) (Via G4)
CC-Link
diagram 10)
ended)
*1
*2
The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO.,
15
LTD.
CONNECTION
INVERTER

Inverter 16
C or later 31
SERVO AMPLIFIER
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
CONNECTION

Inverter
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

9
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
FREQROL 500/700
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable
11
Communi Max. Number of connectable
Connection diagram distance equipment
number
CONNECTION
type
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT15-RS4-9S
12
A700/F700 diagram 6)
RS-422 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2
(Built-in RS485
CC-Link IE FIELD
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 14)
*1
*2
For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
Inverter
GT1155-QTBD
C or later
B or earlier
31
10
14
CONNECTION
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31 (Via G4)

CC-Link
GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-QBBD
A or later 31 15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K(-A0)
Inverter GOT Communication driver
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700

Communication Connection diagram Max. Model name equipment
Model name Option device Model
type number distance
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422 connection
20m GT15-RS4-9S
MD-CX522- K diagram 1)
RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter
(-A0)*2
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
diagram 10)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
FREQROL 500/700
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Distributor Distributor GOT 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Inverter GOT Number of
Terminating
1) *3 2)
Max. connectable 12
Commu cable distance Model name
Connection Model Connection
Model name nication Option device Model equipment
type
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
NETWORK
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
GT15-RS4-9S
13
diagram 1)
RS422 RS422 ended)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
MD-CX522 31 inverters
- K(-A0) RS-422 20m for one
*2 GOT*4
STATION)
RS422
BMJ-8
(Recomm
connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 14
ended)
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CONNECTION
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HACHIKO ELECTRIC
(Via G4)
CC-Link
CO.,LTD.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Inverter
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT and the inverter. RS422 connection diagram 3)
Distributor side Inverter side or distributor side
15.3.1 RS-422 cable (Modular connector) (Modular connector)
SDA 5 5 SDA 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB 4 4 SDB
MELSECNET/10
RDA 3 3 RDA
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) RDB 6 6 RDB
Inverter or Distributor side P5S 2 2 P5S
GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
P5S 8 8 P5S
RDA 2 5 SDA
SG 1 1 SG 11
RDB 7 4 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
CONNECTION
SDB 6 6 RDB
NETWORK
RSA 3 2 P5S
RSB 8 8 P5S
CSA 4 - - 12
CSB 9 - -
CC-Link IE FIELD
SG 5 1 SG
CONNECTION
NETWORK
FG -
*1 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to

"Disable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to
"330 ". 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
FR-A5NR side
STATION)
GOT side*2 (terminal block)
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB
14
SDA 1 RDA
CONNECTION
SDB 6 RDB
*1
RSA 3 RDR (Via G4)
CC-Link
RSB 8
CSA
CSB
4
9
15
SG 5 SG
CONNECTION
FG -
INVERTER
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and

RDR.The terminating resister jumper is packed together
with the FR-A5NR.
"Disable". 16
"330 ".
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side

(terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block)
GOT side*2 Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
RDA RDA
SDA 1 RDA
RDB RDB
SDB 6 RDB
SDA SDA
RDA 2 SDA
SDB SDB
RDB 7 SDB
SG SG
SG 5 SG
RDR RDR
RSA 3 RDR
*1
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
FG -
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
the GOT.
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".

Inverter side
RS485 terminal block
GOT side*1 (built into the inverter)*2
RDA 2 SDA1(TXD1+)
RDB 7 SDB1(TXD1-)
SDA 1 RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB 6 RDB1(RXD1-)
RSA 3
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5 SG(GND)
FG -

"Disable".
"330 ".
*2 RDA2, RDB2, SDA2 and SDB2 terminals of the RS485
terminal block (built into the inverter) cannot be used.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485
MELSECNET/H
terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
GOT side *2
Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
SG 5 GND SDA2 SDA1
SDB 6 RDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDA 1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDB 7 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1
MELSECNET/10
RDA 2 SDA1 GND GND
RSA 3 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2
RSB 8 SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
CSA 4 RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
CSB 9 RDB2 RDB1 RDB2

11
- GND GND GND
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).

12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
FR-E7TR side
GOT side*1 (terminal block)*2
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
SDA RDA
CC-Link CONNECTION
1
SDB 6 RDB
RSA 3
STATION)
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
14
SG 5 SG
CONNECTION
FG -
(Via G4)
CC-Link

"Disable".
"330 ".
15
*2 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the FR-E7TR.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side
terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
GOT side*2 Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2
RDA 2 SDA SDA SDA
RDB 7 SDB SDB SDB
SDA 1 RDA RDA RDA
SDB 6 RDB RDB RDB
RSA 3 SDB SDB SDB
RSB 8 SDA SDA SDA
CSA 4 RDB RDB RDB
CSB 9 RDA RDA RDA
SG 5 SG SG SG
FG - SG SG SG
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.

Distributor side (For GT1030, GT1020)
SDA 5 GOT side*2 FR-A5NR side

(terminal block) (terminal block)
Terminating resistor
SDB 4
100Ω 1/2W
SDA RDA
RDA 3
SDB RDB
RDB 6
RDA SDA
P5S 2
RDB SDB
P5S 8
SG SG
SG 1
RSA RDR
*1
RSB
CSA
(For GT1030, GT1020)
CSB
GOT side*1 Inverter side or distributor side
(terminal block) (Modular connector)
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR.
SDA 3 RDA The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the
FR-A5NR.
SDB 6 RDB *2 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ".
RDA 5 SDA
RDB 4 SDB
SG 1 SG
RSA 2 P5S
RSB 7 SG
CSA 8 P5S
CSB
*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ".


9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT1030, GT1020)
MELSECNET/H
FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side
GOT side*2 (terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block)
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
RDA RDA RDA
SDA
RDB RDB RDB
SDB
SDA SDA SDA
10
RDA
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB SDB SDB
RDB
MELSECNET/10
SG SG SG
SG
RDR RDR RDR
RSA
*1
RSB
CSA
11
CSB
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
CONNECTION
the GOT.
NETWORK
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".

12
(For GT1030, GT1020)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Inverter side
GOT side*1
CONNECTION
RS485 terminal block
NETWORK
(terminal block) (built into the inverter)
SDA RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB RDB1(RXD1-)
RDA SDA1(TXD1+)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RDB SDB1(TXD1-)
SG SG(GND)
RSA
STATION)
RSB
CSA
14
CSB
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(For GT1030, GT1020)
Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485
GOT side terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
SG GND SDA2 SDA1
SDB RDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDA RDA1 RDA2 RDA1
RDB SDB1 RDB2 RDB1
RDA SDA1 GND GND
RSA SDA2 SDA1 SDA2
RSB SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
CSA RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
CSB RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
GND GND GND
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).

(For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side*1 FR-E7TR side

(terminal block) (terminal block)
SDA RDA
SDB RDB
RDA SDA
RDB SDB
SG SG
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB


9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT1030, GT1020)
FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side
MELSECNET/H
GOT side*2 terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2
SDA RDA RDA RDA
SDB RDB RDB RDB
RDA SDA SDA SDA 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDB SDB SDB SDB
MELSECNET/10
SG SG SG SG
RSA SDB SDB SDB
RSB SDA SDA SDA
CSA RDB RDB RDB
CSB RDA RDA RDA

11
SG SG SG
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Precautions when preparing a cable (4) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link
option
(1) Cable length Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series.
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Terminal block
Screw size: M3
SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG A B C
(3) Inverter connector specifications
Terminal
(a) Pin layout in the PU port symbol
When seen from the front of the inverter Connected to the GOT
(receptacle side)
(5) Terminal block layout in the FR-E7TR control

terminal option
Mount the FR-E7TR to the E700 series.
Set the terminal 2/SG switch to the
OPEN right position (ON) to change the
Modular jack
terminal 2 to the terminal SG.
To the GOT or 100
Pin No. Signal name Remark 10 4
I
the previous
V
1 GND (SG) inverter
2 (P5S) Not used SDB RDA

SDA SDB
SDA RDA RDB
RDB SG
SG 22
SOURCE
O
N
3 RXD+ (RDA)
SINK
4 TXD- (SDB) SDA SDB
SDA RDA RDB
SDB RDA RUN FU
RDB RUN FU SE
SE
5 TXD+ (SDA)
6 RXD- (RDB)
7 GND (SG) FM RL RM RH MRS RES SD PC STF STR SD SD
8 (P5S) Not used

A B C
To the next inverter
The contents inside ( ) indicate symbols described
in the inverter manual.
The pins number 2 and 8 (P5S) are connected to
the power supply for an operation panel or a  Connecting terminating resistors
parameter unit.
Do not use them in RS-422 communication. (1) GOT side
(b) Connector of cable between FREQROL Series resistor must be connected to the GOT.
inverters
Use the commercial connectors and cables shown
Set the terminating resistor setting switch.
in the table below or the comparable
products.(Refer to the manual for the inverter.) (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector switch.
Name Model name Specifications Manufacturer
Tyco International, For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
Connector 5-554720-3 RJ45 connector
Ltd to the following.
Modular HACHIKO 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
ceiling ELECTRIC
BMJ-8 -
rosette CO.,LTD.
(Distributor) TEL(03)-3806-9171
Cable
conforming to MITSUBISHI
SGLPEV
Cable EIA568 CABLE
0.5mm 4P
(such as cable INDUSTRIES, LTD.
10BASE-T)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the 38400bps,
Speed
connected equipment. 57600bps, 12

Click!
CC-Link IE FIELD
data length used for
CONNECTION
Data Bit communication with the 7bits/8bits
NETWORK
(Default: 7bits)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Stop Bit

communications. 1bit/2bits
menu. (Default: 1bit) 13
Specify whether or not to perform
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
None
CC-Link CONNECTION
a parity check, and how it is
Parity Even
channel to be used from the list menu. performed during communication.
Odd
(Default: Odd)
STATION)
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Retry
0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
14
• I/F: Interface to be used Timeout Time communication to time out. 1 to 30sec
• Driver: FREQROL 500/700 (Default: 3sec)
4. CONNECTION
Set this item to adjust the
The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, transmission timing of the
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Make the settings according to the usage GOT.

(Default: 10ms)
environment.
15.4.2 Communication detail settings 15
POINT
CONNECTION

INVERTER

POINT changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
The settings of connecting equipment can be data.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following 16
For details, refer to the following. manuals.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
1.1.2 I/F communication setting GT User's Manual

CONNECTION


HINT
controller
(Fundamentals)

9
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.
15.5.1 Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series

10
 Communication settings
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
MELSECNET/10
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
11
RS-485 port Pr.79, n1 to n7, n10 to n12
(2) Communication settings of inverter
Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.30 (Extended function selection) to 1 [With
CONNECTION
NETWORK
display] before making the parameter settings.
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
communication with the GOT is disabled.
Setting item*1 Parameter No.*4 Set value Contents of setting

12
Communication station number n1 (331) 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number
CC-Link IE FIELD
setting
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Communication speed*2 n2 (332) 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 n3 (333) 10
Stop bit length: 1bit
Parity check presence/absence*2 n4 (334) 1 Odd 13

--- The inverter will not come to an
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Number of communication retries n5 (335)
(65535) alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval n6 (336) ---
suspension
STATION)
Wait time setting n7 (337) 0 0ms
CRLF selection n11 (341) 1*3 With CR, without LF

14
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ―
External operation mode at

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3
CONNECTION
power on
Link start mode selection n10 (340) 1 Computer link operation (Via G4)
CC-Link
E2PROM write selection n12 (342) 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1
*2
Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-S500, S500E, and F500J series.
Settings on the GOT can be changed.
15
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 When being monitored from the GOT, the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr.331 through Pr.337, and the parameter
CONNECTION
n10 through n12 correspond with Pr.340 through Pr.342.

INVERTER
Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use.
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series
GOT connection
destination
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT.If they are changed,
Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting
Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number

setting
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd
9999 The inverter will not come to an

Number of communication retries Pr.121
(65535) alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 *3 With CR, without LF

1
Protocol selection*4 ― ― ―
Operation mode selection Pr.79 1*3 PU operation mode
Communication startup mode selection*4 ― ― ―
2 Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

E PROM write selection 0
Built-in frequency setting

Frequency setting command selection*5 Pr.146 9999
potentiometer invalid
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E500 series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
*5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection.

15.5.3 Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124
MELSECNET/10
FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (user group read selection) to 0 [All
parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings.
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, 11
Parameter No.
Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting
CONNECTION
PU connector FR-A5NR
NETWORK
Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number
setting
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

12
Stop bit length/data length Data length: 7bit
Pr.119 Pr.333 10
Stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
NETWORK
The inverter will not come to an
Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
suspension 13
Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ―
STATION)
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
FR-A5NR 0*3
External operation mode at 14
power on
Link start mode selection*6 ― Pr.340 1 Computer link operation
E2PROM write selection*6 ― Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F500 and F500L series.
*3
*4
Inverter default values (No need to change)
Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
15
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they
can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.
Parameter No.

setting
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 Pr.333 10

alarm stop.
Communication check
suspension
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
FR-A5NR 0*3
power on
E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A500 and A500L series.
*4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.

15.5.5 Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342
MELSECNET/10

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (Extended function display selection) to
1 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings.
Parameter No.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
setting

12
Stop bit length/data length Data length: 7bit
Pr.119 Pr.333 10
Stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
alarm stop.
Communication check
suspension 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
FR-A5NR 0*3
External operation mode at 14
power on
E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-V500 and V500L series.
*3
*4
Inverter default values (No need to change)
Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series
GOT connection
destination
PU connector
FR-E7TR Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

(RS-485 terminal block)

PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number

setting
PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10
PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd

Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

0
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E700 series.

15.5.7 Connecting FREQROL-D700 series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549
MELSECNET/10
Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The
simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
setting
PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10

Data length: 7bit
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
alarm stop.
NETWORK
Communication check
suspension
PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms

13
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 *3 With CR, without LF
1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol
STATION)
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-D700 series. 14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series
GOT connection
destination
RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549

Parameter No.
PU connector RS-485
PU communication station number/RS-485 15.5.12 Station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
communication station number setting
PU communication speed/RS-485
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps
communication speed*2
PU communication stop bit length/ Data length: 7bit

Pr.119 Pr.333 10
RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
PU communication parity check/

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
RS-485 communication parity check*2
Number of PU communication retries/ The inverter will not come to an

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
RS-485 communication retry count alarm stop.
PU communication check time interval/ Communication check

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4
RS-485 communication check time interval suspension
PU communication waiting time setting/

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF selection/

Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
Protocol selection ― Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
RS-485 0*3
power on
PU
0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 connector
RS-485 1 Network operation mode.
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

0
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700P series only)
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and
[Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication
settings of the GOT side.
10
Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO]→[GOT]→[1]Write
MELSECNET/10
Pr.999*1 GOTInitial settings
11 -
(RS-485 terminal)
*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series
GOT connection
destination
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549


setting
Data length: 7bit

PU communication stop bit length Pr.119 10

alarm stop.
Communication check
suspension
PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 *3 With CR, without LF

1
Protocol selection Pr.549 *3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol

0

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3
power on
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.
HINT
Automatic setting with Pr.999
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and
[Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication
settings of the GOT side.
Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549

Parameter No.
PU connector RS-485
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PU communication station number/RS-485 15.5.12 Station number
Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
communication station number setting
PU communication speed/RS-485
communication speed*2
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps 12
PU communication stop bit length/ Data length: 7bit
Pr.119 Pr.333 10
CC-Link IE FIELD
RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
CONNECTION
PU communication parity check/
NETWORK
Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
RS-485 communication parity check*2
Number of PU communication retries/ The inverter will not come to an

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
RS-485 communication retry count alarm stop.
13
PU communication check time interval/ *4
Communication check
Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
RS-485 communication check time interval suspension
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PU communication waiting time setting/
Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
STATION)
PU communication CR/LF selection/
Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
Protocol selection ― Pr.549 0*3 Mitsubishi inverter protocol

14
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
CONNECTION
RS-485 0*3
power on
(Via G4)
CC-Link
PU
0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 connector
RS-485
*3
1 Network operation mode.
15
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A700 series.
CONNECTION

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

HINT
(1) Automatic setting with Pr.999
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number]
and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default
communication settings of the GOT side.
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

Pr.999*1
11 GOT Initial settings (RS-485) ―
(2) Inverters available for automatic batch setting

Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL (production number) symbol of the
inverter to be used. For details, contact your local distributor.
15.5.11 Connecting MD-CX522- K(-A0)
GOT connection
destination
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124

• Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
• After setting the parameters for the communication settings, reset the inverter.
• Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.12 Station number setting
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length/data length*2 Pr.119 10
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd
Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension
Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
CRLF presence/absence selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of MELIPM series.

15.5.12 Station number setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set each station number so that no station number
MELSECNET/H
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
Station
No.3
Station
No.0
Station
No.1
Station
No.21
Station
No.6
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
GOT
Examples of station number setting
(1) Direct specification 11

When setting the device, specify the station number of
the inverter of which data is to be changed.
CONNECTION
Specification range
NETWORK
0 to 31
(2) Indirect specification

When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
12
number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GD25).
NETWORK
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 155 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the inverter.
13
Specification Compatible
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Setting range
CC-Link CONNECTION
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
STATION)
102 GD12
103 GD13
14
104 GD14
105 GD15
CONNECTION
106 GD16
0 to 31
107 GD17 For the setting other than the above,
(Via G4)
CC-Link
108 GD18 error (dedicated device is out of range)

will occur.
109
110
GD19
GD20
15
111 GD21
CONNECTION
112 GD22
INVERTER
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
 Inverter (FREQROL 500/700 series)
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
Device
The device specifications of controllers may differ No.
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device name Setting range
represen
same series. tation
Please make the setting according to the specifications of Inverter
the controller actually used. RS0: 0 to RS15: 31
status monitor
RS0: 100 to RS15: 115
Bit device
When a non-existent device or a device number outside (RS)*3
Decimal
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Run command
may not be monitored. WS0: 0 to RS15: 31
(WS)
WS0: 100 to RS15: 115
*4*5
 Setting item Alarm definition
A0: 0 to A7: 31
(A)
A0: 100 to A7: 115
*2*3
Parameter (Pr) Pr0: 0 to Pr999: 31
Word device
*1*2 Pr0: 100 to Pr999: 115
Programmed Decimal
PG0: 0 to PG89: 31
operation
PG0: 100 to PG89: 115
(PG)*1*2
Special
SP108: 0 to SP127: 31
parameter
SP108: 100 to SP127: 115
(SP)*2*4
Item Description *1 When creating the screen, designate only either of

programmed operation (PG) device or parameter (Pr)
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
device.
The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word Do no designate both PG (PG0 to PG89) and Pr (Pr900 to
device. Pr905) devices.
Monitors the inverter of the specified station No. *2 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is possible.
*3 Only reading is possible.
Device 0 to 31: To monitor the inverter of the specified *4 Precautions for PU operation mode
Station station No. When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the
No. 100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the inverter operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multi-
to be monitored by the value of GOT data register speed operation (W3 to W7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used.
For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the
(GD).*1 operations as below.
Displays the device type and setting range which are • Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the
Information operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer
selected in [Device].
link operation mode), and then operate the inverter.
*1 The following shows the relation between the inverter station • Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109,
numbers and the GOT data register.
SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or
Station reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122).
GOT data register (GD) Setting range
No. *5 Precautions for WS devices
Only writing is possible for WS devices.
100 GD10 0 to 31 More than one WS cannot turn on at once.
101 GD11 (If setting a value (Except the turned on WS device, the other WS devices turn
outside the off.)
: : Bits of SP122 (word device) and SP121 (word device) are
range above, a
114 GD24 assigned to WS0 to WS7 and WS8 to WS15 respectively.
device range When more than one WS turns on at once, convert the
115 GD25 error occurs) values for the bit devices that are assigned to the word
device into values for the word device. Write the converted
(1) Setting the device by inputting directly from the values into SP122 or SP121.
keyboard • Setting High speed operation command (WS5), Middle
speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed
When setting the device by inputting directly from the
operation command (WS3)
keyboard, set the items as follows. When setting High speed operation command (WS5),
Middle speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed
operation command (WS3), write numerical values to
device SP122 as necessary.
As the following figure shows, each operation mode is
assigned to device SP122.
The following shows an example for Forward rotation
command (WS1) and Low speed operation command
(WS3).
Station No.
Device number
Device name

(2) Run command
9
WS4: Middle speed operation command(RM)

WS5: High speed operation command(RH)
WS3: Low speed operation command(RL)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown
WS2: Reverse rotation command(STR)

WS1: Forward rotation command(STF)
WS6: Second function selection(RT)
below. For the setting items of other than the
MELSECNET/H
WS0: Current input selection(AU)
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of the used inverter
WS7: Output stop(MRS)

(Communication function (Setting item and set
data))
10
Device name Description*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS0 Current input selection (AU)
MELSECNET/10
Device SP122 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
b15 b7 b0 WS1 Forward rotation command (STF)
Write [1] to each bit corresponding to Forward rotation WS2 Reverse rotation command (STR)
command (WS1) and Low speed operation command
(WS3) of device SP122. The value will be 000AH in this WS3 Low speed operation command (RL)
example. When writing the value to device SP122 actually, WS4 Middle speed operation command (RM)
convert 000AH to decimal number and write the value
[10]. WS5 High speed operation command (RH)
11
When using a WS device, [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot
be used. WS6 Second function selection (RT)
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch.
WS7 Output stop (MRS)
CONNECTION
WS8 Jog operation (JOG)
NETWORK
The following shows correspondences between virtual
inverter devices used in the GOT and data of the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
WS9
power failure (CS)
inverter.
(1) Inverter status monitor

WS10 Start self-holding (STOP) 12
WS11 Reset (RES)
An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown
below. For the setting items of other than the WS12 -
CC-Link IE FIELD
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
WS13 -
NETWORK
User's Manual of the used inverter WS14 -
(communication function (setting item and set
WS15 -
data))
Device name Description*1

*1 The data (function of input terminal) may be changed by the
parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of the 13
inverter used.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS0 Inverter running (RUN) Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication
operation and setting
RS1 Forward rotation (STF)
RS2 Reverse rotation (STR) (3) Alarm definition
STATION)
RS3 Up to frequency (SU)
Device name*1 Description
RS4 Overload (OL)
RS5 Instantaneous power failure (IPF)

A0
A1
Second alarm in past
Latest alarm
14
RS6 Frequency detection (FU) A2 Fourth alarm in past
RS7 Fault (ABC1)
CONNECTION
A3 Third alarm in past
RS8 ABC2 A4 Sixth alarm in past (Via G4)
CC-Link
RS9 - A5 Fifth alarm in past

RS10 - A6 Eighth alarm in past
RS11 - A7 Seventh alarm in past 15

RS12 - *1 Only reading is possible for A0 to A7.
These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical input etc.).
RS13 -
CONNECTION
(4) Parameter
RS14 -
INVERTER
The numbers of virtual devices for inverter (parameter

RS15 Fault occurrence (Pr)), used by GOT, correspond to the inverter
*1 The description (function of input terminal) may be changed parameter numbers.
by the parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of For the inverter parameters, refer to the following.
the inverter used.
Manual of the inverter being used
16
Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication
SERVO AMPLIFIER
operation and setting

CONNECTION

(6) Special parameter
POINT The numbers of the inverter’s virtual devices (SP) used
for the GOT correspond to instruction codes of the
(1) Monitoring Pr.37 inverter communication function.
GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of For instruction details, and values to be read and
FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/ written, refer to the following,
E700. Manual of the inverter used
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr)
"8888" and "9999" designate special function. Instruction
Device
To set these numbers from GOT, designate a Description code
name
number as shown below. Read Write
Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT SP108 Second parameter changing 6CH ECH
*1 Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH
8888 65520 SP109
9999 65535 SP110*1 Set frequency (RAM, E2PROM) 6EH EEH
(3) Precautions for setting calibration parameter SP111 *1*2 Output frequency 6FH -
(Pr900 to Pr905) SP112 *2 Output current 70H -
When setting a calibration parameter (Pr900 to
SP113*2 Output voltage 71H -
Pr905), it is necessary to set the value below for
extension second parameter (SP108), depending on SP114*2 Special monitor 72H -
the device number to be used and the inverter model. SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H
Value to be set to extension Alarm definition all clear - F4H
Description SP116
second parameter (SP108) Latest alarm, second alarm in past 74H -
H00 Offset/gain SP117 Third alarm in past, fourth alarm in past 75H -
H01 Analog SP118 Fifth alarm in past, sixth alarm in past 76H -
H02 Analog value at terminal Seventh alarm in past, eights alarm in
SP119 77H -
past
Inverter status monitor (extended)
SP121 79H F9H
(5) Programmed operation Run command (extend)
The devices below correspond to the parameters Inverter status monitor 7AH -
SP122
(Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series. Run command - FAH
SP123 Communication mode 7BH FBH
Device name Description
PG0 to PG9 Program set 1 (running frequency) SP124*3 All parameter clear - FCH
*3 Inverter reset - FDH
PG10 to PG19*1 Program set 1 (time) SP125
PG20 to PG29 Program set 1 (rotation direction) SP127 Link parameter extended setting 7FH FFH
PG30 to PG39 Program set 2 (running frequency) *1 GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below
are satisfied at the same time.
PG40 to PG49*1 Program set 2 (time) (Only FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/E700
series)
PG50 to PG59 Program set 2 (rotation direction)
• Pr37 0
PG60 to PG69 Program set 3 (running frequency) • SP127 = 1
*2 Only reading is possible for SP111 to SP114.
PG70 to PG79*1 Program set 3 (time)
These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical
PG80 to PG89 Program set 3 (rotation direction) input etc.).
*3 Only writing is possible for SP124 and SP125.
*1 To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70 These devices cannot be used for read object.
to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8bits, and minute
or second in the lower 8bits.
Example) To set 13 hour 35 minute
Time to be set 13H 35M Remark

Convert "hour" and "minute"
H0D H23 HEX
into hexadecimal.
Combine upper and lower 8-
Input H0D23 or 3363. -
bit values.

9
15.7 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 Station No. of inverter system
Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0
station.
 Number of inverter 10
Up to 31 inverters can be connected.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
For GT11 and GT10, refer to the following manual for
MELSECNET/10
the procedure to check the connectable inverter
depending on the version.
GT11 User's Manual, GT10 User's Manual

Number of connect-
able Inverter
11
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
CONNECTION
NETWORK
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10 12
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
 Parameter setting
(1) Communication parameter change
STATION)
Do not make any change for each communication
parameter of the inverter side from GOT.
If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot
be made.
14
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter
(Pr)
"8888" and "9999" designate special function. When CONNECTION
specifying from the GOT, it will be as follows.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT
8888 65520 15
9999 65535
CONNECTION
 Screen switching devices, system

INVERTER
information devices
Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and
system information devices when the GOT is
connected to only the inverter.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
 GOT clock control

CONNECTION
Since the inverter does not have a clock function, the

settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT
clock control will be disabled.

15.7 Precautions
15.7 Precautions
16
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MELSECNET/10
16.
CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
16.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12 13
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
STATION)
16.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 45
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
16 - 1
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

Communication
type
MR-J2S- A
RS-232
MELSERVO-J2-Super MR-J2S- CP 16.2.1
RS-422
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO-J2M 16.2.2
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3- A RS-232
MELSERVO-J3
MR-J3- T RS-422
16.2.3
RS-232
MELSERVO-J4*1 MR-J4- A
RS-422
*1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version.
16 - 2 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
 When connecting via RS-232 communication

Servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
amplifier
MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M
MELSECNET/10
MITSUBISHI Connection cable
CHARGE
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT 11

Number of
Commun connectable
Cable model Max.
Series name ication Option device Model equipment
Connection diagram number distance
type
CONNECTION
GT15-RS2-9P
NETWORK
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
or 15m
-
RS232 connection diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
MELSERVO-
RS-232
1 GOT for
1 servo
12
J2-Super*1 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) amplifier
or RS232 -
+ 15m
connection diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
-
NETWORK
RS232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
 When connecting via RS-422 communication 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M
STATION)
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
GOT
CHARGE CHARGE
14
Connection cable
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT

Communi Max. Number of connectable
Series name cation
type
Connection diagram
number
Option device Model distance equipment
15
RS422 connection - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
INVERTER
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT
MELSERVO-J2-Super RS422 connection GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 30m (multi-drop
*1 diagram 2) communication)
- (Built into GOT)
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
RS422 connection - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION
diagram 7)
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 - 3

16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

Servo
GOT
amplifier
Connection cable

Number of
Commun connectable
Cable model Max.
Series name ication Option device Model equipment
Connection diagram number distance
type
GT15-RS2-9P
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
or 15m
-
(Built into GOT)
MELSERVO 1 GOT for
-J2M RS-232 1 servo
*1 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) amplifier
or RS232 -
+ 15m
connection diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
-
RS232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)

Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
MITSUBISHI
CHARGE
GOT
Connection cable
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT Number of

Communic Connection diagram Max. connectable
Series name Option device Model equipment
ation type number distance
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
MELSERVO-J2M RS422 connection 0 to 31 stations
RS-422 30m GT15-RS4-9S
*1 diagram 2) for 1 GOT
- (Built into GOT)
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

16.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 When connecting to one servo amplifier
MELSECNET/H
Servo RS-422/232 MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M

GOT
amplifier converter
10
Connection cable
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Number of
Series name
RS-422/232 interface
converter
Commun
ication
Cable model
Connection diagram
Max.
Option device Model
connectable 11
RS-422/232 conversion distance equipment
type number
cable
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION
NETWORK
- 15m
DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2
- (Built into GOT)
or RS-232
FA-T-RS40VS *3
12
RS232 connection
diagram 2)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
MELSERVO- GT16-C02R4-9S 1 GOT for
NETWORK
J4*1, J3*1 (0.2m) 1 servo amplifier
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
RS422 connection
- RS-422
diagram 3)
30m
GT15-RS4-9S
13
- (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)
STATION)
*2 DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation.
*3 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
14
The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.
Use the provided cables to connect devices.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection)
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
Connection Connection Connection

Terminating Distributor Distributor
Servo amplifier cable cable cable GOT
cable *2 *2 Max. Number of
1) 2) 3)
dista connectable
Commu Connection Connection Connection Connection nce equipment
Model Model
Series name nication diagram diagram diagram diagram Option device Model
name name
type number number number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422
connection GT15-RS4-9S
diagram 3)
RS422 RS422 RS422
connection connection BMJ-8 connection BMJ-8 Up to 32
MELSERVO-
RS-422 diagram 6) diagram 5) (Recomm diagram 4) (Recomm 30m axes for
J4*1, J3*1 - (Built into GOT)
ended) ended) 1 GOT
RS422
connection
diagram 8) - (Built into GOT)

LTD.

9
 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-232 connection)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
Servo Servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
amplifier amplifier
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
converter
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Connection Connection Connection
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
Servo Terminating Distributor Distributor
cable cable cable GOT
amplifier cable converter*2
NETWORK
*3 *3 interface
1) 2) 3) Max. Number of
Connecti Connecti Connecti dista connectable
Commun Connection nce equipment
Series on on Model on Model Model
name diagram
number
diagram
number
name diagram
number
name name
ication
type
diagram
number
Option device Model
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-RS2-9P
STATION)
-
RS422 RS422 RS422
MELSER
connection connection BMJ-8 connection BMJ-8
FA-T-
-
(Built into GOT)
Up to 32 14
VO-J4*1, diagram 6) diagram 5) (Recom diagram 4) (Recom RS-232 30m axes for
RS40VS
J3*1 mended) mended) 1 GOT
CONNECTION
RS232 (Via G4)
CC-Link
connection -
diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
15
*2 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this
product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
CONNECTION
The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.

INVERTER
Use the cables packed together to connect.

LTD.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

GOT and the servo amplifier.
 Precautions when preparing cable
16.3.1 RS-232 cable (1) Cable length
The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less.
 Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector

RS232 connection diagram 1) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Connector for interface unit's or
GOT side servo amplifier's CN3
CD/NC*1 1 Plate FG
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD
- 9 1 LG
RD(RXD) 2 12 TXD
SG 5 11 LG
RS(RTS) 7
CS(CTS) 8
DR(DSR) 6
ER(DTR) 4

GOT side Connection cable side
SD(TXD) 1 3 TXD
RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD
ER(DTR) 3 1 -
DR(DSR) 4 4 DTR
SG 5 5 GND
RS(RTS) 6 6 DSR
CS(CTS) 7 7 RTS
NC 8 8 CTS
NC 9 9 -

Connector for interface unit's or
GOT side servo amplifier's CN3
SD(TXD) 1 2 RXD
RD(RXD) 2 1 LG
ER(DTR) 3 12 TXD
DR(DSR) 4 11 LG
SG 5 Plate FG
RS(RTS) 6
CS(CTS) 7
NC 8
NC 9

16.3.2 RS-422 cable 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Connector for Connector for Connector for
interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's
or or or
GOT side
1st axis servo
amplifier's CN3
2nd axis servo
amplifier's CN3
32nd axis (last axis)*1
servo amplifier's CN3
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDP SDP
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 9 9 9 SDP
MELSECNET/10
SDN SDN
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 5 5 5 RDP
RDN RDN
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 15 15 15 RDN
SG 13
LG
11
LG
11 11 LG 11
LG LG
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 1 1 LG
TRE TRE
RSB(RTS-) 10 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CONNECTION
CSA(CTS+) 11 Plate Plate Plate SD
NETWORK
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
CC-Link IE FIELD
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
CONNECTION
NC
NETWORK
14
Shell
*1 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN.

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Connector for Connector for Connector for
interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's
or or or
STATION)
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)
GOT side amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 *1
SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 2
SDN
9
SDN
9 9 SDP
14
RXD-(RDB) 7 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 5 5 5 RDP
CONNECTION
RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 6 15 15 15 RDN
LG LG (Via G4)
SG(GND)
CC-Link
5 11 11 11 LG
LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 3 1 1 1 LG
15
TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 8 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CTS+(CSA) 4 Plate Plate Plate SD
CTS-(CSB) 9
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Distributor side Distributor side
GOT side (Modular connector) (Modular connector)
SDA 1 3 RDP LG 1
RDA 2 5 SDP P5D 2
RSA 3 2 P5D RDP 3
CSA 4 7 LG SDN 4 *1
SG 5 1 LG SDP 5
SDB 6 6 RDN RDN 6
RDB 7 4 SDN LG 7
RSB 8 8 NC NC 8
CSB 9
*1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP (3-
FG - pin) and RDN (6-pin) with a 150 resistor.

Distributor side Distributor side
(Modular connector) (Modular connector)
LG 1 1 LG
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
SDN 4 4 SDN
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG
NC 8 8 NC

Servo amplifier side Distributor side
(Modular connector) (Modular connector)
*1
LG 1 1 LG
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
SDN 4 4 SDN
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG
NC 8 8 NC
*1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as
possible.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
*1
GOT side Distributor Distributor Distributor
MELSECNET/H
SDP SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 3 9 9 9
SDN SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 4 19 19 19
RDP RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 5 5 5
10
RDN RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 2 15 15 15
LG LG LG
SG(GND) 5 11 11 11
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
LG LG LG
MELSECNET/10
RTS+(RSA) 6 1 1 1
TRE TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 7 10 10 10
CTS+(CSA) 8 Plate Plate Plate
CTS-(CSB) 9
11
CONNECTION
Distributor side
NETWORK
GOT side (Modular connector)
TXD+(SDA) 1 3 RDP
TXD-(SDB) 2 6 RDN 12
RXD+(RDA) 3 5 SDP
RXD-(RDB) 4 4 SDN
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
SG 5 1 LG
NETWORK
RTS+(RSA) 6 7 LG
RTS-(RSB) 7 2 P5D
CTS+(CSA) 8 8 NC 13
CTS-(CSB) 9
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
 Precautions when preparing cable
STATION)
(1) Cable length
(2) GOT side connector 14
(3) Servo amplifier connector CONNECTION
Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier. (Via G4)
CC-Link

See the technical data of the servo amplifier to
be used. 15
(1) GOT side
CONNECTION
When connecting a servo amplifier to the GOT, a

INVERTER
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.

GOT main unit to "No". 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

to the following.

2.
3.
4. Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
Set this item when change the data length
used for communication with the
Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
(Default: 8bit)
Click! Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
(Default: 1bit)
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
check, and how it is performed during
Parity Even (fixed)
communication.
(Default: Even)
Set the number of retries to be performed
menu. Retry when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times
(Default: 3times)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the time period for a communication to
channel to be used from the list menu. Timeout Time time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
3. Set the following items. Host Address

Specify the station number of the servo
amplifier in the system configuration. 0 to 31
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi (Default: 0)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Set this item to adjust the transmission
timing of the communication request from
Type to be connected. Delay Time 0 to 300 (ms)
the GOT.
• I/F: Interface to be used (Default: 0ms)
• Driver: MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M Specify whether to use the station No.
Station No.
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Selection
If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is fixed
to "0."
Yes or No
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: Yes)

environment.
16.4.2 Communication detail settings POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. The communication interface setting can be
POINT data.
manual.
For details, refer to the following. GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
controller
example, faulty station that has communication 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
(Fundamentals)
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side
Model name Refer to
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 16.5.1 POINT

MELSERVO-J2M Series 16.5.2
(1) Parameter setting
MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 16.5.3
Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch
provided on the operation section of the servo
16.5.1 Connecting to the amplifier or setup software.
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Pushbutton switch
provided on the operation
section of the servo amplifier
POINT
MODE UP DOWN SET
(2) When changing the parameter

MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective
For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series, refer the new parameter.
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO-
J2-Super Series servo amplifiers.
 Parameters of MELSERVO-J2-Super Series

Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2-Super
Series.
Item Set value

Station number setting: 0 to 31
Basic parameter No. 15
(Default: 0)*1
Serial communication function selection
(Default: 0000)
Basic parameter No. 16
(3) (2) 0 (1)
(1) Serial communication baud rate

selection*2
0: 9600bps
1: 19200bps
Basic parameter No. 16 2: 38400bps
3: 57600bps
(2) Serial communication I/F selection
0: RS-232
1: RS-422
(3) Communication response delay time
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid (Response after 800 s or longer
delay)
Function selection 8
In case of MR-J2S- :
(Default: 0000)*3
Expansion parameter 2 No. 53
Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 or No. 57
In case of MR-J2S- CP:
Expansion parameter 2 No. 57 0 (1) 0 0
(1) Station No. selection for protocol
In case of MR-J2S- CL:
0: With station No.
Expansion parameter 2 No. 57
1: Without station No.
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other

axes.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
*3 To change the set value, enter "000E" to basic parameter
No. 19.

16.5.2 Connecting to the 9
MELSERVO-J2M Series POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
(1) Parameter setting
Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch
POINT
provided on the operation section of the servo
MELSERVO-J2M Series amplifier or setup software.
For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the 10
following manual.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Pushbutton switch
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO-
MELSECNET/10
provided on the operation
J2M Series servo amplifiers. section of the servo amplifier
MODE UP DOWN SET
(2) When changing the parameter

 Parameter of MELSERVO-J2M Series Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective
Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series. the new parameter. 11
Item Set value
(Default: 0000)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Basic IFU parameter No. 0
(3) (2) 0 (1)
(1) Serial communication baud rate selection*1

0: 9600bps
1: 19200bps
12
Basic IFU parameter 2: 38400bps
No. 0 3: 57600bps
CC-Link IE FIELD
(2) Serial communication I/F selection
CONNECTION
0: RS-232
NETWORK
1: RS-422
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid (Response after 800 s or longer
13
delay)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Interface unit serial communication station No.
Basic IFU parameter
selection:
No. 10
0 to 31 (Default: 0) *2
STATION)
Basic IFU parameter Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection:
No. 11 0 to 31 (Default: 1) *2
Basic IFU parameter Slot 2 serial communication station No. selection: 14

No. 12 0 to 31 (Default: 2) *2
CONNECTION
No. 13 0 to 31 (Default: 3) *2
Basic IFU parameter Slot 4 serial communication station No. selection: (Via G4)
CC-Link
No. 14 0 to 31 (Default: 4) *2

No. 15 0 to 31 (Default: 5) *2
15
No. 16 0 to 31 (Default: 6) *2
CONNECTION

No. 17 0 to 31 (Default: 7) *2
INVERTER

No. 18 0 to 31 (Default: 8) *2

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to 16
the following.
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

units.

16.5.3 Connecting to the 16.5.4 Station number setting
MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series
Set each station number so that no station number
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
POINT connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series Station Station Station Station Station
For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series, refer to NO.3 NO.0 NO.1 NO.21 NO. 6
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- GOT
J4, J3 Series servo amplifiers.
 Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series Examples of station number setting
Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series. (1) Direct specification

When setting the device, specify the station number of
Item Set value the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed.
Basic parameter Station number setting: 0 to 31
Specification
No. PC20 (Default: 0)*1
range
0 to 31
(Default: 0000)
Basic parameter No. PC21 (2) Indirect specification
(2) (1)
When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
(1) Serial communication baud rate selection*2 number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
0: 9600bps using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
Basic parameter 1: 19200bps GD25).
No. PC21 2: 38400bps When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
3: 57600bps Designer3,the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
4: 115200bps
the station No.specification will be the station No.of the
selection
servo amplifier.
0: Invalid
Specification Compatible
1: Valid (Response after 800 s or longer Setting range
station NO. device
delay)
100 GD10
axes. 101 GD11
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to 102 GD12
the following. 103 GD13
104 GD14
105 GD15
106 GD16
POINT 107 GD17 0 to 31
For the setting other than the above, a
(1) Parameter setting 108 GD18 communication timeout error will occur.
Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch 109 GD19
provided on the operation section of the servo 110 GD20
amplifier or setup software.
111 GD21
112 GD22
113 GD23
Pushbutton switch
provided on the operation 114 GD24
MODE UP DOWN SET
section of the servo amplifier 115 GD25
(2) When changing the parameter (3) All station specification

Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
the new parameter. read-out operation.
• For write-in operation, all station will be a target.
• For read-out operation, only one station will be a
target.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. (a) Device Definition dialog box
When setting a device on the Device dialog box and
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. click the [Device Definition...] button, the
correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a
The device specifications of controllers may differ
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier
is displayed.
10
same series.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Please make the setting according to the specifications of 1. 2. 3. 3.
MELSECNET/10
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.
(1) Servo amplifier
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
4. 5. 6. 12
The device can be searched with the servo definition or
other items on this dialog box to set a device.
CC-Link IE FIELD
1. Select a key item for searching.
CONNECTION
Function Name Search: Select this item when
NETWORK
Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. searching a device with the function name.
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device. Text Search: Select this item when searching a device
Clicking the button displays the dialog box indicating with the character string.
Device
the correspondence between the GOT virtual device
for a servo amplifier and the definition of servo
2. Select and input a key item for searching. 13
amplifier. 3. Click the [Search] button.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
If selecting an item on the displayed dialog box,
remember that the servo amplifier definition is
4. The items that matches to the specified condition are
displayed in the text box below.
displayed.
The display contents are as follows.
STATION)
Informat Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in
ion [Device]. Device : The GOT virtual device for a servo
amplifier is displayed.
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Definition : The definition of the servo amplifier is
Select this item when writing data to all servo
amplifiers connected.
displayed. 14
Symbol : The abbreviated name for the servo
During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of Station amplifier is displayed.
No. 0 is monitored.
All 5. Select a device to be set.
CONNECTION
When inputting data by Numerical Input, the data is
written to all servo amplifiers connected during
inputting; the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is
6. Clicking the [OK] button reflects the device selected (Via G4)
CC-Link
by step 4 to the Device dialog box.

monitored during other than inputting (displaying).
Network Select this item when monitoring the servo amplifier
of the Station No. specified. POINT 15
After selecting, set station numbers of servo
amplifiers in the following range.
When selecting [All] in the Network setting
0 to 31:
Selection
The servo amplifier of the Station No. specified will The network No. 0 and Station No. FF are displayed on
CONNECTION
be monitored. Device List and when printing.

INVERTER
100 to 115: (Device List screen)

Specify the Station No. of the servo amplifier to be
monitored with a GOT data register (GD).*1
For details of *1, refer to the following.
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
100 GD10
101 GD11 0 to 31
CONNECTION
(If setting a value out

: :
of the range above, a
114 GD24 timeout error occurs.)
115 GD25

(2) MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
POINT
Device
No.
Monitoring servo amplifier Device name *2 Setting range available
represent
Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be ation
connected and fully understand the operating
Servo amplifier request
procedures before monitoring. SP1 to SP2
Bit device
(SP)
Before operation, check the parameter settings.
Improper settings may cause some machines to Operation mode selection
OM0 to OM4
perform unexpected operation. (OM)
The parameter settings must not be changed
Basic parameter
excessively. Operation will be insatiable. Expansion parameter
PRM0 to PRM29
(1) Parameters with * in front of it's abbreviated name (PRM) *1
PRM1000 to PRM1029
For the parameter with * in front of it's abbreviated
Status display (ST) ST0 to ST2
name, powering off the servo amplifier after setting Decimal
AL0
then on makes the parameter valid.
AL11 to AL13
Word device
(2) Data length for setting virtual devices for servo Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
amplifier AL210 to AL215
Set the following data length for setting devices. AL230 to AL235
• PRM, ST, AL, PA, PB, PC, PD, POS, SPD, ACT, External input (DI)*3 DI0 to DI2
DCT, DWL, AUX
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
: 16bits or 32bits (depends on the data of servo
Forced output of signal pin
amplifier)
(for test operation) TMO0
• DI, DO, TMI, TMO, TMD: 32bits (TMO)
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM29 when writing parameters to the servo
If the above data length was not set, data would amplifier RAM.
not be set to the servo amplifier correctly or the PRM1000 to PRM1029 are used when writing parameters to
GOT can not monitor normally. E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
*2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
(a) Monitoring devices.
• When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit *3 Only reading is possible.
data, the upper 16bits are displayed as 0.

• When the 32-bit data is handled as 16-bit
data, the lower 16bits only are displayed as POINT
0.
Precautions for SP, OM, and TMO devices
(b) Writing
(1) For bit devices
The GOT writes within the range of data
Only writing is possible.
length set. Note that the servo amplifier
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
responds correctly while the written data is
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
invalid in the servo amplifier side when the
switch.
written data is outside the range of values
which can be set by the servo amplifier. (2) For word devices
(3) Memory area for writing parameters
Numerical input cannot be used.
Parameters are written to RAM or E2PROM of When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
servo amplifier.
(a) When written to RAM
Remember that written parameters are
cleared when power supply to the servo
amplifier is turned off.
(b) When written to E2PROM
Written parameters are not cleared even
when power supply to the servo amplifier is
turned off.However, there are limits in the
number of writing to E2PROM.
If the data is frequently updated (more than
once in an hour), write the parameters to the
RAM.
For details, refer to the manual of the servo
amplifier used.

(a) Servo amplifier request (e) Alarm 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol Device
Item Symbol
MELSECNET/H
SP1 Current alarm clear ― name
SP2 Alarm history clear ― AL0 Current alarm number ―

Servo status when alarm occurs
AL11 ―
regenerative load factor
(b) Operation mode selection
AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Device name Item Symbol
AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs peak bus
―
10
Normal mode voltage
OM0 ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(not test operation mode) Alarm number from alarm history
AL200 ―
MELSECNET/10
Output signal (DO) forced most recent alarm
OM4 ―
output Alarm number from alarm history
AL201 ―
first alarm in past
(c) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
second alarm in past
Device name Item
Symbol *2
AL203
Alarm number from alarm history
third alarm in past
― 11
PRM0, PRM1000 function selection, *BPS Alarm number from alarm history
AL204 ―
alarm history clear fourth alarm in past
Regenerative brake option Alarm number from alarm history
CONNECTION
PRM1, PRM1001 *REG AL205 ―
selection fifth alarm in past
NETWORK
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1 most recent alarm
PRM4, PRM1004
PRM5, PRM1005
Analog monitor 2 output
Analog monitor 3 output
MD2
MD3
AL211
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
first alarm in past
― 12
PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
PRM7, PRM1007 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
CONNECTION
PRM8, PRM1008 Analog monitor 3 offset MO3 AL213 ―
third alarm in past
NETWORK
PRM9, PRM1009 Function selection 2 *OP2
Interface unit serial AL214 ―
fourth alarm in past
PRM10, PRM1010 communication station No. *ISN
selection
Slot 1 serial communication
AL215
fifth alarm in past
―
13
PRM11, PRM1011 *DSN1 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
AL230 ―
CC-Link CONNECTION
most recent alarm
PRM12, PRM1012 *DSM2 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection AL231 ―
first alarm in past
STATION)
PRM13, PRM1013 *DSM3 Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL233
third alarm in past
―
14
CONNECTION
fifth alarm in past
PRM17, PRM1017 *DSN7
(Via G4)
CC-Link

(f) External I/O signal
PRM18, PRM1018 *DSN8
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter write inhibit *BLK
Device
name
Item Symbol 15
Serial communication DI0 External input pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
PRM20, PRM1020 SIC
time-out selection
DI1 External input pin statuses CN5 ―
CONNECTION
PRM21 to PRM29
For manufacturer setting ― DI2 External input pin statuses CN4A/CN4B ―
INVERTER
PRM1021 to PRM1029
DO0 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
*2 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
DO1 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
back on after setting the parameter data.
(d) Status display

(g) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) 16
Device
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Device name Item Symbol Item Symbol

name
CONNECTION
ST0 Regenerative load ratio ―

TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
ST1 Bus voltage ―
ST2 Peak bus voltage ―

(3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
amplifier used with the GOT.
Device
*2
No. (a) Servo amplifier request
represent
ation Device
Item Symbol
name
Servo amplifier request
SP0 to SP6 SP0 Status display data clear ―
(SP)
Bit device
SP1 Current alarm clear ―

Operation mode selection
OM0 to OM4 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
(OM)
SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
Instruction demand
TMB0 to TMB1 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(for test operation) (TMB)
SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Basic parameter
PRM0 to PRM84 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
Expansion parameter
*1
PRM1000 to PRM1084
(PRM)
AL0 Decimal Device
Item Symbol
AL11 to AL21 name
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
Word device
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―

AL210 to AL215 OM1 JOG operation ―
AL230 to AL235
OM2 Positioning operation ―
Input signal for test OM3 Motorless operation ―
operation TMI0
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
(for test operation) (TMI)
TMO0 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
(for test operation) (TMO)
Set data Device name Item Symbol
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD) Clears acceleration/
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo TMB0 deceleration time constant ―
amplifier RAM. (test mode)
PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to
Temporary stop command
E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 ―
(test mode)
devices.
(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
POINT Device name Item Symbol*1
PRM0, PRM1000 For manufacturer setting ―
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
devices
PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU
(1) For bit devices CMX Electronic gear
Only writing is possible. numerator
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. PRM3, PRM1003 CMX
(Command pulse multiplying
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit factor numerator)
switch. Electronic gear
(2) For word devices PRM4, PRM1004
denominator
CDV
Only writing is possible. (Command pulse multiplying
Numerical input cannot be used. factor denominator)
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP
PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1
Position command
acceleration/deceleration
PRM7, PRM1007 PST
time constant
(position smoothing)
PRM8 to PRM15,
For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1008 to PRM1015
PRM16, PRM1016 Alarm history clear *BPS
PRM17 to PRM18,
PRM1017 to PRM1018
PRM19, PRM1019 DRU parameter block *BLK
PRM21, PRM1021 *OP3
(Command pulse selection)
PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC

(e) Status display 9
Device name Item Symbol*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP Device name Item Symbol
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
MELSECNET/H
PRM25 to PRM26,
PRM1025 to PRM1026 ST1 Servo motor speed ―
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR ST2 Droop pulses ―
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 ST3 Cumulative command pulses ―
PRM29 to PRM32,
For manufacturer setting ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ―
PRM1029 to PRM1032
Electromagnetic brake
ST5 Effective load ratio ― 10
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR ST6 Peak load ratio ―
sequence output
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Ratio of load inertia moment ST7 Instantaneous torque ―
MELSECNET/10
PRM34, PRM1034 to servo motor inertia GD2 ST8 Within one-revolution position ―
moment ST9 ABS counter ―
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2 ST10 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1
(f) Alarm
PRM38, PRM1038
Speed integral
VIC
11
compensation Device
Item Symbol
Speed differential name
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation AL0 Current alarm number ―
PRM40 to PRM41,
CONNECTION
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
PRM1040 to PRM1041 AL11 ―
NETWORK
feedback pulses
PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1
PRM43 to PRM50, AL12 ―
For manufacturer setting ― servo motor speed
PRM1043 to PRM1050
PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6 AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs droop
―
12
pulses
PRM52 to PRM53,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
CC-Link IE FIELD
command pulses
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs command
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA AL15 ―
NETWORK
pulse frequency
PRM56 to PRM57,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs effective
load ratio
Machine resonance
PRM58, PRM1058
suppression filter 1
NH1
AL17
Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
ratio
― 13
Machine resonance
PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
suppression filter 2 Servo status when alarm occurs
CC-Link CONNECTION
AL18 ―
Low-pass filter, instantaneous torque
PRM60, PRM1060 adaptive vibration LPF Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL19 ―
suppression control revolution position
STATION)
Ratio of load inertia moment Servo status when alarm occurs ABS
AL20 ―
PRM61, PRM1061 to servo motor inertia GD2B counter
moment 2
PRM62, PRM1062
Position control gain 2
PG2B
AL21
load inertia moment ratio
― 14
changing ratio
Speed control gain 2 AL200 ―
PRM63, PRM1063 VG2B most recent alarm
changing ratio
CONNECTION
Speed integral compensation AL201 ―
PRM64, PRM1064 VICB first alarm in past
changing ratio (Via G4)
CC-Link

PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP AL202 ―
PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS
PRM67, PRM1067
PRM68, PRM1068
Gain changing time constant
For manufacturer setting
CDT
―
AL203
third alarm in past
―
15
Command pulse multiplying AL204 ―
PRM69, PRM1069 CMX2 fourth alarm in past
factor numerator 2
CONNECTION

Command pulse multiplying AL205 ―
PRM70, PRM1070 CMX3 fifth alarm in past
INVERTER
factor numerator 3
Command pulse multiplying Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM71, PRM1071 CMX4 AL210 ―
factor numerator 4 most recent alarm
PRM72 to PRM75, Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM1072 to PRM1075
For manufacturer setting ― AL211
first alarm in past
―
16
PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PRM77 to PRM84, second alarm in past

PRM1077 to PRM1084 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
CONNECTION
AL213 ―
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting third alarm in past
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
back on after setting the parameter data. AL214 ―

Device
Item Symbol
name (4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past Device
No.
Detailed alarm from alarm history Device name *2 Setting range
AL230 ― represent
most recent alarm
ation
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL231 ― Servo amplifier request
first alarm in past SP0 to SP6
(SP)
Bit device
AL232 ― Operation mode selection
second alarm in past OM0 to OM4
(OM)
AL233 ― Instruction demand
third alarm in past TMB0 to TMB1
AL234 ― Basic parameter
fourth alarm in past PRM0 to PRM84
/expansion parameter
Detailed alarm from alarm history PRM1000 to PRM1084
AL235 ― *1
(PRM)
fifth alarm in past
(g) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) AL0 to AL1
AL11 to AL25
Decimal
Device Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
Item Symbol
name AL210 to AL215
Word device
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ― AL230 to AL235
External input (DI)*3 DI0
(h) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) External output (DO) DO0
Input signal for test
Device operation TMI0
Item Symbol
name (for test operation) (TMI)
TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ― Forced output of signal pin
TMO0
(i) Set data (for test operation) Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD)
Device
Item Symbol *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo
name amplifier RAM.
TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
TMD1 ― *2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
constant (test mode) devices.
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test *3 Only reading is possible.
TMD2 ―
mode)
POINT
devices
(1) For bit devices
switch.
(2) For word devices
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.

Device name
PRM22, PRM1022
Item
Symbol*1
*OP4
9
devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP
MELSECNET/H
(a) Servo amplifier request Analog speed command
PRM25, PRM1025 maximum speed VCM
Device /limit maximum speed
Item Symbol
name Analog torque command
PRM26, PRM1026 TLC
SP0 Status display data clear ― maximum output
SP1 Current alarm clear ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR 10
SP2 Alarm history clear ― PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SP3 External input signal prohibited ― Analog speed command offset
PRM29, PRM1029 VCO
MELSECNET/10
SP4 External output signal prohibited ― /limit offset
SP5 External input signal resumed ― Analog torque command offset
PRM30, PRM1030 TLO
/limit offset
SP6 External output signal resumed ―
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
Device
PRM33, PRM1033
sequence output
MBR 11
Item Symbol Ratio of load inertia moment to
name PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
servo motor inertia moment
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2
OM1 JOG operation ―
CONNECTION
NETWORK
OM3 Motorless operation ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC
PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation)

PRM40, PRM1040 For manufacturer setting
Input signal automatic ON
― 12
PRM41, PRM1041 *DIA
selection
PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1
CC-Link IE FIELD
Clears acceleration/
TMB0 ―
CONNECTION
deceleration time constant PRM43, PRM1043 Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5) *DI2
NETWORK
TMB1 Temporary stop command ― PRM44, PRM1044 Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14) *DI3
PRM45, PRM1045 Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8) *DI4
(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter PRM46, PRM1046 Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7) *DI5
13
PRM47, PRM1047 Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8) *DI6
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM48, PRM1048 Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9) *DI7
Control mode, regenerative PRM49, PRM1049 Output signal selection 1 *DO1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PRM0, PRM1000 *STY
brake option selection PRM50, PRM1050 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6
PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU PRM52, PRM1052 For manufacturer setting ―
STATION)
Electronic gear numerator PRM53, PRM1053 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM3, PRM1003 (Command pulse multiplying CMX PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9
factor numerator)
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA
PRM4, PRM1004
Electronic gear denominator
(Command pulse multiplying CDV PRM56, PRM1056
SIC
14
time-out selection
factor denominator)
PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP
Machine resonance
CONNECTION
PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM58, PRM1058 NH1
Position command
Machine resonance (Via G4)
PRM7, PRM1007 acceleration/deceleration time PST PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
CC-Link
constant
Low-pass filter, adaptive
PRM8, PRM1008 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 PRM60, PRM1060 LPF
vibration suppression control
PRM9, PRM1009
PRM10, PRM1010
Internal speed command2/limit2
Internal speed command3/limit3
SC2
SC3 PRM61, PRM1061
Ratio of load inertia moment
GD2B
15
to servo motor inertia moment 2
PRM11, PRM1011 Acceleration time constant STA Position control gain 2
PRM62, PRM1062 PG2B
PRM12, PRM1012 Deceleration time constant STB changing ratio
CONNECTION
S-pattern acceleration/ Speed control gain 2 changing

PRM13, PRM1013 STC PRM63, PRM1063 VG2B
INVERTER
deceleration time constant ratio

PRM14, PRM1014 Torque command time constant TQC Speed integral compensation
PRM64, PRM1064 VICB
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO changing ratio
Serial communication function PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP
PRM16, PRM1016
selection, alarm history clear
*BPS
PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS 16
PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM67, PRM1067 Gain changing time constant CDT
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK Command pulse multiplying
CONNECTION
PRM69, PRM1069 CMX2

PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 factor numerator 2
Function selection 3 (Continued to next page)
PRM21, PRM1021 *OP3
(Command pulse selection)

Device
Item Symbol
name
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Command pulse multiplying
PRM70, PRM1070 CMX3 Alarm number from alarm history
factor numerator 3 AL200 ―
most recent alarm
Command pulse multiplying
PRM71, PRM1071 CMX4 Alarm number from alarm history
factor numerator 4 AL201 ―
first alarm in past
PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4
PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5 AL202 ―
PRM74, PRM1074 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6 Alarm number from alarm history
PRM75, PRM1075 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7 AL203 ―
third alarm in past
PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 Alarm number from alarm history
AL204 ―
PRM77 to PRM84, fourth alarm in past
PRM1077 to PRM1084 Alarm number from alarm history
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
back on after setting the parameter data. most recent alarm
(e) Status display AL211 ―
first alarm in past
Device AL212 ―
Item Symbol second alarm in past
name
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― AL213 ―
third alarm in past
ST1 servo motor speed ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL214 ―
ST2 Droop pulses ― fourth alarm in past
ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL215 ―
ST4 Command pulse frequency ― fifth alarm in past
ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL230 ―
ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― most recent alarm
ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― Detailed alarm from alarm history

AL231 ―
first alarm in past
ST8 Effective load ratio ―
ST9 Peak load ratio ― AL232 ―
ST10 Instantaneous torque ―
ST11 Within one-revolution position ― AL233 ―
third alarm in past
ST12 ABS counter ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL234 ―
ST13 load inertia moment ratio ― fourth alarm in past
ST14 Bus voltage ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past
(f) Alarm
(g) External I/O signal
Device
Item Symbol Device
name
Item Symbol
AL0 Current alarm number ― name
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI0 External input pin statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative DO0 External output pin statuses ―
AL11 ―
feedback pulses
AL12
― (h) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
servo motor speed
AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative name
AL14 ―
command pulses TMI0 Input signal status for test operation ―
AL15 ―
pulse frequency
(i) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
Servo status when alarm occurs analog
AL16 ―
speed command voltage/limit voltage Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs analog name
AL17 ―
torque command voltage/limit voltage TMO0 Forced output status of signal pin ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative
AL18 ―
load ratio
(j) Set data (for test operation)
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load
AL19 ―
ratio
Device
AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL21 ―
instantaneous torque
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- TMD1 ―
AL22 ― constant (test mode)
revolution position
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test
AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― TMD2 ―
mode)
AL24 ―
load inertia moment ratio

(5) MELSERVO-J2S-*CP
9
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Device name*3 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represent
devices
ation
Servo amplifier request (1) For bit devices
SP0 to SP6 Only writing is possible.
(SP)
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. 10
Bit device

OM0 to OM4 Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
(OM)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switch.
Instruction demand
MELSECNET/10
TMB0 to TMB1 (2) For word devices
Basic parameter
PRM0 to PRM90 Numerical input cannot be used.
/expansion parameter
PRM1000 to PRM1090 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
(PRM)*1
Status display (ST) ST0
AL0
to
to
ST16
AL1
11
AL11 to AL27 The following shows correspondences between virtual
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
AL210 to AL215
CONNECTION
AL230 to AL235
NETWORK
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 (a) Servo amplifier request
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
Device
Point table
(position) (POS)*2
POS1 to
POS1001 to
POS31
POS1031
name
Item Symbol
12
SP0 Status display data clear ―
Point table Decimal
SPD1 to SPD31 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
Point table (speed)
CC-Link IE FIELD
SPD1001 to SPD1031 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
(SPD)*2
Word device
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Point table
ACT1 to ACT31 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(acceleration time
ACT1001 to ACT1031
constant) (ACT)*2 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Point table
(deceleration time
DCT1 to DCT31 13
DCT1001 to DCT1031
constant) (DCT)*2 (b) Operation mode selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Point table DWL1 to DWL31
Device
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1031 Item Symbol
name
Point table AUX1 to AUX31
STATION)
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX1031
Input signal for test
operation
TMI0
OM3 Motorless operation ― 14
TMO0
CONNECTION
Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD) Device name Item Symbol
(Via G4)
CC-Link
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM90 when writing parameters to the servo Clears the acceleration/
amplifier RAM. TMB0 ―
deceleration time constant
E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 Temporary stop command ― 15
*2 When writing to a point table, use the area of 1001 to 1031
(E2PROM area) of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX.
If writing to the area of 1 to 31 (RAM area) of POS, SPD,
CONNECTION
ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX, the value is not reflected.

INVERTER
devices.
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

PRM46, PRM1046
Software limit + *LMP
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM47, PRM1047
Command system/ PRM48, PRM1048

Software limit - *LMN
PRM0, PRM1000 regenerative brake option *STY PRM49, PRM1049
selection PRM50, PRM1050
Position range output address + *LPP
PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM51, PRM1051
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM52, PRM1052
Position range output address - *LNP
PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM53, PRM1053
PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 *OP6
PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9
PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA
PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST Machine resonance
PRM61, PRM1061 NH1
PRM12, PRM1012 Rough match output range CRP suppression filter 1
PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG Machine resonance
PRM62, PRM1062 NH2
S-pattern acceleration/ suppression filter 2
PRM14, PRM1014 *STC Low-pass filter,
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM63, PRM1063 adaptive vibration suppression LPF
control
Serial communication function
PRM16, PRM1016 selection, *BPS Ratio of load inertia moment
PRM64, PRM1064 GD2B
alarm history clear to servo motor inertia moment 2
PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD Position control gain 2

PRM65, PRM1065 PG2B
changing ratio
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD
Speed control gain 2 changing
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK PRM66, PRM1066 VG2B
ratio
Speed integral compensation
PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM67, PRM1067 VICB
changing ratio
PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP
Serial communication time-out
PRM23, PRM1023 SIC PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS
selection
PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT
PRM71 to PRM90,
PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1071 to PRM1090
PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 back on after setting the parameter data.
PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2
PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC (e) Status display
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
ST0 Current position ―
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR ST1 Command position ―
sequence output
ST2 Command remaining distance ―
Ration of load inertia moment
PRM34, PRM1034 GD2 ST3 Point table No. ―
to servo motor inertia moment
PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1 ST5 Servo motor speed ―
PRM37, PRM1037 Position control gain 2 VG2 ST6 Droop pulses ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST7 Override ―
Speed differential ST8 Torque limit voltage ―
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation ST9 Regenerative load ratio ―
PRM40 to PRM41, ST10 Effective load ratio ―
PRM1040 to PRM1041
ST11 Peak load ratio ―
Home position return position
PRM42, PRM1042 *ZPS ST12 Instantaneous torque ―
data
ST13 Within one-revolution position ―
Moving distance after
PRM43, PRM1043 DCT ST14 ABS counter ―
proximity dog
Moving distance ST15 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM44, PRM1044 ZTM
after proximity dog ST16 Bus voltage ―
Stopper type home position
PRM45, PRM1045 ZTT
return torque limit value

(f) Alarm (g) External I/O signal 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device Device
Item Symbol Item Symbol
name
MELSECNET/H
name
AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses ―
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
DI1 External input pin statuses ―
AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ―
Statuses of input devices switched on
Servo status when alarm occurs command DI2 ―
AL12 ― through communication
AL13
position
―
DO0 Output device statuses ― 10
remaining distance DO1 External output pin statuses ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL14 ―
MELSECNET/10
point table No. (h) Point table (position)
AL15 ―
cumulative feedback pulses Device name Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs POS1 to POS31, Point table (position)
AL16 ― ―
servo motor speed
POS1001 to POS1031 No. 1 to No. 31
AL17
AL18
Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs override
―
―
SPD1 to SPD31,
SPD1001 to SPD1031
Point table (speed)
No. 1 to No. 31
― 11
Servo status when alarm occurs torque limit
AL19 ― Point table
voltage ACT1 to ACT31,
(acceleration time constant) ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative ACT1001 to ACT1031
AL20 ― No. 1 to No. 31
CONNECTION
load ratio
Point table
NETWORK
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load DCT1 to DCT31,
AL21 ― (deceleration time constant) ―
ratio DCT1001 to DCT1031
No. 1 to No. 31
AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ―
AL23
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous
torque
― DWL1 to DWL31,
DWL1001 to DWL1031
Point table
(dwell) ― 12
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- No. 1 to No. 31
AL24 ―
revolution position Point table
AUX1 to AUX31,
CC-Link IE FIELD
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― (auxiliary function) ―
CONNECTION
AUX1001 to AUX1031
Servo status when alarm occurs No. 1 to No. 31
NETWORK
AL26 ―
Load inertia moment ratio
AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― (i) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
AL200 ―
most recent alarm
Device
name
Item Symbol 13
AL201 ―
first alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
CC-Link CONNECTION
AL202 ―
(j) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL203 ―
STATION)
third alarm in past
Device
Alarm number from alarm history Item Symbol
AL204 ― name
14
Alarm number from alarm history TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL210
―
(k) Set data (for test operation)
most recent alarm
CONNECTION
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
AL211 ― Item Symbol
first alarm in past name
(Via G4)
CC-Link
AL212 ― TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―

Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMD1 ―
third alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMD2
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test
―
15
AL214 ― mode)
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past
CONNECTION

INVERTER
AL230 ―
most recent alarm
AL231 ―
first alarm in past
AL232
― 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
AL233 ―
third alarm in past
CONNECTION
AL234 ―
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past

(6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
Device amplifier used with the GOT.
*2
No.
represent (a) Servo amplifier request
ation
Device
Servo amplifier request Item Symbol
SP0 to SP6 name
(SP)
Bit device

OM0 to OM4 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
(OM)
SP2 Alarm history clear ―
Instruction demand
TMB0 to TMB1 SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
Basic parameter SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
PRM0 to PRM90
/expansion parameter SP5 External input signal resumed ―
*1
PRM1000 to PRM1090
(PRM) SP6 External output signal resumed ―
AL0 to AL1 (b) Operation mode selection
AL11 to AL28
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205 Device
Item Symbol
AL210 to AL215 name
AL230 to AL235 OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 Decimal OM1 JOG operation ―
External output(DO) DO0 to DO1 OM2 Positioning operation ―
Word device
Current position latch data OM3 Motorless operation ―

LD1
(LD) OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
The value of the general-
RR1 to RR4
purpose register (Rx) (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
*3
RR1001 to RR1004
(RR)
The value of the general- Device name Item Symbol
RD1 to RD4
purpose register (Dx) (RD) Clears the acceleration/
TMB0 ―
Input signal for test deceleration time constant
operation TMI0 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
TMO0
Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
*1 PRM0 to PRM90 are used when writing parameters to the
servo amplifier RAM.
E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
devices.
*3 Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx.
POINT
devices
(1) For bit devices
switch.
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.

Device name
PRM48, PRM1048
Item Symbol*1 9
Software limit- *LMN
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM49, PRM1049
PRM50, PRM1050 Position range output
MELSECNET/H
Command system/ *LPP
PRM0, PRM1000 regenerative brake option *STY PRM51, PRM1051 address+
selection PRM52, PRM1052
Position range output address- *LNP
PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM53, PRM1053
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM3, PRM1003
PRM4, PRM1004
Auto tuning
Electronic gear numerator
ATU
*CMX
PRM55, PRM1055
PRM56, PRM1056
For manufacturer setting
*OP6
―
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9
MELSECNET/10
PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA
PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF Machine resonance
PRM61, PRM1061 NH1
PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF suppression filter 1
PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST Machine resonance
PRM62, PRM1062
NH2
11
Low-pass filter,
PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG
PRM63, PRM1063 adaptive vibration suppression LPF
S-pattern acceleration/ control
PRM14, PRM1014 *STC
Ratio of load inertia moment
CONNECTION
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM64, PRM1064 GD2B
to Servo motor inertia moment 2
NETWORK
Serial communication function Position control gain 2
PRM16, PRM1016 selection, *BPS PRM65, PRM1065 PG2B
changing ratio
alarm history clear
Speed control gain 2 changing
PRM17, PRM1017
PRM18, PRM1018
Analog monitor output
Status display selection
MOD
*DMD
PRM66, PRM1066
ratio
Speed integral compensation
VG2B
12
PRM67, PRM1067 VICB
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK changing ratio
PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS
NETWORK
PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT
Serial communication time-out PRM71 to PRM73,
PRM23, PRM1023 SIC For manufacturer setting ―
selection PRM1071 to PRM1073
PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1
PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2 13
PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR Selected to program input
PRM77, PRM1077 SYC1
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 polarity selection 1
PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM78 to PRM90,
PRM1078 to PRM1090
STATION)
PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
PRM33, PRM1033
MBR 14
sequence output (e) Status display
Ration of load inertia moment
PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
to servo motor inertia moment Device name Item Symbol
CONNECTION
PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST0 Current position ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 2 VG1 ST1 Command position ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2 ST2 Command remaining distance ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST3 Program Number ―
Speed differential ST4 Step Number ―
PRM39, PRM1039
compensation
VDC
ST5 Cumulative feedback pulses ― 15
JOG operation acceleration/ ST6 Servo motor speed ―
PRM40, PRM1040 JTC
deceleration time constant ST7 Droop pulses ―
Home position return
CONNECTION
ST8 Override ―
PRM41, PRM1041 operation acceleration/ ZTS
ST9 Torque limit voltage ―
INVERTER

Home position return position
PRM42, PRM1042 *ZPS ST11 Effective load ratio ―
data
Moving distance after ST12 Peak load ratio ―
PRM43, PRM1043
proximity dog
DCT
ST13 Instantaneous torque ― 16
Stopper type home position ST14 Within one-revolution position ―
PRM44, PRM1044 ZTM
return stopper time
SERVO AMPLIFIER
ST15 ABS counter ―

Stopper type home position ST16 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM45, PRM1045 ZTT
CONNECTION
return torque limit value

ST17 Bus voltage ―
PRM46, PRM1046
Software limit+ *LMP
PRM47, PRM1047

Device
Item Symbol
(f) Alarm name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History
Device AL234 ―
Item Symbol fourth alarm in past
name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History
AL0 Current alarm number ― AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs Current
―
(g) External I/O signal
position
Servo status when alarm occurs Command Device
position name
Servo status when alarm occurs Command DI0 Input device statuses ―
AL13 ―
remaining distance DI1 External input pin statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Program Statuses of input devices switched on
AL14 ― DI2 ―
Number through communication
AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs Step Number ― DO0 Output device statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative DO1 External output pin statuses ―
AL16 ―
feedback pulses
AL17
Servo motor speed
― (h) Current position latch data
AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ―
Device
AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs Torque limit LD1 Current position latch data ―
AL20 ―
voltage
AL21 ― (i) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx)
Regenerative load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Effective
AL22 ― Device name Item Symbol
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load RR1, RR1001 ―
AL23 ― purpose register (R1)
ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs RR2, RR1002 ―
AL24 ― purpose register (R2)
Instantaneous torque
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one- The value of the general-
AL25 ― RR3, RR1003 ―
revolution position purpose register (R3)
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― The value of the general-
RR4, RR1004 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs purpose register (R4)
AL27 ―
Load inertia moment ratio
AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx)
Alarm number from Alarm History
most recent alarm
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL201 ― RD1 ―
first alarm in past purpose register (D1)
AL202 ― RD2 ―
second alarm in past purpose register (D2)
AL203 ― RD3 ―
third alarm in past purpose register (D3)
AL204 ― RD4 ―
fourth alarm in past purpose register (D4)
Alarm number from Alarm History
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
(k) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
AL210 ―
most recent alarm
AL211 ― TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
first alarm in past
AL212 ― (l) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
third alarm in past
AL214 ―
AL215
―
(m) Set data (for test operation)
fifth alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History Device
most recent alarm name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL231 ―
first alarm in past Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
TMD1 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History constant(test mode)
AL232 ―
second alarm in past Writes the moving distance in pulses(test
TMD2 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History mode)
AL233 ―
third alarm in past

(7) MELSERVO-J3-*A
The following shows correspondences between virtual 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device amplifier used with the GOT.
MELSECNET/H
*2
No.
represen (a) Servo amplifier request
tation
Device
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Item Symbol
name
Bit device
Operation mode selection SP0 Status display data clear ―

(OM)
OM0 to OM4
SP1 Current alarm clear ― 10
Instruction demand SP2 Alarm history clear ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6
(for test operation) (TMB) SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Gain filter parameter PB1 to PB45 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
(PB)*1 PB1001 to PB1045
Extension setting parameter PC1 to PC50 (b) Operation mode selection
(PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050 11
Device
PD1 to PD30 Item Symbol
I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 name
PD1001 to PD1030
Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST14 Decimal
CONNECTION
Word device
AL0 to AL1 OM2 Positioning operation ―
NETWORK
AL11 to AL25 OM3 Motorless operation ―
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205 OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235
12
*4 DI0 to DI2
External input (DI)
Device
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 Item Symbol
CC-Link IE FIELD
name
CONNECTION
Input signal for test operation
TMI0 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
NETWORK
Test operation (positioning operation) start
Forced output of signal pin TMB2 ―
TMO0 command
(for test operation) (TMO) TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
Set data
TMD0
TMD3
to TMD1 TMB4
TMB5
Reverse rotation direction
Restart for remaining distance
―
―
13
*1 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing data to TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
the servo amplifier RAM.
1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing
data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
STATION)
devices. Device name Item Symbol*1
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG
Absolute position detection 14
POINT PA3, PA1003
system
*ABS
PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD Number of command input
CONNECTION
PA5, PA1005 *FBP
devices pulses per revolution
Electronic gear numerator
(Via G4)
(1) For bit devices
CC-Link
PA6, PA1006 (command pulse multiplying CMX

Only writing is possible. factor numerator)
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit PA7, PA1007
(command pulse multiplying CDV 15
switch. factor denominator)
(2) For word devices PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU
Only writing is possible. PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP
CONNECTION
Numerical input cannot be used. PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP

INVERTER
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP
PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS
PA14, PA1014
PA15, PA1015
Rotation direction selection
Encoder output pulses
*POL
*ENR
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PA16 to PA18,
PA1016 to PA1018
CONNECTION
PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK


(e) Gain filter parameter (f) Extension setting parameter
Device name Item Symbol*1 Device name Item Symbol*1

Adaptive tuning mode PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA
PB1, PB1001 FILT
(Adaptive filter II) PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB
Vibration suppression control filter S-pattern acceleration/
tuning mode PC3, PC1003 STC
PA2, PB1002 VRFT deceleration time constant
(Advanced vibration suppression
PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC
control)
PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1
Position command acceleration/
PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2
PB3, PB1003 deceleration time constant PST
(position smoothing) PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4
PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5
Ratio of load inertia moment to PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6
PB6, PB1006 GD2
servo motor inertia moment PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 Analog speed command
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 PC12, PC1012 maximum speed VCM
/limit maximum speed
PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2
Analog torque command
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PC13, PC1013 TLC
maximum output
PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC
PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1
PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting ―
Machine resonance suppression
PB13, PB1013 NH1 Electromagnetic brake
filter 1 PC16, PC1016 MBR
sequence output
PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP
PB15, PB1015 NH2 PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
filter 2
PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS
PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 NHQ2
PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
Vibration suppression control
PB19, PB1019 VRF1 PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2
vibration frequency setting
Vibration suppression control PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3
PB20, PB1020 VRF2
resonance frequency setting PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
PB21 to PB22, PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5
PB1021 to PB1022 PC27 to PC29,
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PC1027 to PC1029
Slight vibration suppression PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2
PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control selection PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1 Command pulse multiplying
PC32, PC1032 CMX2
PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP factor numerator 2
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL Command pulse multiplying
PC33, PC1033 CMX3
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT factor numerator 3
Ratio of load inertia moment to Command pulse multiplying

PC34, PC1034 CMX4
PB29, PB1029 servo motor inertia moment at GD2B factor numerator 4
changing gain PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2
Position loop gain at changing PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
PB30, PB1030 PG2B
gain Analog speed command offset
PC37, PC1037 VCO
PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain at changing gain VG2B /limit offset
Speed integral compensation at Analog torque command offset
PB32, PB1032 VICB PC38, PC1038 TPO
changing gain /limit offset
Vibration suppression control PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
PB33, PB1033 vibration frequency setting for VRF1B PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
changing gain
PC41 to PC50,
Vibration suppression control For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to PC1050
PB34, PB1034 vibration resonance setting for VRF2B
changing gain
PB35 to PB45, back on after setting the parameter data.
PB1035 to PB1045

(g) I/O setting parameter (i) Alarm
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 Device name Item Symbol
MELSECNET/H
Input signal automatic ON AL0 Current alarm number ―
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
selection 1
PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
Input signal device selection 1 AL11 ―
PD3, PD1003 *DI1 feedback pulses
(CN1-15)
AL12 ―
PD4, PD1004
Input signal device selection 2
(CN1-16)
*DI2
AL13
servo monitor speed
Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PD5, PD1005 *DI3 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
(CN1-17) AL14 ―
command pulses
MELSECNET/10
PD6, PD1006 *DI4 Servo status when alarm occurs command
(CN1-18) AL15 ―
pulse frequency
PD7, PD1007 *DI5 Servo status when alarm occurs analog
(CN1-19)
AL16 speed command voltage ―
Input signal device selection 6 /limit voltage
PD8, PD1008 *DI6
PD9, PD1009
(CN1-41)
For manufacturer setting ― AL17
analog torque command voltage ―
11
Input signal device selection 8 /limit voltage
PD10, D1010 *DI8
(CN1-43) Servo status when alarm occurs
AL18 ―
Input signal device selection 9 regenerative load ratio
PD11, PD1011 *DI9
CONNECTION
(CN1-44) Servo status when alarm occurs effective
AL19 ―
NETWORK
Input signal device selection 10 load ratio
PD12, PD1012 *DI10
(CN1-45) Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
AL20 ―
Output signal device selection 1 ratio
PD13, PD1013 *DO1
(CN1-22)
Output signal device selection 2
AL21
instantaneous torque
― 12
PD14, PD1014 *DO2
(CN1-23) Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL22 ―
Output signal device selection 3 revolution position
PD15, PD1015 *DO3
CC-Link IE FIELD
(CN1-24) AL23 Load inertia moment ratio ABS counter ―
CONNECTION
Output signal device selection 4 Servo status when alarm occurs
NETWORK
PD16, PD1016 *DO4 AL24 ―
(CN1-25) load inertia moment ratio
PD17, PD1017 For manufacturer setting ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Output signal device selection 6 Alarm number from alarm history
PD18, PD1018 *DO6 AL200 ―
PD19, PD1019
(CN1-49)
Response level setting *DIF
most recent alarm
13
AL201 ―
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 first alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 second alarm in past
PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL203 ―
third alarm in past
STATION)
PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5
PD25 to PD30, AL204 ―
For manufacturer setting ― fourth alarm in past
PD1025 to PD1030
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting AL205
fifth alarm in past
― 14
back on after setting the parameter data. Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
most recent alarm
CONNECTION
(h) Status display AL211
―
first alarm in past
Device Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Item Symbol AL212 ―

name second alarm in past
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL213 ―
ST1
ST2
Servo motor speed
Droop pulses
―
―
third alarm in past
15
AL214 ―
ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― fourth alarm in past
ST4 Command pulse frequency ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past
CONNECTION
ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ―

INVERTER
ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― AL230 ―

most recent alarm
ST8 Effective load ratio ― AL231 ―
first alarm in past
ST9 Peak load ratio ―
AL232
― 16
ST11 Within one-revolution position ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
SERVO AMPLIFIER
AL233 ―
ST12 ABS counter ― third alarm in past
CONNECTION
ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― AL234 ―

ST14 Bus voltage ―
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past

(j) External input
Device
Item Symbol
name
DI0 Input device statuses ―
DI2 ―
through communication
(k) External output

DO0 Output device statuses ―
DO1 External output pin statuses ―
(l) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

(m) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

(n) Set data (for test operation)

TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
Writes the acceleration/
TMD1 deceleration time constant ―
(test mode)
TMD2 For manufacturer setting ―
Writes the moving distance
TMD3 ―
(test mode)

(8) MELSERVO-J3-*T
9
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
represen
devices
tation
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 (1) For bit devices
Bit device

(OM)
OM0 to OM5
Decimal [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. 10
Instruction demand
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6 switch.
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019 Only writing is possible.
Gain
filter parameter
PB1 to PB45 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
*1
PB1001 to PB1045
(PB)
Extension setting PC1 to PC50 11
parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050
I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD30 devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1030
CONNECTION
Option unit parameter PO1 to PO35
NETWORK
(PO)*1 PO1001 to PO1035 (a) Servo amplifier request
Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST17
Device
AL0
AL11
to
to
AL1
AL28
name
Item Symbol
12
Alarm (AL)*4 AL200 to AL205
AL210 to AL215
CC-Link IE FIELD
AL230 to AL235 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
CONNECTION
NETWORK
External input (DI)*6 DI0 to DI7
SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
External output (DO)*4 DO0 to DO4
Word device
SP5 External input signal resumed ―

Point table POS1 to POS255
(position) (POS)*2 POS1001 to POS1255 Decimal
13
Point table SPD1 to SPD255
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
(speed) (SPD)*2
CC-Link CONNECTION
SPD1001 to SPD1255
Point table Device
ACT1 to ACT255 Item Symbol
(acceleration time constant) name
*2
ACT1001 to ACT1255
(ACT)
STATION)
Point table OM1 JOG operation ―
DCT1 to DCT255
(deceleration time constant) OM2 Positioning operation ―
DCT1001 to DCT1255
(DCT)*2
OM3 Motorless operation ― 14
Point table DWL1 to DWL255 OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1255
OM5 One step sending ―
Point table
CONNECTION
AUX1 to AUX255
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX1255
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation) (Via G4)
CC-Link
Point table MCD1 to MCD255

(M code) (MCD)*2*3 MCD1001 to MCD1255 Device
Item Symbol
name
(for test operation) (TM0)
TMI0 to TMI2 TMB1 Temporary stop command ― 15
Forced output of signal pin Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMO0 to TMO1 TMB2 ―
(for test operation) (TMO) command
TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
CONNECTION
Set data TMD0 to TMD1

(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3 TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
INVERTER
*1 Use 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
Use 1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT
write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
*2 When the GOT writes data to point tables, use 1001 to 1255 16
of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX, and MCD (E2PROM
SERVO AMPLIFIER
area).
*3 MCD cannot be used as a real number.
CONNECTION

devices.

(d) Basic setting parameter
Gain changing, Ratio of load
PB29, PB1029 inertia moment to servo motor GD2B
Device name Item Symbol*1 inertia moment
PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B
Absolute position detection Gain changing, Speed integral
PA3, PA1003 *ABS PB32, PB1032 VICB
system compensation
PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 Gain changing, Vibration
PA5, PA1005 Feeding function selection *FTY PB33, PB1033 suppression control vibration VRF1B
PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX frequency setting
PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator *CDV Gain changing, Vibration
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU PB34, PB1034 suppression control resonance VRF2B
frequency setting
PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP
PB35 to PB45,
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP For manufacturer setting ―
PB1035 to PB1045
PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP
PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PA13, PA1013 For manufacturer setting ― back on after setting the parameter data.
PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL
PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR
(f) Extension setting parameter
PA16 to PA18,
For manufacturer setting ― Device name Item Symbol*1
PA1016 to PA1018
PC1, PC1001 For manufacturer setting ―
PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK
PC2, PC1002 Home position return type *ZTY
PC3, PC1003 Direction of home position return *ZDIR
back on after setting the parameter data. PC4, PC1004 Home position return speed ZRF
PC5, PC1005 Creep speed CRF
(e) Gain filter parameter PC6, PC1006 Home position shift distance ZST
PC7, PC1007 Home position return position data *ZPS
PC8, PC1008 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT
Adaptive tuning mode
PB1, PB1001 FILT Hold time home position return
(Adaptive filter II) PC9, PC1009 ZTM
hold time
Vibration suppression control filter
Hold time home position return
tuning mode PC10, PC1010 ZTT
PA2, PB1002 VRFT torque limit value
(advanced vibration suppression
control) PC11, PC1011 Rough match output range CRP
PB3, PB1003 For manufacturer setting ― PC12, PC1012 Jog speed JOG
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC S-pattern acceleration/
PC13, PC1013 *STC
PC14, PC1014 Backlash compensation *BKC
Ratio of load inertia moment to
PB6, PB1006 GD2 PC15, PC1015 For manufacturer setting ―
servo motor inertia moment
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 Electromagnetic brake sequence
PC16, PC1016 MBR
output
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2
PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC
PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP
PB13, PB1013 NH1 PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
filter 1
PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1 PC23, PC1023 For manufacturer setting ―
Machine resonance suppression PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3
PB15, PB1015 NH2
filter 2 PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 NHQ2 PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5
PB17, PB1017 For manufacturer setting ― PC27, PC1027 For manufacturer setting ―
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF PC28, PC1028 Function selection C-7 *COP7
Vibration suppression control PC29 to PC30,
PB19, PB1019 VRF1 For manufacturer setting ―
vibration frequency setting PC1029 to PC1030
Vibration suppression control PC31, PC1031 Software limit + Low LMPL
PB20, PB1020 VRF2
resonance frequency setting PC32, PC1032 Software limit + High LMPH
PB21 to PB22, PC33, PC1033 Software limit - Low LMNL
PB1021 to PB1022
PC34, PC1034 Software limit - High LMNH
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF
PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2
Slight vibration suppression
PB24, PB1024 *MVS PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
control selection
PC37, PC1037 Position range output address + Low *LPPL
PC38, PC1038 Position range output address + High *LPPH
PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP
PC39, PC1039 Position range output address - Low *LNPL
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT (Continued to next page)

Device name
MR-J3-D01
Item Symbol
9
PO7, PO1007 Input signal device selection 6 *ODI6
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Position range output address - (CN10-35, 36)
PC40, PC1040 *LNPH
High
MELSECNET/H
MR-J3-D01
PC41 to PC50, PO8, PO1008 Output signal device selection 1 *ODO1
PC1041 to PC1050 (CN10-46, 47)
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting MR-J3-D01
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and PO9, PO1009 Output signal device selection 2 *ODO2
back on after setting the parameter data. (CN10-48, 49)
(g) I/O setting parameter

PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1 10
PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3
MELSECNET/10
Input signal automatic ON MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1 PO13, PO1013 MOD1
selection 1 output
PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ― MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2
PO14, PO1014 MOD2
output
PD3, PD1003 *DIA3 MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1
selection 3 PO15, PO1015 M01
PD4, PD1004
selection 4
*DIA4
offset
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2
11
PO16, PO1016 M02
offset
PO17 to 20,
Input signal device selection 2 For manufacturer setting ―
PD6, PD1006 *DI2 PO1017 to PO1020
(CN6-2)
CONNECTION
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 3 PO21, PO1021 VCO
NETWORK
PD7, PD1007 *DI3 Override offset
(CN6-3)
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 4 PO22, PO1022 TLO
PD8, PD1008 *DI4 Analog torque limitation offset
(CN6-4)
PD9, PD1009
(CN6-14)
*DO1
PO23 to 35,
PO1023 to PO1035
For manufacturer setting ― 12
PD10, D1010 *DO2 (i) Status display
(CN6-15)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
PD11, PD1011 *DD3 Device
(CN6-16)
NETWORK
Item Symbol
name
PD12 to PD15,
For manufacturer setting ― ST0 Current position ―
PD1012 to PD1015
PD16, PD1016 Input polarity selection *DIAB ST1 Command position ―
PD17 to PD18,
PD1017 to PD1018
ST2
ST3
Command remaining distance
Point table No.
―
―
13
ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF
CC-Link CONNECTION
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 ST5 Servo monitor speed ―
PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― ST6 Droop pulses ―
PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 ST7 Override voltage ―
STATION)
PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― ST8 Override ―
PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5 ST9 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ―
PD25 to PD30,
PD1025 to PD1030
ST10
ST11
Effective load ratio
―
―
14
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting ST12 Peak load ratio ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and ST13 Instantaneous torque ―
CONNECTION
ST14 Within one-revolution position ―
(h) Option unit parameter ST15 ABS counter ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
ST16 load inertia moment ratio ―

Device name Item Symbol ST17 Bus voltage ―
PO1, PO1001 For manufacturer setting ―
MR-J3-D01 15
(CN10-21, 26)
MR-J3-D01
CONNECTION

INVERTER
(CN10-27, 28)
MR-J3-D01
(CN10-29, 30)
PO5, PO1005
MR-J3-D01
Input signal device selection 4 *ODI4
16
(CN10-31, 32)
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MR-J3-D01
CONNECTION
(CN10-33, 34)

(j) Alarm (k) External input
Device Device
Item Symbol Item Symbol
name name
AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses 1 ―
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI1 Input device statuses 2 ―
AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― DI2 Input device statuses 3 ―
AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― DI3 External input pin statuses 1 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Command DI4 External input pin statuses 2 ―
AL13 ―
remaining distance Statuses of input devices switched on
DI5 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs through communication 1
AL14 ―
Point table No. Statuses of input devices switched on
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative DI6 ―
AL15 ― through communication 2
feedback pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs DI7 ―
AL16 ― through communication 3
Servo motor speed
AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ―
(l) External output
Servo status when alarm occurs Override
AL18 ―
voltage
Device
AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs DO0 Output device statuses 1 ―
AL20 ―
Analog torque limit voltage
DO1 Output device statuses 2 ―
AL21 ― DO2 Output device statuses 3 ―
DO3 External output pin statuses 1 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Effective
AL22 ― DO4 External output pin statuses 2 ―
load ratio
AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load ratio ―
AL24
― (m) Point table (position)
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one- Device name Item Symbol
AL25 ―
revolution position POS1 to POS255, Point table
―
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― POS1001 to POS1255 (position) No.1 to 255
Servo status when alarm occurs SPD1 to SPD255, Point table
AL27 ― ―
Load inertia moment ratio SPD1001 to SPD1255 (speed) No.1 to 255
AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― Point table
ACT1 to ACT255,
Alarm number from alarm history, (acceleration time constant) ―
AL200 ― ACT1001 to ACT1255
Most recent alarm No.1 to 255
Alarm number from alarm history Point table
AL201 ― DCT1 to DCT255,
First alarm in past (deceleration time constant) ―
DCT1001 to DCT1255
Alarm number from alarm history No.1 to 255
AL202 ―
Second alarm in past DWL1 to DWL255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history DWL1001 to DWL1255 (dwell) (DWL) No.1 to 255
AL203 ―
Third alarm in past AUX1 to AUX255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history AUX1001 to AUX1255 (auxiliary function) No.1 to 255
AL204 ―
Fourth alarm in past MCD1 to MCD255, Point table
―
Alarm number from alarm history MCD1001 to MCD1255 (M code) No.1 to 255
AL205 ―
Fifth alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history (n) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
AL210 ―
Most recent alarm
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
First alarm in past name
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 ―
AL212 ―
TMI1 Input signal for test operation 2 ―
AL213 ― TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 ―
Third alarm in past
AL214 ―
Fourth alarm in past (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL215 ― Device
Fifth alarm in past Item Symbol
name
AL230 ― TMO0 Forced output from signal pin (CN6) ―
Most recent alarm
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMO1 Forced output from signal pin (CN10) ―
AL231 ―
First alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history (p) Set data (for test operation)
AL232 ―
Detailed alarm from alarm history Device
Third alarm in past name
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL234 ―
Fourth alarm in past
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMD1 ―
Fifth alarm in past
TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ―

(9) MELSERVO-J4-*A
9
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
represen
devices
tation
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 (1) For bit devices
Bit device

(OM)
OM0 to OM4 [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. 10
Instruction demand
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6 switch.
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA32
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1032 Only writing is possible.
Gain
filter parameter
PB1 to PB64 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
*1
PB1001 to PB1064
(PB)
Extension setting PC1 to PC80
11
parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1080
I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD48 amplifier used with the GOT.
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1048
CONNECTION
Extension setting 2 PE1 to PE64 (a) Servo amplifier request
NETWORK
parameter (PE)*1 PE1001 to PE1064
Device
Extension setting 3 PF1 to PF48 Item Symbol
name
parameter (PF)*1
Status display (ST)*3
PF1001
ST0
to
to
PF1048
ST41
Decimal SP0 Status display data clear ― 12
Word device
AL0 to AL1 SP2 Alarm history clear ―

AL11 to AL25
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205
SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
NETWORK
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
ALM0 to ALM1 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
ALM11 to ALM52
Alarm (ALM)*3 ALM200 to ALM215 (b) Operation mode selection 13
ALM220 to ALM235
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
ALM240 to ALM255 Device
Item Symbol
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 name
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1
STATION)
TMI0 OM2 Positioning operation ―
(for test operation) (TM0)
Forced output of signal pin OM3 Motorless operation ―
TMO0
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ― 14
Set data TMD0 to TMD1
(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
CONNECTION
*1 Use 1 to 80 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the GOT
writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. Device
Item Symbol
Use 1001 to 1080 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, and PF when the name (Via G4)
CC-Link
GOT write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
devices. Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMB2 ―
*3
*4
Only reading is possible.
Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1.
command 15
TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
CONNECTION
TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(d) Basic setting parameter
PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF
Device name Item *1 PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF

Symbol
Vibration suppression control 1
PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY PB19, PB1019 VRF11
- Vibration frequency
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative option *REG
Absolute position detection PB20, PB1020 VRF12
PA3, PA1003 *ABS - Resonance frequency
system
PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 PB21, PB1021 VRF13
- Vibration frequency dumping
Number of command input Vibration suppression control 1
PA5, PA1005 *FBP PB22, PB1022 VRF14
pulses per revolution - Resonance frequency dumping
Electronic gear numerator PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF
PA6, PA1006 (command pulse multiplication CMX
Slight vibration suppression
numerator) PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control
PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1
PA7, PA1007 (command pulse multiplication CDV
denominator) PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL
PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP Load to motor inertia ratio after
PB29, PB1029 GD2B
gain switching
PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP
Position loop gain after gain
PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN PB30, PB1030 PG2B
switching
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS
Speed loop gain after gain
PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL PB31, PB1031 VG2B
switching
PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR Speed integral compensation
PB32, PB1032 VICB
PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2 after gain switching
PA17 to 18, Vibration suppression control 1
PA1017 to 1018 PB33, PB1033 - Vibration frequency after gain VRF1B
PA19, PA1019 Parameter writing inhibit *BLK switching
PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS Vibration suppression control 1
PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3 PB34, PB1034 - Resonance frequency after gain VRF2B
switching
PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting ―
Drive recorder arbitrary alarm
PA23, PA1023 DRAT PB35, PB1035 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF3B
trigger setting
after gain switching
PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 *AOP4
One-touch tuning - Overshoot PB36, PB1036 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF4B
PA25, PA1025 OTHOV
permissible level after gain switching
PA26 to 32, PB37 to 44,
For manufacturer setting ― For manufacturer setting ―
PA1026 to 1032 PB1037 to 1044
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Machine resonance suppression
back on after setting the parameter data. PB46, PB1046 NH3
filter 3
PB47, PB1047 Notch shape selection 3 NHQ3
(e) Gain filter parameter
PB48, PB1048 NH4
Device name Item Symbol*1 filter 4
Adaptive tuning mode PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4

PB1, PB1001 PB1 Machine resonance suppression
(adaptive filter II) PB50, PB1050 NH5
Vibration suppression control filter 5
PB2, PB1002 tuning mode (advanced vibration VRFT PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5
suppression control II) Vibration suppression control 2
PB52, PB1052 VRF21
Position command acceleration/ - Vibration frequency
PB3, PB1003 deceleration time constant PST Vibration suppression control 2
PB53, PB1053 VRF22
(position smoothing) - Resonance frequency
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC Vibration suppression control 2
PB54, PB1054 VRF23
PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― - Vibration frequency dumping
PB6, PB1006 Load to motor inertia ratio GD2 Vibration suppression control 2
PB55, PB1055 VRF24
PB7, PB1007 Model loop gain PG1 - Resonance frequency dumping
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 Vibration suppression control 2

PB56, PB1056 - Vibration frequency after gain VRF21B
switching
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC
PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC PB57, PB1057 - Resonance frequency after gain VRF22B
PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA switching
Machine resonance suppression Vibration suppression control 2
PB13, PB1013 NH1
filter 1 PB58, PB1058 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF23B
PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1 after gain switching
Machine resonance suppression Vibration suppression control 2
PB15, PB1015 NH2 PB59, PB1059 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF24B
filter 2
after gain switching
PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2

Device name Item
Model loop gain after gain
Symbol*1 Device name Item
Analog torque command offset
Symbol*1 9
PB60, PB1060 PG1B PC38, PC1038 TPO
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
switching Analog torque limit offset
PB61 to 64, PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
MELSECNET/H
PB1061 to 1064
PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PC41 to 42,
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to 1042
Error excessive alarm detection
PC43, PC1043 ERZ
(f) Extension setting parameter level
PC44 to 50,
10
Device name Item Symbol*1 PC1044 to 1050
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA Forced stop deceleration time
PC51, PC1051 RSBR
MELSECNET/10
constant
PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB
PC52, PC1052 For manufacturer setting ―
S-pattern acceleration/
PC3, PC1003 STC PC53, PC1053 For manufacturer setting ―
PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC Vertical axis freefall prevention
PC54, PC1054 RSUP1
compensation amount
Internal speed command 1
PC5, PC1005 SC1
Internal speed limit 1
PC55 to PC59,
PC1055 to PC1059
PC6, PC1006 SC2 PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD
PC61 to PC80,
Internal speed command 3 For manufacturer setting ―
PC7, PC1007 SC3 PC1061 to PC1080
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PC8, PC1008 SC4 back on after setting the parameter data.
Internal speed command 5 (g) I/O setting parameter
PC9, PC1009 SC5
Internal speed command 6 Device name Item Symbol*1 12
PC10, PC1010 SC6 Input signal automatic on
Internal speed limit 6 PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
selection 1
CC-Link IE FIELD
PC11, PC1011 SC7 PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
CONNECTION
PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L
NETWORK
Analog speed command -
Maximum speed PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H
PC12, PC1012 VCM
Analog speed limit - Maximum PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L
speed PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H
PC13, PC1013
Analog torque command
maximum output
TLC
PD7, PD1007 Input device selection 3L *DI3L 13
PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H
Electromagnetic brake sequence PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L
PC16, PC1016 MBR
output
STATION)
PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
PD15 to 16,
PD1015 to 1016
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1 PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H
CONNECTION
PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2 PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L
PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H (Via G4)
CC-Link
PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ― PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L
PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5 PD22, PD1022 Input device selection 10H *DI10H
PC27, PC1027 Function selection C-6 *COP6 PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1
PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting ― PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2 15
PC29, PC1029 For manufacturer setting ― PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3
PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2 PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4
PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
CONNECTION

Command input pulse PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6
INVERTER
PC32, PC1032 CMX2

multiplication numerator 2
PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting *DIF
Command input pulse
PC33, PC1033 CMX3 PD30, PD1030 Function selection D-1 *DOP1
PC34, PC1034
Command input pulse
CMX4 PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 16
PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PD33, PD1033 For manufacturer setting ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD PD34, PD1034 Function selection D-5 *DOP5
PD35 to 48,
CONNECTION
Analog speed command offset For manufacturer setting ―

PC37, PC1037 VCO PD1035 to 1048
Analog speed limit offset

Device
Item Symbol
(h) Extension setting 2 parameter name
ST33 Setting time ―
ST34 Oscillation detection frequency ―
PE1 to 40,
For manufacturer setting ― ST35 Number of tough drives ―
PE1000 to 1040
ST36 to 39 For manufacturer setting ―
PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3
Unit power consumption 1
PE42 to 64, ST40 ―
For manufacturer setting ― (incremwnt of 1 W)
PE1042 to 1064
Unit total power consumption 1
ST41 ―
(incremwnt of 1 Wh)
(i) Extension setting 3 parameter
Device
(k) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J3-*A)
Item Symbol
name
Device
PF1 to 8, Item Symbol
name
PF1001 to For manufacturer setting ― AL0 Current alarm number ―
1008
PF9,
Function selection F-5 *FOP5 Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative
PF1009 AL11 ―
feedback pulses
PF10 to 14, Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor
PF1010 to For manufacturer setting ― AL12 ―
speed
1014 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop
AL13 ―
PF15, pulses
Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT
PF1015 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
AL14 ―
PF16 to 20, command pulses
PF1016 to For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs command
AL15 ―
1020 pulse frequency
PF21, Servo status when alarm occurs analog
Drive recorder switching time setting DRT AL16 ―
PF1021 speed command voltage/limit voltage
PF22, Servo status when alarm occurs analog
For manufacturer setting ― AL17 ―
PF1022 torque command voltage/limit voltage
PF23, Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative
OSCL1 AL18 ―
PF1023 level load ratio
PF24, Servo status when alarm occurs effective

AL19 ―
Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2 load ratio
PF1024
PF25, Instantaneous power failure tough drive AL20 ―
CVAT ratio
PF1025 - Detection time
PF26 to 30, AL21 ―
PF1026 to For manufacturer setting ―
Servo states when alarm occurs Within
1030 AL22 ―
onerevolution position(1 pulse unit)
PF31, Machine diagnosis function - Friction
FRIC AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ―
PF1031 judgement speed
Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia
PF32 to 48, AL24 ―
moment ratio
PF1032 to For manufacturer setting ―
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ―
1048
Alarm number from Alarm History most
AL200 ―
recent alarm
(j) Status display Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm
AL201 ―
in past
Device
Item Symbol Alarm number from Alarm History second
name AL202 ―
alarm in past
ST0 Comulative feedback pulse ― Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm
ST1 Servo motor speed ― AL203 ―
in past
ST2 Droop pulse ― Alarm number from Alarm History fourth
AL204 ―
ST3 Cumulative command pulse ― alarm in past
ST4 Command pulse frequency ― Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm
AL205 ―
ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ― in past
Analog torque command voltage/limit Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
ST6 ― AL210 ―
voltage recent alarm
ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first
AL211 ―
alarm in past
ST8 Effetive load ratio ―
ST9 Peak load ratio ― AL212 ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third
ST11 Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) ― AL213 ―
alarm in past
ST12 ABS counter ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth
AL214 ―
ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― alarm in past
ST14 Bus voltage ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth
AL215 ―
ST15 to 31 For manufacturer setting ― alarm in past
ST32 Internal temperature of encoder ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History most
AL230 ―
recent alarm

Device
name
Item Symbol
Device
name
Item Symbol 9
Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL231 ― ALM204 ―
in past in past
MELSECNET/H
Detailed alarm from Alarm History second Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm
AL232 ― ALM205 ―
alarm in past in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm
AL233 ― ALM206 ―
in past in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm
AL234 ― ALM207 ―
alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm
in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm
10
AL235 ― ALM208 ―
in past in past
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
ALM209 ―
(l) Alarm (extended for MELSERVO-J4-*A) in past
ALM210 ―
Device in past
Item Symbol
name Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm
ALM211 ―
ALM0 Current alarm number ― in past
ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative
―
ALM212
in past
― 11
ALM11 ―
feedback pulses Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm
ALM213 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor in past
ALM12 ―
speed Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm
ALM214 ―
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs Droop in past
ALM13 ―
NETWORK
pulses Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm
ALM215 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative in past
ALM14 ―
command pulses Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
ALM220 ―
ALM15
pulse frequency
―
ALM221
recent alarm
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st
―
12
Servo status when alarm occurs analog alarm in past
ALM16 ―
speed command voltage/limit voltage Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd
ALM222 ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
Servo status when alarm occurs analog alarm in past
CONNECTION
ALM17 ―
torque command voltage/limit voltage Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd
NETWORK
ALM223 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative alarm in past
ALM18 ―
load ratio Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th
ALM224 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs effective alarm in past
ALM19 ―
load ratio
ALM225
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th
alarm in past
― 13
ALM20 ―
ratio Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th
ALM226 ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs alarm in past
ALM21 ―
Instantaneous torque Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th
ALM227 ―
Servo states when alarm occurs Within alarm in past
ALM22 ―
onerevolution position(1 pulse unit) Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th
STATION)
ALM228 ―
ALM23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― alarm in past
Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th
ALM24 ― ALM229 ―
alarm in past
ALM25
moment ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― ALM230
―
14
alarm in past
ALM
For manufacturer setting ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th
26 to 42 ALM231 ―
alarm in past
CONNECTION
Servo states when alarm occurs Internal
ALM43 ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th
temperature of encoder ALM232 ―
alarm in past
ALM44 Servo states when alarm occurs Setting time ―
(Via G4)
CC-Link

Servo states when alarm occurs Oscillation ALM233 ―
ALM45 ― alarm in past
detection frequency
ALM46
Servo states when alarm occurs Number of
tough drives
―
ALM234
alarm in past
―
15
ALM ALM235 ―
For manufacturer setting ― alarm in past
47 to 50
Detailed alarm from Alarm History most
CONNECTION
Servo states when alarm occurs Unit power ALM240 ―

ALM51 ― recent alarm
consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 W)
INVERTER
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm

Servo states when alarm occurs Unit total ALM241 ―
ALM52 ― in past
power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 Wh)
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm
Alarm number from Alarm History most ALM242 ―
ALM200 ― in past
recent alarm
Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in ALM243
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm
―
16
ALM201 ― in past
past
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm

Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm ALM244 ―
ALM202 ― in past
in past
CONNECTION
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm

Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm ALM245 ―
ALM203 ― in past
in past

Device
Item Symbol
name
ALM246 Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm ―

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past

in past
(m) External input

DI0 Input device statuses ―
Statuses of input devices
DI2 switched on through ―
communication
(n) External output

Device
Item Symbol
name
DO0 Output device statuses ―
DO1 External output pin statuses ―
(o) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

Device
Item Symbol
name
(p) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

Device
Item Symbol
name
TMO0 Forced output from signal pin ―
(q) Set data (for test operation)

Device
Item Symbol
name
TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
TMD1 ―
constant (test mode)
TMD2 For manufacturer setting ―
TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ―

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
16.7 Precautions
MELSECNET/H
 Station number setting in the servo system
Make sure to establish servo system with the station
number set with the host address. 10
For details of host address setting, refer to the
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
following.
MELSECNET/10
 GOT clock function

Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock
function, the settings of [Adjust] or [Broadcast] by GOT 11
clock control will be disabled.
 Servo amplifier/test operation using the GOT
CONNECTION
During the servo amplifier/test operation, when the
NETWORK
communication between the GOT and the servo
amplifier is interrupted for 0.5[ms] or more, the servo
amplifier decelerates, stops, and then gets into the 12
servo lock status. During the servo amplifier/test
operation, continue the communication constantly by
CC-Link IE FIELD
monitoring the status display of the servo amplifier on
CONNECTION
the GOT screen, etc.
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

16.7 Precautions
16.7 Precautions
17
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
ROBOT CONTROLLER
17.
CONNECTION 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
GT11, GT10
17.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 6 21
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
MULTI-CHANNEL
17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
17 - 1
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

Communication
type
Robot
CRnD-700 Ethernet 17.2.1
controller
For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to 13).

17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700)
Robot
GOT
controller Communication driver
Connection cable
Robot controller Maximum GOT

Connection cable Number of connectable
Communication segment
Model name *1*2
*3 Option device Model equipment
type length
• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
CRnD-700*5*6 Ethernet 100m 1 GOT
• 100BASE-TX GT15-J71E71-100
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
system.
*2 A straight cable is available.
When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, remember that the by cross cable is available.

cascades.
*5 For the system configuration of CRnD-700, refer to the following manual.
CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL

*6 Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
17 - 2 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
 GT16
18
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
4.
CONNECTION
Item Description
Range
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GT11, GT10
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Click!
*1
router) 0.0.0.0 to 21
Subnet Mask
If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
menu.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the router address of the default
FUNCTION
channel to be used from the list menu. Default
0.0.0.0 to
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255
router)
3. Set the following items. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Ethernet
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
1024 to 5010 to 22
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Download Port 5014 to 65534
download.
FA TRANSPARENT
Type to be connected. No.
(Default: 5014)
(Except for 5011, 5012,
• I/F: Interface to be used *1 5013 and 49153)
1024 to 5010 to
• Driver: GOT Set the GOT port No. for the FUNCTION
5014 to 65534
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 Communication connection with the Ethernet module.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
5013 and 49153)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Set the number of retries to be
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. performed when a communication
Make the settings according to the usage timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
environment. When receiving no response after
17.3.2 Communication detail settings (Default: 3times)
POINT (Default: 3sec)
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
For details, refer to the following: 0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 - 3

IP Address Setting]
screen.
 GT15, GT12

(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
IP Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
network. (Only for connection via
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected. (Only for connection via
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010 to
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
GOT Set the GOT port No. for the 5014 to 65534
Communication connection with the Ethernet module. (Except for 5011,
Port No. (Default: 5001) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
Timeout Time
*1
(Default: 3sec)
0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
The host is displayed. (The host is
Host ―
indicated with an asterisk (*))
Set the network No. of the connected
19
N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 239
GOT MULTI-DROP
(Default: blank)
CONNECTION
Set the station No. of the connected
PLC No. Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank)
Set the type of the connected
Type*1 Ethernet module. CRnD-70(fixed)
CRnD-70(fixed) 20
Set the IP address of the connected
CONNECTION FUNCTION
0.0.0.0 to
IP address Ethernet module.
255.255.255.255
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the connected
GT11, GT10
Port No. Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
(Default: 5001)
*1 Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type]. 21
POINT
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
(1) Example of [Ethernet]
For examples of [Ethernet], refer to the following.
The communication interface setting can be 22
FA TRANSPARENT
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following FUNCTION
manual.
GT User's Manual

Model Reference
(2) For R32TB or R56TB
Robot controller CRnD-700 17.4.1
17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller

(CRnD-700)
This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot
controller in the following case of system configuration.
POINT
Robot controller (CRnD-700)
For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to
the following manual. (For R56TB)
CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL
Setting
necessity at
 System configuration Item Set value
GOT
connection
Designer3 NETIP 192.168.0.19
<GOT> (The settings other than the GOTPORT 5001
Network No. :1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
PLC No. :1
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT

IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001
Designer3
(1) Communication settings
<CRnD-700> (The settings other than the Item Set value
Network No. :1 GOT NET No. 1
PLC No. :2
IP address : 192.168.0.19 GOT PLC No. 1
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed) GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18

■2Parameter settings for CRnD-700
GOT Port No.
5014
 Parameter settings for CRnD-700 (Ethernet Download)

(1) For RT ToolBox2
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
Setting necessity at PLC No. 2

Item Set value Ethernet setting
GOT connection Type CRnD-700
No.1
NETIP 192.168.0.19 IP address 192.168.0.19
GOTPORT 5001
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Communication UDP (fixed)

17
POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
(Communication settings) 18
CNC CONNECTION
 Confirming communication state of CRnD-
700
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®.
Windows®. 19
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
TTL=64
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Request timed out.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• Parameter settings
GT11, GT10
• Operation state of the CRnD-700. (faulty or not)
• The IP address of the CRnD-700 specified for the
Ping command.
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

For details on the device range that can be used on the
GOT, refer to the following.
2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR,
CRnD-700
17.6 Precautions
 When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

18
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
18. CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 21
18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
18 - 1
18. CNC CONNECTION

Communication
type
RS-232
RS-422 18.2.1
MELDAS
FCA C6 MELSECNET/10*2 18.2.2
C6/C64
FCA C64
*1 CC-Link(ID) 18.2.3
Ethernet 18.2.4
*1 Use the NC system software version D0 or later.

*2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O
network..
For the connection to CNC C70, refer to Mitsubishi Products (Chapter 5 to Chapter 13).
18 - 2 18. CNC CONNECTION

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
ROBOT
18
MELDAS
CNC CONNECTION
F311 cable GOT Communication driver
C6/C64
Connection cable
AJ71C24, MELDAS C6*
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC Connection cable GOT
Number of
CONNECTION
Communi connectable
Max.
Model name F311 cable cation Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
type
MELDAS C6/C64
- RS-232
RS232 connection
15m
- (Built into GOT) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 diagram
GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT11, GT10
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
MELDAS C6/C64 *3 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
*2
RS-422
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
30.5m GT15-RS4-9S
21
- (Built into GOT)
MULTI-CHANNEL
*1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL.
FUNCTION
*2 Connect the connector of the CNC side to SIO.
*3 To be prepared by the user, referring the following.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) F311 Cable Production Drawing
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
18. CNC CONNECTION 18 - 3

18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
POINT
MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT
cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system

When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
CNC Connection cable GOT Number of

Max. connectable
Model name Expansion unit Communication type Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
GT15-J71BR13*2
MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable
FCU6-EX878 *1 31 GOTs
(Coaxial bus system) *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
MELDAS C6/C64
GT15-J71LP23-25*2
MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable
FCU6-EX879 *1 63 GOTs
(Optical loop system) *3
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

*3 For the coaxial cable and optical fiber cable, refer to the following manuals.


18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC Connection cable GOT Number of
CONNECTION
Model name Expansion unit Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
CC-Link dedicated GT15-J61BT13*2

MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-HR865 CC-Link(ID) cable *1 26 GOTs
*3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
GT11, GT10
18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

18.2.4 Ethernet connection
MELDAS Expansion
GOT Communication driver
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
CNC Connection cable*1 GOT

Number of
Commun Maximum connectable
Model name Expansion unit ication Cable model segment Option device Model equipment
type length*3

• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
Shielded twisted pair cable
(STP) or unshielded twisted
128 GOTs
FUC6-EX875 pair cable (UTP): Category
MELDAS C6/C64 Ethernet 100m (recommended to
*4*5 3, 4, and 5
16 units or less)
• 100BASE-TX GT15-J71E71-100
(STP):
Category 5 and 5e
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
GT16 User's Manual
cascades.
*4 For the system configuration of the expansion unit, refer to the following manuals.

*5 Select [AJ71QE71] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT and the CNC.
ROBOT
18.3.1 RS-232 cable 18
CNC CONNECTION
RS232 connection diagram
MELDAS C6/C64 side*1

GOT side (20 pin half pitch)
CD 1 1 GND 19
RD(RXD) 2 6 SD
GOT MULTI-DROP
SD(TXD) RD
CONNECTION
3 16
ER(DTR) 4 - -
SG 5 11 GND
DR(DSR) 6 - -
RS(RTS) 7 - - 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CS(CTS) 8 18 ER(DTR)
- 9 - -
GT11, GT10
*1 For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to
the following manuals.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 21
MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
(1) Cable length
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

POINT
settings)
Set the channel of the connected equipment. confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
2. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting
3. 18.4.2 Communication detail settings

4. (1) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*
Click!

menu.

4800bps,
• Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Set this item when change the
9600bps,
• Controller Type: transmission speed used for
Transmission 19200bps,
For GT16, GT15 Speed 38400bps,
equipment.
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* (Default: 19200bps)
57600bps,
For GT14, GT11 115200bps
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with the
• I/F: Interface to be used Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
• Driver:
(Default: 8bit)
For direct connection to CPU
AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
For ELSECNET/10 connection (Default: 1bit)
MELSECNET/H Specify whether or not to perform a parity
MELSECNET/10 check, and how it is performed during
Parity Odd (fixed)
For CC-Link (ID) connection communication.
CC-Link Ver2 (ID) (Default: Odd)
CC-Link (ID) Set the number of retries to be

For Ethernet connection Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 (Default: 0time)

Timeout Time
to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
environment.
18.4.2 Communication detail settings from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)

(2) MELSECNET/H (3) MELSECNET/10
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
• MNET/H mode
Set the number of retries to be 19
Set the network type. performed when a communication
Network Type • MNET/10 mode
(Default: MNET/H mode) timeout occurs.
GOT MULTI-DROP
• MNET/H EXT mode Retry 0 to 5times
CONNECTION
Set the network No.
Network No. 1 to 239 retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 1)
(Default: 3times)
Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1) Set the time period for a communication
• Online Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 90sec
(auto. reconnection)
• Offline
(Default: 3sec)
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• Test between
GOT. slave station*1
Mode Setting
(Default: POINT
• Self-loopback test*1
Online (auto. reconnection))
• Internal self-
When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used
GT11, GT10
loopback test*1
• H/W test *1 When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network
using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
specify [MELSECNET/10 mode] as [Network Type].
timeout occurs.
21
retries, the communication times
MULTI-CHANNEL
out.
(Default: 3times)
FUNCTION
(Default: 3sec)
Delay Time
0 to 300ms
22
PLC.
FA TRANSPARENT
(Default: 0ms)
station units during FUNCTION
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time)
1 to 1000times
Interval Valid when [Secured data send/
Secured data receive] is marked
by the control station side network
parameters of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
transmission speed.
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode]
as the network type, only 10Mbps
can be set applicable.
*1 For details, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

(4) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) (5) CC-Link(ID)

Set the station No. of the GOT. Item Description Range
Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1) Set the number of retries to be
Set the transmission speed and performed when a communication
Transmission
the mode of the GOT. 0 to E timeout occurs.
Rate*1 Retry 0 to 5times
(Default: 0) When receiving no response after
Ver.1/Ver.2/
Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: 3times)
Mode Additional/
(Default: Ver.1)
Offline Set the time period for a communication
Single/
(Default: 3sec)
Expanded Set the cyclic point expansion. Double/
Cyclic (Default: Single) Quadruple/
Octuple
Set the number of stations
Occupied
occupied by the GOT. 1 Station/4 Stations
Station
(Default: 1 Station)
Set Clear/Hold at an error
Input for Error
occurrence. Clear/Hold
Station
(Default: Clear)
timeout occurs.
times out.
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
PLC.
(Default: 0ms)
*1 Transmission speed settings

The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC-
Link communication.
Set value Description

0 Online: 156kbps
1 Online: 625kbps
2 Online: 2.5Mbps
3 Online: 5Mbps
4 Online: 10Mbps
A Hardware test: 156kbps
B Hardware test: 625kbps
C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps
D Hardware test: 5Mbps
E Hardware test: 10Mbps
For details of the hardware test, refer to the following

manual.
Manual for CC-Link module to be used

(6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700
*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT 17
IP Address Setting]
screen.
(a) GT16, GT14
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18)
255.255.255.255
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to
Mask*1 If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
GT11, GT10
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the
Default default gateway where the GOT is
Gateway connected.(Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255 21
*1 router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
MULTI-CHANNEL
1024 to 5010,
FUNCTION
No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
GOT
connection with the Ethernet
5014 to 65534 22
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
FA TRANSPARENT
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
(Default: 5001)
49153)
FUNCTION
timeout occurs.
out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

(b) GT15, GT12
POINT
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual

(Default: 1)
GOT PLC No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
default gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010 to
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the Ethernet
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
(Default: 5001)
49153)
timeout occurs.
out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

18.4.3 Ethernet setting 18.4.4 Switch setting 17
 Switch setting (GT15-75J71P23-Z, GT15-
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
75JBR13-Z)
ROBOT
POINT
18
Switch setting of the communication unit
CNC CONNECTION
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
the switch setting is not needed.

Item Description Range following manual.
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
19
The host is displayed. (The host
Host ― User's Manual
is indicated with an asterisk (*))

Network No. of
GOT MULTI-DROP
N/W No. connected Ethernet module.
CNC*1
CONNECTION
(Default: blank) GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
Set the station No. of the
PLC No. connected Ethernet module. Station No. of CNC RUN POWER
(Default: blank)
PC
DUAL D.LINK
SW.E T.PASS
20
M/S.E
E PRM.E GOT R/W E
Set the type of the connected

R CRC CRC R
R OVER R
OVER
O O
R AB.IF AB.IF R
TIME TIME
Type Ethernet module. AJ71QE71

DATA DATA
UNDER UNDER
LOOP LOOP
CONNECTION FUNCTION
SD SD
(Default: QJ71E71)
RD RD
F.LOOP R.LOOP
Set the IP address of the

IP Address connected Ethernet module. IP address of CNC 4 5 6
7 8 (2)
2 3
GROUP No.
GT11, GT10
(Default: blank)
9 0 1
89
67 4 5 6
(4)
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
Set the port No. of the connected 4 5 6 4 5 6
(1)
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X10 X10 NETWORK

9 0 1 9 0 1 No.
Port No. Ethernet module. 5001 (3) STATION

No.
4 5 6 4 5 6
21
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
(Default: 5001)
9 0 1 9 0 1

(1) Network number setting switch
MULTI-CHANNEL
*1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239".
Network number setting
FUNCTION
switch
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
X100
22
9
0 1

4 5 6
MELSECNET/10
7 8
2 3
X10 NETWORK 1 to 239
FA TRANSPARENT
9 0 1 No. communication unit.
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
FUNCTION
7 8
2 3
X1
9
0 1

switch
Set the group No. of the

4 5 6 0: No group
MELSECNET/10
setting
7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
(fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
*1 The GOT does not use the group number.

Specify "0".

(3) Station number setting switch  Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-
75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is
switch used)
4
5 6 Set the station No. of the 1 to 64:
POINT
7 8
2 3
9
X10 MELSECNET/10 GT15-
0 1
STATION communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: Switch setting of the communication unit
stations in the network. GT15-
7 8
2 3
X1
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
(Default: 01) 75J71BR13-Z
9
0 1
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.

(4) Mode setting switch following manual.
Mode setting switch Description Set value GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
Manual
89
67 Online
AB
45
0
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Left side Front side
POINT
RUN
L RUN

SD
RD
345
(1)
EF 2
67 A

01
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
following.
901
456
78
10
(2) 23
STATION NO.
901
456
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection 78

1
23
(3)
901
456

78
BAUDRATE
ON
When changing the switch setting after mounting (4)

1 2
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the 2 4 1

DB SLD (FG1) NC
GOT, reset the GOT.

(3) Self check test (1) Mode setting switch
Select "3" to "9" as the mode setting switch to
provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10 Mode setting
communication unit. switch
345
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit Select the online mode.
EF 2
67 A
01
0 (fixed)
89
User's Manual BCD (Default: 0)
Station number
setting switch
23
901
456
78 Specify the station No. of the

CC-Link communication unit. 1 to 64
23
(Default: 01)
901
456
78

(3) Transmission baudrate setting switch
17
Transmission
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
baudrate setting Description Set value
switch
ROBOT
0: 156kbps
23 1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
18
901
456
2: 2.5Mbps
(Default: 0)
3: 5Mbps
78
4: 10Mbps
CNC CONNECTION
Condition
Setting
setting Description Set value
switch
switches
Specify input data status of the

19
OFF: Cleared
SW1 data link error station.
GOT MULTI-DROP
ON: Held
(Default: OFF)
ON
CONNECTION
1 2
Specify the number of stations

OFF: 1 station
SW2 occupied.
ON: 4 stations
(Default: OFF)
20
POINT
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
following.
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection
When changing the switch setting after mounting 21
the GT15-75J61BT13-Z type CC-Link
communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

18.5 CNC Side Settings
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection
Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with
MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as
parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on
CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of
using the default parameters or not requiring separate
settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to
set the network
(1) Control Station Parameter

If you wish to place the control station in CNC and set
the common parameters, set the network parameters
by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An
example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows.
Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the
expansion slot to which the unit is inserted.
(a) Start I/O No.
Slot Start I/O No.
EXT1 0200
EXT2 0280
EXT1
EXT2
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the

following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION
MANUAL BNP-B2373
(2) Normal Station Parameter

As for normal stations, it is not necessary to set
parameters unless separate settings are required.
The refresh parameters are set and written as required.
In this case, the parameter setting of the first I/O No. is
the same as in the case of the control station.

17
 Expansion unit settings
(1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
No. Switch name Settings
ROBOT
Condition setting Set the operation condition.
switch
SW Description OFF ON
1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net

18
CNC CONNECTION
8 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)
7
6 3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM)
5
1)
4 4 OFF ON OFF ON
3 Number of stations*2 8 16 32 64
2 5 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF Station OFF Station ON Station ON Station
1
ON 6 B/W total points*2
(Valid when SW3 is ON)
OFF 2K
points
ON 4K
points
OFF 6K
points
ON 8K
points
19
7 OFF OFF ON ON
GOT MULTI-DROP
8 Not used Always OFF
CONNECTION
Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
Other than 01 to 64: Setting error
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Setting switch of
group number
GT11, GT10
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
21
Setting switch of
network number
MULTI-CHANNEL
Network number setting*2
FUNCTION
(Setting range)
4)
001 to 255: Network number
22
*2
Mode setting switch Mode setting
FA TRANSPARENT
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
FUNCTION
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*2 Set as necessary.
*3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.
*4 Set the station type to the control station.
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.

(2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable)
Switch layout No. Switch name Settings
Set the operation condition.

Condition setting
SW Description OFF ON
switch
1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net
2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)

8
7 Common parameters Default parameter
6 3 Used parameter*2
(PRM) (D.PRM)
5
1)
4 4 OFF 8 ON 16 OFF 32 ON 64
3 Number of stations*2 Sta Sta Sta Sta
2
5 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF tio OFF tio ON tio ON tio
1
n n n n
ON
6 OFF 2K ON 4K OFF 6K ON 8K
B/W total points*2
1) poi poi poi poi
7 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF OFF ON ON
nts nts nts nts
8 Not used Always OFF
2) Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
3)
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
4)
Setting switch of
group number
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
Setting switch of
5) network number
Network number setting*2
(Setting range)
4)
001 to 255: Network number
Mode setting*2
Mode setting switch
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*4 Set the station type to the control station.

18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection 17
 Expansion unit settings
Make the communication settings by the setting switch
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865).
Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX
(1) Expansion unit
ROBOT
Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in
the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary
to set the network parameters. 1)
18
(1) Master station parameter
CNC CONNECTION
It is necessary to set and write the network parameters
to CNC with GX Developer. The following shows an
example of parameter settings.Set the first I/O No. as 2)
follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit
is inserted. 3)
(a) Start I/O No.
4) 19
Slot Start I/O No.
GOT MULTI-DROP
EXT1 0200
CONNECTION
EXT2 0280
EXT1
EXT2 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
1) 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
2)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION FUNCTION
MANUAL BNP-B2373

(2) Contents of setting
No. Switch name Settings
Set the operation condition.
Switch status Setting validity

Condition setting Master station Local station
No. Description
switch OFF ON (Standby (Standby
master station) master station)
Master station/local
SW1 Station type*1 Standby master station (Valid) (Valid)
station
SW2 Not used Always OFF - -

1) SW3 Not used Always OFF - -
Data link error station

SW4 Clear Hold valid valid
input data status*1
SW4 OFF 1 OFF 2 ON ON 4

3
Number of occupied Sta Sta Sta
Sta Invalid valid
SW5 stations*1 OFF tio ON tio ON OFF tio
tion
n n n
This switch sets the unit operation status.

Mode setting switch Settability
No. Name Description
Master station Local station
Automatic online return provided when data link is

0 Yes Yes
Online*1 enabled
1 Link with remote I/O net mode Yes No
2)
2 Offline*1 Data link offline state Yes Yes
3 Line test 1*1 Line test 1 in offline state Yes No
4 Line test 2*1 Line test 2 in offline state Yes No
Parameter confirmation
5 Checks the parameter details Yes No
test*1
6 Hardware test*1 Test Expansion unit (FCU6-HR865) Yes Yes
7 to F Not usable
This switch sets the unit transmission speed.

Transmission speed
setting switch No. Description
0 156Kbps*1
1 625Kbps*1
3)
2 2.5Mbps*1
3 5Mbps*1
4 10Mbps*1
5 to F Not usable
Setting switch of
station No.
This switch sets the unit station No.*1*2
(Setting range)
4) Master station: 00
Local station: 01 to 64
Standby master station: 01 to 64

18.5.3 Ethernet connection 17
Set parameters related to Ethernet with MELSEC’s
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
peripheral devices in the same way as parameter
The following shows the example of the system setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by
ROBOT
configuration when using the CNC monitor function. Personal computer.
<CNC-2> <GOT>
(1) Network parameter setting
N/W No. :239
PLC No. :3
N/W No. :1
PLC No. :1
Set the network parameters by peripheral device and 18
IP address :192.168.1.3 IP address :192.168.1.1 write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting
CNC CONNECTION
by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows
according to the expansion slot to which the unit is
Ethernet (192.168.1.xx) inserted.
<CNC-1> (a) Unit No.
[Communication with GOT]
N/W No. :239 Start
PLC No. :2
IP address :192.168.1.2
Slot
position
I/O
No.
Mounting position of extension unit 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
EXT1 0200 When mounted When mounted
in EXT1 and EXT2 in EXT1 and EXT3
CONNECTION
EXT2 0280
EXT3 0300
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1 EXT1
20
Unit2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Unit2
Unit1 Unit1
When mounted When mounted
GT11, GT10
in EXT2 and EXT3 in EXT1 only
21
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Unit1
Unit2 Unit1
When mounted When mounted

in EXT2 only in EXT3 only
22
EXT3
FA TRANSPARENT
EXT2
FUNCTION
Unit1 Unit1

(b) Example of GX Developer setting (2) CNC side parameter setting
Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the
settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask
and port No. by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of
the CNC side.
For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to
the following.
MANUAL BNP-B2373 IV Setting the Ethernet
IP Address
following.
MANUAL BNP-B2373 7-segment LED
POINT
IP address setting
IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid.
Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary
switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page.
Rotary switch

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following.
ROBOT
18.7 Precautions 18
CNC CONNECTION
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU 18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection
 Version of CNC  Using cyclic transmission
For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version
D0 or later.
(1) I/O signal for master station
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output 19
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection station.
GOT MULTI-DROP
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC
CONNECTION
 Network configuration system may be malfunctioned.
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC
network) to configure a network including the GOT. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User's Manual 20
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
CONNECTION FUNCTION
configured. Manual
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network)
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) CC-Link Mode
GT11, GT10
CNC is not compatible with CC-Link Ver.2.
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the (3) When GOT malfunctions
following. The cyclic output status remains the same as before
becoming faulty. 21
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
PLC NETWORK)  For transient transmission
MULTI-CHANNEL
 Monitoring range (1) Access range that can be monitored
FUNCTION
Only CNC of the same networks No. can be monitored The GOT can access to the CNC mounting the master
in GOT. and local station of the CC-Link System.
It cannot access another network via the CC-Link
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on
module. 22
Network Systems  GOT startup in CNC connection (CC-Link
FA TRANSPARENT
connection (intelligent device station))
 Starting GOT with CNC connection In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent
(MELSECNET/10 connection) FUNCTION
device station)), the data link is started approximately
With the CNC connection (MESLSECNET/10 10 seconds after the GOT startup.
connection), the data link starts approximately 10
seconds after the GOT starts.  When a network error occurs in the system
alarm
 When a network error occurs in the system In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent
alarm
device station)), when a network error occurs in the
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be
with the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 canceled even though the causes are removed.
connection), the system alarm is kept displaying on the
GOT even though the error factor is removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.  Version of CNC
 Version of CNC D0 or later.
E0 or later.

18.7.4 Ethernet connection
 Version of CNC
 Via network system D0 or later.
GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the
CNCs in another network via the CNC (network
module, Ethernet module, etc.).
 When connecting to multiple GOTs

When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.

By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and CNC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT
 Ethernet cable connection

Ethernet cable is so susceptible to noise that you
should wire power cables and electric supply cables
separately. And you need to attach a ferrite core
(attachment) on the control unit side.
For details of the Ethernet cable connection, refer to the
following

MANUAL BNP-B2373 IX Connection Function
with GOT
LED1
1 turn
Ferrite
core
GOT
Ferrite core
Ethernet
FG cable for Ethernet

18.7 Precautions
MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1

20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION
FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1
19
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19. GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
19.1 CPU that can be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2
GT11, GT10
19.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 24
FUNCTION
19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 29
19.8 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
19 - 1
19.1 CPU that can be Monitored

The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.
Serial Multi-Drop Unit
19 - 2 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

19.1 CPU that can be Monitored
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master
module") directly
ROBOT
Communication type
Series Model name Clock Between CPU
and master
Between
master module
18
module and GOT
CNC CONNECTION
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
19
*1
Q25HCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q02PHCPU
CONNECTION
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422
- 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
GT11, GT10
(Q mode)*5 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU 21
Q13UDHCPU
RS-485
Q20UDHCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU 22
Q26UDEHCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2
FA TRANSPARENT
Q50UDEHCPU *2 *2 *2 *2
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU FUNCTION
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2
module Q24DHCCPU-V *2 *2 *2 *2
MELSEC-QS*5 QS001CPU -
L02CPU*3
L26CPU*3
L26CPU-BT*3 RS-232
MELSEC-L*5
L02CPU-P*3 RS-422
L26CPU-PBT*3
L02SCPU

*3 When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 is required.
*5 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored.
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19 - 3

Communication type
Series Model name Clock Between CPU Between

and master master module
module and GOT
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A
(A mode)*3 RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-422
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU)*2*3
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU RS-422
Q2ASCPU
RS-422
(QnASCPU)*2*3 Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1 RS-485
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
MELSEC-A
A1NCPU*1 RS-422
(AnCPU)*4
*1
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21*1
A2NCPU*1
A2NCPUP21*1
A2NCPUR21*1
A2NCPU-S1*1
A2NCPUP21-S1*1
A2NCPUR21-S1*1
A3NCPU*1
A3NCPUP21*1
A3NCPUR21*1
MELSEC-A
A2USCPU RS-422
(AnSCPU)*4
*1 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later
• A2SCPU: Version H or later
*2 GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later.
PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type HW/SW Version
Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL
Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL
Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL
Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL
Q4ARCPU AL - -

*4 SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored.

Communication type 17
module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
ROBOT
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A A1SHCPU
RS-422
18
(AnSCPU)*5 A2SCPU*1
CNC CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1
RS-422
19
A0J2HCPUR21*1
GOT MULTI-DROP
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
CONNECTION
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A*5
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-422
A2CCPUC24-PRF 20
A2CJCPU-S3
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A1FXCPU
RS-485
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
GT11, GT10
Q172CPUN*2 RS-422
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU 21
Motion controller Q173HCPU
CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q173DCPU
RS-232 *4
FUNCTION
Q172DCPU-S1 *4 *4 *4 *4
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU RS-232 22
A273UCPU RS-422
FA TRANSPARENT
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU FUNCTION
CPU (A Series)*5 A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N
*1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later
• A2CCPU: Version H or later

Communication type

module and GOT
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
Motion controller A172SHCPU
RS-422
CPU (A Series)*2 A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS RS-232
WS0-CPU1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25G RS-232
remote I/O station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet adapter
module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232
RS-485
CRnQ-700
Robot controller RS-232
(Q172DRCPU)
FX0 RS-422
FX0S
RS-422
FX0N
FX1 RS-422
FX2
RS-422
FX2C *1
FX1S
FX1N RS-232
MELSEC-FX
FX2N RS-422
FX1NC
RS-232
FX2NC
*1 RS-422
FX3G
FX3GC RS-232
FX3U RS-422
FX3UC
*1 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.

module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
ROBOT
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E 18
FREQROL-F500J
CNC CONNECTION
FREQROL
FREQROL-D700 RS-422
FREQROL-F700PJ
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
RS-485
MELIPM
FREQROL-F700P
MD-CX522- K(-A0)
19
MR-J2S- A
GOT MULTI-DROP
MR-J2S- CP
CONNECTION
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3-
MR-J3-
A
T
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MR-J4- A
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master
module") in computer link connection
Communication type
module and GOT
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422
-
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode)*3 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU RS-485
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU RS-232
Q50UDEHCPU RS-422
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
RS-232
module Q24DHCCPU-V
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT RS-232
MELSEC-L*3
L02CPU-P RS-422
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU

module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A
ROBOT
(A mode)*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
MELSEC-QnA
Q2ACPU-S1
RS-232
18
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU)*1 RS-422
CNC CONNECTION
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 RS-232
(QnASCPU)*1 Q2ASHCPU RS-422
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
19
A2UCPU-S1
GOT MULTI-DROP
A3UCPU
CONNECTION
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1 20
A2ACPUP21-S1 RS-485
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
GT11, GT10
A3ACPUR21
MELSEC-A RS-232
(AnCPU) A1NCPU RS-422
A1NCPUP21
21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
A2NCPUP21
FUNCTION
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1 22
A3NCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
FUNCTION
MELSEC-A RS-232
A2USCPU
(AnSCPU) RS-422

Communication type
module and GOT
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A A1SHCPU RS-232
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU RS-422
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
RS-422
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A -
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-232
A2CCPUC24-PRF RS-422
A2CJCPU-S3
-
A1FXCPU
RS-485
Q172CPU*1*2
*1*2
Q173CPU RS-232
Q172CPUN *1*2 RS-422
Q173CPUN*1*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion controller
Q172DCPU
CPU (Q Series)
Q173DCPU RS-232
*3
Q172DCPU-S1 RS-422 *3 *3 *3 *3
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
RS-232
Q170MCPU
RS-422
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A373UCPU-S3 RS-422
A171SCPU
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N

module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
ROBOT
Motion controller A172SHCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN RS-422
A173UHCPU 18
A173UHCPU-S1
CNC CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H RS-232
QJ72LP25G
remote I/O station RS-422
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - 19
head module
GOT MULTI-DROP
CC-Link IE
CONNECTION
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet adapter
module
RS-232
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-485
RS-422
Robot controller
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU)
- 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FX0 -
FX0S
-
FX0N
GT11, GT10
FX1 -
FX2
-
FX2C *1
FX1S 21
FX1N
MELSEC-FX -
MULTI-CHANNEL
FX2N
FX1NC
FUNCTION
FX2NC -
*1
FX3G
22
FX3GC
-
FX3U
FX3UC
FA TRANSPARENT
*1 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.
FUNCTION

Communication type

module and GOT
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-F500J
FREQROL
FREQROL-D700 RS-422
FREQROL-F700PJ
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
RS-485
FREQROL-F700P
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0)
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J4- A

17
 [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3
The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
multi-drop connection is available.
PLC Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
ROBOT
GOT type
Connection type Type Serial Multi-Drop Connection driver
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
CONNECTION TO
CPU
QnA/L/Q CPU
18
COMPUTER LINK
CNC CONNECTION
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
CONNECTION TO
CPU
QnA/L/Q CPU 19
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
GOT MULTI-DROP
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC
CONNECTION TO MELSEC-QnA/Q
CPU
COMPUTER LINK
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)
QnA/L/Q CPU
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
(RS-422) DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
GT11, GT10
POINT
21
GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection
The following GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection.
MULTI-CHANNEL
For the confirming method of hardware version, refer to the following.
FUNCTION
GT User's Manual
GOT Hardware version Standard monitor OS
GT16, GT15*1, GT14 version A or later
GT1155-QTBD version C or later - 22
GT1155-QSBD, GT1150-QLBD version F or later
FA TRANSPARENT
GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD version C or later
GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD version A or later
FUNCTION
Standard monitor OS[01.12.**]or later
GT1030-L D , GT1030-H D version B or later
GT1020-L D version E or later
*1 When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.14Q or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to
the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
For details of the OS installation, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Connection type Multi-Drop (Slave)

dependent
(Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit) (GOT)
Serial multi
PLC drop connection GOT GOT
unit
Varies according to the

connection type. Connection cable Connection cable
Serial Multi-Drop
Connection cable GOT
Connection Unit Number of
Max.
PLC Commun connectable
distance
Model ication Cable model Option device Model equipment
type
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
connection diagram 2) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
connection diagram 1)
RS485
For details of the system GT15-RS4-TE
configuration between
16 GOTs for
the Serial Multi-Drop
GT01-RS4-M RS-485 500m*2 Serial Multi-Drop
Connection Unit and GT10-9PT5S*1
Connection Unit*3
PLC, refer to the
corresponding section. RS485
- (Built into GOT)
*5
RS485
GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
*1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT).
*2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT.
*3 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases.
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
*5 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT.
ROBOT
19.4.1 RS-485 cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
3 3 3
GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin)
SHELL
SHELL
SHELL
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
SG
SG
19
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
Terminal Terminal Terminal
SG
SG
SG
FG
FG
FG
block *6 block *6 block *6
Serial multi drop R R

*4
20
connection unit *2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RDA*1
RDB*1
SDA*1
GT11, GT10
SDB*1
SG
*5
21
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
*3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
FUNCTION
*4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal.
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.
*6 For the cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block, refer to the following. 22
 Precautions when preparing a cable(2)
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

connection unit *2 CON side*3(20 pin) CON side*3(20 pin) CON side*3(20 pin)
SDA1(TXD1+) SDA2(TXD2+) SDA1(TXD1+)

SDA*1 6 5 6
SDB1(TXD1-) SDB2(TXD2-) SDB1(TXD1-)
SDB*1 8 7 8
RDA1(RXD1+) RDA2(RXD2+) RDA1(RXD1+)
RDA 10 9 10
RDB1(RXD1-) RDB2(RXD2-) RDB1(RXD1-)
R
RDB 12 11 12
*4
SG SG SG
SG 2 2 2
NC NC NC
1 1 1
*5 *5 *5 *5
NC NC NC
3 3 3
NC NC NC
4 4 4
5 6 5
7 8 7
9 10 9
*5 *5
11 12 11
NC NC NC
13 13 13
RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+)
14 14 14
NC NC NC
15 15 15
RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-)
16 16 16
NC NC NC
17 17 17
CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+)
18 18 18
NC NC NC
19 19 19
CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-)
20 20 20
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB.



17
(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
connection unit *2 CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin)
ROBOT
RDA*1 6 5 6
R
RDB*1 8 7 8
18
*4
SDA*1 10 9 10
R
SDB *1
CNC CONNECTION
12 11 12
*4
SG SG SG
SG 2 2 2
NC NC *5 *5 NC
1 1 1
*5 *5
NC NC NC
3 3 3
NC NC NC
4 4 4
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
SDA1(TXD1+)
6
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
19
7 8 7
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
9 10 9
11 12 11
NC NC NC
13 13 13
*5 *5
RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+)
20
14 14 14
NC NC NC
15 15 15
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-)
16 16 16
NC NC NC
17 17 17
CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+)
GT11, GT10
18 18 18
NC NC NC
19 19 19
CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-)
20 20 20
21
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

connection unit *2 GOT side*3 GOT side*3 GOT side*3
SDA1 SDA2 SDA1
SDA*1 1 5 1
SDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDB*1 2 6 2
RDA1 RDA2 RDA1
RDA 3 7 3
RDB1 RDB2 RDB1
R
RDB 4 8 4
*4
SG SG SG
SG 9 9 9
*5 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2

5 1 5
SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
6 2 6
RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
7 3 7
RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
8 4 8
FG FG FG
10 10 10
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB.



(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

SDA1 SDA2 SDA1
RDA*1 1 5 1
SDB1 SDB2 SDB1
RDB*1 2 6 2
*1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1

SDA 3 7 3
R
*1 RDB1 RDB2 RDB1
SDB 4 8 4
*4
SG SG SG
SG 9 9 9
*5 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2

5 1 5
SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
6 2 6
RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
7 3 7
RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
8 4 8
FG FG FG
10 10 10
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB, RDA/RDB.



17
(For 1 pair wiring)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial multi drop
connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
ROBOT
SDA *4 SDA *4 SDA *4
SDA 1 1 1
SDB SDB SDB
SDB 6 6 6
RDA
RDA
2
RDA
2
RDA
2 18
RDB RDB RDB
CNC CONNECTION
RDB 7 7 7
*3 *3 *3
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
*5 RSA *5 RSA *5 RSA

3 3 3
RSB RSB RSB
8 8 8
CSA CSA CSA
4 4 4
CSB
9
CSB
9
CSB
9
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
CONNECTION

*3 Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "1pair" when using the connection conversion adapter.
In that case, transition wiring is not necessary between SDA and RDA or SDB and RDB.
*4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 main unit. 20
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less).
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(For 2 pair wiring)
GT11, GT10
Serial multi drop
connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
*4 *4 *4
RDA
SDA
1
SDA
1
SDA
1 21
SDB SDB SDB
RDB 6 6 6
MULTI-CHANNEL
RDA RDA RDA
SDA 2 2 2
RDB RDB RDB
SDB
FUNCTION
7 7 7
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
*5 RSA *5 RSA *5 RSA

3 3 3
RSB
8
RSB
8
RSB
8 22
CSA CSA CSA
4 4 4
FA TRANSPARENT
CSB CSB CSB
9 9 9
FUNCTION
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".

*3 Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "2pair" when using the connection conversion adapter.
*4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 main unit.

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

SDA SDA SDA SDA
SDB SDB SDB SDB
RDA RDA RDA RDA
RDB RDB RDB RDB
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3
19.6.3 Setting switches

*2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair)
• When GOT is a terminal
Terminating resistor: 110
• When GOT is not a terminal
Terminating resistor: OPEN
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

RDA SDA SDA SDA
RDB SDB SDB SDB
SDA RDA RDA RDA
SDB RDB RDB RDB
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3

*2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type: 4-wire type (2Pair)
• When GOT is a terminal
Terminating resistor: 330
• When GOT is not a terminal
Terminating resistor: OPEN
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

17
POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Mixed wiring with various GOTs
The GOT multi-drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed.
ROBOT
GT16, GT15
(GT15-RS4-9S)
18
SHELL
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
CNC CONNECTION
Example of mixed wiring with various GOTs
GT16 GT16, GT15 User-created GT11, GT10

(FA-LTBGTR4CBL□□) (GT15-RS4-TE) terminal block (GT10-9PT5S)
RDA1
RDB1
RDA2
RDB2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2
RDA1
RDB1
RDA2
RDB2
SDA1
SDB1
SDA2
SDB2
SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
SDA1
SDB1
SDA2
SDB2
19
RDB
RDA
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDB
SDA
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
SG
SG
SG
FG
FG
GOT MULTI-DROP
Serial multi drop
connection unit
CONNECTION
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Precautions when preparing a cable (3) GOT side connector
(1) Cable 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as
a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following
shows recommended model names and manufacturers
of the cable to be used. When connecting a Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to
Manufacturer Model Remark
the GOT.
Mitsubishi Cable Two-pair cable of
SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Industries,Ltd 0.5mm2
Two-pair cable of
Set the terminating resistor setting switch.
Showa Electric Wire & KMPEV-SB
Cable Co.,Ltd CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P 0.5mm2
Three-pair cable of
DPEV SB 0.3 3P Set the terminating resistor selector switch.
Sumitomo Electric 0.3mm2
Industries.,Ltd Three-pair cable of
DPEV SB 0.5 3P For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
0.5mm2
to the following.
The Furukawa Electric Three-pair cable of
D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
Co.,Ltd 0.5mm2
Two-pair cable of
IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2
0.3mm2
Fujikura Ltd.
Two-pair cable of
IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2
0.5mm2
Pair
Shield
Two-pair cable structural

Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
drawing example
(2) Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to

terminal block
Create by yourself, referring to the following connection
diagram.
Example of connection diagram for 2 pair wiring

SDA1 1 SDA
SDB1 6 SDB
RDA1 2 RDA
RDB1 7 RDB
SDA2 5 SG
SDB2 3 RSA
RDA2 8 RSB
RDB2 4 CSA
SG 9 CSB
FG Shell FG
Make sure to connect the wiring branched on the GOT side

connector.
Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.2mm2 or more.
Use an applicable cable to D-sub connector.
Wiring should be the shortest distance.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
interface (communication
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
4.
CONNECTION

4800bps,
9600bps,
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
Click!
38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
115200bps
GT11, GT10

timeout occurs.
menu. Retry When receiving no response after
0 to 5times
21
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the out.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 0time)
3.
FUNCTION
Set the following items. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
• Manufacturer: Set it according to the connected (Default: 3sec)
equipment. Specify the station number of the

host station in the system
• Controller Type: Set it according to the connected
equipment.
GOT Address
configuration.
(Default: 0)
0 to 15
22
FA TRANSPARENT
Set this item to adjust the
• Driver: Multi-Drop (slave) transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, GOT. FUNCTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0ms)
environment.
POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manual.
GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings

19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
19.6.1 Write the OS
Write the standard monitor OS and communication interface (Communication
driver according to the desired connection type onto the settings)
serial multi-drop connection unit.
For the OS writing methods, refer to the following
Make the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit interface
manual.
setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT
GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual Designer 3.
For the communication interface driver, set the same
communication driver as the serial multi-drop
connection.
For details on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of
GT Designer3, refer to the manuals.
GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual
1.
Click!
1. Check-mark a communication driver according to the

desired connection type and click the [Write] button.

17
 Controller setting  Setting the multi-drop system information
function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
When checking the connection status of each GOT
which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side,
ROBOT
set the multi-drop system information function.
The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side
word device. 18
(1) Setting on the PLC side word device
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
1. Set the following to the driver for the connected
GT11, GT10
equipment.
• Connection type dependent
The driver for connection with the GOT is fixed to the 21

following one.
MULTI-CHANNEL
• Multi-drop(Host)
2.
FUNCTION
Perform the detailed settings for the driver.
1. Select [Use the system information of Multidrop] and
■ Communication detail settings click the [Set] button. The following dialog window is
displayed.
3. Set [Use the system information of Multidrop] as
22
necessary.
■ Setting the multi-drop system information
FA TRANSPARENT
function
FUNCTION
4. Click the [Write] button when settings are completed.
5. If the [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] dialog box

is closed, communication setting contents for GT01- 2. Set the PLC side word device to [Head Device (10
RS4-M does not remain. Points)]. In this example, "D0" is set.
• To maintain the communication setting contents,
click (export).
■ Exporting/Importing the communication
setting contents
• To use communication setting contents which are
saved previously, click (import).
■ Exporting/Importing the communication
setting contents

(2) Assignment contents of the PLC side word device (c) Slave station control signal
The following table shows the device assignment This signal controls slave stations which are not
contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to updated by the master station.
"D0". Usually, the master station accesses all stations
(up to 16 stations). In addition, if stations are
Device Description temporarily in communication error due to a power
D0 (Head device+0) Control signal 1-1 disconnection or screen data transfer during the
D1(Head device+1) Station information notification signal steady operation, the automatic recovery of the
D2(Head device+2) (Reserve) station is executed for one station per ten seconds.
D3(Head device+3) (Reserve)
Therefore, the automatic recovery may take
maximum 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
Using this control signal, the number of slave
D5(Head device+5) Slave station control signal
stations to be monitored by the master station can
be reduced to the actual number of slave stations
to be used by a user. This makes the automatic
D8(Head device+8) (Reserve) recovery processing smooth. If an error occurs in
D9(Head device+9) (Reserve) only one station, the time for the station to recover
automatically can be reduced within 10 seconds.
(3) Details on the word device assignment contents Device

Action
(a) Control signal 1-1 value
The master station accesses all the slave stations

Bit position Description 0 (station 0 to 15). When the multi-drop system
bit0 10 second cycle flicker signal information is not used, the operation is the same.
bit1 to 15 (Reserve) Turning on the bit corresponding to a station No.

disconnects the specified slave station from the
< 10 second cycle flicker signal *1 > master station.
By the repetition of turning ON/OFF every 5
seconds, the connection between GT01-RS4-M Other bit15 bit14 .......... bit2 bit1 bit0
and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side. than 0 Station Station Station Station Station
When no repetition of this ON/OFF is observed, ..........
No. 15 No. 14 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0
GT01-RS4-M is not connected to the PLC.
5sec 5sec 1...Connected
0...Unconnected
ON
OFF When the bits are off and the master station and
the slave stations are in communication, the
*1 When writing or clearing data on the program area from the
personal computer to the PLC using FA transparent function, communication with the corresponding slave
flicker of the signal as shown above may be temporarily stations is disconnected if the above corresponding
stopped.
bits are turned on.
(b) Station information notification signal *2
This signal notifies the status of the slave station
(GOT) which is connected to the master station
(GT01-RS4-M). Only the bit corresponding to the
number of connected slave station (GOT) is turned
ON and other bits are turned OFF.
bit15 bit14 .................. bit2 bit1 bit0
Station Station Station Station Station

..................
No. 15 No. 14 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0
• 1: Connected
• 0: Unconnected (Including communication error
status)
*2 When the communication between GT01-RS4-M and the
PLC becomes faulty, the station information notification
signal is not updated.

17
 Exporting/Importing the communication  Communication detail settings
setting contents Make the settings according to the usage environment.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) Export (3) For the connection with GOT
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. After determining the storage location as necessary,
name the file and save it.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
4800bps,
(2) Import 9600bps,
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
38400bps,
GT11, GT10
equipment.
57600bps,
115200bps
performed when a communication 21
timeout occurs.
MULTI-CHANNEL
out.
FUNCTION
(Default: 0time)
(Default: 3sec)
Set this item to adjust the 22
transmission timing of the
FA TRANSPARENT
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
GOT.
1. Enter the name of the file previously saved and open (Default: 0ms)
FUNCTION
the file.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
(4) For the connected equipment

Set the communication detail settings of the driver for
controllers according to the connection type.
Refer to each chapter.

Set the switches according to the connection type.
POINT
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit,
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s
Manual
Terminating resistor PLC communication

selector switch selection switch

17
19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
Set the switches according to the connection type.
18
POINT
CNC CONNECTION
Connection conversion adapter
For details on the connection conversion adapter, refer
Connection Conversion Adapter User’s manual
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
1pair / 2pair signal
MULTI-CHANNEL
selection switch
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter
19.8 Precautions
 Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop  Using the multi-drop connection in the multi-
connection channel configuration
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing If a communication timeout error occurs when using the
Communication driver multi-drop connection in the multi-channel
When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, configuration, set the send delay time to the serial
the writing of the standard monitor OS and multi-drop connection unit side.
communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 ■ Communication detail settings
(Version 1.12N or later), as well as the writing of the
standard monitor OS and communication driver to the  Device update cycle
serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
• When the number of connected slave GOTs and the
(2) Device specification device points of each GOT increase, the device
Network No. and station No. are not supported. update cycle on the screen may get slower. In such a
case, it is recommended to reduce the device points
 Station number setting on GOT of each GOT. (Please consider 250 points as a guide
Set each station number so that no station number of 1 GOT, and 750 points as a guide of the total
points.) In addition, when a timeout error occurs,
overlaps.When the station No. is duplicated, the GOT
make the timeout time longer in the communication
whose station No. is duplicated cannot be monitored
settings of the slave GOT.
normally.
The station number can be set without regard to the • When the device number is set randomly, the device
update cycle becomes slower compared to the case
cable connection order.There is no problem even if
that the device number is set consecutively.Therefore,
station numbers are not consecutive.
it is recommended to set the device number
consecutively.
Station Station Station
No.3 No.0 No.15 • Depending on the device points or combination, it
may take time to switch the screen.At this time, the
device update cycle of other slave station is also
affected.
 FA transparent function
The example of a Station No. setting FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the
GOT multi-drop connection system.
 Extended/Option function of GOT
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing
The extended/option functions of GOT shown below
are not available.
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop
System monitor, Device monitor, Ladder monitor, A list connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and
editor, FX list editor, Intelligent unit monitor, Network communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3
monitor, Q motion monitor, Servo amplifier monitor, (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the
CNC monitor, Backup/restore, CNC data I/O, SFC standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
monitor, Ladder editor, Log viewer, MELSEC-L serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
troubleshoot, Motion SFC, motion program (SV43)
(2) Number of personal computers
editor, Motion program (SV43) I/O Only one personal computer can be connected to the
multi-drop connection system.
 System alarm (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11) Only one personal computer
The alarms of the serial multi-drop connection unit are
displayed on the system alarm.The alarms of the
connected PLC are not displayed.
 Activating the serial multi-drop connection

unit
The master module detects a slave GOT, which is
connected, at the startup.It may take time to detect (3) Monitor speed of GOT
again the slave station which is not detected at this The monitoring performance slows down according to
point.Activate the master module in the condition that a the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA
communication can be made after the startup of the transparent function, the monitoring performance of the
whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result,
slave GOT.
timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.

19.8 Precautions
20
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11,
20.
GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
20.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 - 11
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
20 - 1
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10
CONNECTION FUNCTION

For details of connectable models, refer to the following.

20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

( For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) ( For GT10)
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.
PLC GOT (1st) *1 Connection cable GOT (2nd) *1

Number of
Commu connectable
Communic Max.
Connection type Option device Model nication Cable model Option device Model equipment
ation type distance
type
- RS422 connection -
RS-422 30m
(Built into GOT) diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
For the system
- RS422 connection -
configuration RS-422 30m
between a got and A
plc, refer to the - -
RS422 connection
following. RS-422 30m
RS-232 - RS422 connection - 2 GOTs

DIRECT RS-422 30m
CONNECTION TO
CPU -
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*3 3m
COMPUTER (Built into GOT)
LINK - GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
RS-232 *2
CONNECTION*4 (Built into GOT) + -
15m
RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
20 - 2 20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

17
Number of
Commu connectable
Communic Max.
CONTROLLER
Connection type Option device Model nication Cable model Option device Model
CONNECTION
ation type distance equipment
type
ROBOT
For the system - RS422 connection -
RS-422 30m *5
configuration (Built into GOT) (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
between a got and A
plc, refer to the
following.
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m 18
CNC CONNECTION
RS-232 2 GOTs
DIRECT GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
- -
CONNECTION TO RS-232 +
(Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
CPU
RS232 connection
COMPUTER diagram 5)
LINK
CONNECTION*4
19
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a RS-232 built-in product.
GOT MULTI-DROP
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2))
CONNECTION
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU.
*5 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-422 built-in product.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20 - 3

20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface
A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 QnA/L/Q CPU MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

( For GT14, GT12, GT11) ( For GT10) ( For GT10)
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to

Number of
Commun connectable
Communica Max.
Connection type Option device Model ication Cable model Option device Model equipment
tion type distance
type
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 15m
(Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 15m
(Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
For the system - or -
RS-232 15m
configuration (Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
between a got and diagram 1)
A plc, refer to the
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
following.
- or -
RS-232 15m
RS-422 (Built into GOT) RS232 connection (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs
DIRECT
CONNECTION TO diagram 1)
CPU
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *3 3m
GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
COMPUTER LINK - - *2
RS-232 +
CONNECTION*4 (Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
- RS232 connection - *2
RS-232 15m
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
- -
RS-232 +
(Built into GOT) 15m (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
diagram 5)
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product.
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS232 connection diagram 2))
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only QCPU (Q mode), LCPU.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT and the PLC. RS232 connection diagram 4)
ROBOT
Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) Second GOT side
D-Sub 9-pin (terminal block)
20.3.1 RS-232 Cable
N.C. 1 6 RS
18
CNC CONNECTION
 Connection diagram RD (RXD) 2 1 SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
RS232 connection diagram 1) ER (DTR) 4 4 DR (DSR)
GOT side GOT side
SG 5 5 SG
N.C. 1 1 N.C. DR (DSR)
19
6 3 ER (DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) RS (RTS) 7 7 CS (CTS)
GOT MULTI-DROP
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) CS (CTS) 8 8 N.C.
CONNECTION
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) - 9 9 N.C.
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) Second GOT side
RS(RTS) 7 8 CS(CTS) D-Sub 9-pin side
20
CS(CTS) 8 7 RS(RTS) N.C. 1 1 N.C.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
- 9 - - RD (RXD) 2 3 SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
GT11, GT10
ER (DTR) 4 6 DR (DSR)
Second GOT side Untied wire color
(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P SG 5 5 SG
SD Brown
DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR)
21
RS (RTS) 7 8 CS (CTS)
RD Red
MULTI-CHANNEL
CS (CTS) 8 7 RS (RTS)
ER Blue
- 9 - -
FUNCTION
DR Yellow
SG Green
RS  Precautions when preparing a cable

22
Purple
CS
(1) Cable length
FA TRANSPARENT
NC The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.
NC (2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. FUNCTION
RS232 connection diagram 3) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Second GOT side
First GOT side (terminal block)
N.C. 1 6 RS
RD(RXD) 2 1 SD(TXD)
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
ER(DTR) 4 4 DR(DSR)
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 3 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 CS(CTS)
CS(CTS) 8 8 N.C.
- 9 9 N.C.

20.3.2 RS-422 cable
 Connection diagram (1) Cable length
GOT side GOT side
SDA 1 2 RDA 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RDA 2 1 SDA
RSA 3 4 CSA
CSA 4 3 RSA (1) GOT side
SG 5 5 SG
SDB 6 7 RDB Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main
RDB 7 6 SDB unit to "300 ".
RSB CSB
8 9
to the following.
CSB 9 8 RSB 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

Second GOT side
First GOT side (terminal block)
RDA 2 1 SDA
RDB 7 2 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
SDB 6 4 RDB
SG 5 5 SG
CSA 4 6 RSA
CSB 9 7 RSB
RSA 3 8 CSA
RSB 8 9 CSB

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
ROBOT
settings) Make the settings according to the usage
environment. 18
This section explains with an example of the following 20.4.2 Communication detail settings
CNC CONNECTION
RS-232 1st GOT RS-422 2nd GOT
cable cable
GT11 GT11 (2) Settings of communication interface connecting to

 Setting for the first GOT the second GOT
19
(1) Settings of communication interface connecting to
2.
GOT MULTI-DROP
the PLC
CONNECTION
2.
3. 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
4.
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
Click! Click!
FUNCTION
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the 1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from 22
menu. the menu.
FA TRANSPARENT
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the 2. The I/F Connection list window is displayed. Select
channel to be used from the list menu. the following.
FUNCTION
• I/F-1: RS422/232
CH No.: 9
Driver: Host (PC)
• I/F: Standard I/F (RS232) Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the
For GT14, GT12, GT11
A/QnA/L/Q CPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24
MELSEC-FX
For GT10
QnA/L/Q CPU
MELSEC-A
MELSEC-FX

(3) [Transparent] setting (GT14 only)
 Setting for the second GOT
Set the communication interface connecting to the first
GOT.
2.
3.
4.
1. Select [Common] [Environment Setup] [GOT

Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the
[Transparent] menu.
2. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the Click!

channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple
GOTs.
For details of connectable models, refer to the
following. 1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU menu.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select
[CH1] from the list menu.
• Controller Type: Set the same setting as the first
GOT (communication interface connecting to the
PLC)
• I/F: Standard I/F (RS422/232)
• Driver: Set the same setting as the first GOT
(communication interface connecting to the PLC)

Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication
interface connecting to the PLC)

20.4.2 Communication detail settings (2) MELSEC-FX
17
(a) For the GT14, GT12, GT11
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
Item Description

Range
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Set this item when change the equipment. 19200bps,
transmission speed used for Transmission (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps,
communication with the connected Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
9600bps, 57600bps,
equipment. the connected equipment,
19200bps, 115200bps
Transmission (Default: 115200bps) communication is performed at the
20
38400bps, fastest transmission speed supported
57600bps, by the connected equipment.
115200bps
CONNECTION FUNCTION
communication is performed at the Set the number of retries to be
fastest transmission speed supported performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
by the connected equipment. timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
GT11, GT10
performed when a communication Set the time period for a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs. Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 0time)

(Default: 3sec)

21
Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec timing of the communication request
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 3sec) from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
FUNCTION
Delay Time 0 to 300ms (b) For GT10
from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

equipment. 19200bps,
Transmission (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of 57600bps,
115200bps

(3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10)

equipment.
19200bps,
38400bps,
57600bps,
communication is performed at the 115200bps
(4) MELSEC-A (GT10)

equipment.
9600bps
POINT
data.
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual

17
20.5 Precautions
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 GOT's communication timing
 Using the FA transparent function
ROBOT
(1) GOT's communication timing
Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent
the power to the system, the communication with the function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or
connected device (MITSUBISHI PLC) is performed in USB interface is used for the connection. 18
order starting from the first GOT (from the 1st GOT to
(When connecting a personal computer to the first
CNC CONNECTION
the 2nd, and so on).
GOT, the FA transparent function can be used.)
When the communication is failed, retries are
performed. And if the predetermined time has elapsed, 1st GOT 2nd GOT
PC
a communication error occurs. RS-232
• If the first GOT is turned on after a while the second

GOT is turned on, because the communication start of
the second GOT is delayed, a communication error
PC 19
may be detected at the second GOT.
GOT MULTI-DROP
USB
• If the system power is turned on simultaneously and it
CONNECTION
takes time to start the communication of the second
GOT, a communication error may be developed. 1st GOT
PC
(2) Adjusting communication timing

(a) When powering up the system simultaneously 20
Using the utility or selecting [GOT Setup] -  Monitoring stop condition for the GOT in the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
multiple-GT11 connection
[Opening Screen Time] from GT Designer3, set the
opening screen time adding a delay to each setting In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
for the GOTs. performing either of the following monitoring stop
GT11, GT10
During the opening process, communication with operations on the preceding stage (the first GOT) also
the connected device does not start. stops monitoring of the GOT on the next stage (the
second GOT).
Example: Set value of [Opening Screen Time]
(Inside (): set value) When the GOT on the preceding stage resumes
21
First module (5s) Second module (10s) monitoring, the GOT on the next stage also resumes it.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(b) When powering on devices individually • When project data or the OS is written/read by GT
FUNCTION
Turn on the connected device first, and then the Designer3*1
first GOT, the second GOT, and so on. • When the GOT is set up*1
*1 A timeout error occurs in GX Developer.
Power supply (24V DC)
Power feeding to GOT
The title screen
is displayed. 1st GOT 2nd GOT
GT Designer3 22
FA TRANSPARENT
Monitoring
Downloading
stopped
Communication of the
First GOT's 2nd GOT is enabled.
communication user screen
FUNCTION
USB
The project data is being download.
Second GOT's
communication
Retry user screen  When PLC power disconnection occurs in
the multiple-GOT connection
In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
when the communication between the PLC and the first
GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection and a
disconnection of the communication cable between the
PLC and the first GOT, the GOT waits for timeout
against the communication request from the peripheral
devices (GX Developer, etc.), and recovery of
monitoring between the PLC and the GOT is delayed.
1st GOT 2nd GOT
Monitoring Monitoring

20.5 Precautions
20.5 Precautions
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1

21
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
21.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 41
GT11, GT10
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 42
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
21 - 1
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
21.1 What is Multi-channel Function?

Multi-channel Function is a function to monitor up to four FA controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter, etc.)
on one GOT by writing multiple communication drivers in the GOT.
(For GT155 , up to two controllers (two channels))
Installing multiple
communication drivers Channel No.1
Bus connection
Channel No.2
OMRON PLC
connection
Monitoring the devices
of FA controllers
Channel No.3
Temperature
controller
connection
Channel No.4
Servo amplifier
connection
POINT
(1) Before using the multi-channel function
This manual describes the procedure to use the multi-channel function, based on the following system
configuration example.
21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection
21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection
(2) System configuration when the multi-channel function is used
The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi-
channel function.
For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following.
Each chapter indicating the system configuration
(3) Precautions for hardware
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required for some GOTs.
The following table shows the required option function boards.
GOT Option function board
GT16, GT12 Not necessary
GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M,

GT15
GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M
GT14 Not necessary
21 - 2 21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

17
 Features of the multi-channel function
(1) With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo amplifier and
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
other controllers can be configured.
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system
ROBOT
configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information
is possible. 18
CNC CONNECTION
PLC system
PLC
Temperatur
controller Temperature controller system
Servo amplifier
Can monitor
different kinds Servo amplifier system
19
of controllers on
the same screen.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
(2) Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.)
It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.).
For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied,
using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) as the trigger for action.
Condition is satisfied 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FXCPU
GT11, GT10
Writing to a device
(3) With one GOT, the Ethernet connection and the bus or network connection are available in combination. 21
(GT16 only)
One GOT can make the Ethernet connections and the bus or network connection. Therefore, the system
MULTI-CHANNEL
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
FUNCTION
Also, the GOT can monitor multiple controllers on an Ethernet network.(Multi-channel Ethernet connection)
22
Hub
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21 - 3

21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration,
in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is
possible.
Bus(Q) OMRON SYSMAC OMRON THERMAC

/INPANEL NEO MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M
Bus connection
QCPU Connection cable
(Channel No.1)
Direct CPU
OMRON connection
Connection cable
PLC (Channel No.2) GOT
OMRON Temperature
temperature Connection cable controller
controller connection
(Channel No.3)
MELSERVO-
J2-Super Servo amplifier connection
Connection cable
series (Channel No.4)
GOT Number of
Connection
PLC Connection cable Channel connectable
type Option device Model
No. equipment
Bus For the system configuration between
MELSEC-Q 1 GT15-QBUS 4 connected
connection GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
OMRON PLC 2 - (Built into GOT)
Direct CPU GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 3 GT15-RS2-9P
connection (4 channels)
MELSERVO-J2-Super system configuration 4 GT15-RS4-9S
For the system configuration between
OMRON PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the 1 2 connected
Direct CPU following. equipment for 1
- (Built into GOT)
connection GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 2 (2 channels)
system configuration

17
POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8
The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8.
ROBOT
For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller.
Channel No. Driver*1 Reference
Barcode Reader, 18
RFID Controller, GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals)
5 to 7
CNC CONNECTION
PC Remote Operation(Serial), FINGERPRINT AUTHENTICATION DEVICE CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
BAR CODE READER CONNECTION
Barcode Reader,
PC REMOTE CONNECTION
RFID Controller,
8 PC Remote Operation(Serial), PRINTER CONNECTION
Fingerprint Authentication, RFID CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
*1 Only one channel can be assigned to one driver.

19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection
One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
Ethernet/IP(AB)/ Ethernet(MELSEC),
MELSECNET/H MELSEC-FX Gateway Q17nNC, CRnD-700
FXCPU Direct CPU connection

Connection cable
(Channel No.1)
MELSECNET/H
QCPU Connection cable connection
(Channel No.2) GOT
ALLEN-
Ethernet connection
BRADLEY Connection cable
(Channel No.3)
PLC
Robot Ethernet connection

controller Connection cable
(Channel No.4)
GOT Number of
PLC Connection type Connection cable connectable
Channel No. Option device Model
equipment
Direct CPU
MELSEC-FX For the system configuration between 1 GT15-RS2T4-9P
connection
GOT and the controllers, refer to the 4 connected
QCPU MELSECNET/H 2 GT15-J71LP23-25 equipment for 1
following.
ALLEN-BRADLEY GOT
Each chapter indicating the 3
PLC Ethernet - (Built into GOT) (4 channels)
Robot controller 4
ALLEN-BRADLEY For the system configuration between
1 2 connected
PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
GOT
OMRON PLC Each chapter indicating the 2
(2 channels)

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
21.3.1 Basics of interface selection
ROBOT
This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function.
A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 21.3.2 to 18
21.3.6.
CNC CONNECTION
It is recommended to refer to 21.3.2 to 21.3.6 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the
first time.
 Multi-channel function specifications

How the units are installed and the multi-channel function specifications are described below.
(1) Image drawing of unit installation 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Extension interface allows the installation of a
3rd stage communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively.
(For the GT1655, GT155 , only one extension
interface can be installed.)
2nd stage
A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher
stage cannot be used.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
1st stage
Standard interface
For GT16 21
The RS-232 interface, the USB interface,
MULTI-CHANNEL
the RS-422/485 interface, and the Ethernet interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
FUNCTION
For GT15
The RS-232 interface and the USB interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) Specifications
Specifications
GT1695
GT1685 GT1595
Item GT1675 GT1585 Description
GT1655 GT155 GT14 GT12
GT1672 GT157
GT1665 GT156
GT1662
GT16
• In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can
be set for one GOT.
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set.
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
included in the count of the number of channels.
GT15
• For the bus connection, network connection (*1), and Ethernet
connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
Max. included in the count of the number of channels.
number of 4 channels 2 channels
channels GT14
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 2 channels can be set.
(GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
(GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
GT12
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one
GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
• Multiple identical units can be installed only for serial communication

units.
Max. • It is necessary to calculate the consumed current.
installable (( This section ■ Calculating consumed current)
5 3 5 3 -
number of • An RS-422 conversion unit is not included in the count of the
modules number of units.
(For GT1655, GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not
applicable.)
• A module that occupies 2 slots (*5, *6, *7) must be installed at the
first stage.
• For the video/RGB display, RGB output, and multimedia function,
Allowable Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3
install the unit indicated in *6 at the first stage and the other units at
number of stages stages stages stages -
the second or later stage.
stages (2 slots) (1 slot) (2 slot) (1 slot)
• When a unit indicated in *7 is used, other extension units cannot be
installed.
• The CF card unit must be installed on the last stage, if used.
*1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station)
*2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS®/TCP connection
*3 Gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download
*4 Fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (writing remote personal computer operation (serial), FA
transparent function, OS install, project data) or serial printer
*5 GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13

*6 GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1, GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT, GT16M-
MMR 17
*7 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z,
GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Usable units differ depending on the GOT.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For units usable with each GOT, refer to the following manuals.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Calculating consumed current
For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the below tables. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code
reader, or RFID controller, refer to the below tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the
capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
Capacity Capacity
GOT type GOT type
(A) (A)
GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13
GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74
GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74
GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2
GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3
(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2,
0.275*1 GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1
GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11
GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1
GT15-J71GF13-T2 0.96 GT15-CFCD 0.07
GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15
GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08
GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1
Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1
GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2
GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

(3) Calculation example
17
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
18
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
CNC CONNECTION
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing
System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below.

Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below.
System selection 21.3.3

Determining the connection type and channel No. (System
Determine the connection type and the channel No. to be used. selection)
Interface selection
21.3.4
Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
be used for the multichannel function.
Checking the unit installation position 1.3.7

Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation
Determine the communication unit installation position. position)
21.3.5
Make settings for Communication Settings.
Setting for communication settings
21.3.6
Confirm items to know before starting drawing.
Items to be checked before starting drawing

21.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) 17
 Determining the connection type
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial
connection are available as shown in the following table.
Connection type Reference 18

Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION
CNC CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
Bus/network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
19
network))
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CONNECTION
Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection
Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC
Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
GT11, GT10
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
21
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
• 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)
MULTI-CHANNEL
MODBUS®/TCP connection
• 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Connection type Reference
Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC
4.2 Serial Connection
• 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC
• 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC
• 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC
• 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC
• 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC
• 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
• 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC
• 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
• 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
Serial connection • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
• 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER
Third party safety controller connection
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER
Third party servo amplifier connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
• 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER
• 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Third party temperature controller connection • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
• 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)
MODBUS®/RTU connection
• 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION

The following shows the applicable combinations of connection types, the number of channels, and restricted 17
functions.
: Allowed : Restricted
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
GT1695 FA transparent function
ROBOT
GT1685
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1675
GT1672
GT1665
RS-232 USB 18
GT1662
CNC CONNECTION
GT1655
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(a) Max. 4 channels
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(b) Max. 4 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
(c)
Max. 4 channels *2
19
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel
GOT MULTI-DROP
(d) • Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 4 channels *2
CONNECTION
(e) • Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2
(f) • Ethernet connection:: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used. 20
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Multimedia function
Operation panel function External I/O function RGB display function
Report function Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
GT11, GT10
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) 21
*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) GT15
For GT15, the combinations of the bus, network, or Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available
as shown in the following table.

Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION
Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
network))
CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection
Bus/network/Ethernet
connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 1
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

17
Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
ROBOT
Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
18
CNC CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC
19
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
Serial connection • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
GT11, GT10
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER
22
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
FA TRANSPARENT
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
Microcomputer Connection (Serial)

The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used.
The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted
functions.
Functions that are restricted by the connection

GOT to be used
type*1*2
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1595 FA transparent function

GT1585
GT155
GT157 RS-232 USB
GT156
• Bus/network/Ethernet connection: 1 channel Max. 4 Max. 2 *3

(a)
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels channels channels
Max. 4 Max. 2 *3
(b) • Serial connection: 4 channels
channels channels
functions to be used.
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Operation panel function
External I/O function RGB display function Report function
Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download, gateway
function, MES interface function and file transfer function (FTP client) can be used.
Bus connection MELSECTNET/H connection
MELSECNET/10 connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link connection MODBUS®/TCP connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection
(3) GT14
For GT14, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the
following table.
Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet
Connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection
Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Serial connection Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

17
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection
18
CNC CONNECTION
Serial connection Third party robot controller connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Third party temperature controller connection CONTROLLER
• 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Microcomputer connection (Serial)
GT11, GT10
The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table
below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD, FA transparent function
FUNCTION
GT1450-QLBDE GT1450-QLBD RS-232 USB Ethernet
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels *2 *3

(a) Max. 2 channels -
(b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2 *3

22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
Barcode function RFID function
*3 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not
allowed.

(4) GT12
For GT12, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the
following table
Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection
Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection
Serial connection • 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
Third party robot controller connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Microcomputer connection (Serial)

The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. 17
The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted
functions.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1*2
ROBOT
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1275 FA transparent function
GT1265 RS-232 USB
18
• Ethernet connection: 1 channel *3
(a) Max. 2 channels
CNC CONNECTION
• Serial connection: 1 channel
(b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *3
Barcode function RFID function
19
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and
GOT MULTI-DROP
gateway function can be used.
CONNECTION
MODBUS®/TCP Connection
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Determining the channel No.
(1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot
controller
After determining the connection type to be used, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be
used for the respective connection types.
There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos.
Set the channel No. by selecting [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)
(2) Channel No. of external devices (fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer and
serial printer)
When connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer, select
the channel No. (No.5 to No.8) for each external device.
(a) Number of external devices that can be connected to the GOT
One fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer can be connected
to one GOT.
One driver must be set for one channel No. (No.5 to No.8) in the communication settings.
(b) Operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication)
When using the operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication), the RFID
controller is available for the channel No.8 only.
(c) External devices that requires the power supply from the GOT
When using the barcode reader or RFID controller that requires the power supply from the GOT, set the
channel No.8.
When the channel No.5 to No.7 is set, the GOT cannot supply the power.
Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.
Selection of connection type
Write Check Write down the name of connection type to be used.
Sheet
21.5
Multi-channel Function
Check Sheet

21.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) 17
To use the multi-channel function, add interfaces to the GOT with the following methods if required.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
• Install communication units on the extension interfaces.
• Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485
interface, and/or the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
18
CNC CONNECTION
Extension interface allows the installation

3rd stage of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage,
respectively.
(For the GT1655, only one extension interface can
be installed.) 19
2nd stage
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1st stage
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
communication.
For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
GT11, GT10
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
(For the GT1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
21
Not used for the multi-channel function.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
Allows controllers to be connected via Ethernet.
Up to four channels can be set.
Standard interface 3 22
(RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
FA TRANSPARENT
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
communication.
FUNCTION

(2) GT15
• Install communication units on the extension interfaces.
• Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
Extension interface allows the installation

3rd stage of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage,
respectively.
(For the GT155 , only one extension interface can
be installed.)
2nd stage A communication unit installed at the 4th
or higher stage cannot be used.
1st stage
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication.

For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
(For the GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
Not used for the multi-channel function.

For the connection via the connection type selected in 21.3.3, select interfaces and communication units to be used. 17
Select the interfaces and communication units according to the connection type by referring to the following.
Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
• Bus connection This section ■ GOT interface used for bus connection
ROBOT
• MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
• MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

18
CNC CONNECTION
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection
This section ■ GOT interface used for network connection
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
• CNC connection
(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network),
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))
19
• Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
GOT MULTI-DROP
• MODBUS®/TCP connection
This section ■ GOT interface used for Ethernet connection
CONNECTION
• Robot controller connection
• CNC connection (Ethernet connection)
• Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• CC-Link connection (via G4)
• Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
GT11, GT10
• Third party safety controller connection
• Third party servo amplifier connection
• Third party robot controller connection

This section ■ GOT interface used for serial connection
21
• Third party temperature controller connection
• Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
MULTI-CHANNEL
• GOT Multi- Drop Connection
FUNCTION
• MODBUS®/RTU connection
• Inverter connection
• Servo amplifier connection

22
• CNC connection (serial connection)
FA TRANSPARENT
• Other functions This section ■ Interfaces and option units used for other functions
FUNCTION
POINT
Number of units that can be installed to a GOT
The number of units that can be installed to extension interfaces differs depending on the GOT type.
GOT Number of units that can be installed
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665,

Up to 5 units can be installed (up to 4 communication units)
GT1662, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156
GT1655, GT155 Up to 3 units can be installed (up to 2 communication units)
GT12 -

 GOT interface used for bus connection
For the bus connection, use the following communication units.
Interface Model*1
GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS(2),

Bus connection unit
GT15-ABUS(2)
*1 To mount multiple units, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required.
POINT
(1) Bus connection units to be used
GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels.
When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-
ABUS(2).
(2) Restrictions by bus connection unit installation
For the following functions, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2), regardless of the number of channels
used for the serial connection.
With the GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, the following functions are not available.
Function
Remote personal computer operation(serial), Video display function, Multimedia function,

Operation panel function, External I/O function, RGB display function,
Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Sound output function, Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download*1, Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1
*1 Since the GT16 has the Ethernet interface, the function is available regardless of the bus connection unit to be used.
 GOT interface used for network connection

For the network connection, use the following communication units.
Interface Model
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
POINT
When using GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(1) GT16
The GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable.
(2) GT15
No unit can be mounted on the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z. (For the
GT155 , the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable)
Therefore, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is used for the serial connection.
Because of this, the functions using the RS-232 interface, including the barcode function, are not available.
The gateway function, the printer output, and others are also not available since no unit can be mounted on
the above models.

17
 GOT interface used for Ethernet connection
For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT and communication unit.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
Interface Name
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface*1

*1 Up to four channels can be used. 18
CNC CONNECTION
(2) GT15
Interface Model
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
(3) GT14
19
Interface Name
GOT MULTI-DROP
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface*1
CONNECTION
*1 Up to two channels can be used.
(4) GT12
Interface Name
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface

20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
POINT
GT11, GT10
When using Ethernet download, gateway function, or MES interface function
(1) GT16
The Ethernet download, the gateway function, and the MES interface function are available using the Ethernet 21
interface built in the GOT (one channel).
(2) GT15
MULTI-CHANNEL
For using Ethernet download, the gateway function and MES interface function, only one Ethernet
FUNCTION
communication unit is required.
(3) GT14
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
(one channel). 22
(4) GT12
FA TRANSPARENT
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
(one channel).
FUNCTION
 GOT interface used for serial connection

For the serial connection, provide interfaces equivalent to the number of channels by using the following interfaces
built in the GOT and communication units in combinations.
(1) GT16
Interface Name/model
Interface built in GOT *1*2

RS-232 interface , RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

*1 The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232
communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
*2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required.
(For GT 1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)

(2) GT15
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1*2
Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

*1 The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232
communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
*2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required.
(For GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
(3) GT14
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module -

*1 The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
(4) GT12
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module -

*1 The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
 Interfaces and option units used for other functions

When the following functions are used in combinations, the number of available channels may vary according to the
combinations of units
Function Reference
Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Operation panel function, External I/O function, (1) (a)
Sound output function
Remote personal computer operation (serial), Video display function,

(1) (b)
Multimedia function, RGB display function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit (1) (c)
Remote personal computer operation(Ethernet), Ethernet download*1,

(1) (d)
Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1
Fingerprint authentication, Barcode function,

RFID function, Remote personal computer operation(serial), (1) (e)
Report function (when using the serial printer), Hard copy function (when using the serial printer)
*1 For GT16, the function is available regardless of the combinations of units because the GOT has the Ethernet interface.
For GT15, the function is not available when the Ethernet communication unit cannot be mounted because of the combination of
units.
Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi-channel function to be used is
restricted or not. If it is restricted, review the system configuration.
(1) Number of stages taken up by the individual functions (number of slots)
(a) Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge
compatible printer), operation panel function, external I/O function and sound output function
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit is required depending on the
function to be used.
Each unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface.

(b) Remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function and RGB display 17
function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a
ROBOT
multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used.
Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface.
Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT. 18
CNC CONNECTION
(c) Functions with CF card unit or CF card extension unit
19
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required.
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit uses one stage
GOT MULTI-DROP
(one slot) of an extension interface.
CONNECTION
(d) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway and MES interface functions 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• GT16
Use the interface built in the GOT.
The Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
GT11, GT10
• GT15
An Ethernet communication unit is required.
An Ethernet communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
If the GOT is already connected in the Ethernet connection, the Ethernet
21
communication unit installed in the GOT is used.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(e) Fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial),
FUNCTION
report function (when using a serial printer) and hard copy function (when using a serial printer)
22
Use the interface built in the GOT or a serial communication unit.
FA TRANSPARENT
A serial communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
FUNCTION

(2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels
The following are examples of unit combinations that affect the number of available channels.
POINT
Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For details on the precautions for installing units on another unit, refer to the following.
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you
are using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
Example 1) To add the printer output (when using a PictBridge compatible printer) and the Ethernet download in
a system using the bus connection (1 channel), serial connection (3 channels), and the barcode
function
(a) For GT16
Mount the printer unit at the third stage, and use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. This enables both
the printer output of the report function and the Ethernet download.
Printer unit
unit
Serial communication Serial communication
unit unit
Bus connection unit
Barcode reader
(b) For GT15

Because units can be mounted up to the third stage for GT15, the printer output of the report function and
the Ethernet download cannot be used together.
Printer unit
Ethernet communication
unit
unit
unit unit
Bus connection unit
Barcode reader

Example 2) To add the serial connection (1 channel) to the system using the bus connection (unit occupying 2 17
slots: 1 channel), the serial connection (2 channels), the video display, and the barcode function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
unit unit
ROBOT
Bus connection unit
Video input unit

18
CNC CONNECTION
Barcode reader
Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit, serial connection can be used for up to 2
channels.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.
Selection of interface (communication unit)
Write Check Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used
Sheet
for each of the connection type.
21.5
Check Sheet

Write down the following items to the check sheet.
17
Attaching the communication unit
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Write Check
Sheet
1. Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the
ROBOT
21.5 connection type.
Check Sheet
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 21
When GT15-QBUS2/ABUS2 is used, although GT15-RS2-9P is installed physically at the
MULTI-CHANNEL
2nd stage of extend interface 2, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Therefore, in the check sheet, the position should be entered as 1st stage.
FUNCTION
2. After writing down the names of communication units, write down CH
No. to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in ■ Check
Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface). 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name
for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the
respective connection types, refer to the following.
Chapters of each respective connection type
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1.

21.3.5 Setting for communication settings 17
Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extend interface 1
ROBOT
Extend interface 2
3rd stage 18
CNC CONNECTION
2nd stage
1st stage
19
RS-232 interface
GOT MULTI-DROP
built in a GOT
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet
where the necessary information has been written.
The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are
Check
GT11, GT10
specified on the check sheet by numbers (GT16: (1) to (9), GT15: (1) to (7)).
21.5
Check Sheet
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1.

This completes the setting for Communication Settings.
Create a screen with GT Designer3.

Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code reader"
(In the case of the GT157 )
3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)

OMRON temperature controller connection

FXCPU direction CPU connection
1 Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2) Inverter connection
QCPU bus connection
5 Bar code reader
1
2
3

Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 channel)" 17
(In the case of the GT155 )
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)
ROBOT
FXCPU direction CPU connection
MELSECNET/H communication unit
(GT15-J71LP23-25) 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Example: Setting example for Ethernet connection (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685)
Ethernet interface built in the GOT

QCPU Ethernet connection
YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet connection
YASKAWA PLC Ethernet connection
MODBUS /TCP connection

21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing 17
The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
beforehand when using the multi-channel function.
ROBOT
 Device settings
It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set. Set the device.
 Accessible range for monitoring
CONNECTION FUNCTION
The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used.
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
FXCPU
22
Accessible range
is not changed.
FXCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Clock function
Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No.
10:10
10:10
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
10:10
CH No. 3
Broadcast is OMRON PLC
executed for
CH No. 1 and CH No. 4
CH No. 3. Temperature controller
 FA transparent function
Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No.
The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility.
To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility.
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
FA transparent function is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.
 Station No. switching function

Set the controller for which the station No. switching function should be executed by the CH No.
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
MITSUBISH I
CH No. 2
CHA RGE Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
Station No. switching is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.

17
21.4 Precautions
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
21.4.1 Precautions for hardware
ROBOT
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required according to the GOT.
The following shows required option function boards according to the GOT.
18
GOT Option function board
CNC CONNECTION
GT16 Not necessary
GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M

GT15
GT15-MESB48M
GT14 Not necessary
GT12 Not necessary

19
GOT MULTI-DROP
21.4.2 Precautions for use
CONNECTION
 Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels
When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels
the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm.
Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
is not reflected to the GOT.
 Confirmation of the channel No. at which a system alarm occurred
GT11, GT10
When a system alarm occurred, confirm the channel No. where the alarm occurred, using the procedure indicated
below.
(1) Check by [System alarm display] of the utility.
21
GT15 User's Manual
MULTI-CHANNEL
GT14 User's Manual
FUNCTION
(2) Monitor the internal devices of the GOT.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

21.4 Precautions
21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet
This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used.
Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet.
Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the
setting for the multi-channel function.
Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.
Shows items and
Selection of connection type contents to be written on
Write Check
Enter the name of connection type to be used. the check sheet.
Sheet
Also describes an
Section 2.8.10 example of the check
Multi-channel function sheet.
check sheet
The following symbols are used for each purpose.
Indicates parts where items and details are to be written.

Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet.
Write Check
Sheet
Indicates parts where written details are to be checked.

Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings.
Check

17
 Check sheet No.1 (selection of connection type and interface)
(1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller CPU, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
controller (No.1 to No.4)
ROBOT
CH Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)
No.
( 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4)
Connection name
18
1
CNC CONNECTION
Connection name
2
Connection name
3
Connection name
4
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
(2) Channel No. of fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer, serial printer
CONNECTION
(No.5 to No.8)
CH Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)

No.
( 21.3.3) ( 21.3.4)
20
Connection name
CONNECTION FUNCTION
5
Connection name
6
GT11, GT10
Connection name
7
8
Connection name
RS-232 interface built in a GOT 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface)
Attaching the communication unit
( 1.3.7)
(1) GT16
Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2

3rd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(1)
(4)
2rd stage
(2)
(5)
1rd stage
(3) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(6)
(only one connection)
Connecting a controller
Standard interface 1 (only one connection)
(8)
(7)
Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or

personal computer
(7)
8
Connecting a personal computer
(8)
(9) 9 Host (PC)

(3) Connecting a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)
(1)
(9)
(6) Connecting a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(4)
Multi Multi-channel Ethernet connection

(2) GT15
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2
3rd stage
ROBOT
(1)
(4)
2nd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 2nd stage
18
CNC CONNECTION
(2)
(5)
1st stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1st stage
(6)
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
(7)
(7)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or
personal computer
GT11, GT10
(3)
Connecting a personal computer
(2)
(1) 9 Host (PC)
21
(6)
(5)
MULTI-CHANNEL
(4)
FUNCTION
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1

22
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
22.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
22.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2
22.2 Compatible Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 - 11
22.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26
GT11, GT10
22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 39 21
22.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 67
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
22 - 1
22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
22.1 FA Transparent Function

The FA transparent function allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from
a personal computer connected via a GOT.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Bus connection cable RS-232 cable

RS-232/RS-422 cable USB cable
Ethernet connection cable Ethernet connection cable
Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc.
22.2 Compatible Software

The following shows the software compatible with the FA transparent function.
POINT
(1) The range accessible by software when FA transparent function is used
Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software.
For details on accessible range, refer to the manual for the respective software.
(2) The software settings when using FA transparent function
For the software settings, refer to the following when using FA transparent function.
22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator

22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2
22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer
22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP
22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer
22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2
22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator
22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2
22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator
22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP
22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-EN
22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2
22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator
22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator
22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration Tool
22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module
22 - 2 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

22.1 FA Transparent Function
17
 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with RS-232
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
ROBOT
*9
MELSOFT Navigator
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*10 18
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module PX Developer*4
CNC CONNECTION
GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*7
MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12
*1
GX Developer
Q/QnA/ACPU,
GX Works2*11
motion controller CPU (A Series)
MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12 19
MELSOFT Navigator*9
GOT MULTI-DROP
MT Developer*2
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P,
CONNECTION
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP,
SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MR Configurator*3
MT Works2*8, MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*6 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*15 MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2*13
*15 *14
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) MR Configurator2
*1 GX Developer Version 8 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GT11, GT10
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
*2 MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3
*4
MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 21
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*5 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
function.
FUNCTION
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D or later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Z or later
GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later
*6
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
22
*7 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FA TRANSPARENT
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FUNCTION
*10 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*12 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*13 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*14 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*15 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection.
*16 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*17 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 - 3

(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection
PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*10
GX Developer
GX Works2*11
QCPU (Q mode) PX Developer*3
*15
MELSOFT Navigator
LCPU*14 GX Developer*12 GX Works2*13, GX Logviewer
MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool*20
GX Developer
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU
GX Developer
GX Works2*11
FXCPU FX-PCS/WIN*5
FX Configurator-FP*6
FX Configurator-EN *19
MT Developer
SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MT Works2*9
MR Configurator*1, MX Component*23, MX Sheet*24
GX Developer
SW3RN-GSV51P
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*22 MR Configurator2*21
FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series FR Configurator*2
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*7
*1 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*2 FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/
F700 series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700
series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700
series to the GOT.
*3 PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later
*5 The RS-232/USB conversion adaptor (GT10-RS2TUSB-5S) is not applicable to FX-PCS/WIN.
*6 FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*7 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*12 GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*13 GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*14 The adapter (L6ADP-R2) is required.
*15 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*19 FX Configurator-EN Version 1.10A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*20 LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*22 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection.

(3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection
17
PLC CPU Software
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*4
GX Developer*1
ROBOT
GX Works2*5
QCPU (Q mode)
PX Developer*2
GX Configurator-QP*3 18
CNC CONNECTION
MELSOFT Navigator*8
GX Developer*6
LCPU GX Works2*7
GX LogViewer
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13
*1 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 19
GOT.
GOT MULTI-DROP
*2 PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION
*9
*10
MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet. 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication
GT11, GT10
PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*3
GX Developer*2 21
QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module *4
GX Works2
MULTI-CHANNEL
*9
MELSOFT Navigator
FUNCTION
GX Developer*6
LCPU GX Works2*7
GX LogViewer
FXCPU GX Works2*16
22
GX Developer*2
FA TRANSPARENT
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU*1
*3
MELSOFT Navigator
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P, FUNCTION
MT Works2*5*8
Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2*13
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *15 MR Configurator2
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B) *15 MR Configurator2*14
*1 Only QCPU can be connected.To connect to QnA/ACPU, connect via QCPU.
*2 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*4 GX Works2 Version 1.10L or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*5 MT Works2 Version 1.08J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.12N or later is required to connect with Q17nDCPU-S1.
*15 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection.
*16 GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB
PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*9
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*10
PX Developer*4
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module
Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*19
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU, GX Developer*1

motion controller CPU (A Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13
MELSOFT Navigator*9
MT Developer*2
MR Configurator*3
CNC CPU(Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator*11
*1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GOT.
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
*11 NC Configurator Version A0 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*19 Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

17
PLC CPU Software
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GX Developer*1
ROBOT
GX Works2*12
QCPU (Q mode) PX Developer*5
18
*17 *18
MX Component , MX Sheet
CNC CONNECTION
GX Developer*13
LCPU*15 GX Works2*14
GX Logviewer
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU, GX Developer*1
motion controller CPU (A Series) MX Component*17, MX Sheet*18 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*12
CONNECTION
FXCPU
FX Configurator-FP*7
FX Configurator-EN *20
MT Developer*2
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MR Configurator*3
FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series *4
FR Configurator
GT11, GT10
*23
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2*19
21
*23 *22
*1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GOT.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
*4 FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/
F700 series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700
series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700
series to the GOT. 22
FA TRANSPARENT
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later FUNCTION
*7 FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*20 FX Configurator-EN Version 1.10A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*4
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*5
QCPU (Q mode)
PX Developer*2
MELSOFT Navigator*8
GX Developer*6
LCPU GX Works2*7
GX LogViewer
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) MX Component*12, MX Sheet*13
*1 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the GOT.
*2 PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
(4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication

PLC CPU Software
MELSOFT Navigator*3
GX Developer*2
QCPU (Q mode)*1, C Controller module GX Works2*4*13
Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module*18
GX Developer*7
LCPU GX Works2*8
GX LogViewer
FXCPU GX Works2*19
GX Developer*2
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU*1
MELSOFT Navigator*3
MT Works2*5*9
CNC CPU(Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator*6
Robot controller (CRnQ-700, CRnD-700) RT ToolBox2*15
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) *17 MR Configurator2
*1 Only QCPU can be connected.To connect to QnA/ACPU, connect via QCPU.
*4 GX Works2 Version 1.10L or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*5 MT Works2 Version 1.08J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*6 NC Configurator Version A1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MT Works2 Version 1.12N or later is required to connect with Q17nDCPU-S1.
*13 GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to execute the FA transparent function with using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet
adapter (NZ2GF-ETB).
C controller module does not support CC-Link IE Field Network.
*17 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection.
*19 GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

17
 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Bus connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC CPU Software
ROBOT
GX Works2 *1, MX Component *2, MX Sheet*3, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module
module*8
Motion controller CPU (Q series) MT Works2*4 18
*5 *6
CNC CONNECTION
*1 GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

*2 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*3 MX Component Version 3.15R or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
*4 Use MT Works2 Version 1.25B or later for MT Works2.
*6
*7
Use MR Configurator2 Version 1.07H or later for MR Configurator2.
Use MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later for MR Configurator2.
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
PLC CPU Software
QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4
LCPU*2 GX Works2 *1, MX Component *3, MX Sheet*4
FXCPU GX Works2*5 20
Motion controller CPU (Q series) *6
CONNECTION FUNCTION
MT Works2
GT11, GT10
*5
*6
GX Works2 Version 1.73B or later is required for GX Works2 to use the FA transparent function.
MT Works2 Version 1.25B or later is required for MT Works2 to use the FA transparent function.
21
*7 MR Configurator2 Version 1.07H or later is required for MR Configurator2 to use the FA transparent function.
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
PLC CPU Software
22
QCPU (Q mode) GX Works2 *1, MX Component *2, MX Sheet*3
*2 *1 *2
LCPU GX Works2 , MX Component , MX Sheet*3
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with Modem
PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2

*2 GX Works2 Version 1.16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
FXCPU GX Developer*1


PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2

(4) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection

PLC CPU Software
GX Developer*1
QCPU (Q mode)
GX Works2 *2
*1 Use GX Developer of Version 8.78G or later.

*2 Use GX Works2 of Version 1.15R or later.

17
22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following models support FA transparent function.
 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with serial or USB
ROBOT
Connection type
Bus
connection
Direct CPU connection Computer link connection
Ethernet
connection
18
CNC CONNECTION
Series Model name Target software
*2
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU 19
Q01CPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q02CPU
CONNECTION
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
GT11, GT10
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
21
Q00UJCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
Q00UCPU GX Developer
Q01UCPU GX Works2
FUNCTION
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU GX Configurator
(Q mode) PX Developer
Q03UDCPU
MX Component
Q04UDHCPU MX Sheet
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
22
Q13UDHCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
FUNCTION
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1 *1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*3
GX Developer
Q12DCCPU-V
GX Works2 *2 *1 *1 *1 *2
MX Component
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V
MX Sheet
module
Setting/Monitoring
Q24DHCCPU-V tool for C Controller *2
module*5
L02CPU GX Developer
L26CPU GX Works2
L26CPU-BT MX Component
MELSEC-L
L02CPU-P MX Sheet
L26CPU-PBT LCPU Logging
L02SCPU Configuration Tool
Q02CPU-A GX Developer
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A MX Component
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A MX Sheet
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1 GX Developer
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU MX Component
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU MX Sheet
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
GX Developer
MX Component
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
MX Sheet
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21 GX Developer
MELSEC-A *4
A3ACPUR21 MX Component
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU MX Sheet
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V have no direct coupled I/F.
*2 When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V as the connected CPU, only MX Component can be used.
When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-V, GX Developer or GX Works2 can also be used.
*4 Do not execute the write during RUN in the bus connection.
*5 When the GOT and the personal computer are connected in the serial connection, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module
is unavailable.

Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*3
18
A2USCPU
CNC CONNECTION
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A
A1SHCPU
GX Developer 19
A2SCPU*1 MX Component
(AnSCPU)
MX Sheet
GOT MULTI-DROP
A2SCPU-S1
CONNECTION
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21 GX Developer
MX Component *4
A0J2HCPUR21 MX Sheet
GT11, GT10
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
21
GX Developer
A2CCPUC24 MX Component
MULTI-CHANNEL
MX Sheet
A2CCPUC24-PRF
FUNCTION
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
MT Developer
22
Q172CPUN
FA TRANSPARENT
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU MT Developer
FUNCTION
*1 *1 *1
Q173HCPU MR Configurator
Motion Q172DCPU
controller CPU
Q173DCPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1
MT Works2 *2 *2 *2
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
MT Works2
Q170MCPU GX Developer
GX Works2

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since only the USB port is available as the direct coupled I/F for Q172H/
Q173HCPU.
*2 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172H/Q173HCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*1
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3 GX Developer
controller CPU MX Component *2
(A Series) A171SCPU-S3N MX Sheet

A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, GX Developer

FX1, FX2, FX2C, GX Works2
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, MX Component
FX1NC, FX2NC MX Sheet
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX3G MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX3GC MX Component
MX Sheet
MELSEC-FX
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX Configurator-EN
FX3U MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
GX Developer
FX Configurator-FP
FX Configurator-EN
FX3UC MX Component
MX Sheet
GX Works2
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1


Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*4
18
QJ72LP25-25
CNC CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G -
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE 19
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB GX Works2
GOT MULTI-DROP
Ethernet adapter
module
CONNECTION
CNC C70 GX Developer *1 *1 *2
CNC (Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator
MELDAS C6/C64 GX Developer
Robot
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU) RT ToolBox2
*3 *3 20
controller
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CRnD-700
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
GT11, GT10
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL
FREQROL-S500/S500E 21
FREQROL-F500J FR Configurator
MULTI-CHANNEL
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-E700
FUNCTION
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700

22
MR-J2S- A
FA TRANSPARENT
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A - FUNCTION
MR-J2M- DU
MR-J3- A
MELSERVO
MR-J3- T
MR Configurator
MR-J3- B
MR Configurator2
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B
MR-J4W2- B MR Configurator2
MR-J4W3- B
*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q173NCCPU has no direct coupled I/F.
*2 Connect to the DISPLAY I/F of Q173NCCPU.
GX Developer accesses the PLC CPU which configures the multiple CPU system.
*3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since CRnQ-700 has no direct coupled I/F.

 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet
Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*2 *2
*2
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
*3
*3 *3
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
GX Works2
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU MX Component
(Q mode)
Q03UDCPU MX Sheet
Q04UDHCPU *3
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU *3 *3
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1*3
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUDEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F.
*3 GT11 is not supported.

Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*1
18
Q12DCCPU-V
CNC CONNECTION
-
Q24DHCCPU-V
C controller
module Setting/Monitoring
Q24DHCCPU-V tool for C *2
Controller module
L02CPU 19
L26CPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
L26CPU-BT GX Works2
CONNECTION
MELSEC-L MX Component *2 *2
L02CPU-P MX Sheet
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q02CPU-A
20
Q02HCPU-A -
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
GT11, GT10
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
21
Q2ASCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
-
(QnASCPU)
FUNCTION
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1 22
A3UCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21 FUNCTION
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-A
A2ACPUP21-S1 -
(AnCPU)
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU


Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*1
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
MELSEC-A A2NCPUP21-S1
-
(AnCPU) A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
-
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Motion Q172CPUN
controller CPU -
(Q Series) Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU


Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*1
18
Q172DCPU
CNC CONNECTION
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
MT Works2 *2 *3 *2*3
Motion Q173DCPU-S1
controller CPU
Q172DSCPU
(Q Series)
Q173DSCPU
19
MT Works2
Q170MCPU GX Developer *2 *2
GOT MULTI-DROP
GX Works2
CONNECTION
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
20
A373UCPU-S3
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3
controller CPU -
GT11, GT10
(A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU 21
A172SHCPUN
MULTI-CHANNEL
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
FUNCTION
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
22
FX1
FA TRANSPARENT
FX2
FX2C
FX1S FUNCTION
MELSEC-FX FX1N GX Works2 *2
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1

*3 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system since Q172D/Q173DCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*1
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70
CNC (Q173NCCPU) -
MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ-700
Robot controller (Q172DRCPU) -
CRnD-700
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL
FREQROL-F500J -
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A -
MR-J2M- DU
MR-J3- A
MELSERVO
MR-J3- T
MR-J3- B*3*4 MR Configurator2 *2 *2
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B*3*4
MR-J4W2- B*3*4 MR Configurator2 *2 *2
*3*4
MR-J4W3- B

17
 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem
Connection type
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Bus Ethernet
ROBOT
*2 18
CNC CONNECTION
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
19
Q06HCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q12HCPU
CONNECTION
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
GT11, GT10
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
21
Q01UCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU GX Developer
(Q mode) GX Works2
Q03UDCPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
22
Q20UDHCPU
FA TRANSPARENT
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
FUNCTION
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
*1 *1 *1
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU

*1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUEHCPU has no direct coupled I/F.

Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*1
C Controller Q12DCCPU-V
-
module Q24DHCCPU-V
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L -
L02CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
-
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21


Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*1
18
CNC CONNECTION
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
19
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU*1
GOT MULTI-DROP
-
(AnSCPU)
CONNECTION
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
GT11, GT10
A0J2HCPUP21
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
21
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 -
MULTI-CHANNEL
A2CCPUR21
FUNCTION
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
22
FA TRANSPARENT
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
Q172CPUN FUNCTION
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
controller CPU Q172DCPU -
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU-S1
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU


Connection type
Bus Ethernet
*1
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3
controller CPU -
(A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
FX1S
MELSEC-FX FX1N GX Developer
FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS -
WS0-CPU1


Connection type
17
Bus Ethernet
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
*1
18
CNC CONNECTION
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
19
CNC C70
(Q173NCCPU)
GOT MULTI-DROP
CNC -
CONNECTION
MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU) -
controller
CRnD-700
FREQROL-A500/A500L 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
GT11, GT10
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL
FREQROL-F500J -
FREQROL-D700 21
FREQROL-E700
MULTI-CHANNEL
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
FUNCTION
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP 22
MR-J2S- CL
FA TRANSPARENT
MR-J2M-P8A
-
MR-J2M- DU FUNCTION
MELSERVO MR-J3- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J3- B
MR-J4- A -
MR-J4- B
MR-J4W2- B -
MR-J4W3- B

22.4.1 GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet,
LCPU Logging Configuration Tool, Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller
module
PLC GOT PC
Connection cable Communication driver
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
Personal
PLC GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
RS-232/USB Max. equipment
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software
conversion adaptor distance
For the system

configuration between the
GOT and PLC, refer to the RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
following. GX Developer
3m GX Works2
- GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) GX LogViewer
BUS
MX Component
CONNECTION *2 RS-232 GT10-RS2TUSB-5S GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) MX Sheet
*4 GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) 1 personal
DIRECT LCPU Logging
computer
CONNECTION TO CPU*6 Configuration
for 1 GOT
Tool
COMPUTER LINK
Setting/
CONNECTION*1*6 Monitoring tool
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
ETHERNET USB - 3m for C Controller
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
CONNECTION*3 module
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION*5
*1 Applicable to the QCPU only
*2 GT10, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool are not applicable to the bus connection.
*3 GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection.
*4 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal
computer.
RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual
*5 GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration Tool and Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module
are not supported.
*6 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

17
 When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
ROBOT
Connection type
dependant
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to
Maximum Personal Number of

PLC GOT Connection cable*1
segment computer connectable
Connection type Model Interface Cable model length*3 Software equipment
19
For the system configuration *2 *5
GOT MULTI-DROP
between - (Built into GOT) Twisted pair cable
the GOT and PLC, refer to
CONNECTION
• 10BASE-T
the following. Shielded twisted pair cable
GX Works2
(STP) or unshielded
Setting/ 1 personal
BUS twisted pair cable (UTP):
100m Monitoring tool computer
CONNECTION*4 Category 3, 4, and 5
for C Controller for 1 GOT
DIRECT
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
module 20
*6
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CONNECTION TO CPU (STP):
COMPUTER LINK Category 5 and 5e
CONNECTION*6
GT11, GT10
system.
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module. 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
GT16 User's Manual
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) 22
FA TRANSPARENT
cascades.
*4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection.
*5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. FUNCTION
*6 Not applicable to Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

 When connecting the GOT and personal computer with modem
Connection type
dependant
PLC GOT Modem Modem PC
Adapter cable Connection cable Phone line Connection cable
Varies according to the connection type.
Personal Number of
PLC GOT Connection cable
Adapter cable Modem Phone line computer*3 connectable
Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment
For the system RS-232

configuration between the (Built
GOT and PLC, refer to the - *1
into
following. GOT)
BUS
1 personal
CONNECTION*2 GX Developer
*1 Public line computer
GX Works2
DIRECT for 1 GOT
CONNECTION TO CPU GT10-C02H-6PT9P
RS-232 *1
COMPUTER LINK (0.2m)
CONNECTION*1
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*4
*1 For connectable modems, system equipment and connection cables, refer to the following Technical News.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (T10-0039)

*2 GT10 is not applicable to the bus connection.
*3 Installation of the GOT modem connection tool to the personal computer is required to connect the GOT to a modem.

22.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
Personal
CONNECTION
computer
connectable
Max.
distance
For the system configuration
between the GOT and PLC, refer
to the following. RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
BUS CONNECTION PX Developer 1 personal
GX Configurator computer for 1 GOT
DIRECT CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
TO CPU GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2
QCPU +
Motion controller CPU GOT PC
(Q series)
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
Personal
computer
connectable
RS-232/USB Max.
conversion adaptor distance

RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
to the following.
BUS CONNECTION*1
- GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 1 personal
DIRECT CONNECTION MT Developer
RS-232 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) 3m computer
TO CPU GT10-RS2TUSB-5S *3 MT Works2
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) for 1 GOT
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*2
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB -
GOT MULTI-DROP GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
CONNECTION*4
*1 GT10 is not applicable to the bus connection.

computer.
RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor USER'S MANUAL

*4 GX LogViewer, MX Component and MX Sheet are not supported.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
PLC GOT PC
ROBOT
Connection type
dependant
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to

segment computer connectable
Connection type Model Interface Cable model length*3 Software equipment
19
For the system configuration *2 *5 Twisted pair cable
GOT MULTI-DROP
between - (Built into GOT) • 10BASE-T
CONNECTION
the GOT and PLC, refer to
the following. (STP) or unshielded
1 personal
twisted pair cable (UTP):
100m MT Works2 computer
BUS for 1 GOT
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
CONNECTION*4
DIRECT
(STP): 20
CONNECTION TO CPU
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Category 5 and 5e
system.
GT11, GT10
21
GT16 User's Manual
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer. 22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2
Connection type
dependant
Servo Servo QCPU +
Motion controller GOT PC
amplifier amplifier
CPU (Q series)
Connection type
dependant
Varies according to
SSCNET , SSCNET /H
Personal
computer
connectable
Max. equipment
distance
For the system configuration between
the GOT and PLC, refer to the following. RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
BUS CONNECTION MR Configurator 1 personal

MR Configurator2 computer for 1 GOT
DIRECT CONNECTION TO GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
CPU GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
ETHERNET CONNECTION*1
*1 Only MR Configurator2 is compatible with the Ethernet connection.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Servo Servo QCPU +
Motion controller GOT PC
amplifier amplifier
ROBOT
CPU (Q series)
Connection cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
Varies according to
, SSCNET /H

Connection type Model Interface Cable model

segment
length*3
computer
Software
connectable
equipment
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
For the system configuration *2 *5 Twisted pair cable
between - (Built into GOT) • 10BASE-T
CONNECTION
the GOT and PLC, refer to Shielded twisted pair cable
the following. (STP) or unshielded
1 personal
twisted pair cable (UTP): MR
100m computer
Category 3, 4, and 5 Configurator2
BUS for 1 GOT
CONNECTION*4
GT15-J71E71-100 • 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable 20
DIRECT (STP):
CONNECTION FUNCTION
CONNECTION TO CPU Category 5 and 5e
GT11, GT10
system.
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
GT16 User's Manual
FUNCTION
cascades.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.4.5 FR Configurator
FREQROL 500/700
Inverter Inverter GOT PC
Connection cable
Varies according to
Personal
Inverter GOT Connection cable Number of
computer
connectable
Max.
distance
For details on the system configuration

RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
between GOT and Mitsubishi inverter,
refer to the following. 1 personal
FR Configurator
computer for 1 GOT
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
INVERTER CONNECTION GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
22.4.6 FX Configurator-FP, FX Configurator-EN
PLC GOT PC
Connection cable
MELSEC-FX
PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of

RS-232/USB Max. connectable
conversion adaptor distance equipment
For the system RS-232 - GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

configuration between
the GOT and PLC,
- GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 1 personal
refer to the following. FX Configurator-FP,
RS-232 GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) 3m computer
GT10-RS2TUSB-5S*1 FX Configurator-EN
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) for 1 GOT
DIRECT
CONNECTION TO GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
CPU USB -
GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
computer.
RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User's Manual

22.4.7 RT ToolBox2 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CRnQ-700 GOT PC
CNC CONNECTION
Connection cable
Connection type
dependant
Personal
19
computer
GOT MULTI-DROP
connectable
Max.
CONNECTION
distance
between the GOT and PLC, RS-232 GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) 3m
BUS CONNECTION*1 RT ToolBox2

1 personal 20
computer for 1 GOT
CONNECTION FUNCTION
DIRECT GT09-C30USB-5P(3m)
USB 3m
CONNECTION TO CPU*1 GT09-C20USB-5P(2m)
ETHERNET
CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
*1 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection, the direct CPU connection.
22.4.8 NC Configurator 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Q173NCCPU GOT PC 22
FA TRANSPARENT
Connection cable
Connection type
FUNCTION
dependant
Personal
computer
connectable
Max.
distance
to the following.
GT09-C30USB-5P(3m) 1 personal
USB 3m NC Configurator
BUS CONNECTION GT09-C20USB-5P(2m) computer for 1 GOT
ETHERNET
CONNECTION*1
*1 GT11 is not applicable to the Ethernet connection.

interface  Communication setting with personal
computer
 Controller setting Set the communication setting between the GOT and the
personal computer.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following
manual.
2. Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
7.1.2 Interface setting of the GOT
Example: For GT16
3.
4.
Click! 1. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC(Data

Transfer) ]from the menu.
2. The [PC (Data Transfer)] is displayed. Set the

interface of the GOT to be used in the communication
with the personal computer.
menu.
(a) Host (PC) setting
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the When communicating the GOT and the personal
channel to be used from the list menu. computer in the direct connection, set the interface
of the GOT to be used in the communication with
3. Set Manufacturer, Controller Type, I/F, and Driver the personal computer.
according to the connected equipment to be used. (b) Ethernet download setting
When communicating the GOT via Ethernet, set
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, the interface of the GOT to be used in the
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. communication with the personal computer.
environment.
POINT

17
Item Description Range Specify whether or not to perform a
None
parity check, and how it is performed
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to Parity Even
IP Address (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255 Odd
(Default: Odd)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
IP Label Set the IP Label of detail setting. -
Set the subnet mask for the sub performed when a communication
ROBOT
Retry 1time
network. (Only for connection via timeout occurs.
router) 0.0.0.0 to (Default: 1time)
Subnet Mask*1
If the sub network is not used, 255.255.255.255
the default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Timeout Time communication to time out.
(Default: 5sec)
5sec
18
CNC CONNECTION
Set the AT command to initialize the
default gateway where the GOT Up to 255 one-byte
Default 0.0.0.0 to Initialization modem.
is connected. (Only for alphanumeric
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255 Command*1 (Default:
connection via router) characters
AT&FE0%C0&K0&D0W2S0=1)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
*1 The maximum number of characters of the AT command
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for differs according to the specification of the modem. When
5014 to 65534
Download Port Ethernet download. the maximum number of characters of the AT command
(Except for 5011, 5012,
No.*1 (Default: 5014) which can be used in the modem is less than 255, set the
5013, 49153)
initialization command according to the specification of the
modem. 19
IP Address Setting] screen.
3. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
POINT
POINT
Setting the FA transparent function of GX Works2
When connecting the GOT and the personal computer (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
in Ethernet connection, set the GOT IP address and
the Ethernet download port No. to the same as the
The communication interface setting can be 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
contents of PLC side I/F detailed setting of GOT. after downloading [Communication Settings] of
22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 project data.
GT11, GT10
manual.
(c) Host (modem) setting
GT User's Manual
When communicating the GOT via modem, set the
interface of the GOT to be used in the
communication with the modem.
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Transmission
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
(Default: 115200) 115200bps
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
the connected equipment.
(Default: 8bit)
Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
(Default: 1bit)

 GOT Setup
When using the multi-channel function (only GT16,
GT15, GT14, GT12), specify the channel No. on which
FA transparent function is executed.
2. 3. 4.
Click!
1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting]

[GOT Setup] from the menu.
2. Check [Enable GOT Setup].
3. Select the [Transparent] tab.
4. As necessary, check one of [CH1] to [CH4]. (Default:

CH1)
< GT16,GT15 >
[CH1], [CH2], [CH3], [CH4]
< GT14,GT12 >
[CH1], [CH2]
POINT
Transparent setting on the utility screen
Transparent setting can be performed by the GOT.
For details of the operating, refer to the following.
GT User's Manual

17
22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX
Developer, PX Developer,
ROBOT
(For bus connection)
GX Configurator
The setting method for the FA transparent function of GX
Developer is used as an example. 18
GX Configurator is an add-on software of GX Developer.
CNC CONNECTION
(Except for GX Configurator-QP)
 Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus

connection or direct CPU connection
(when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to
20
display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
7. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F
Detailed setting of PLC module].
GT11, GT10
Bus connection
[via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. *1
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
Direct CPU connection 21
[via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode]
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
MULTI-CHANNEL
PC side I/F : Serial USB (COM) *1 This is operation required in the case of using GX Developer
PLC side I/F : PLC module of which version is 8.22Y and above.
FUNCTION
Other station : No specification
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click

[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been
4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC
connected to the QCPU (Q mode).
side I/F Serial setting].
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F
Serial setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial
When connecting the GOT to PC via modem
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox.
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB
Mark the [USB] checkbox.

 Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link
connection(when connected to the QJ71C24(N))
(GX Configurator is not supported.)

Serial setting].
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. When connecting the GOT to PC via modem
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: Mark the [USB] checkbox.
PC side I/F : Serial
PLC side I/F : C24

4. Return to [Transfer Setup] and double-click [C24] of

the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F detailed
setting of C24].
5. Check [via GOT transparent mode] for [PLC side I/F

detailed setting of C24].

17
 When connecting the GOT and PLC in
Ethernet communication
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
6. Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to
GOT MULTI-DROP
display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module].
CONNECTION
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer. 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module],
mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]
2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. checkbox and click [Set].
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: 20

PC side I/F : Serial USB (COM)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
PLC side I/F : PLC module
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
4. Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC 8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent
side I/F Serial setting]. setting] is displayed.
FUNCTION
Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet
module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.
Serial setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name].
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. When connecting the Q173NCCPU, set [QJ71E71].
10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station
No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet
module.
When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting
is not required.
11. Specify the IP address for [IP address] same as the

IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port
QCPU or Ethernet module.

Serial setting].
12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click

 Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU

connection (when connecting to FXCPU)
6. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the

connected to the FXCPU.
POINT
How to operate GX Developer
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the
following manual.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer.

PC side I/F : Serial
PLC side I/F : PLC module


22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 17
The following shows the procedure to set the FA
transparent function of GX Works2.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 When connecting the GOT and personal
ROBOT
computer with serial or USB
(1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or
direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU
18
(Q mode))
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display
[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

Detailed Setting of GOT]. 20
Bus connection
CONNECTION FUNCTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view
Direct CPU connection
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data
GT11, GT10
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
checkbox.
2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed.
21
3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1]:
PC side I/F : Serial USB
MULTI-CHANNEL
PLC side I/F : GOT
FUNCTION
Other Station Setting : No Specification:
22
FA TRANSPARENT
8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. FUNCTION
Click [Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has

been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).
4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display

[PC side I/F Serial Setting].

Serial Setting].

(2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link
connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N))

[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data 7. Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. GOT].

PLC side I/F : GOT
Other Station Setting : No Specification
8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1].

been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).


Serial Setting].

(3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet
17
connection
(a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view 7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. and click [Setting...].
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
PLC side I/F : GOT
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent FA TRANSPARENT

FUNCTION
Setting] is displayed.
4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet
[PC side I/F Serial Setting]. module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.
5. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side I/F 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [PLC Type].
Serial Setting].

10.Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station
module.
When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is
not required.
11. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the



Serial Setting].
12.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup Connection1]. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT
PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter OK
been connected to the QCPU (Q mode). Setup
Cancel
PLC Mode FXCPU
(b) Connecting to FXCPU

via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode
via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode
FX3U-ENET-ADP-0.0.0.0. Setting...
C24
Setup
Computer Type QJ71C24
Station No. 0
Parity Odd
Sum Check Exists
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1

7. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark

the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox
1. Click the Connection Destination view and click [Setting...].
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2.

PLC side I/F : GOT

(4) Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-
17
GOT(Ethernet) Transparent Setting ETB) in Ethernet connection, and connecting it to a
PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
OK
PLC Type Cancel This section describes the settings of the GX Works2 in
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-ENET-ADP the following case of system configuration.
ROBOT
Ethernet Module
Module Side
POINT
IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Input Format DEC.
18
Version of GX Works2
CNC CONNECTION
GX Works2 Version 1.34L or later is required to
execute the FA transparent function with using
Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF-ETB).
<GOT>
19
Network No. :3
PC No. :1
8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent
GOT MULTI-DROP
IP address :192.168.3.18
setting] is displayed. Port No. :5001
CONNECTION
Communication :UDP (fixed)
Here, set the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet format
Module], which is connected via a GOT.
Ethernet
9. Set [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module] for [PLC
Type]. <Ethernet adapter module>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Ethernet setting
IP address :192.168.3.30
CC-Link IE Field Network setting
IP address assigned to the [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or
Network No. :1
[Ethernet Module]. Station No. :1
GT11, GT10
21
HUB
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station)
Network No. :1
11. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click PC No.
Total Stations
:0
:2
connected to the FXCPU.
22
FA TRANSPARENT
Network Type : CC IE Field (Local station) FUNCTION
Network No. :1
PC No. :2

[Connection Destination] [(Connection target data 6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display
name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displayed. 7. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU].
3. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection1].

PLC side I/F : GOT
4. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display 8. On the[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark
[PC side I/F Serial Setting]. the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox
and click [Setting...].
Serial Setting].

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
9. [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting] is displayed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Here, set the Ethernet module, which is firstly
CONNECTION
connected via a GOT.
10. Set [NZ2GF-ETB] for [PLC Type]. 14. Click [Other station (Single network)].
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
11. Set the same number to [IP address] as the number 15. Double-click [CC IE Field].
assigned to NZ2GF-ETB, and click [OK]. FUNCTION
In the system configuration example, the setting is as
follows.
[IP address]: 192 168 3 30
12. Return to [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], and

click [OK].

computer in Ethernet connection (GT16,
GT15 and GT14 only)
direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU
(Q mode))
16.Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of

CC IE Field is displayed.
17.Set [Network No.] and [Station No.] assigned to CPU,

and click [OK].
When connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network
Master/Local module of the system configuration
example, the setting is as follows.
[Network No.] :1
[Station No.] :0
1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection

Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the
Navigation window of GX Works2.
18.The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click 3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been PC side I/F :Ethernet Board
connected to the QCPU (Q mode). PLC side I/F :GOT
Other Station Setting : No specification
4. Double-click [Ethernet Board] of the PC side I/F to

display [PC side I/F Ethernet Board Setting].
5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station No.

are not required to be changed (default) because they
are not used.

(2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link
17
connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N))
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection
Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the

Navigation window of GX Works2.
20
2.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
[PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed.
7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail 3. Set the [Transfer Setup]:
setting for PC and GOT connection]. PC side I/F : Ethernet Board
GT11, GT10
Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the PLC side I/F : GOT
Ethernet download setting. Other Station Setting : No specification
22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting 21
8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for
MULTI-CHANNEL
GOT and PLC connection].
FUNCTION
Bus connection
Direct CPU connection 22

Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
FA TRANSPARENT
checkbox.
FUNCTION


are not used.


22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer

transparent function of GX LogViewer.
1. Click [Show Assistant Dialog] for [View] on GX

6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display LogViewer.
2. The [Assistant] dialog box is displayed.
7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail
setting for PC and GOT connection].
Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the
Ethernet download setting.
22.5.1 (b) Ethernet download setting
8. Check [C24] in [Detail setting for GOT and PLC

connection].
3. Click [LCPU] [Show Logged Device Status] in the

9. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click [Assistant] dialog box.
[Connection Test] to check if GX Works2 has been
4. The [Transfer Setup Connection 1] dialog box is
displayed.
5. Set the [Transfer Setup Connection 1]:

PLC side I/F : GOT
Other Station Setting : (Select from the system
configuration)
6. For [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT] of [Transfer Setup], refer to
the following.

22.6.4 Accessing PLC by 17
GX Configurator-QP
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of GX Configurator-QP.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
4. Set the [PLC side] in [Connection setup].
PLC type: Q series PLC type
Multi PLC specification: None/No.1 to 4 19
Direct CPU connection, mark the [via GOT
1.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on GX transparent mode] checkbox.
CONNECTION
Configurator-QP. Bus connection
2. The [Connection setup] is displayed. Interface: PLC
Type: Bus
3. Set the [PC side] in [Connection setup].
Interface: PLC
20
Interface: (RS-232C)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
COM setting: COM1 to COM10 Type: Direct coupled
Transmission speed: 9.6kbps to 115.2kbps Computer link connection
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Interface: C24
GT11, GT10
Interface: USB
(For bus connection only) 21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
5. Set the [Module connecting I/O address] in
[Connection setup].
Specify the actual IP address of the module.
6. The screen returns to the [Connection setup]. Click

the [Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has
been connected to the QD75***(QnCPU).

22.6.5 Accessing by the MT
Developer
This section explains the procedure to set the FA

transparent function of MT Developer with an example of
connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series).

setting of PLC module].
Bus connection
1. Click [Communication] [Communication Setting] in
MT Developer. Direct CPU connection
[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
5. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted by using

the transparent function in [CPU].
6. Click [Connection Test].
2. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port].

7. Confirm that the personal computer is connected to
3. Click [Detail]. the motion controller CPU (Q series).

22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of MT Works2 with an example of
connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series).
ROBOT
computer with serial or USB
18
CNC CONNECTION
direct CPU connection
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display 20
[CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
CONNECTION FUNCTION
7. Check-mark either of the following in [CPU side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT].
GT11, GT10
1. Click [Transfer setup] [Online]. Bus connection
Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode] checkbox.
2. The [Transfer setup] is displayed. 21
3. Set the [Transfer setup]: Mark the [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode]
MULTI-CHANNEL
checkbox.
CPU side I/F : GOT
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
8. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click

[Connection Test] to check if MT Works2 has been
connected to the motion controller (Q mode).
4. Double-click [Serial] of the PLC side I/F to display [PC
Serial setting].

(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet
communication

name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2.
7. PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT
3. Set the [Transfer Setup]: Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]
PC side I/F : Serial USB checkbox and click [Set].
PLC side I/F : GOT


Serial Setting].
When connecting the GOT and PC with serial 8. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent
Setting] is displayed.
Here, set the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet
When connecting the GOT and PC with USB module, which is firstly connected via a GOT.
Mark the [USB] checkbox. 9. Set [QnUDE(H)] or [QJ71E71] for [Type name].

17
10. Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GT15 and GT14 only)
ROBOT
module.
direct CPU connection
When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [Type name], the setting
is not required. 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20
12. The screen returns to [Transfer setup]. Click 1.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Click the Connection Destination view
[Connection Test] to check if GX Developer has been [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data
connected to the motion controller (Q mode). name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2.
GT11, GT10

21
PC side I/F : Ethernet Board
PLC side I/F : GOT
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
22
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION


are not used.

22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier
by the MR Configurator
Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT
Developer.
22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer
22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier

by the MR Configurator2
Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Works2.

22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2
22.6.9 Accessing the inverter by the

FR Configurator
This section explains the setting method of the FA
transparent function of FR Configurator with an example of
7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail connecting to FREQROL A700/F700 series.
Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the
Ethernet download setting.
8. Check either of the followings in [Detail setting for
GOT and PLC connection].
Bus connection
Mark the [via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
checkbox.
1. Click [Settings] [Communication Settings...] in FR

Configurator.

connected to the Motion controller (Q mode).

22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX 17
Configurator-FP
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
transparent function of FX Configurator-FP with an
example of connecting to FXCPU.
18
CNC CONNECTION
2. Check-mark either of the following in [Communication
Port].
Mark the [RS-232C] checkbox. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
3. Click the [GOT Transparent Communication].
1. Click [Connection setup] for [Online] on FX
4. Click the [OK]. Configurator-FP.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
2. Check-mark either of the following in [PC side].
Mark the [RS-232 (FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD 22
Included)] checkbox.
5. Click [OFFLINE] to make it [ONLINE].
FA TRANSPARENT
6. Click the [System Read], then check if GOT has been Mark the [USB(GOT Transparent)] checkbox.
connected to FREQROL A700/F700 series normally. FUNCTION
3. Click [Comm. Test].
4. After the communication test is completed, check that

the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU.

22.6.11 Accessing by FX Configurator-
EN
transparent function of the FX Configurator-EN.
5. After the communication test is completed, check that

the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU.
1. Click [Transfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN.
2. Mark the [Serial port/USB] checkbox in [Connecting

interface].
3. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port/
USB] of [Connecting interface].
Mark the [RS-232C (include FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-
BD)] checkbox.
Mark the [USB (GOT Transparent mode)] checkbox.
4. Click [Connection test]

22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of
connecting to CRnQ-700.
ROBOT
 Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus
connection or direct CPU connection (CRnQ-
700)
18
CNC CONNECTION
4. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port]. 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
5. Click [Detail].
20
1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
project tree of RT ToolBox2.
Click [Edit Project].
GT11, GT10
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
6. Check-mark either of the following in [PLC side I/F 22
setting of PLC module].
FA TRANSPARENT
Bus connection
FUNCTION
[via GOT(direct coupled) transparent mode]
7. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU].
2. Set [Method] to [CRnC].

3. Click [Detail].

 Connecting the GOT and Controller in
Ethernet connection
1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the

6. On the [PLC side I/F setting of PLC module], mark the
project tree of RT ToolBox2. [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox and
Click [Edit Project]. click [Set].
2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ]. 7. Set [QJ71E71] for [Type].
3. Click [Detail].
8. Specify the number assigned to the Ethernet module

for [Network No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in
"Module side".
9. Specify the number assigned to the GOT for [Network

No.], [Station No.] and [IP Address] in "GOT side".
10. As necessary, select a CPU that is targeted in [CPU].
4. Check-mark either of the following in [Serial port].

Mark the [RS-232] checkbox.

5. Click [Detail].

22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator 17
The following shows the procedure to set the FA This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
transparent function of NC Configurator. function of the MELSOFT Navigator.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
1. Click [Online] [Batch Read] in MELSOFT
Navigator.
2. The [Batch Read] is displayed.

19
GOT MULTI-DROP
1. Click [File] [Open].
CONNECTION
2. The [Open] is displayed.
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
21
3. Select the projects to be read from [Select Project],
and set the storage destination of the workspace in
MULTI-CHANNEL
[Save Workspace].
FUNCTION
4. Click [Execute] to read and display the specified
3. Select [NC] on the upper left of the screen, and set project.
the following:
NC series : C70 M or C70 L 22
Connect pattern : Set the pattern according to the
FA TRANSPARENT
connect pattern.
IP address : Set as necessary.
FUNCTION
4. By clicking [Open], data is read from CNC and
displayed.

22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring
Configuration Tool tool for C Controller module
The following shows the procedure to set the FA The following shows the procedure to set the FA
transparent function of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool . transparent function of Setting/Monitoring tool for C
Controller module with the C Controller module
(Q24DHCCPU-V) connected.

computer with USB
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus
connection
1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup...].

[Connection Destination] [(Connection target
data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Setting/
Monitoring tool for C Controller module.

PLC side I/F : GOT

PLC side I/F : GOT
4. Set [PC side I/F Serial Setting] and [PLC side I/F
Detailed Setting of GOT] in [Transfer Setup]. For
details, refer to the following.
4. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display

[CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].

17
5. Mark the [via GOT(Bus) transparent mode]
checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of 4. Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display
GOT] screen. [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
5. Mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode]
ROBOT
checkbox on the [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of
GOT] screen.
18
CNC CONNECTION
[Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool
for C Controller module has been connected to the
motion controller (Q mode).
(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet

communication 19
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
6. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) Transparent
Setting] is displayed. 20
Here, set the C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-
CONNECTION FUNCTION
V), which is firstly connected via a GOT.
GT11, GT10
IP address assigned to the C Controller module
(Q24DHCCPU-V).
21
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
1. Click the Connection Destination view 8. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target [Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool
for C Controller module has been connected to the 22
C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V).
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
PLC side I/F : GOT

GT15, and GT14 only)
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus
connection

7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail

1. Click the Connection Destination view Set the IP address and port No. to the same as the
[Connection Destination] [(Connection target Ethernet download setting.

PC side I/F : Ethernet Board
PLC side I/F : GOT

[Connection Test] to check if Setting/Monitoring tool
for C Controller module has been connected to the
motion controller (Q mode).

5. Set the protocol to TCP. Network No. and Station

No. are not required to be changed (default)
because they are not used.

17
22.7 Precautions
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.7.1 Precautions common to each
software  When monitoring the PLC CPU from a
ROBOT
personal computer
 GOT interface required to use the FA When monitoring the PLC CPU from a personal
transparent function computer, the GOT and personal computer refresh the
18
Connect the personal computer, to which GX display slower.
CNC CONNECTION
Developer or any other relevant software has been
installed, to the RS-232 interface or USB interface of  Software available for the FA transparent
the GOT. function
When multiple kinds of software are activated on one
When performing the FA transparent function, use
personal computer, only one of them is available for
either RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT.
Using both of them to perform the FA transparent
communications using the FA transparent function. 19
Do not concurrently perform any communications using
function concurrently is not allowed.
GOT MULTI-DROP
the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION
(Offline operation with each software is available)
RS-232
Also, do not perform communications with the GOT
(e.g. downloading project data) from GT Designer3
during execution of communications using the FA
transparent function. 20
USB
CONNECTION FUNCTION
 Conditions for suspending the FA transparent
GT11, GT10
function Online operation
GX Developer and so on
The FA transparent function is also suspended when
any of the following operations, which stop the GOT
monitor, is performed.
GT Designer3
21
Communication with GOT
Note that the FA transparent function will not be
MULTI-CHANNEL
stopped while using the optional function such as the  When the FA transparent function is used in
Utility display or ladder monitor function. a bus connection
FUNCTION
• When project data is written/read, or when the OS is
(1) When multiple GOTs are bus-connected
written by GT Designer3*1
When multiple GOTs are bus-connected, the FA
• When the GOT is set up*1 transparent function can be used on each GOT. 22
• When no communication request (online monitor, However, note that the monitoring performance of each
etc.) has been issued from GX Developer for 45 GOT slows down as the number of monitoring GOTs
FA TRANSPARENT
minutes and personal computers increases.
*1 A timeout error occurs in GX Developer. FUNCTION
 When GOT monitoring is faulty

The FA transparent function cannot be used in case
that the GOT monitoring is faulty due to PLC CPU
RS-232
errors or faulty communication between the PLC CPU cable
and GOT.
When GOT monitoring is faulty, check the following. PC
(1) Whether the PLC CPU operates normally

Refer to the User's Manual of the PLC CPU you
use.
(2) Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected
normally
5. BUS CONNECTION

22.7 Precautions
(2) When the FA transparent function is used in a bus  When the FA transparent function is used in
connection
an Ethernet connection
When the FA transparent function is used in a bus
connection, the following GX Developer functions or (1) GX Developer function or GX Works2 function
GX Works2 functions cannot be executed. When the FA transparent function is used in an
The message [The executed function is not supported. Ethernet connection, the following GX Developer
Please check the manual and other documentation.] is functions or GX Works2 functions cannot be executed.
displayed on GX Developer or GX Works2. The message [The executed function is not supported.
Please check the manual and other documentation.] is
Unsupported GX Developer
Remark
displayed on GX Developer or GX Works2.
functions
Unsupported GX Developer functions Remark
• Remote Reset
―
• Remote system reset • Remote Reset
―
• Remote system reset
• Remote RUN
• Remote STOP • Remote RUN
• Remote PAUSE • Remote STOP
Inexecutable only when specify all
• Remote STEP-RUN • Remote PAUSE Inexecutable only when
stations/groups has been performed.
• Remote latch clear • Remote STEP-RUN specify all stations/groups
• Write clock data • Remote latch clear has been performed.
• Clear malfunction log • Write clock data
• Clear malfunction log
 When using together with the Multiple-GT11, •

•
Remote password function
MELSECNET diagnostics
GT10 connection function • CC IE Control diagnostics
When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent • CC IE Field diagnostics ―
• Ethernet diagnostics
function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or
(PING test/loopback test with
USB interface is used for the connection. the Ethernet module (Q series))
PC
1st GOT 2nd GOT
RS-232 (2) GOT station monitoring function
When the FA transparent function is used in an
Ethernet connection, GOT station monitoring function
PC cannot be operated.
Therefore, in the cases of [no connection target], [PLC
USB
power OFF], etc., the monitoring of the GOT delays for
the timeout time.
PC
1st GOT
 When PLC power disconnection occurs with

the FA transparent function being used
While the FA transparent function is being used, if the
communication between the PLC and the GOT is
stopped due to PLC power disconnection or a
disconnection of the communication cable between the
PLC and the GOT, the GOT waits for timeout against
the communication request from the peripheral devices
(GX Developer, etc.), and it takes a few minutes to
recover the monitoring between the PLC and the GOT.
Monitoring
Online operation
GX Developer and so on

22.7 Precautions
22.7.2 When using GX Developer, 17
 When connecting the GOT multi-drop
connection GX Woks2
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the
GOT multi-drop connection system.  When connecting to QCPU (A mode)
ROBOT
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Communication When connecting to QCPU (A mode), set the PLC type
driver writing to "A4UCPU" or "QCPU (A mode)" on GX Developer.
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop
 When connecting the GOT and PC with RS- 18
connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and
232
CNC CONNECTION
communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3
(Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the The [Transmission speed] setting in [PC side I/F Serial
standard monitor OS and communication driver to the setting] in GX Developer or GX Works2 must be within
serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
the range supported by the connected CPU.
(2) Number of personal computers
Only one personal computer can be connected to the CPU connected Transmission speed
multi-drop connection system.
QCPU, FXCPU
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 19
Only one personal computer 57600bps, 115200bps
GOT MULTI-DROP
QnACPU 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
CONNECTION
ACPU 9600, 19200bps
Motion controller CPU

9600bps
(A series)
 When [monitor conditions] have been set on 20

(3) Monitor speed of GOT GX Developer, GX Works2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
The monitoring performance slows down according to
the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA (1) Monitoring performance of the GOT is temporarily
transparent function, the monitoring performance of the suspended.
GT11, GT10
whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result, (2) The GOT cannot respond to the touch switch operation
timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.
and numerical/ascii inputs.
 When connecting the GOT and personal (3) Writing to PLC results in a system alarm occurrence 21
computer with modem connection and displays the message, "315 Device writing error.
When using the FA transparent function with a modem, Correct device.".
MULTI-CHANNEL
the communication settings of compatible software, (4) While setting the monitor conditions, do not perform
modem connection tool, modem and GOT must be set any operation which makes the GOT restart (e.g.
FUNCTION
correctly to communicate with the GOT. If not correctly downloading project data, changing utility data).
set, the communication cannot be performed. Doing so may display a system alarm, "402
Communication timeout. Confirm communication
 When connecting the GOT and personal pathway or modules." when the GOT restarts. 22
computer with serial or USB When the monitor conditions setting for the PLC CPU
has not been cancelled, reconnect GX Developer, GX
FA TRANSPARENT
When the operations shown below are executed, the
Works2 to cancel the setting.(An error may be output
operation is executed in the PLC. However, the display
when the monitor conditions setting is cancelled.)
on the GOT may stop temporarily or the display of FUNCTION
timeout may appear on GX Works2. (5) When the time check of GX Developer, GX Works2 is
set to 30 seconds or more in the monitor condition
Operation*1 Remark settings, the message "402 Communication timeout.
Applied for the following operations Confirm communication pathway or modules." may
• Remote Reset specifying the currently selected appear.
station.
Set the time check time of GX Developer, GX Works2
• Remote RUN to 30 seconds or less.
• Remote STOP
•
•
Remote PAUSE
Remote STEP-RUN
Applied for the following operations  When exiting GX Developer, GX Works2
specifying all the station.
• Remote Reset For 45 seconds after GX Developer, GX Works2 has
• Remote latch clear
been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same
• Write clock data
speed as when the FA transparent function is working.
• CC IE Control diagnostics
(Link startup/stop)
―
• CC IE Field diagnostics
(Link startup/stop)
*1 The remote operations only of when the connection type

between the GOT and CPU is the direct CPU connection or
computer link connection are applied.

22.7 Precautions
• Reading the special module monitor CPU
 When performing [Read to PLC], [Write to Malfunction log
PLC] and other file operations on GX Corrective
Developer, GX Works2 Error messages
Corrective Error messages
action on GX
action on GOT on GX Developer
If any of the following GOT functions is executed during on GOT
side and GX Works2
Developer and
GX Works2
the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to
PLC], an error may occur on the GOT, GX Developer, With no file
or GX Works2. operation being With no special
executed on module
In this case, take the following corrective action:
GX Developer File access monitor
Communication
or GX Works2, failure. malfunction log
error
• File reading in the ladder monitor function for re-execute the Please retry. being read,
MELSEC-Q CPU execute the file
malfunction log operation.
Corrective reading.
Error messages action on GX
on GOT
side and GX Works2
Developer and • Backup/restore
GX Works2
Corrective
With no file Corrective Error messages
With no file Error messages action on GX
reading being action on GOT on GX Developer
operation being on GOT Developer and
executed in the side and GX Works2
executed on File access GX Works2
The file is not ladder monitor
GX Developer failure. With no file
found. function for
or GX Works2, Please retry. operation being With no
MELSEC-Q,
re-execute the executed on backup being
re-execute the
file reading. Backup GX Developer ― executed,
file operation.
or GX Works2, execute the file
• Read/write of values of the file register specified for re-execute the operation.
the recipe function backup.
With no file
Corrective
Corrective Error messages operation being With no restore
action on GOT on GX Developer executed on being
on GOT Developer and
side and GX Works2 Restore GX Developer ― executed,
GX Works2
or GX Works2, execute the file
File access Execute the re-execute the operation.
With no file
failure. file access restore.
operation on
Please retry. operation
358 PLC file GX Developer
again with the • SFC monitor file reading
access failure. or GX Works2,
PLC file system recipe in-
Confirm PLC turn ON the Corrective
error. Unable to process signal Corrective Error messages
drive.*1 trigger device Error messages action on GX
communicate in GOT system action on GOT on GX Developer
for the recipe on GOT Developer and
with PLC. information side and GX Works2
function again. GX Works2
OFF.
With no file With no special
• Reading TC monitor set value in the system monitor operation being module
function executed on monitor CPU
― GX Developer ― malfunction log
Corrective
Corrective Error messages or GX Works2, being read,
action on GOT on GX Developer re-execute the execute the file
side and GX Works2 file reading. operation.
GX Works2
With no file
No message is operation being With no TC set
displayed. executed on File access value being
(The TC set GX Developer failure. read, re-
value space is or GX Works2, Please retry. execute the file
blank.) re-execute the operation.
TC monitor.
*1 The numerical indicates the system alarm No.

22.7 Precautions
• Reading/Writing files of ladder edit 17
Corrective
Error messages
action on GX computer with modem connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
side and GX Works2 (1) Timeout time settings
GX Works2
When the FA transparent function is used with a
ROBOT
With no file modem, it takes time for the initial communication with
With no file
operation being PLC and GX Works2 or GX Developer and a timeout
reading being
executed on
Read GX Developer ―
executed on
ladder edit,
may occur. In that case, set a longer time for the initial
communication timeout time for the GOT modem
18
or GX Works2,
execute the file connection tool.
CNC CONNECTION
re-execute the
operation.
file reading.
(2) Communication settings
With no file When the FA transparent function is used via modem,
With no file
operation being
writing being
the communication setting differs depending on the
executed on
executed on connection target of the GOT.
Write GX Developer ― Set as follows.
ladder edit,
or GX Works2,
re-execute the
execute the file Setting target 19
operation. Target
file writing. Setting GX GX GOT modem Communication
of the GT
GOT MULTI-DROP
item Works2 Developer connection settings of the
GOT Designer3
CONNECTION
 When PLC write is failed while using the FA Data length 8bits
*1
7bits
*1 tool
8bits
GOT
transparent function FXCPU Parity None Even None

The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent Stop bit 1bit 1bit 1bit
function may be failed due to some reason such as
cable disconnection.
Data length
QCPU Parity
8bits
Odd
20
CONNECTION FUNCTION
When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the Stop bit 1bit
same personal computer, or reset the PLC CPU. *1 Communication settings of GX Works2/GX Developer are
set automatically, and setting is not required.
 Restrictions on GX Developer during backup/
GT11, GT10
restore execution  When connecting the ACPU and motion
controller CPU (A series) in bus connection
(1) When reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a
PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or
Do not execute write during RUN with GX Developer.
An error may occur in the PLC due to the write during
21
GX Works2 with the FA transparent function during the RUN, what may stop the PLC.
backup/restore execution with the GOT, the backup/
MULTI-CHANNEL
restore is stopped.
22.7.3 When using MT Developer,
FUNCTION
Check that reading/writing data from/to the PLC,
monitoring the PLC, and others are not executed with MT Works2
GX Developer or GX Works2 with the FA transparent
function. Execute the backup/restore with the GOT
again.  When exiting MT Developer, MT Works2 22
For 45 seconds after GX Developer, MT Works2 has
(2) When the backup/restore is executed with the GOT
FA TRANSPARENT
while reading/writing data from/to a PLC, monitoring a been exited, the GOT continues monitoring at the same
PLC, and others are executed with GX Developer or speed as when the FA transparent function is working.
GX Works2 with the FA transparent function, errors FUNCTION
occur on GX Developer or GX Works2.  When PLC write is failed while using the FA
The backup/restore with the GOT is correctly executed. transparent function
The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent
function may be failed due to some reasons such as
cable disconnection.
When this occurs, re-execute the PLC write from the
same personal computer, or reset the motion controller
CPU.
 When a cable disconnection has occurred

When the cable between the GOT and the motion CPU
is disconnected, it takes time until a timeout error
occurs in MT Developer.

22.7 Precautions
22.7.4 When using MR Configurator,
MR Configurator2
 Unavailable functions and restrictions

For the use via the motion controller, there are
unavailable functions and restrictions.
For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen
of MR Configurator.
 Monitor speed of GOT

Since the FA transparent function is used via the
motion CPU, the monitor speed of GOT is slow.
22.7.5 When using FR Configurator
 GOT monitoring when using FA transparent

function
When FA transparent function is used, GOT suspends
monitoring on channels supporting FA transparent
function.
POINT
Cancelling the suspended GOT monitoring
immediately
To cancel the suspended (45 seconds) GOT
monitoring immediately after FA transparent is
executed, input "1" to device GS457.Then GOT
resumes monitoring.
If FA transparent is resumed even if "1" is already input
to device GS457, an error will occur on FR
Configurator.
For the details of the device, refer to the following
manual.
Manual
 When using the oscilloscope function

specified sampling
Since the monitoring of the inverter data may be not
performed at the specified sampling intervals
depending on the settings of oscilloscope function,
adjust the communication setting, a sampling interval,
etc.
 PU mode operation command source

selection
On the setting of PU mode operation command source
selection (Pr:551) of the inverter, specify the terminal
(1:RS-485 terminals, 2:PU connected) connected to
GOT.

22.7 Precautions
INDEX
[A] MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ........ A-24 ........................................................................... 9-7
INDEX
ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING ................. 3-1 CNC connection
AnCPU type CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 ......................................................................... 18-5
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Direct connection to CPU................................. 18-3
......................................................................... 13-6 Ethernet connection ......................................... 18-6
Computer link connection ................................ 7-13 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9 ......................................................................... 18-4
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 CNC side settings .............................................. 18-16
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Coaxial cable ....................................................... 1-29
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Communication module ....................................... 1-17
AnSCPU type Computer link connection ...................................... 7-1
Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 Connectable Model List
Bus connection................................................... 5-2
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
......................................................................... 13-6
......................................................................... 13-2
Computer link connection ................................ 7-14
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-2
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-9
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-2
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-2
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
CNC connection ............................................... 18-2
................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Computer link connection................................... 7-2
[B] Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-2
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU ................................ 8-11 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION................. 19-2
Bus connection ...................................................... 5-1 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-2
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
[C] ......................................................................... 10-2
C Controller module MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 ........................................................................... 9-2
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 function............................................................. 20-2
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-2
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Connection Diagram
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-8
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-11 CNC connection ............................................... 18-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Computer link connection................................. 7-15
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-22
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-15
........................................................................... 9-7 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-21
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).... 13-1 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................... 14-1 function............................................................. 20-5
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection .......... 11-1 Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-8
CC-Link IE Field Network connection.................. 12-1 Connector conversion adapter............................. 1-18
CNC C70 Controller Type ...................................................... 1-6
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 Conversion cables ............................................... 1-18
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 [D]
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6
DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET................... 2-1
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 Device Range that Can Be Set
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 CNC connection ............................................. 18-23
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-44
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-12 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-8
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-17
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Direct connection to CPU ...................................... 6-1
Index-1
[E] [M]
Ethernet connection............................................... 8-1 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
............................................................................. 10-1
[F] MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
............................................................................... 9-1
FA transparent function ............................... 22-1,22-2 Motion controller CPU (A series)
FXCPU Bus connection......................................... 5-19,5-24
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-10 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-9 ......................................................................... 13-6
Computer link connection......................... 7-13,7-14
[G] Direct connection to CPU ................................... 6-9
GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-26 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION .................... 19-1 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
GOT Side Settings ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Bus connection................................................. 5-30 Motion controller CPU (Q series)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Bus connection................................................... 5-5
......................................................................... 13-9 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-9 ......................................................................... 13-7
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-8 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-8 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
CNC connection ............................................... 18-8 Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Computer link connection................................. 7-19 Direct connection to CPU ........................... 6-6,6-20
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-25 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-15 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
FA transparent function.................................. 22-36 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-23 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-29 ........................................................................... 9-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ............................ 21-1
......................................................................... 10-9 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ................. 21-42
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection function
........................................................................... 9-9 ............................................................................. 20-1
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-7
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection [O]
function ............................................................ 20-7 Option unit ........................................................... 1-18
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-3
Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-12 [P]
Personal Computer Side Setting ....................... 22-39
[H] PLC Side Setting
HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM ....... 4-1 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
....................................................................... 13-12
[I] CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-10
CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-10
I/F .......................................................................... 1-8
I/F communication setting.................................... 1-12 Computer link connection................................. 7-22
Inverter Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-20
FREQROL A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
......................................................................... 15-3 ....................................................................... 10-12
FREQROL A700/F700/F700P........................ 15-14 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
FREQROL E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/ ......................................................................... 9-11
F700PJ............................................................. 15-7 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-6
FREQROL E700 ............................................ 15-10 PLC Side Settings
INVERTER CONNECTION ................................. 15-1 CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-11
Inverter Side Settings ........................................ 15-31 Precautions
Bus connection................................................. 5-34
[L] CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
....................................................................... 13-39
LCPU CC-Link connection (via G4) .......................... 14-17
CC-Link connection.......................................... 14-7
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection..... 11-16
Computer link connection................................... 7-8
CC-Link IE Field Network connection............. 12-13
CNC connection ............................................. 18-23
List of Models that Can Be Monitored ............... 22-11
Index-2
Computer link connection ................................ 7-29 QSCPU
Direct connection to CPU................................. 6-28 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
Ethernet connection ......................................... 8-49 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
FA transparent function.................................. 22-67 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-30 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-47 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
INDEX
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7
....................................................................... 10-26
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) [R]
......................................................................... 9-16 Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ...................... 21-41 Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
function .......................................................... 20-11 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ......... 17-8 ROBOT CONTROLLER
Servo amplifier connection............................. 16-45 Bus connection................................................... 5-5
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
MONITORING ....................................................... 1-1 ................................................................. 13-6,13-7
CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
[Q] CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
QCPU(A mode) Computer link connection................................... 7-7
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
......................................................................... 13-6 Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
Computer link connection .................................. 7-9 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 ................................................................. 10-7,10-8
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ........................................................................... 9-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ............. 17-1
QCPU(Q mode)
Bus connection .................................................. 5-5 [S]
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ....................... 1-18
................................................................. 13-6,13-7 Servo amplifier
CC-Link connection (via G4)............................ 14-6 MELSERVO-J2M Series .................................. 16-4
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection ...... 11-7 MELSERVO-J2-Super Series .......................... 16-3
CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7 MELSERVO-J3 Series ..................................... 16-5
Computer link connection .................................. 7-7 Servo amplifier connection .................................. 16-1
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6 Setting connected equipment ................................ 1-4
Ethernet connection ................................... 8-7,8-11 Setting of connection conversion adapter.......... 19-29
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ..... 19-24
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ......................... 16-14
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) Station number setting
........................................................................... 9-7 INVERTER CONNECTION............................ 15-43
QnACPU type MELSERVO connection................................. 16-16
Bus connection .................................................. 5-9 System Configuration
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Bus connection................................................... 5-5
......................................................................... 13-6 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Computer link connection ................................ 7-10 ......................................................................... 13-6
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 CC-Link connection (via G4) ............................ 14-6
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 CC-Link IE Controller Network connection....... 11-7
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) CC-Link IE Field Network connection .............. 12-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 CNC connection ............................................... 18-3
QnASCPU type Computer link connection................................... 7-7
Bus connection ................................................ 5-12 Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-6
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7
......................................................................... 13-6 FA transparent function.................................. 22-26
Computer link connection ................................ 7-11 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION............... 19-14
Direct connection to CPU................................... 6-8 INVERTER CONNECTION.............................. 15-3
Ethernet connection ........................................... 8-7 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) ......................................................................... 10-7
................................................................. 10-7,10-8 MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
........................................................................... 9-7
Index-3
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4
Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 connection
function ............................................................ 20-2
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION.......... 17-2
Servo amplifier connection............................... 16-3
[T]
Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-30
[W]
What is Multi-channel Function? ......................... 21-2
Index-4
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.01B
Nov., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-B B edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.05F

• Compatible with iQ Works
Jan.,2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-C C edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.10L

• MELSEC-L compatible, MELSEC-FX (MELSEC-FX buffer memory compatible), FA transparent (GX Works2
compatible, NC Configurator compatible), GT10 motion controller CPU (Q series) connection compatible
May,2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-D D edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.14Q

• Q50UDEH/Q100UDEH compatible, Q172DCPU-S1/Q173DCPU-S1 compatible, LJ72GF15-T2 compatible
• GT16/GT15 GOT multi-drop connection compatible
Jun., 2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-E E edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.17T

• GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, and GT1662-VN are added.
• Q12DCCPU-V compatible, MELSEC-WS compatible, FA transparent (MX Component, MX Sheet and GX
LogViewer compatible)
Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080898ENG-F F edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.19V

• Compatible with CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module
• FA transparent in GOT multi-drop connection compatible
• Station monitoring function (Inverter connection) compatible
• FA transparent (MR Configurator2 compatible)
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-G G edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.23Z

• CC IE Control extended mode compatible
• Inverter connection with 31 modules, device range expansion compatible
• FA transparent in LCPU Logging Configuration Tool compatible
• FA transparent in Ethernet connection between GOT and personal computer compatible
Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-H H edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.28E

• GT1655-V is added.
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-I I edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.31H

• CC-Link IE Field Network compatible
• Communication setting storage and error information notification in GOT multi-drop connection compatible
• FA transparent (MX Component) in Ethernet connection between personal computer and GOT compatible
• Device range expansion (D and W of QCPU and X, Y, Ww, and Wr of LCPU) compatible
• Communication setting format 2 compatible
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080898ENG-J J edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.37P

• GT14, GT12 are added.
• Station shutoff function (Inverter connection) compatible
• CC-Link IE Field Network compatible model (QS001CPU) are added.
• Note about Ethernet connection (FXCPU) are added.
Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-K K edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.40S

• "I/F Communication Setting" is compatible with "5V power supply".
• CC-Link IE field extended device of QSCPU compatible
• Station shutoff function for the network connection via PLC CPU compatible
• Station number setting function compatible (multi-drop system information function expanded)
• FA transparent in Ethernet connection between GOT and personal computer compatible (FXCPU, motion CPU,
MELSERVO)
• RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor is added.
• FX3U-ENET-ADP is added.
Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-L L edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.45X

• FX3GC compatible
• Q172DSCPU/Q173DSCPU compatible
Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-M M edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.54G

• Ethernet connection; Timeout time setting range is extended.
• MELSERVO-J4 series compatible
• Ping test at the GT14 main unit compatible
Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-N N edition: Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.58L

• Device G compatible
REVISIONS - 1
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.63R

• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed.
• C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) compatible
• Inverter connection (MELIPM series) compatible
• FA transparent function (MX Component 4.00A) compatible
Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) Version1.67V

• High-speed QnU (QnUDVCPU) compatible
• MELSEC-L models (L26CPU/L02SCPU, LJ71E71-100) are added.
• FA transparent function (Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module) compatible
• FA transparent function (FXCPU) compatible
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result
of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
REVISIONS - 2
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-080898ENG-P
Series
Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (ELE)
MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE
MODEL 1D7MC9
CODE
SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in Japan, February 2013.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Straße 89 99, Paola Hill Ul. Zhambyla 28
Gothaer Straße 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta-Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-100017 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Radlická 751/113e Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 I.C. SYSTEMS Ltd. EGYPT
ESCO DRIVES BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM. B.V. NETHERLANDS 23 Al-Saad-Al-Alee St.
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 EG-Sarayat, Maadi, Cairo
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +20 (0) 2 / 235 98 548
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 60 Phone: +31 (0)180 / 46 60 04 Fax: +20 (0) 2 / 235 96 625
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 61 Fax: +31 (0)180 / 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
KONING & HARTMAN B.V. BELGIUM KONING & HARTMAN B.V. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount GIRIT CELADON Ltd. ISRAEL
INEA RBT d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 12 H'aomanut Street
IRL-Dublin 24 Stegne 11 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 IL-42505 Netanya
SI-1000 Ljubljana NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Phone: +386 (0)1/ 513 8116 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +386 (0)1/ 513 8170 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
Italian Branch CEG LIBAN LEBANON
AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
Viale Colleoni 7 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89
I-20864 Agrate Brianza (MB) Lebanon-Beirut
BG-1756 Sofia PT- 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 445
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 193
Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA CR CROATIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Polish Branch Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
PL-32-083 Balice AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 ADROIT TECHNOLOGIES SOUTH AFRICA
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01 20 Waterford Office Park 189 Witkoppen Road
AutoCont C.S. S.R.O. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA SR SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA Kafkova 1853/3 Izletnicka 10 ZA-Fourways
Russian Branch CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2 SER-113000 Smederevo Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8100
52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 615 401 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8101
RU-115054 Мoscow Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 615 401
Phone: +7 495 721-2070
Fax: +7 495 721-2071 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Lykkegardsvej 17 Jána Derku 1671
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN DK-4000 Roskilde SK-911 01 Trencín
Spanish Branch Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona)
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA INEA RBT d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Fax: +34 935891579 Pärnu mnt.160i Stegne 11
EE-11317 Tallinn SI-1000 Ljubljana
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116
UK Branch Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
Travellers Lane
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Beijer Electronics Automation AB SWEDEN
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 28 87 80 Vanha Nurmijärventie 62 Box 426
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 FIN-01670 Vantaa SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01
Tokyo Building 2-7-3
Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku PROVENDOR OY FINLAND OMNI RAY AG SWITZERLAND
Tokyo 100-8310 Teljänkatu 8 A3 Im Schörli 5
Phone: +81 (3) 3218-2111 FIN-28130 Pori CH-8600 Dübendorf
Fax: +81 (3) 3218-2185 Phone: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3300 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3322 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA
500 Corporate Woods Parkway UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE Fabrika Otomasyonu Merkezi TURKEY
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 5, Mavrogenous Str. Şerifali Mahallesi Nutuk Sokak No:5
Phone: +1 (847) 478-2100 GR-18542 Piraeus İ
Fax: +1 (847) 478-0328 Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 39 95
MELTRADE Ltd. HUNGARY CSC AUTOMATION Ltd. UKRAINE
Fertő utca 14. 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
HU-1107 Budapest UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA
Ritausmas iela 23
LV-1058 Riga
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA
Goštautu g. 3
LT-48324 Kaunas
Phone: +370 37 262707
Fax: +370 37 455605
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 ELE PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Series

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

● Remove the protective film of the GOT.

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

● Correctly connect the battery connector.

● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

● Dispose of used battery promptly.

[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

3.ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

4.HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

9.MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

10.MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

12.CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

13.CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

17.ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

20.MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

 Screen creation software manuals

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

 Extended and option function manuals

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (α2 Connection) for GT

 Transferring data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , Handy GOT

GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA

Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package

GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software

MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP type servo set up software

FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)